Home

Dynamix XM-1444 Series Monitoring System User Manual, 1444

1. O O O PID label area p x pin lennig DIN rail set screws 2 ea gt oe ace connector a i E Base to module connector Electronics O O Oa module coding slots Ethernet address AnI gt Lower base connector Bottom set screws 2 ea Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System When installing the system follow these instructions and install configure the components in the following order _ yer Nanay RY P rl on Sl SE nl v N O 14 Review the safety instructions Review the network connectivity considerations Review the system design guidelines considerations and requirements Mount the terminal base Establish expansion bus connections between modules Configure the main terminal base Configure the Auxiliary relay terminal base Configure the Auxiliary 4 20 mA terminal base Configure the Auxiliary TSC terminal base Install the module Configure the main module connectors Configure the main module transducers Configure the Expansion module connectors Start the module and perform a Self test Figure 5 Expansion Terminal Base Overview PID label area DIN rail set screws 2 ea Left EXP bus connector A
2. Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad SINT Pad INT 0x398 0 16 Synchronization enable SINT 0x398 0 17 Waveform FFT storage format BYTE Pad INT 0x398 1 16 Enable BYTE 0x398 1 17 Signal Source SINT 0x398 1 18 Number of averages SINT Pad SINT 0x398 1 19 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 0x398 1 20 Associated Tacho Source SINT 0x398 1 21 Waveform Record Length SINT 0x398 1 24 FFT Enable SINT 0x398 1 25 FFT Line Resolution SINT 0x398 1 26 FFT Window Function SINT 0x398 1 27 FFT Averages SINT 0x398 1 28 FFT Line value detection scaling SINT Pad SINT 0x398 2 16 Enable BYTE 0x398 2 17 Signal Source SINT 0x398 2 18 Number of averages SINT Pad SINT 0x398 2 19 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 0x398 2 20 Associated Tacho Source SINT 0x398 2 21 Waveform Record Length SINT 0x398 2 24 FFT Enable SINT 0x398 2 25 FFT Line Resolution SINT 0x398 2 26 FFT Window Function SINT 0x398 2 27 FFT Averages SINT 0x398 2 28 FFT Line value detection scaling SINT Pad SINT 0x398 3 16 Enable BYTE 0x398 3 17 Signal Source SINT 0x398 3 18 Number of averages SINT Pad SINT 0x398 3 19 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 0x398 3 20 Associated Tacho Source SINT 0x398 3 21 Waveform Record Length SINT 0x398 3 24 FFT Enable SINT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P
3. Table 129 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get V Enabled Instances STRUCT Bit wise coding of enabled AC Decoding information measurement instances BYTE Active instances for channels 0 3 BYTE Reserved for full multiplexing BYTE Reserved for full multiplexing Table 130 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values Rule 1 Get V RMS Value REAL RMS measurement value 2 Get V True Peak Value REAL True Peak measurement value 3 Get V True Peak to Peak Value REAL True pk pk measurement value 4 Get V Peak Value REAL True pk pk value 2 5 Get V Scaled Peak Value REAL Calculated pk value from RMS 6 Get V Scaled Peak to Peak Value REAL Calculated pk pk value from RMS 7 Get V Average Value REAL Rectified average 8 Get V Magnitude Value REAL A magnitude value from a choice of detection methods effectively attributes 1 7 made by configuration AC Overall Measurement Group of 8 configuration attributes 16 Get V AC Overall Measurement Source SINT Source selection Coding information 17 Get V AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS AC measurement units Options and selection criteria 18 Get V AC Overall Measurement RMS TC REAL Time constant definition for RMS Range 0 1 60 s measu
4. Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x38F 3 22 Synchronous samples per revolution INT 23 Alternate Path Decimation INT 24 Alternate LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 0x38F 4 16 LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 7 HP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 18 Decimation INT 19 SRD SINT 20 Alternate Path enable SINT 21 Synchronous Tacho Source SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x38F 4 22 Synchronous samples per revolution INT 23 Alternate Path Decimation INT 24 Alternate LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 0x39E 0 16 Configured Auxiliary Modules BYTE 24 Tacho Mode SINT 32 Opto Output 0 Allocation SINT 33 Opto Output 1 Allocation SINT 40 User Local Relay Control BYTE 42 Relay Source SINT 64 Redundant Power Supply SINT Pad SINT 0x39E 0 72 Channel 0 DSP FFT Enable SINT 73 Channel 0 DSP FFT Signal Source SINT 74 Channel 0 DSP FFT Measurement Units ENGUNITS 75 Channel 0 DSP FFT Line Resolution SINT 76 Channel 0 DSP FFT Window Function SINT 77 Channel 0 DSP FFT Number of averages SINT 78 Channel 0 DSP FFT Line value detection scaling SINT 79 Channel 1 DP FFT Enable SINT 80 Channel 1 DSP FFT Signal Source SINT 81 Channel 1 DSP FFT Measurement Units ENGUNITS 82 Channel 1 DSP FFT Line Resolution SINT 83 Channel 1 DSP FFT Window Function SINT 84 Channel 1 DSP FFT Number of averages SINT 85 Channel 1 DSP FFT Line value detection scaling SINT 86 Channel 2 DP FFT Enable SINT 262 Rockwell Automatio
5. Operate the Module Chapter 9 Table 52 Input Data Parameters Parameter Description 32 ChOOrder2Phase Tracking filter 2 phase values 33 Ch10rder2Phase 34 Ch20rder2Phase 35 Ch30rder2Phase 36 ChOOrder3Mag a Ch 1OrdersMag Tracking filter 3 magnitude values 38 Ch20rder3Mag 39 Ch30rder3Mag 40 Ch0Order3Phase Tracking filter 3 phase values 4 Ch10rder3Phase 42 Ch20rder3Phase 43 Ch30rder3Phase 44 ChOFFTBand0 FFT Band 0 magnitude values 45 ChiFFTBando 46 Ch2FFTBando 47 Ch3FFTBand0 48 ChOFFTBand1 FFT Band 1 magnitude values 49 Ch1FFTBand1 50 Ch2FFTBand1 51 Ch3FFTBand1 52 ChOFFTBand2 FFT Band 2 magnitude values 53 Ch1FFTBand2 FFT Band 2 magnitude values 54 Ch2FFTBand2 55 Ch3FFTBand2 56 ChOFFTBand3 FFT Band 3 magnitude values 57 Chi FFTBand3 58 Ch2FFTBand3 59 Ch3FFTBand3 60 ChOFFTBand4 FFT Band 4 magnitude values 61 Ch1FFTBand4 62 Ch2FFTBand4 63 Ch3FFTBand4 64 ChOFFTBand5 FFT Band 5 magnitude values 65 ChiFFTBand5 66 Ch2FFTBand5 67 Ch3FFTBand5 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 231 Chapter 9 Operate the Module Table 52 Input Data Parameters Parameter Description 68 ChOFFTBand6 FFT Band 6 magnitude values 69 Ch1FFTBand6 70 Ch2FFTBand6 71 Ch3FFTBand6 72 ChOFFTBand7 FFT Band 7 magnitude values 73 Ch1FFTBand7 74 Ch2FFTBand7 75 C
6. Transducer Status Bit Status Description if 1 0 Channel 0 Enabled Channel is configured for dynamic or static measurements 1 Channel 1 Enabled Channel is configured for dynamic or static measurements 2 Channel 2 Enabled Channel is configured for dynamic or static measurements 3 Channel 3 Enabled Channel is configured for dynamic or static measurements 4 TX 0 Enabled 5 TX 1 Enabled 6 TX 2 Enabled 7 TX3 Enabled 8 TX 0 Fault 9 TX 1 Fault 10 TX 2 Fault 11 TX 3Fault 12 Wire Off 0 Detected 13 Wire Off 1 Detected 14 Wire Off 2 Detected 15 Wire Off 3 Detected Table 41 Speed Status Speed Status Bit Status Description if 1 0 Tacho 0 enabled Speed 0 measurement is enabled 1 Tacho 1 enabled Speed 1 measurement is enabled 2 Tacho 0 fault Speed 0 indicates fault 3 Tacho 1 fault Speed 1 indicates fault 4 Max Speed Event Tach 0 Anew maximum speed even is detected on Speed 0 Bits toggle when a new event is detected 5 Max Speed Event Tacho 1 6 Redundant Tacho Fault Redundant tachometer mode is set and the tachometer has switched due to a tachometer failure 7 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 221 Chapter9 Operate the Module Table 42 A D Status A D Status Bit Status Description 0 Ch 0 Calibration Failure Hardware fault See Calibration page 211 1 Ch 1 Calibration Failure 2 Ch 2 Calib
7. The DIP switch towards the bottom of Figure 3 contributes to the expansion module bus address so that a like for like Expansion module replacement retains the earlier address Only the Relay Expansion module uses the DIP switch address Up to three relay modules can be used per main host module To install join the bases of a module and its associated Expansion modules by connecting the right side of one to the left side of the next by using the supplied ribbon cables These cables are included with each main and expansion module terminal base Continue these interconnections across all modules that are intended to share the tacho bus ofa TSC module and note the following e One tacho bus can support a maximum of six main modules e One and only one TSC Expansion module can be used per tacho bus 1 While the serial and power buses are specific to one DYN module and its associated Expansion modules the tacho bus extends to serve tacho signals to multiple main modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Using Local Bus Extension Cables The Dynamix 1444 series implements a Local Bus that connects modules to e Provide power and communication between an Expansion Module and its Host module e Pass the Speed Signals TTL from a Tachometer Signal Conditioner Module to other main modules on a network If no expansion m
8. Instance ID Description 0 TSC Module Class Instance 1 Instance 1 defines setup of TSC module input 0 2 Instance 2 defines setup of TSC module input 1 Table 147 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get NV Vendor ID UINT 9 Get NV Device Type UINT 10 Get NV Product Code UINT 11 Get NV Firmware Revision STRUCT Retrieves Firmware Revision of the TSC expansion module Major Version USINT Minor Version USINT 12 Get V Expansion Module Status WORD Coded information on TSC expansion TSC status module operational status 13 Get NV Serial Number UDINT 14 Get NV Product Name SHORT_ STRING 15 Get V Transducer Status WORD Coded information on transducer 0 1 operational status 17 Get NV Auxiliary Link Time Out UNIT Link time Fixed at 1000 ms 1 s out 18 Get V Mode Control BYTE Allows additional detection modes Fixed at zero supports future capability such as reverse rotation detection 352 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 148 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B The proceeding NV status relates to nonvolatile storage in the auxiliary module not in the main module s Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get V TSC Measured Speed Out
9. CIP Objects Appendix B Table 75 Configuration Groups 20 and 21 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x399 7 21 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 8 22 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 9 23 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 10 24 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 291 Appendix B Table 75 Configuration Groups 20 and 21
10. Common B gt Signal ED Shield ED _ Recommended shield pin connection but can be landed to any available shield connection Figure 29 Channel 1 wiring for a Self generating magnetic Sensor Shield Floating Common E B Shield p gt Recommended shield pin connection but can be landed to any available shield connection Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 83 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System TTL Output Sensor For any sensor or device that provides a TTL signal such as a Hall Effect sensor the connected channel of the Tachometer Signal Conditioner must be configured with e Transducer Type TTL Signal and e Transducer Power OFF Wire the pickup as illustrated in the following Figure 30 Channel 0 wiring for a TTL Signal Shield N Floating i Common _Sional_ gt i L _ Shield Recommended shield pin connection but can be landed to any available shield connection Figure 31 Channel 0 wiring for a TTL Signal i N Floating Common Recommended shield pin connection but can be landed to any available shield connection 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Start the Module and Perform a Self test Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 After the modules are wired power can be applied to test the installation At power
11. Secondary DNS Server Address N A Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 101 Chapter2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Port Configuration Page Use the Port Configuration page to enable and configure module ports Figure 38 The Port Configuration Page Port Enable Link Status Ut a a Selected Selected Diagnostics Lz LEJ BEz el xl Table 13 Port Configuration Parameter Value Comments Port Enable Link Status Auto Negotiate Speed Duplex Port Diagnostics 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Network Page Use the Network page to view the network topology and status See ENET UMO0O01 for more information Figure 39 Network Page Network Topology Network Status Figure 40 The Network Page Network Topology Network Status Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 103 Chapter2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Time Sync Page Figure 41 The Time Sync Page CIP Sync Time Synchronization UTC System Time Grandmaster Clock Identity Class Accuracy Variance Source Priority 1 Priority 2 Figure 42 The Time Sync Page CIP Sync Time Synchronization UTC System Time Grandmaster Clock Class Variance Priority 1 Priority 2 10
12. Sample Rate Samples s FFT FMAX Hz i ADCout Signal Measurements Iternate Signal Path Sample Mode Asynchronous w 48 dB LP Fiter MAX Alternate Decimation Sample Rate FFT FMAX Samples s Hz Samples s Hz Tach Source Overall iy Pre Filter Signal Measurements Tracking Filters ow Pass Filter Primary Samples Rev fe Frequency 1430 Maximum Speed Bands Demand L a i Mid Filter Signal Measurements Si Fites igh Pass Filter Primary ow Pass Filter Alternate Overal Frequency 1 Frequency 1430 Tracking Fiters FFT Bands i PostFilter Signal i Alternate Path Signal ae Measurements Measurement Demand Values Comments The available FMAX selections are as follows FMAX SRD_ Conditions 40000 1 Available for 40 kHz Module Personalities Module Definition and if the Measurement Type Hardware Page is one of 40 kHz absolute vibration A to A 40 kHz absolute vibration A to V or gSE 18300 2 Available for the 18 kHz Module Personality Module Definition and if the Measurement Type Hardware 12200 3 Page is NOT any of the 40 kHz or either of the 9200 4 absolute vibration A to A 40 kHz absolute vibration Ato V or gSE 7300 5 6100 6 5200 7 4100 19 Available for all 4 kHz and 18 kHz Module Personalities Module Definition and if the Measurement Type 3100 12 Hardware P
13. Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Type Attribute 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get V Enabled Instances STRUCT Bit wise coding of Decoding enabled DC information measurement instances BYTE Active instances for channels 0 3 BYTE Reserved for full multiplexing BYTE Reserved for full multiplexing Table 134 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get V DC Value REAL Processed DC measurement output 2 Get V Rod Drop Value REAL Processed rod drop value output 0 when rod drop application is not active for this channel 3 Get V DC Bias REAL Measured in DC Volts The same as attribute 1 of the Transducer Object DC Measurement Group of 5 configuration attributes 16 Get V DC Measurement Units ENGUNITS The DC measurement units Options and selection criteria 17 Get V DC Measurement TC REAL Time Range 0 1 60 s default constant of1 definition for DC measurement demanded 18 Get V DC Measurement Offset REAL Measurement offset in selected Is added to the measurement units measurement Range 50000 50000 19 Get V DC Measurement Sense SINT Sense control of the DC measurement 0 Active Normal Control for axial thrust applications 1 Inactive Counter Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 339 Appendix B Tabl
14. Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x399 11 25 16 Channel Source SINT 7 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 12 26 16 Channel Source SINT 7 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 13 27 16 Channel Source SINT 7 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 14 28 16 Channel Source SINT 7 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 292 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 75 Configuration Groups 20 and 21 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x399 15
15. e The tag value displays in the specified engineering units for the proportional value e Ifthe channel type is DC then only one DC member can be selected Axial or Radial Differential Expansion DC Proportional or Rod Drop Rod Drop Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this to include the Rod Drop member for the selected channel to the input tag Channel Tag Member 0 ChORodDrop 1 Ch1RodDrop 2 Ch2RodDrop 3 Ch3RodDrop If the channel type is DC then only one DC member can be selected Axial or Radial Differential Expansion DC Proportional or Rod Drop 98 Select Input Data for Input Tag The parameters on this page are used to specify measurements to be included in the Input Tag When a control is checked the corresponding member is included in the input tag The page is organized into top Module level middle Input Pair level and bottom Input level sections Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Module Level Parameters The parameters in the top section are all associated with speed so they are not dependent on the configuration or availability of any measurement channel Channel Pair Level Parameters The parameters in this section are measurements that are made from two measurement channels All two channel measurements are made from channels that are grouped into either of two pair
16. A Shield Floating Common Signal Shield WDC Recommended shield pin connection but can be landed to any available shield connection Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 81 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System NPN PNP Proximity Switch The connected channel of the Tachometer Signal Conditioner must be configured with e Transducer Type NPN Proximity Switch or e Transducer Type PNP Proximity Switch and Transducer Power 24V DC Wire the proximity switch as illustrated Figure 26 Channel 0 wiring for an NPN PNP Proximity Switch N Floating ER ED Shield E w D Recommended shield pin connection but can be landed to any available shield connection Figure 27 Channel 1 wiring for an NPN PNP Proximity Switch Shield Floating TTT 5 Shield ED 24V DC EX Recommended shield pin connection but can be landed to any available shield connection 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Self generating magnetic Sensor The connected channel of the Tachometer Signal Conditioner must be configured with e Transducer Type Self generating Magnetic Pickup and e Transducer Power OFF Wire the pickup as illustrated Figure 28 Channel 0 wiring for a Self generating magnetic Sensor Floating
17. Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get V Current Output Value REAL Provides processed current output value in mA 2 Get V Source Measurement Value REAL Provides actual measurement value in engineering units General Group of 3 configuration attributes 16 Get V Current Output Enable SINT Current output enable control 0 Not enabled 1 Enabled 17 Get V Current Output Measurement INT Defines source of 4 20 mA signal Source selection Identifier 18 Get V Current Output Name SINT 32 A name to identify this output instance 32 characters Output Scaling Group of 3 configuration attributes 19 Get V 20 mA Output Scaling REAL Definition of measurement value thatis Range 40000 50000 associated with 20 mA 20 Get V 4 mA Output Scaling REAL Definition of measurement value thatis Range 50000 40000 associated with 4 mA Default 0 24 Get V Current Output Not OK SINT The current output set when a fail Not OK configuration Configuration condition is detected TX Fail of associated channel auxiliary bus failure auxiliary module self check fail Module address is fixed as is the link between instances and current outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 421 AppendixB CIP Objects Attribute Semantics Current Module Status The auxiliary output module reports its status as part of the normal exchanges with the main modul
18. Pad INT 0x38E 1 33 Transducer OK High Threshold REAL 34 Transducer OK Low Threshold REAL 0x38E 2 24 Transducer AC Units ENGUNITS Pad INT Ox38E 2 25 Transducer AC Sensitivity REAL 26 Transducer DC Units ENGUNITS Pad INT Ox38E 2 27 Transducer DC sensitivity REAL 28 TX Power Setup SINT 32 Transducer OK Configuration BYTE Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 259 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 67 Configuration Group 1 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute Name Data Type 0x38E 2 33 Transducer OK High Threshold REAL 34 Transducer OK Low Threshold REAL 0x38E 3 24 Transducer AC Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x38E 3 25 Transducer AC Sensitivity REAL 26 Transducer DC Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x38E 3 27 Transducer DC sensitivity REAL 28 TX Power Setup SINT 32 Transducer OK Configuration BYTE Pad INT 0x38E 2 33 Transducer OK High Threshold REAL 34 Transducer OK Low Threshold REAL 0x38E 3 24 Transducer AC Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x38E 3 25 Transducer AC Sensitivity REAL 3 26 Transducer DC Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x38E 3 27 Transducer DC sensitivity REAL Ox38E 4 28 TX Power Setup SINT 0x38E 4 32 Transducer OK Configuration BYTE Pad INT 0x38E 4 33 Transducer OK High Threshold REAL 34 Transducer OK Low Threshold REAL 260 Rockwell Automation Publica
19. Topic Page Resetting the Module 197 Note Module Time is a 64 bit integer value in units of microseconds with a power 208 up value of 0 which corresponds to an epoch of January 1 1970 Coordinated Universal Time UTC The time standard for civil time representing time at the Prime Meridian The time does not include time zone or daylight savings time offsets Module Time is based on UTC Module Outputs 213 Services 215 1 0 Message Formats 215 Calibration 234 This chapter describes the reset types the module offers Resetting the Module Supported Reset Types The module supports three forms of resets including types 0 1 and 2 Reset Type Methods Hardware Remote Reset Service Code 5 Remote Reset not allowed while a class 1 connection is active or if the class 1 connection was closed abnormally Send data value Common Reset 0 Power cycle Out of Box Reset 1 Power cycle with 888 address Hard Reset 2 N A Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 0 or blank 1 2 197 Chapter 9 198 Operate the Module Type 0 Common Reset A common reset deletes all trend alarm and transient data and wipes the executing configuration and the ID of its host controller After reset the module loads the configuration that is stored in nonvolatile memory and restarts monitoring A common reset does not delete data in nonvolatile memory which includes its saved co
20. asa amp 44 Hs Path AB_ETPIP 1 192 168 199 amp Rom Prog DE E Program Mode No Foeces Cormoter OK t F Energy Storage OK Favorites Assim A omey A Aimee AOA No Edits a dd sd E voo 5 Controller Organizer 0x vonest Requested Packet Inteeval RPI 80 2 A Controller Tags Connection a i 800 ens 40 0 1000 0 E Controller Fault Handler Modsi irto Aaa A Power Up Handler achometer i Tasks Speed Myr Faut On Contolier E Connecton Fats While in Run Mode z Time Sot Misip er MainTask HW Corigerabon J Use Unicast Connecton over EtherNey ES Ma nProgram Measuremert Deft Chamel 0 G Unscheduled Programs Phases amp Motion Groups amp Ungrouped Axes Add On Instructions 200 F ers Over Tracking F fer FFT 2 Remove the module from its base ATTENTION Removing a module from its base while powered hot swap is not allowed when operating in a hazardous area Note the current setting of the IP address switches Set the IP address switches to 888 Replace the module and let it power up Nn WR Y Wait until Status Indicator behavior stabilizes The module is not able to communicate over Ethernet 7 Remove the module from its base 8 Set the IP address switches to their original setting 9 Replace the module and let it power up The module is now in its out of box reset state Un inhibiting the module forces a connection to be re established and a configuration do
21. or channels DSP or update in disabled configuration process during error configuration transfer process CHO Channel 0 Channel Channel OK Channel TX status disabled TX OK Fault CH1 Channel 1 Channel Channel OK Channel TX status disabled TX OK Fault CH2 Channel 2 Channel Channel OK Channel TX status disabled TX OK Fault CH3 Channel 3 Channel Channel OK Channel TX status disabled TX OK Fault RLY Relay status Relaynotin Relaynotin Relay Relay in use alarm inhibited alarm actuated 236 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Ethernet Port Status Indicators Status Appendix A Each Ethernet ports RJ45 jack is fitted with two status indicators Activity Activi a Link ty Status Indicator Off On Blinking color Activity amber No network activity Network activity present Link green No link established Link established Expansion Module Status Indicators When the expansion module is inserted and powered the power status indicator shows green The two remaining status indicators provide information as to the status of the expansion bus and the module controller Normal expected status indicator states for these three status indicators with a healthy system are e Power Status PWR Solid green e Network Status LNS Solid gre
22. 450 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 281 Data Types Type Description Data BOOL Boolean 1 byte SINT Short Integer 1 byte 128 127 INT Integer 2 bytes 32768 32767 DINT Double Integer 4 bytes 231 231 1 LINT Long Integer 8 bytes 23 734 USINT Unsigned Short Integer 1 byte 0 255 UINT Unsigned Integer 2 bytes 0 65535 UDINT Unsigned Double Integer 4 bytes 0 P24 ULINT Unsigned Long Integer 8 bytes 0 24 REAL Floating Point 4 bytes IEEE 754 DATE Date Only 2 bytes 1972 01 01 65536 day 2151 06 06 TIME_OF_DAY TOD Time of Day 4 bytes 1 msec resolution SHORT_STRING Character String 1 byte per character 1 byte length indicator 1 byte count header 1 count byte sequence STRINGI International Character String Structure BYTE Bit String 8 bits WORD Bit String 16 bits DWORD Bit String 32 bits ENGUNIT Engineering Unit Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 451 AppendixB CIP Objects Notes 452 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 453 AppendixB CIP Objects 454 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Numerics 4 20 mA Output Expansion Module outputs 214 A AC Measurement Object CIP objects 335 Advanc
23. Pad INT 0x399 4 16 Channel Source SINT 0x399 4 17 Data Source SINT 0x399 4 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 0x399 4 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 0x399 4 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 0x399 4 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 285 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 74 Configuration Group 19 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x399 4 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39D 0 15 Current Module Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39D 0 16 Auxiliary Link time out UINT 0x39D 1 16 Current Output Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x39D 1 17 Current Output Measurement INT Identifier 19 20 mA Output scaling REAL 20 4 mA Output scaling REAL 24 Current Output Not OK SINT Configuration Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39D 2 16 Current Output Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x39D 2 17 Current Output Measurement INT Identifier 19 20 mA Output scaling REAL 20 4 mA Output scaling REAL 24 Current Output Not OK SINT Configuration Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39D 3 16 Current Output Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x39D 3 17 Current Output Measurement INT Identifier 19 20 mA Output scaling REAL 20 4 mA Output scaling REAL 24 Current Output Not OK SINT Configuration Pad SINT Pad INT
24. Recommended shield pin connection but may be landed to any available shield connection Figure 16 Channel 1 Wiring Ep 43 Ceassrsonenennsort NJ 000000000 V7 00000000000 Driver Shield Floating ol0000I000Ilo Common E AAMIIN Signal Output 50 gt Shield 24V0C gt Recommended shield pin connection but may be landed to any available shield connection Figure 17 Channel 2 Wiring Shield Floating Common gt Signal Output Shield 27 wi D Recommended shield pin connection but may be landed to any available shield connection 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Figure 18 Channel 3 Wiring Driver Shield Floating Common Signal Output Shield Recommended shield pin connection but may be landed to any available shield connection pean me c S a it 16 gt gt 14or 15 Fay Chapter 1 2 wire Acceleration Pressure or Piezoelectric Velocity Sensors The channel must be configured for a positive constant current supply and the transducer power output must be connected to the spare signal connection link terminals 1 and 2 in channel 0 example above A list of appropriate terminals for each channel fo
25. Status DINT Status codes 0 eSUCCESS Returned after all successful requests 1 eUnrecognizedSession 2 eMaxSessionsReached 3 ePacketCountOutOfSequence 4 elnvalidBufferSelect 5 eNoDataAvailable 6 eGeneralError 7 eDeniedRequestAlreadylnProgress 8 eSessionAccessDenied 9 eAdvancedMeasurementRequestinProgress When returned the host can retry as often as required until successful although it is recommended to wait for the advised processing time before you begin polling When a code 9 is returned the PacketCountDown field indicates the current average count progress towards the requested number of averages 10 eRequestQueued Any code returned other than eSUCCESS 0 or eAdvancedMeasurementRequestinProgress 9 ends the session Data Array DWORD 50 Each record is an array of DWORDs of size RecordSize This array of records can be large It is the calling applications responsibility to handle these records appropriately The DWORD type is just a placeholder for the actual types in the data structure that maps to this RecordArray See the next section for details Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 403 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 208 FFT eFFT The Record Type Structures are as follows Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since
26. Table 237 Opto Output Source CIP Objects Appendix B Bit Description 0 OFF 1 13 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Output Type Alert 14 16 Reserved 17 29 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Output Type Danger 30 32 Reserved 33 45 Voted ALARM INSTANce 1 13 Output type TX OK 48 Local TTL Tacho Input 0 49 Local TTL Tacho Input 1 50 Tacho Bus 0 51 Tacho Bus 1 52 Tacho Bus OK 0 53 Tacho Bus OK 1 54 Local Logic Input 0 55 Local Logic Input 1 56 TX 0 Fault 57 TX 0 Fault 58 TX 0 Fault 59 TX 0 Fault 127 Module Status OK Indices 48 53 are routed directly in hardware all other selections are actively controlled based on the state of the source selected The local relay control allows for Module Fault to be to some extent configurable on a per relay basis Index 127 follows the first definition of module fault first relay so usually the main module relay configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 429 AppendixB CIP Objects The designated opto output is inactive in the following circumstances e OFF e Noalarm e Tacho OK e Logic input open e TXOK e Module Status OK Note therefore that as inactive equals shelf state they are non fail safe For the local tacho inputs the opto is inactive when the input signal is high above the 2 5V threshold For the TSCX tacho inputs the opto is inactive w
27. Adaptive Monitoring Source High Limit 248 MeasAlarm00 23 Ranged 4HLimit Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Range 0 4 upper control value CIP Objects Appendix B Table 58 Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference Multiplier MeasAlarm00 23 Range0 4Multiplier hoa Measurement Alarm Range 0 4 Alarm Multiplier jec Voted Alarm Page Alarm Name VotedAlarmName00_01 0 7 Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Name VotedAlarmName02_08 0 6 Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Name VotedAlarmName09_12 0 3 Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Name Alarm Status to Activate On Alert VotedAlarm00 73 AlarmOnAlert Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Usage Alarm Status to Activate On Danger VotedAlarm0d 13 AlarmOnDanger Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Usage Alarm Status to Activate On VotedAlarm00 13 AlarmOnTransducerFault Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Usage Transducer Fault Measurement Alarm Input 0 VotedAlarm00 73 Alarm0Input Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Input 0 Measurement Alarm Input 1 VotedAlarm00 73 Alarm1 Input Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Input 1 Measurement Alarm Input 2 VotedAlarm00 73 Alarm2Input Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Input 2 Measurement Alarm In
28. Alarm input 0 in alarm AND Other TX Fail OR Alarm input 1 in alarm AND Other TX Fail OR Alarm input 0 in alarm AND Alarm input 1 in alarm OR Both TX Fail e TX OK Not Considered Alarm IF Alarm input 0 in alarm AND Alarm input 1 in alarm It is allowable for each measurement alarm to have another behavior pertaining to transducer status However to avoid complicating the example it is assumed in the proceeding paragraph that both measurement alarms have the same type Each Voted Alarm Object has up to three outputs which are individually enabled when required Alert Danger dedicated TX OK It is the enabled outputs of the Voted Alarm Object that provide the actual alarms that can be assigned to relay outputs The dedicated TX OK output combines the relevant TX Status results in the selected logic scheme It does not pay any attention to measurement alarm type setting TX OK Considered Monitored or Not Considered Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Normal CM Data Object CIP Objects Appendix B This configures the Normal CM Condition Monitoring Data object class 0x398 This data is dynamic data TWF and FFT which is captured as part of the Trend and Alarm and Transient Data capabilities of the module Live data can also be requested direct from this object Available services allow for data requests for Normal CM data according to requester
29. Alert Alarm 0 000 65 500 seconds Enter the time that the measured value must persist at an Alert level before an Alert Alarm condition is Delay Time set The intent of an alarm delay is to prevent random electronic or mechanically generated noise This noise can create rapid short lived signal spikes from being interpreted and acted on as if an actual alarm condition 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 32 Alarms Configure Alarms Chapter 7 Parameter Values Help Danger Alarm 0 000 65 500 seconds Enter the time that the measured value must persist at a Danger level before a Danger Alarm condition Delay Time is set The intent of an alarm delay is to prevent random electronic or mechanically generated noise This noise can create rapid short lived signal spikes from being interpreted and acted on as if an actual alarm condition Apply Limits Select from Select the source for the alarm limits and any applicable multipliers From e Static Limits Static Limits with Adaptive Multipliers Option Description 5 Output Tag Limits Static Limits This is the normal mode The limits are entered directly so are static along with one static multiplier that is managed by the Set Point Multiplier function Static Limits with The limits are entered directly so are static but uses up to five multipliers that Adaptive are applied depending on
30. AppendixB CIP Objects Table 58 Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference Overall 1 Time Constant cho 30verall RMSTimeConstantB Dynamix AC Measurement Object AC Overall Measurement RMS TC cho 30verall PkTimeConstantB Dynamix AC Measurement Object AC Overall Measurement Peak TC Tracking Filters Page Enable 0 3 Cho 3TrkFltrs TrkFltr0 3En Dynamix Order Measurement Object Order Measurement Configuration Tacho Source 0 3 Cho 3TrkFltrs TrkFltr0 3TachSrc Dynamix Order Measurement Object Order Measurement Configuration Order 0 3 ChO 3TrkFltrs TrkFltr0 3 Dynamix Order Measurement Order 0 3 setup Object Measurement Units hd 30rders Units Dynamix Order Measurement Order Measurement Units Object Signal Detection Cho 30verall SignalDetection Dynamix Order Measurement Order Measurement Scaling Object Measurement Resolution Speed 0 Cho 30verall Speed0FilterNumRevolutions Dynamix Order Measurement Object Order Filter Definition Tacho 0 Measurement Resolution Speed 1 Cho 30verall Speed1FilterNumRevolutions Dynamix Order Measurement Object Order Filter Definition Tacho 1 FFT Page Enable TWF Data Storage Chd 3Complex TWFEn Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Enable Signal Source cho 3Complex Source Dynamix Normal CM Data
31. Dynamic AC Input Tag Measurement Type selections Comment Tags that require dynamic measurements can be processed using any of these Measurement Types Aero Derivative AV V Applies 60 dB octave low pass LP and high pass HP filters Limits the maximum frequency that the module can measure to approximately 1665 Hz The tracking filter 0 measurement is the gas generator vibration and the tracking filter 1 measurement is the power turbine vibration X shaft relative One eddy current probe or the eddy current probe that is mounted in the X direction for an XY pair Applies a 24 dB octave LP filter Y shaft relative An eddy current probe that is mounted in the Y direction for an XY pair Applies 24 dB octave filters X shaft relative Filtered One eddy current probe or the eddy current probe that is mounted in the X direction for an XY pair Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters Y shaft relative Filtered One eddy probe or the eddy current probe that is mounted in the Y direction for an XY pair Applies a 24 dB octave LP filter Aero derivative AV D Applies 60 dB octave LP and HP filters Specifies one level of integration velocity to displacement Limits the maximum frequency that the module can measure to approximately 1665 Hz The tracking filter 0 measurement is the gas generator vibration and the tracking filter 1 measurement is the p
32. Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Based on maximum current load models including internal module power dissipation of its DC power and externally connected power sources an estimate can be made of total internal power dissipation within the enclosure to provide guidance to select an enclosure or plan for required temperature control measures inside your enclosure Module Type Maximum Power Dissipation Main 9 0 W Relay 23W 4 20 MA 3 6 W Tacho Signal Conditioning 3 0W Together with known maximum system heat dissipation from all used components that are planned for your enclosure the following approximate equations They are based on using no active method of heat dissipation control like fans or air conditioning can be used to calculate either cooling surface requirement for enclosure and or internal cabinet temperature rise Metric English 0 38 4 08 A Petana aih N Q A 4 08 Q 18 T 1 1 T 11 0 21 408 Q pe te T T 441 A Where Where e Tisthe temperature difference between inside airand Tis the temperature difference between inside air and outside ambient C outside ambient oF e Qis heat generated in enclosure W e Ais enclosure surface area m2 The exterior surface of all six sides of an enclosure is calculated as follows A 2dw 2dh 2wh Where d depth w width and h height are in meters Qis heat generated in enclosure W e Ais enclo
33. amp DANGER Iftime synchronization is disabled online active axes in any controller in this chassis or any other synchronized device Enable Time Synchronization Is the system time master may experience unexpected motion Safety controllers may fault if no other time master O Is a synchronized time slave exists in the local chassis O Duplicate CST master detected O CST Mastership disabled O No CST master Advanced l Cancel p Help Refer to publication IA AT003B Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration for further information on configuring CIP Sync in your controller Note Module Time is a 64 bit integer value in units of microseconds with a power up value of 0 which corresponds to an epoch of January 1 1970 Coordinated Universal Time UTC The time standard for civil time representing time at the Prime Meridian The time does not include time zone or daylight savings time offsets Module Time is based on UTC Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 Module Inputs The Dynamix 1444 Series Monitor Systems accepts the following inputs 1444 DYN04 01RA Dynamic Measurement Module Eight inputs of three types are provided Channel Inputs Four inputs are provided to connect common dynamic measurement sensors such as eddy current probes accelerometers velocimeters strain p
34. so x S gZ 2 Z 3 5 x 2 L a Ss B a S amp S Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 75 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System 4 20 mA Expansion Module The Analog Output module provides four channels of 4 20 mA output For each output specific High HI and Low LO signal connections are provided despite the High Low description these connections are polarity insensitive Eight electrically connected shield connections are provided The 4 20 mA Expansion module requires loop power a supply in the range of 18V to 32V DC at 26 mA to be provided to each output Supplying Loop Power When loop power is not provided by other devices a 24V supply must be provided The output connections are isolated from one another and the remainder of the module circuitry While individual supplies can be applied per channel output it is possible to deploy a common supply for multiple channels if maintaining inter channel isolation is not important WN PLC WN O Recorder 24 V de Supply Above Example wiring scheme where PLC DMM Recorder represent the 4 20 mA load As shown in the preceding graphic e Connect the positive power to the module output high connections pins 1 5 14 and 18 e Connect the negative power to the module output low connections pins 2 6 13 and 17 e Do not make any co
35. 4 18 Current Output 3 Name SINT 32 oe o h a Trend Overall Update Multiplier e Pad INT 0x38B 1 18 Trend Dynamic Update Multiplier DINT 19 Alarm Overall Update Multiplier INT 24 Trend Data Set Enable BYTE 32 Alarm Data Storage Trigger Source SINT 33 Alarm Data Storage Latching SINT 34 Alarm Post Trigger for the High Resolution 100 ms SINT Overall Records 35 Alarm Post Trigger for the Low Resolution Configured SINT Rate Overall Records 36 Alarm Post Trigger for Dynamic Data Records 10x SINT Configured Overall Rate 0x38B 1 48 DWORD 0 Trend Static Data Source DWORD 49 DWORD 1 Trend Static Data Source DWORD 50 DWORD 2 Trend Static Data Source DWORD 51 DWORD 3 Trend Static Data Source DWORD 0x38C 1 16 Transient Data Mode Control WORD 18 Transient Dynamic Data Selection SINT 23 Source of Speed Data SINT 24 Low Speed Threshold DINT 25 High Speed Threshold DINT 26 Overall Delta RPM SU INT 27 Overall Delta RPM CD INT 28 Overall Delta RPM SU INT 29 Overall Delta RPM CD INT 30 Disable Dynamic Data Storage BYTE Pad SINT 298 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 83 Configuration Group 29 CIP Objects Appendix B Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x38C 1 31 Extra Startup Sample Time INT 64 DWORD 0 Transient Static Data Source DWORD 65 DWORD 1 Transient Static Data Source DWORD 66 DWORD 2 Transient Stati
36. August 2015 447 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 277 Generic CIP Status Codes Ox2C 44 Attribute not attainable A request to read a non readable attribute was received 0x2D 45 Reserved Reserved OxCF 207 OxDO 208 Reserved for Object Class and service errors This range of error codes is used to indicate Object Class specific errors Use of this range is only OxFF 255 performed when none of the Error Codes that are presented in this table accurately reflect the error that was encountered General Code Extended Code Description 0x02 0x0201 The maximum number of class 3 connections are already in use Ox0F Ox0F01 Intrusive services are not allowed for unconnected messages 0x0F02 A Set Attribute Single service is only allowed when there is an active class 3 connection that belongs to the module owner determined by the Vendor ID and the Device Serial Number 0x0F03 User attempted to access a service that is limited to Class 1 access only 0x0F04 User attempted to access a service that is only accessible if alarm inhibit is active 0x10 0x1001 An attempt to reconfigure the module was made while the module was already in program mode or in starting mode 0x01002 A Set Attribute service on the Configuration Manager object was attempted while the module was in Program Mode or in Starting Mode 0x1003 Intrusive services are not allowed on the Non Volatile Storage Object 0xA1 unless the module is in an Out of Box
37. Max Number of revolutions 10 calculated from 200 2 56 3600 32 60 93750 If the speed was instead 60 000 RPM then first reduce the SRD as much as is allowed or is practicable For the purposes of example assume a reduction to SRD 9 the lowest allowed when tracking filters are being used Then the equivalent number of revolutions in the tracking filter definition can be recalculated Number of revolutions 49 calculated from 200 2 56 60000 9 60 93750 When defining a tracking filter first help insure that the tracked frequency is well within the bandwidth available by virtue of the SRD setting never higher than an equivalent FFT FMAX Then adjust the number of revolutions in the filter definition according to the machine speed and the configured SRD as shown in the preceding statement The number of revolutions determines the bin width and the spread of the response side lobes To quantify that the following expression can be used where at the calculated bin width the response is approximately 3 dB down e Bin width orders 1 Number of revolutions e Bin width Hz 1 60 Number of revolutions speeds in rpm The following grahic is a comparison of the normalized filter response which is configured for 10 and 100 revolutions and illustrates how configuring a higher Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 131 Chapter3 Measurement Definition number
38. Real Time 2 Ch Dynamic 18 kHz 2 Ch 2 Static Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic 4 kHz Dual Path 32 Real Time 2 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz 64 Multiplexed 4 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz or 128 Static Paired Module Personality defines the general measurement configuration of the module including which channels are used at what maximum frequency or DC Two categories of Personality are provided Real Time and Multiplexed Real Time personalities are those that provide continuous measurements that update at rates of not slower than once every 40 milliseconds The Multiplexed personalities update measurements in channel pairs although they do not necessarily alternate equally see Time Slot Multiplier The available selections are as follows 1 Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic 4 kHz or Static All channels are available Each channel pair can be defined for either Static DC or Dynamic AC measurements Dynamic channels can be configured for an Fmax up to 4 kHz 240 kCPM 2 Real Time 2 Ch Dynamic 18 kHz 2 Ch Static Channels 0 and 1 can be configured for Dynamic AC measurements with an Fmax of up to 18 kHz 1080 kKCPM Channels 2 and 3 can be used for Static DC measurements 32 Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic 4 kHz Dual Path For measurements this is the same as 1 Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic 4 kHz or Static What is different is that the module internally connects the channel
39. Selected mid Filter identifies inclusion of application Low Pass Filter 0x03 3 Post Filter Selected post Filter identifies inclusion of both application Low and High Pass Filter including potentially enabled integration stage 0x04 4 Alternate path a CM alternate processing path available when so configured in the Channel Set Up Object Measurement Units Actual selection of Measurement engineering units are a subset of the master engineering units list It is based on active measurement application for the applicable measurement channel related to sensor type and signal processing Source of Speed Data Any one of the following can be identified as the speed reference for Normal CM data Value Description 0 Tacho Speed 0 1 Tacho Speed 1 Waveform Record Length Index 0 1 2 3 4 5 Samples 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 Number of samples 256 2 Index Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 FFT Resolution CIP Objects Appendix B Defines the FFT line resolution that is used for the Normal CM data FFT For Advanced CM data another line resolution can be requested Index FFT Resolution 0x00 0 100 lines 0x01 1 200 lines 0x02 2 400 lines 0x03 3 800 lines 0x04 4 1600 lines Transient dynamic data is generally specified by the Normal CM data object noting however that it is limited to a maximum of an 800 line FFT and 2048 point TWF Norm
40. 0x01 X Get Attributes All Returns the contents of the specified attribute Ox0E x Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Table 111 Object Specific Services Service Service Name Code Implementation Description of Service Class Instance Event log upload This service allows block upload of the Event data using a predefined format Partial uploads such as the last 250 events is supported 0x4B Event Log Record Request Event log entries are retrieved using a series of request response unconnected messages One service is used to both start and continue with a session The first request initiates the session and subsequent requests return values that the service returns When the packet count down value returned reaches 0 the session is completed The instance and attribute can be set to 1 but they are ignored The host as part of an 0x4B service request sends the following Request Parameters This process is identical to the Data Manager Object 0x38B Service 0x4C CM Buffer Upload Both services call the same service handling code That code is why the buffer select codes do not overlap with the codes for the data manager object Table 112 Event Log Entries Byte Offset Structure Data Description within Member Type Structure 0 BufferSelect INT Specify the buffer to retrieve the data from eEVENT_LOG 26 The BufferSelect does not change duri
41. 1 Check this to include the Order 0 magnitude member for the selected channel to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel Tag Member 0 Ch0Order n Mag 1 Ch10rder n Mag 2 Ch20rder n Mag 3 Ch30rder n Mag Order n Phase Checked 1 Check this to include the Order 0 Phase member for the selected channel to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel Tag Member 0 Ch0Order n Phase 1 Ch10rder n Phase 2 Ch2Ordern Phase 3 Ch30rder n Phase Bias Gap Checked 1 Check this to include the Bias Gap DC volts member for the selected channel to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel Tag Member 0 choDCV 1 chiDCV 2 Ch2DCV 3 Ch3DCV FFT Band n Checked 1 Check this to include the FFT Band 0 member for the selected channel to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel TagMember 0 ChOFFTBand n 1 Chi FFTBand n 2 Ch2FFTBand n 3 Ch3FFTBand n Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 97 Chapter2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Table 10 Input Data Values Comments Parameter Not 1x Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this to include the Not 1x member for the selected channel to the input tag Channel Tag Member 0 ChONot1X 1 ChiNot1X 2 Ch2Not1X 3 Ch3Not1X Proportional DC Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this to include the Proportional DC member for the selected channel to the input tag Channel Tag Member 0 choDCc 1 Ch1DC 2 Ch2DC 3 Ch3DC
42. 216 Operate the Module Module Status Structure The status structure consists of these parameters dint AuxiliaryCommunicationProcessor int TrendBuffer int AlarmBuffer int Transient int Reserved dint DSP int ChannelTransducer sint Speed sint A D int RelayModuled int RelayModule1 int RelayModule2 int Reserved int 4 20 mAModule int TachoSignalConditionerModule Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 While the module does not provide a single Module OK status value it is possible to monitor the individual Module Status Structure members hex or decimal values rather than the status of each of its individual bits The following table provides the expected hex decimal values for each structure member if in its OK state ype ember alue omments Hex Decimal ot AuxiliaryCommunicationProcessor 0x 288 208 nt IrendBuffer 7A nformation only AlarmBuffer Transient dint 10x00000000 0 ormal 0x00000400 T 024 Konfiguration has changed The bit will reset when the same configuration is downloaded from the controller or when the module is power cycled or reset int KChannelTransducer 0x000000FF 255 Assumes 4 channels enabled not a multiplexing configuration kint Speed 0x01 7 Tach 0 enabled x03 3 ach s0 amp 1 enabled int D 10x00 0 nt elayModule x
43. 276 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 72 Configuration Group 17 CIP Objects Appendix B Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad INT 0x397 7 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 7 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD Table 73 Configuration Group 18 Configuration Group 18 Group 18 contains voted alarm object instances 8 13 and options to configure the input and output assemblies See Assembly Object on page 435 0x04 for more on this configurability Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x397 8 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 8 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 8 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD Rockwell Automation Publica
44. 80 DC Channel 0 112 Channel 0 17 Order 0 Phase 49 FFT Band 5 81 DC Channel 1 113 Channel 1 18 Order 0 Phase 50 FFT Band 6 82 DC Channel 2 114 Channel 2 19 Order 0 Phase 51 FFT Band 7 83 DC Channel 3 115 Channel 3 20 Order 1 Mag 52 FFT Band 8 84 S maxMag Channel Pair 0 116 Channel 0 21 Order 1 Mag 53 FFT Band 9 85 S maxMag Channel Pair 1 117 Channel 1 22 Order 1 Mag 54 FFT Band 10 86 Smax Phase Channel Pair 118 Channel 2 0 23 Order 1 Mag 55 FFT Band 11 87 Smax Phase Channel Pair 119 Channel 3 1 24 Order 1 Phase 56 FFT Band 12 88 Shaft Absolute pk pk 120 Channel 0 Channel Pair 0 25 Order 1 Phase 57 FFT Band 13 89 Shaft Absolute pk pk 121 Channel 1 Channel Pair 1 26 Order 1 Phase 58 FFT Band 14 90 Speed 0 122 Channel 2 27 Order 1 Phase 59 FFT Band 15 91 Speed 1 123 Channel 3 28 Order 2 Mag 60 FFT Band 16 92 Speed 0 maximum 124 Channel 0 29 Order 2 Mag 61 FFT Band 17 93 Speed 1 maximum 125 Channel 1 30 Order 2 Mag 62 FFT Band 18 94 Speed 0 Rate of Change 126 Channel 2 31 Order 2 Mag 63 FFT Band 19 95 Speed 1 Rate of Change 127 Channel 3 368 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 161 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Instance 0x0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Behavior An instance of the Measurement Alarm Object
45. Ch0 Setting Dynamic Ch2 Setting Dual Path Static Static RealTime 2Ch Off Off Off Off Dynamic 40 kHz Dynamic Ch0 Setting gSE Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 10 Input Data Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Input Data Page Use the Input Data Page to specify the measurements to be included in the module input assembly The input assembly is constructed to include a fixed Status Assembly See Assembly Object on page 435 followed by a table that consists of the selected measurements Selecting measurements to be included on the input assembly is not sufficient for the module to produce them Measurements must also be configured appropriately See Measurement Definition on page 117 Figure 35 The Input Data Page 1YNO4 01RA ae put Data xpansion Module w Speed 0 WI Speed 1 4 TSCX02 02RB Factored Speed 0 Factored Speed 1 4 RELX00 04RB E Speed 0 Maximum Speed 1 Maximum E Speed 0 Rate of Change Speed 1 Rate of Change Channel Pairs Loa z3 _ SMax Pk Pk Axial Differential Expansion E Shaft Absolute Pk Pk Radial Differential Expansion Channel ca Loch v Overall 0 V FFT Band 0 __ Overall 1 FFT Band 1 Order 0 Magnitude FFT Band 2 C Order 0 Phase FFT Band 3 Order 1 Magnitude FFT Band 4 Order 1 Phase FFT Band 5 Order 2 Magnitude FF
46. In this case the measurement alarms are defined such that a transducer fault is treated as in alarm e Actuate on transducer fault Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 167 Chapter 6 168 Configure Relays Main Module Fault Output Relays can also be configured to actuate on various fault conditions These can be selected in addition to a voted alarm input or independently of so acts only on faults and any or all faults can be selected for notification by the relay The available faults that can be detected and acted on by the dynamic measurement module relay differ from those available to the expansion module relays The available faults that the main module relay can be configured to act on are Module Fault This is a fault reported by the main module itself on failure of any of the following e Startup tests e RAM memory test e Code CRC check e Runtime tests e RAM memory test Runtime version e Code CRC check Runtime version e Relay drive test tests the internal relay drive circuitry when the relay configuration is fail safe The level of the compliance requirement determines how which and how frequently the runtime tests are performed See Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 Tachometer Fault A tachometer fault condition is communicated to the main module by any of e The local bus from the tachometer signal conditioner expansion module 1444 TSCX02 02
47. Peak to Peak or RMS 2 RMS default Channel 3 DSP FFT Group of 7 configuration attributes 93 Get V Enable SINT An enable control Only 0 Disable enable if FFT bands are 1 Enable required from this channel 94 Get V Signal Source SINT Defines the data source Source 95 Get V Measurement Units ENGUNITS Measurement units 96 Get V Line Resolution SINT Fixed at 1600 lines 97 Get V Window Function SINT Definition of window Window function used 98 Get V Number of Averages SINT FFT averaging Averages 99 Get V Line Value Detection Scaling SINT Allows line bin values to 0 Peak be returned scaled as Peak 1 Peak to Peak Peak to Peak or RMS 2 RMS default Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 425 Appendix B 426 CIP Objects Attributes 72 79 Channel 0 3 DSP FFT refer to the FFT function of the DSP that is executed exclusively to calculate FFT Band data Object 0x399 refers The FFT calculated in the DSP is not served externally stored internally or used for any other purpose than the FFT Band function Attribute Semantics Auxiliary Modules Bit wise setting indication of the expected detected auxiliary modules Table 234 Auxiliary Modules Bit Description 0 Relay Output Module 0 1 Relay Output Module 1 2 Relay Output Module 2 3 4 20 mA Analog Output Module 4 Tacho Signal Conditioner Sid Reserved Detected auxiliary modules is limited to expected modul
48. Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 253 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 63 Channel Application Type Index Description Primary Path Filtering Integration Notes 0 OFF 1 Temperature Transmitter F OFF 1 2 Temperature Transmitter C OFF 1 3 Temperature Transmitter K OFF 1 4 DC Current OFF 1 5 DC Voltage OFF 1 6 Position OFF 1 7 Rod Drop OFF 1 8 Bearing Temperature F OFF 1 9 Bearing Temperature C OFF 1 10 Bearing Temperature K OFF 1 77 X shaft relative Filtered LP HP 24 dB 4 78 Y shaft relative Filtered LP HP 24 dB 4 79 Eccentricity LP 24 dB 2 80 Aero Derivative AV to V LP HP 60 dB 3 81 X shaft relative LP 24 dB 4 82 Y shaft relative LP 24 dB 4 83 Aero Derivative AV to D LP HP 60 dB Yes 3 84 Standard Case Absolute Vibration A to A LP HP 24 dB 4 85 Standard Case Absolute Vibration A to V LP HP 24 dB Yes 4 86 Standard Case Absolute Vibration A to D LP HP 24 dB Yes 4 87 Standard Case Absolute Vibration AV to V LP HP 24 dB 4 88 Standard Case Absolute Vibration AV to D LP HP 24 dB Yes 4 89 Standard Case Absolute Vibration V to V LP HP 24 dB 4 90 Standard Case Absolute Vibration V to D LP HP 24 dB Yes 4 92 Dynamic Pressure with filters LP HP 24 dB 5 93 Dynamic Pressure OFF
49. Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 61 Chapter 1 62 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Lower Base Connector Terminal Name Application Description 17 TOSIG Tach 0 Tach 0 Signal 18 TORET Tach 0 Return 19 Shield Shield Shields 20 Shield 21 TISIG Tach 1 Tach 1 Signal 22 TIRET Tach 1 Return 23 Shield Shield Shields 24 Shield 25 LOSIG Logical Input Input 0 Signal 26 LORET Input 0 Return 27 Shield Shield Shields 28 Shield 29 L1SIG Logical Input Input 1 Signal 30 LIRET Input 1 Return 31 Shield Shield Shields 32 Shield Shield Shield connections are provided as a termination point for cable screens shields one or more can be used to connect Shield to a local ground of the user s choosing IMPORTANT There is no internal connection between the Shield Bus and ground A separate connection must be made between one terminal shield pin and a suitable ground location Logic Inputs The DYN module includes two logic inputs 0 and 1 These are not isolated from other module circuitry the signal input has a resistive pull up to 5V and the return connection is analog ground return Logic inputs have various possible uses configuration dependent including alarm gating and SPM controls Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 DYN Module Transducers Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monito
50. The expansion modules a tachometer signal conditioner a relay module and an analog output module are configured and managed from their host main module Therefore configuration of these capabilities is included in the AOP for the main dynamic measurement module The main module also manages errors that are associated with any expansion module The behavior of the expansion modules themselves on the failure of its host main module or loss of communication to the main module can also be defined The module supports the EtherNet IP communication protocol and includes two RJ45 Ethernet ports These ports can be applied as either standard Ethernet connections where modules are daisy chained one to the next or implemented by using Device Level Ring DLR Main Features The DYN module offers the following major features e Distributed vibration module with direct EtherNet IP network connectivity e Multifunction configurable for eddy current probes accelerometers velocimeters and all common dynamic measurement sensors that output voltages from 24V to 24V DC e Four measurement channels and two tacho TTL circuits e Transducer supply configurable per channel as one of Constant Current Mode 24 V 4 mA Constant Voltage Mode 24 V 25 mA Constant Voltage Mode 24 V 25 mA e Buffered signal outputs output current limited e Measurement bandwidth up to 18 kHz 4 channels 40 kHz 2 channels e Digital filtering
51. and are Opto isolated from the module and each other Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Services 1 0 Message Formats Operate the Module Chapter 9 See CIP Objects on page 243 for available common and object specific services Assemblies are created in Logix and defined by the 1444 modules Add on Profile AOP The AOP for the 1444 s dynamic measurement module creates assemblies for input output and configuration The structure content and meaning of the parameters of each of the assemblies except configuration is provided in the following Input Assembly The input assembly consists of four structures three fixed Status data structures and a variably defined data structure In the Studio 5000 Tag Monitor the structures are presented similarly as shown below replacing Test with the module name Test_1444 C Test_1444 Test_1444 1 ModuleStatus Test_1444 1AlarmStatus Test_1444 lRelayStatus Test_1444 1 Ch0Overall0 Test_1444 1 Ch10Overall0 Test_1444 Ch2O0verall0 Test_1444 Ch30verall0 Test_1444 Ch0Overall1 The structures are defined as follows Input Assembly Structure Module Status Structure ModuleStatus Fixed Alarm Status Structure AlarmStatus 13 Fixed Relay Status Structure RelayStatus Fixed Input Data Structure Input Data Parameters Variable Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 215 Chapter 9
52. but with extra indices e 5 3200 lines 6 6400 lines e 7 12800 lines 28 FFT Window Function SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A 29 FFT Line Value Scaling SINT Allows line bin values to be returned scaled as Peak Peak to Peak or RMS 0 Peak 1 Peak to Peak 2 RMS 30 Pad INT Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary Instance 4 Channel 3 32 Enable BYTE A bit wise enable control 33 Number of Averages SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A 34 Waveform Record SINT Defines the number of samples in the Advanced CM waveform Length 35 FFT Line Resolution SINT Record Length 36 FFT Window Function SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A 37 FFT Line Value Scaling SINT Allows line bin values to be returned scaled as Peak Peak to Peak or RMS 0 Peak 1 Peak to Peak 2 RMS 38 Pad INT Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary Table 203 Record Length TWF Samples 65536 FFT Lines 100 200 400 1600 3200 6400 12800 25600 398 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Enable CIP Objects A bit wise enable control per instance channel Table 204 Enable Appendix B Value Description 0 FFT 1 Waveform 2 Waveform Averaging 3 FFT Averaging 4 7 Reserved Waveform averaging is only a valid selection when waveform is enabled the Advanced CM data so
53. defined order 7 Get V magnitude 3 REAL magnitude reading for 0 output when not fourth defined order configured or no speed 8 Get V Phase 3 REAL Phase reading 0 output when not 0 359 deg for configured or no speed fourth defined order 9 Get V Not 1X REAL magnitude of AC magnitude components other than 1x General Tracking Filter Setup Group of 6 configuration attributes 16 Get V Tracking filter BYTE A bit wise coded entry Coding information Configuration that specifies if the filter is enabled and which Tacho source is used 0 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 347 Appendix B 348 CIP Objects Table 144 Instance Attributes 17 Get V Order ENGUNITS Definition of Options and selection Measurement measurement criteria Units engineering units that indirectly also allow for signal integration differentiation 18 Get V Order SINT The scaled 0 Peak Measurement measurement 1 pk pk Scaling detection thatis used 2 RMS for the order assessments 19 Get V Tracking Filter SINT Define order signal 0 Constant Q Mode processing mode 1 Fixed frequency 20 Get V Tracking Filter REAL The filter Q factor or Currently only fixed Q Definition Frequency bandwidth mode Tacho 0 that is associated with supported by the selected processing specifying a number of mode revolutions Default 10 Range 1 256 21 Get V Tracking Filter RE
54. e Local Logic Input is low based on logic input being pulled high e Logic control bit is high 1 Assuming single defined source OR logic situations Table 173 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Instance 0x05 Reset the peak hold speed RPM max Ox0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute No Object Specific Services are supported Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 377 Appendix B 378 CIP Objects Behavior The Voted Alarm Object provides for logical combinations of up to 4 referenced measurement alarms instance attributes 25 28 refer The alarm logic scheme name and logic description applies to attributes in order so that X out of Y where both X and Y are from 1 to 4 refers to attributes 25 28 unused attributes are ignored and for more complicated logic 1o02 AND 1002 is where the first pair refers to attributes 25 and 26 and the second pair to attributes 27 and 28 The alarm type the measurement alarm behavior that is related to transducer status TX OK determines how TX OK state is integrated into the voting logic 2002 illustrates an example of how that is reflected in the final logic so using Alarm inputs 0 and 1 e TX OK Considered Alarm IF Alarm input 0 in alarm AND Associated TX OK AND Alarm input 1 in alarm AND Associated TX OK e TX OK Monitored Alarm IF
55. or that any fault conditions associated with the relay are faulted Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 241 Appendix A 242 Status Startup Behavior At startup the group of four is used to indicate the configured bus address of the expansion module The blue channel status indicators flash to indicate the module address in binary bit 0 being to the right for 10 seconds Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 Example for relay module address 7 or 0111 in binary During this period all controllable status indicators except indicators displaying the address are unlit the green status indicator to the left is the hardware controlled power status indicator Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Appendix B CIP Objects This appendix defines the specific CIP Objects supported by the Dynamix measurement module Topic Page Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference 244 Dynamix Specific Objects Dynamix Configuration Manager Object 252 Dynamix Data Manager Object 299 Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object 311 Dynamix Event Log Object 319 Dynamix Transducer Object 328 Dynamix Channel Setup Object 331 Dynamix AC Measurement Object 335 Dynamix DC Measurement Object 339 Dynamix Dual Measur
56. resent and configure RelayModule1 RelayModule2 14 20mAModule 0x0000 0 Not present int TachoSignalConditionerModule 0x0002 2 ay change as machine slows or stops Use masking to avoid hat MaskedStatus Status AND OxF3FF The data type for each attribute is either a sinr 8 bits an int 16 bits or a dint 32 bit In each case the state of the individual bits as provided in Table 35 defines status It is possible for multiple bits to be set Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 217 Chapter 9 Operate the Module Table 35 Auxiliary Processor Status Auxiliary Communication Processor Status Bit Status Description if 1 Bit Status Description if 1 0 Reserved 16 1V5 0K 1 Network fault Device powered off or with no IP 17 DSP 1V6 OK address configured Network cable not detected An exclusive owner connection has timed out 2 Network address fault Indicates an IP addressing conflict 18 DSP 3V3D OK address in use by another device When set this error contributes to an EIP communication fail in the context of ta module fault relay 3 DSP DPM Fault Dual Port Memory Fault 19 5VA 0K 4 CIP Sync Support 20 25V5 0K 5 Reserved 21 24V 0K 6 Reserved 22 25V5 0K 7 Reserved 23 24V 0K 8 Reserved 24 ADO_0 6V5 Fault 9 Reserved 25 ADO_1 5V_Ref Fault 10 Reserved
57. transient event a buffer that is configured as latching will still be left unlatched This condition makes it available for a new event if the amount of data that is stored is less than a fixed percentage of the buffer capacity This function helps ensure that an aborted transient event with little data available is automatically released for potential capture of later events The percentage is not configurable but is TBD Timeout refers to the situation where one speed threshold is crossed and the buffer is filled to maximum capacity before any further speed threshold crossing occurs Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 313 AppendixB CIP Objects Transient Data Mode Bits Description 0 Disable 0 or enable 1 transient mode 1 Startup Bit set for Fast Transient Data Collection Mode Default is Normal Transient Data Collection Mode Sets of overall and Dynamic data 2 Coast down Bit set for Fast Transient Data Collection Mode Default is Normal Transient Data Collection Mode Sets of overall and Dynamic data 3 5 Number of buffers that are allocated to start up in Normal Mode referred to by RU or SU Values 0 4 default 2 6 8 Number of buffers that are allocated to coast down in Normal Mode CD Values 0 4 default 2 9 Buffer latch control 10 Use additional available buffers for the same extended transient event 11 15 Reserved for future functional
58. 0 7 Reserved for full multiplexing 3 0 7 Reserved for full multiplexing Disabled instances return error 0x08 Service Not supported when disabled instances are addressed with common services Source Selection For the overall AC measurement A the source is fixed the level assessment is made after the user configured low and high pass filters For the overall AC measurement B the source is variable Index Source 1 Pre Filter before the user configured low pass filter 2 Mid Filter after the user configured low pass filter Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 337 Appendix B 338 CIP Objects Source selection for the overall AC measurement B configures the dual path processing capability for that channel so that e in an integrating configuration both acceleration and velocity overalls are available e or inanon integrating configuration to have both band pass filtered and wide band data available AC Units Actual selection of AC engineering units are a subset of the master engineering units list The selection is based on active measurement application for the applicable measurement channel related to sensor type and signal processing AC magnitude Detection Method Value Description 0 True peak 1 True peak to peak 2 RMS 3 Rectified average 4 Peak 5 Scaled peak 6 Scaled peak to peak Peak per Revolution Assessment I
59. 0 Enable 1 Disabled Default Enabled Tracking filter 0 0 Tacho 0 1 Tacho 1 Default Tacho 1 Tracking filter 1 0 Enable 1 Disabled Default Enabled Tracking filter 1 0 Tacho 0 1 Tacho 1 Default Tacho 1 Tracking filter 2 0 Enable 1 Disabled Default Enabled Tracking filter 2 0 Tacho 0 1 Tacho 1 Default Tacho 1 Tracking filter 3 0 Enable 1 Disabled Default Enabled Tracking filter 3 0 Tacho 0 1 Tacho 1 Default Tacho 1 Table 145 Common Services Service Code Ox0E Implementation Class Instance X x Service Name Get Attribute Single Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Description of Service Returns the contents of the specified attribute Get requests to certain attributes require data to be requested from the auxiliary module itself If that module is not present active on the bus an embedded server error is returned in response to the request CIP Objects Appendix B Behavior In general e You can configure up to four tracking filters per channel e They can be configured to track any particular order including non integer values e The filter has a constant Q behavior so it changes or adapts to speed e Any combination of the two tacho inputs can be used across a channel Some restrictions special considerations do apply for specific measurements and applications For Aero derivative ap
60. 0 50 0 20 Channel 1 1_ Positive w 0 50 0 20 Filters Overall Parameter Values Comments Mode Normal 0 In Normal mode the speed inputs are independent In Redundant 1 Redundant mode if Tach 0 is in Fault Not OK then Tacho 1 is used for all functions specified for Tacho 0 Name Blank or must start with a letter or underscore _ Enter a name of up to 32 characters for the selected tachometer Speed Multiplier Support for values lt gt 1 Enter a multiplier for the Factored Speed value Notes e There are two speed measurements available Speed and Factored Speed This parameter is used to calculate the Factored Speed Factored Speed is used when the required speed is that of a shaft that is mechanically connected to the shaft to which the tachometer is applied Source Local TTL Tach Input 0 1 Local TTL Tach Input 1 2 Tach Bus 0 3 Tach Bus 1 4 1 0 Speed 0 5 1 0 Speed 1 6 Each speed measurement can be processed from any type source Synchronous measurements Filters page and Order Tracking Tracking Filters pages require speed measured from a triggered signal source so must be either a Local TTL or Tacho Bus source 1 0 Speed selections require that Speed be included in the Controller Output assembly in Module Definition Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 115 Chapter 2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Paramete
61. 0 and 2 inputs and the channel 1 and 3 inputs 64 Real Time 2 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz Channels 0 and 1 pair can be configured for Dynamic AC measurements with an Fmax of up to 40 kHz 2400 kCPM or as gSE Channels 2 and 3 are disabled off 128 Multiplexed 4 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz or Static Paired Channels can be configured in pairs 0 and 1 2 and 3 for Dynamic AC measurements with an Fmax of up to 40 kHz 2400 kCPM as gSE as Static DC measurements or off Channel Pair measurements alternate based on the Time Slot Multiplier setting Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 93 Chapter 2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Table 9 Module Functionality Parameter Cho Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 94 Values 0 Off 1 Dynamic 2 gSE 3 Static Comment Channel Type is a high level selection that is used by the AOP not the module to filter manage further user selections in Module Definition and in Configuration The Channel Types that are enabled are based on the Module Personality selected The selections are as follows Personality cho chi ch2 Ch3 RealTime 4Ch Off Off Off Off Dynamic 5 kHz Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic or Static Static Static Static Static Real Time 2Ch Off Dynamic Off Off Off Dynamic Ch0 Setting Static Static 20 kHz 2 Ch Static Real Time 4Ch Off off off off Dynamic 5 kHz Dynamic
62. 0x39D 4 16 Current Output Enable SINT Pad SINT 286 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 74 Configuration Group 19 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x39D 4 17 Current Output Measurement INT Identifier 19 20 mA Output scaling REAL 20 4 mA Output scaling REAL 24 Current Output Not OK SINT Configuration Pad SINT Pad INT 0x398 0 16 Synchronization enable SINT 17 Waveform FFT storage format BYTE Pad INT 0x398 1 16 Enable BYTE 17 Signal Source SINT 18 Number of averages SINT Pad SINT 0x398 1 19 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 20 Associated Tacho Source SINT 21 Waveform Record Length SINT 24 FFT Enable SINT 25 FFT Line Resolution SINT 26 FFT Window Function SINT 27 FFT Averages SINT 28 FFT Line value detection scaling SINT Pad SINT 0x398 2 16 Enable BYTE 17 Signal Source SINT 18 Number of averages SINT Pad SINT 0x398 2 19 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 20 Associated Tacho Source SINT 21 Waveform Record Length SINT 24 FFT Enable SINT 25 FFT Line Resolution SINT 26 FFT Window Function SINT 27 FFT Averages SINT 28 FFT Line value detection scaling SINT Pad SINT 0x398 3 16 Enable BYTE 17 Signal Source SINT 18 Number of averages SINT Rockwell Automation Pu
63. 1 13 output type Danger 30 Any Danger 31 32 Reserved 33 45 Voted alarm instance 1 13 output type TX OK 46 Any TX OK TX Fail 47 48 Reserved 49 Any Voted Alarm Output Higher values Reserved 0x00 disables any automatic storage function that is based on an alarm status Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 301 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 88 Status Data Bit Allocations Either by the controller via its output table or by a service the alarm data storage can be triggered These controls and the configured trigger source are ORed Bits DWORD 0 DWORD 1 DWORD 2 DWORD 3 0 Overall 0 Order 2 FFT Band 20 Factored Speed 0 Channel 0 Phase Channel 0 1 Overall 0 Order 2 FFT Band 21 Factored Speed 1 Channel 1 Phase Channel 1 2 Overall 0 Order 2 FFT Band 22 Axial Differential Channel 2 Phase Channel 2 Expansion Channel Pair 0 3 Overall 0 Order 2 FFT Band 23 Axial Differential Channel 3 Phase Channel 3 Expansion Channel Pair 1 4 Overall 1 Order 3 Mag FFT Band 24 Ramp Differential Expansion Radial Channel 0 Channel 0 Channel Pair 0 5 Overall 1 Order 3 Mag FFT Band 25 Ramp Differential Expansion Radial Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel Pair 1 6 Overall 1 Order 3 Mag FFT Band 26 Rod Drop Channel 0 Channel 2 Channel 2 7 Overall 1 Order 3 Mag FFT Band 27 Rod Drop Channel 1 Channel
64. 1 2 06 1 0 connection opened Forward open for an 1 0 connection No data byes are used received 07 1 0 connection closed Forward close for an 1 0 connection No data byes are used received or connection lost 08 Firmware Update A Firmware Update was successfully Byte 10 indicates which processed firmware was updated instance number 09 13 Not allocated 14 Redundant power supply A change in the redundant power supply Byte 8 is previous state and 9 status status has been detected the current 1 is fail 1 is OK 15 AUX module detection Identifies change in which auxiliary Byte 8 is previous state and 10 modules are detected the current Bit set indicates that the module is missing 16 AUX module status A change in auxiliary module reported Byte 8 is previous state and 9 status has been logged Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 the current 1 is fail 0 is OK Table 115 System Event Types CIP Objects Appendix B ID Name Description Bytes 8 15 Application 17 Internal power supply status Internal power supply status change Bytes 8 9 are previous NetX status bits 16 31 bytes 10 22 are the new status data 18 NetX status other Detected network issues Byte 8 is previous NetX status bits 16 31 bytes 10 11 are the new status data 19 Controller output assembly Changes in the 16 bit output assembly Bytes 8 0 are previous control data have been detected
65. 1970 8 SamplePeriodInSecs REAL Time period between samples or speed and number of samples per revolution can be used to calculate the bandwidth for the FFT 12 Identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 ucDataSelect BYTE If Bit 0 is set phase array follows the mag array in the LineArray Otherwise just the magnitude net amp 2 indicate FFT scaling 0 Peak 1 Peak to Peak 2 RMS Bit 3 is set if FFT Data Filter has been applied 17 Reserved1 BYTE 18 Reserved2 UINT 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 LineArray REAL The array of FFT line amplitude data Table 209 Waveform eTWF2 Note Reference measurement tables on page 361 Byte Offset Structure Member Data Type Description within Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 SamplePeriodInSecs REAL Time period between samples or speed and number of samples per revolution 12 Identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 RelativeTime UDINT A 24 bit micro second counter value for finely aligning data 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 SampleArray REAL The array of waveform data values samples Table 210 Tacho eTACHO Reference measurement tables on page 362 Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structu
66. 27 CIP Objects Appendix B Group 27 contains configuration attributes from the Voted Alarm Object 0x397 Instances 3 9 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x397 3 17 Voted Alarm 2 Name SINT 32 4 7 Voted Alarm 3 Name SINT 32 5 17 Voted Alarm 4 Name SINT 32 6 7 Voted Alarm 5 Name SINT 32 7 7 Voted Alarm 6 Name SINT 32 8 17 Voted Alarm 7 Name SINT 32 9 7 Voted Alarm 8 Name SINT 32 Table 82 Configuration Group 28 Configuration Group 28 Group 28 contains configuration attributes from the Voted Alarm Object 0x397 Instances 10 13 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x397 10 17 Voted Alarm 9 Name SINT 32 11 7 Voted Alarm 10Name SINT 32 12 17 Voted Alarm 11Name SINT 32 13 17 Voted Alarm 12Name SINT 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 297 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 83 Configuration Group 29 Configuration Group 29 Group 29 contains configuration attributes from the following objects e Current Output Module Object 0x39D e Data Manager Object 0x38B e Transient Data Manager Object 0x38C Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x39D 1 18 Current Output 0 Name SINT 32 2 18 Current Output 1 Name SINT 32 3 18 Current Output 2 Name SINT 32
67. 3 Channel 3 8 DC V Channel 0 Order 3 FFT Band 28 Rod Drop Channel 2 Phase Channel 0 9 DC V Channel 1 Order 3 FFT Band 29 Rod Drop Channel 3 Phase Channel 1 10 DC V Channel 2 Order 3 FFT Band 30 Phase Channel 2 11 DC V Channel 3 Order 3 FFT Band 31 Phase Channel 3 12 Order 0 Mag FFT Band 0 Not 1X Channel 0 Channel 0 13 Order 0 Mag FFT Band 1 Not 1X Channel 1 Channel 1 14 Order 0 Mag FFT Band 2 Not 1X Channel 2 Channel 2 15 Order 0 Mag FFT Band 3 Not 1X Channel 3 Channel 3 16 Order 0 FFT Band 4 DC Channel 0 Phase Channel 0 17 Order 0 FFT Band 5 DC Channel 1 Phase Channel 1 18 Order 0 FFT Band 6 DC Channel 2 Phase Channel 2 19 Order 0 FFT Band 7 DC Channel 3 Phase Channel 3 20 Order 1 Mag FFT Band 8 S maxMag Channel Pair 0 Channel 0 21 Order 1 Mag FFT Band 9 S maxMag Channel Pair 1 Channel 1 302 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 88 Status Data Bit Allocations CIP Objects Appendix B Bits DWORD 0 DWORD 1 DWORD 2 DWORD 3 22 Order 1 Mag FFT Band 10 S max Phase Channel Pair 0 Channel 2 23 Order 1 Mag FFT Band 11 S max Phase Channel Pair 1 Channel 3 24 Order 1 FFT Band 12 Shaft Absolute Phase Channel 0 pk pk Channel Pair 0 25 Order 1 FFT Band 13 Shaft Absolute Phase Channel 1 pk pk Channel Pair 1 26 Order 1 FFT Band 14 Speed 0 Phase Channel 2 27 Order 1 FFT Band 15 Speed 1 Phase Cha
68. 5 95 AC Current LP HP 24 dB 4 96 AC Voltage LP HP 24 dB 4 160 18 kHz Case Absolute Vibration A to A LP HP 24 dB 6 161 18 kHz Case Absolute Vibration A to V LP HP 24 dB Yes 6 193 Complementary Differential Expansion A OFF 1 194 Complementary Differential Expansion B OFF 1 195 Ramp Differential Expansion A OFF 1 196 Ramp Differential Expansion B OFF 1 198 Shaft Relative Absolute Shaft LP HP 24 dB 4 225 40 kHz Case Absolute Vibration A to A LP HP 24 dB 7 226 40 kHz Case Absolute Vibration A to V LP HP 24 dB Yes 227 gSE Spike Energy Special HP LP 8 254 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Notes corresponding to numbers in preceding table 1 Static DC measurement types do not have AC overall measurement capabilities In addition no alternate path processing is available but Normal Advanced CM data acquisition capabilities are available from main path sources 2 Eccentricity will use a peak per revolution AC measurement assessment see AC Measurement Object Otherwise eccentricity falls within the general dynamic category regarding capabilities note 4 3 Aero derivative applications types are based on specific processing requirements Generally two channels are deployed per turbine one with a sensor positioned at the gas generator compressor frame the other on the Power turbine frame The expected input signal is velocity AV
69. 5 Get V DSCP Scheduled USINT 6 Get V DSCP High USINT 7 Get V DSCP Low USINT 8 Get V DSCP Explicit USINT Table 264 Common Services Service Implementation Instance Service Name Description of Service Code Class Ox0E x x Get Attribute Single 0x10 x Set Attribute Single Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 441 AppendixB CIP Objects TCP IP Interface Object Table 267 Instance Attributes Attribute Access ID Rule 1 Get NV The TCP IP Object class code OxF5 is part of the standard Hilscher netX100 EIP protocol stack Before ODVA testing this object is completed updated in line with the latest stack released by Hilscher The TCP IP Interface Object provides the mechanism to configure a TCP IP network interface of a device Examples of configurable items include the IP Address Network Mask and Gateway Address of the device Table 265 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Class Instance of the TCP IP Interface Object 1 Table 266 Class Attributes Attribute ID 1 Access Rule Get NV NV Name Revision Data Type UINT Instance representing active TCP IP Interface for the main module Description of Semantics of Attribute Values Defines the current revision of the TCP IP Current revision Interface Object 3 Name Status Get Maximum Instance UINT Defines maximum number of available TCP I
70. A negative or falling edge trigger would result in a phase angle of 60 e A positive or rising edge trigger would result in a phase angle of 90 In order configurations that are integrating the reported phase angle reflects that integration for instance velocity lags acceleration by 90 and displacement lags acceleration by 180 Influence of Sample Rate and Tracking Filter Definition Settings The Tracking filter definition is specified in terms ofa number of revolutions for the measurement The higher the number of revolutions configured e The sharper the tracking filter e The more accurate stable the assessment e The longer the measurement acquisition time Accuracy and stability also improve when more samples are being considered and so are sensitive not only to the Tracking Filter Definition but also to the SRD setting the higher the sample rate lower SRD the better The filter response is similar to one FFT bin rectangular no windowing So for a more objective benchmark a similar FFT case can be considered such as a 200 line FFT based on 512 samples Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 For an order measurement at a given sample rate SRD the equivalent maximum number of revolutions can be calculated as follows Max Number of revolutions Number of lines FFT 2 56 Speed RPM SRD 60 93750 Ex For a speed of 3600 rpm SRD 32
71. Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 78 Get V Line Value Detection Scaling SINT Allows line bin values to 0 Peak be returned scaled as Peak 1 Peak to Peak Peak to Peak or RMS 2 RMS default Channel 1 DSP FFT Group of 7 configuration attributes 79 Get V Enable SINT An enable control Only 0 Disable enable if FFT bands are 1 Enable required from this channel 80 Get V Signal Source SINT Defines the data source Source 81 Get V Measurement Units ENGUNITS Measurement units 82 Get V Line Resolution SINT Fixed at 1600 lines 83 Get V Window Function SINT Definition of window Window function used 84 Get V Number of Averages SINT FFT averaging Averages 85 Get V Line Value Detection Scaling SINT Allows line bin values to 0 Peak be returned scaled as Peak 1 Peak to Peak Peak to Peak or RMS 2 RMS default Channel 2 DSP FFT Group of 7 configuration attributes 86 Get V Enable SINT An enable control Only 0 Disable enable if FFT bands are 1 Enable required from this channel 87 Get V Signal Source SINT Defines the data source Source 88 Get V Measurement Units ENGUNITS Measurement units 89 Get V Line Resolution SINT Fixed at 1600 lines 90 Get V Window Function SINT Definition of window Window function used 91 Get V Number of Averages SINT FFT averaging Averages 92 Get V Line Value Detection Scaling SINT Allows line bin values to 0 Peak be returned scaled as Peak 1 Peak to Peak
72. Alarm type options designated fail safe or Alarm Type Options non fail safe Alarm Voting Logic Group of 5 configuration attributes 24 Get V Alarm Logic SINT The high level Voted logic schemes Configuration voting scheme that is used for the logical alarm processing Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 371 Appendix B 372 CIP Objects Table 165 Instance Attributes 25 Get V Alarm Input 0 SINT Measurement Alarm Range 1 24 instance reference that is used for input 0 26 Get V Alarm Input 1 SINT Measurement Alarm Range 1 24 instance reference that is used for input 1 27 Get V Alarm Input 2 SINT Measurement Alarm Range 1 24 instance reference that is used for input 2 28 Get V Alarm Input 3 SINT Measurement Alarm Range 1 24 instance reference that is used for input 3 Alarm Multiplier Group of 2 configuration attributes 32 Get V Alarm Multiplier BYTE Trigger Sourceand AM control options Control Enable Disable 33 Get V Alarm Multiplier ON DINT The time that the ms Time alarm threshold Range 0 65500 multiplier is applied after the control is toggled Speed Gating Group of 4 configuration attributes 40 Get V Speed Gating Control SINT Speed gating data Speed gating sources source selection with Enable Disable control 41 Get V Speed Gating SINT Selection of Speed range condit
73. Alert Danger and Transducer Fault are states that the Voted Alarm can actuate on see Voted Alarm page If Disarm is selected the relay is in Bypass mode If Module Fault is selected then the relay actuates only on the specified faults not just Module Fault Main Module Relay Module Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must actuate on a fault in the main module When Fail Safe Enable is checked for the selected Voted Alarm if Alarm Status to Activate On is set to Module Fault this control is checked and disabled Main Module Relay Tach Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must actuate on a tachometer fault This fault actuates if a tachometer fault is indicated on any enabled speed input see Speed page Main Module Relay Communication Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must actuate on an Ethernet network fault Main Module Relay Expansion Module Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must actuate on a fault reported by in any connected Expansion module Main Module Relay Expansion Bus Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must actuate on a fault of the Expansion Bus Main Module Relay Latch Enable Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must latch after having actuated on any of the selected fault conditions Latch contro
74. All enabled Measurement Alarms except the Measurement Alarms selected for Inputs 0 and 1 Select the Measurement Alarm to use in Instance 2 of the Voted Alarm logic Measurement Alarm Input 3 All enabled Measurement Alarms except the Measurement Alarms selected for Inputs 0 1 and 2 Select the Measurement Alarm to use in Instance 3 of the Voted Alarm logic Logic Select from 1 Out Of 1 1 Out Of 4 1 Out Of 2 2 Out OF 4 2 Out Of 2 3 Out OF 4 1 Out Of 3 4 Out Of 4 2 Out Of 3 1 Out Of 2 AND 1 Out Of 2 3 Out OF 3 2 Out Of 2 OR 2 Out Of 2 1 Out Of 2 AND 2 Out Of 2 2 Out Of 2 AND 1 Out Of 2 The Logic control uses the form A out of B In all cases the number B refers to the first B entries in the Measurement Alarm Input list For the Voted Alarm to evaluate to TRUE the requisite number of its inputs per this Logic definition must have a status of any of the types that are enabled per Alarm Status to Activate On Set Point Multiplier Trigger Control 0 1 180 Select Control 0 or 1 Select Control 0 to use Controller Output Control Tag SPM 0 to manage the Set Point Multiplier function Select Control 1 to use Controller Output Control Tag to manage the Set Point Multiplier function Note To use Logic Discrete Inputs the specific input must also be defined to apply to the SPM function See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 Rockwell Au
75. August 2015 283 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 74 Configuration Group 19 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x398 3 25 FFT Line Resolution SINT 0x398 3 26 FFT Window Function SINT 0x398 3 27 FFT Averages SINT 0x398 3 28 FFT Line value detection scaling SINT Pad SINT 0x398 4 16 Enable BYTE 0x398 4 17 Signal Source SINT 0x398 4 18 Number of averages SINT Pad SINT 0x398 4 19 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 0x398 4 20 Associated Tacho Source SINT 0x398 4 21 Waveform Record Length SINT 0x398 4 24 FFT Enable SINT 0x398 4 25 FFT Line Resolution SINT 0x398 4 26 FFT Window Function SINT 0x398 4 27 FFT Averages SINT 0x398 4 28 FFT Line value detection scaling SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 0 16 Synchronized data control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39A 1 16 Source Selection SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 1 17 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 0x39A 1 18 Associated Tacho Source SINT 0x39A 1 19 Waveform Record Length SINT Pad INT 0x39A 2 16 Source Selection SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 2 17 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 0x39A 2 18 Associated Tacho Source SINT 0x39A 2 19 Waveform Record Length SINT Pad INT 0x39A 3 16 Source Selection SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 3 17 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 0x39A 3 18 Associated Tacho Source SINT 0x39A 3 19 Wa
76. August 2015 229 Chapter9 Operate the Module Input Data Structure The input data structure is written immediately following the status data described above It consists of an array of 4 byte floating point numbers that represent the various measurements selected for input in module definition The parameters are some subset of those listed in Table 30 Table 52 Input Data Parameters Parameter Description 0 Ch0OverallO Overall values after integration and high pass filters 1 Ch10verallo 2 Ch20verallo 3 Ch30verall0 4 Ch0Overall1 z Chi0verall1 Optional Overall values from selected data source 6 Ch20verall1 7 Cch30verall1 8 ChoDCV Channel bias or gap values 9 Ch1DCV 10 Ch2DCV 11 Ch3DCV Ch0Order0Mag K IONS Tracking filter 0 magnitude values 14 Ch20rder0Mag 15 Ch30rder0Mag 16 ChOOrder0Phase Tracking filter 0 phase values 17 Ch10rder0Phase 18 Ch20rder0Phase 19 Ch30rder0Phase 20 Ch0Order1Mag a ChilOrderiMag Tracking filter 1 magnitude values 22 Ch20rder1Mag 23 Ch30rder1Mag 24 ChOOrder1Phase Tracking filter 1 phase values 25 Ch10rder1Phase 26 Ch20rder1Phase 27 Ch30rder1Phase 28 ChOOrder2Mag a ChOrdereMag Tracking filter 2 magnitude values 30 Ch20rder2Mag 31 Ch30rder2Mag 230 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015
77. Class Instance 0x4B Not implemented 0x4C X x Get Configuration The module calculated configuration CRC along with some additional data can be obtained using this Signature Object Specific service No instance or attribute is required Configuration Time Data and Calculated CRC relate only to Safety Configurations and Safety related parameters Configuration Counter is fully general Response Data Type Name Description UINT32 Configuration Time Milliseconds from previous midnight AOP supplied Updated and persistent only when valid UINT16 Configuration Date Days since 1 1 1972 AOP supplied Updated and persistent only when valid UINT32 Configuration Counter Number of successful configurations since last power on Not persistent 0 in Out of Box state UINT32 Calculated Safety CRC The last calculated CRC Updated and persistent only when valid 1 The Time Date CRC fields are only updated and persistent when the configuration i a Safety Configuration compliance mode indices 2 4 and the configuration is valid For example the module calculated CRC and the AOP supplied CRC match The additional data a non persistent Configuration Counter is updated by a successful configuration download or restore of configuration from Nonvolatile Memory irrespective of the compliance type A counter value of zero indicates tha the module is in Out of box State Configuration Group 1 Group 1 contains c
78. DC Measurement Type USINT 32 Rod Drop Trigger Source SINT 33 Rod Drop Trigger Angle INT 34 Rod Drop Measurement Range SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x391 4 35 Rod Drop Decay Time REAL 0x393 1 16 Tracking Filter Configuration BYTE Pad SINT 0x393 1 17 Order Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 Order Measurement Scaling SINT 19 Tracking Filter Mode SINT Pad INT 0x393 1 20 Tracking Filter Definition Tacho 0 REAL 21 Tracking Filter Definition Tacho 1 REAL 32 Tracking Filter 0 setup REAL 33 Tracking Filter 1 setup REAL 34 Tracking Filter 2 setup REAL 35 Tracking Filter 3 setup REAL 0x393 2 16 Tracking Filter Configuration BYTE Pad SINT 0x393 2 17 Order Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 Order Measurement Scaling SINT 19 Tracking Filter Mode SINT Pad INT 0x393 2 20 Tracking Filter Definition Tacho 0 REAL 21 Tracking Filter Definition Tacho 1 REAL 32 Tracking Filter 0 setup REAL 33 Tracking Filter 1 setup REAL 34 Tracking Filter 2 setup REAL 35 Tracking Filter 3 setup REAL 0x393 3 16 Tracking Filter Configuration BYTE Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 269 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 70 Configuration Group 4 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad SINT 0x393 3 17 Order Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 Order Measurement Scaling SINT 19 Tracking Filter Mode SINT P
79. Hanning window Usage Use it to separate close frequency components Number of Averages Select from Ba the number of averages for the gSE FFT or Time Waveform See Average TWF on page 246 1 When averaging the individual gSE FFT s are updated as quickly as possible How fast this occurs is dependent on 2 the overall processing demands on the module which is a function of the module configuration and to some 3 degree the circumstance of the moment This along with the fact that the waveforms are always captured e 6 without respect to an overlap requirement so always max overlap makes it impossible to define precisely how e 12 long in time it takes to acquire any specific number of samples that are used in the averaging 23 Averaging is Exponential This means that once the specified number of samples has been acquired that the gt 45 averaged sample result is available upon each subsequent update 89 178 138 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Bands Spike Energy is a measure of the intensity of energy that repetitive transient mechanical impacts generate These impacts typically occur as a result of surface flaws in rolling element bearings gear teeth or other devices where repeating metal to metal contact occurs by design But such contact can also occur as a consequence of abnormal conditions such as rotor rub or insufficient bearing lubricati
80. Implementation Service Name Code Instance Ox0E Get Attribute Single Description of Service Returns the contents of the specified attribute Get requests to certain attributes require data to be requested from the auxiliary module itself If that module is not present active on the bus an embedded server error is returned in response to the request The Module Control Object class code 0x39 provides module level controls which are implemented in one instance DSP NetX refer to the two onboard processors the digital signal processor and the NetX communication and condition monitoring auxiliary processor Table 232 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Module Control Class Instance Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision Auxiliary Modules A group of 2 configuration attributes 2 Get V Detected Auxiliary Modules BYTE Bit wise indication of Auxiliary modules detected auxiliary modules 16 Get V Configured Auxiliary BYTE Bit wise configuration of Auxiliary modules Modules expected auxiliary modules 18 Get NetX CPU Usage UINT Percentage CPU in use 0 to 10 000 0to 100 19 Get Module Mode BYTE Current Module Mode O start up 1 run 2 program mode Running Status 20 Get NV NetX Firmware Build SHORT STRING Build Date ASCII string for example length 0x0B 5
81. In the normal 20 kHz max case SRD settings are in the range 2 to 32 and are set appropriately for the channel application The default decimation is 1 In the gSE 40 kHz case The SRD will be fixed at 2 and internally the A D set is set at double mode that combination is equivalent to an SRD of 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 126 Sampling Control Category gSE Mode Description In gSE mode CIP Objects Appendix B e Use the HP filter setting as required typically 100 200 500 1000 2000 or 5000 Hz but not restricted to these values Use the LP filter setting to indicate the required FFT FMAX typically 25 100 200 300 or 1000 Hz but again not limited to these values Based on the preceding information the module automatically implements suitable decimation the configured decimation is ignored The settings for gSE results in the filters being unusually set HP gt LP this setting is normal for gSE measurements Aero derivative mode Dynamix AC Measurement Object application Table 127 Common Services Service Implementation Code Ox0E Get Attribute Single Instance Service Name Description of Service Note When an Aero derivative mode has been selected the roll off the LP and HP filters are automatically increased from the standard 24 dB to the 60 dB required for that Returns the contents of the specified attribute T
82. Low Danger Threshold REAL 27 High Danger Threshold REAL 32 Hysteresis SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x396 N 33 Delay Sustain Time Alert DINT 34 Delay Sustain Time Danger DINT 35 Alarm Multiplier REAL 40 Adaptive Monitoring Source INT Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 271 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 71 Configuration Groups 5 16 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x396 N 41 Range 1 upper control value REAL 42 Range 1 Alarm Multiplier REAL 43 Range 2 upper control value REAL 44 Range 2 Alarm Multiplier REAL 45 Range 3 upper control value REAL 46 Range 3 Alarm Multiplier REAL 47 Range 4 upper control value REAL 48 Range 4 Alarm Multiplier REAL 49 Range 5 upper control value REAL 50 Range 5 Alarm Multiplier REAL 64 Profile mode Reference for Low Alert Threshold SINT 65 Profile mode Reference for High Alert Threshold SINT 66 Profile mode Reference for Low Danger Threshold SINT 67 Profile mode Reference for High Danger Threshold SINT 0x396 N 1 16 Alarm Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x396 N 1 17 Alarm Measurement Identifier INT 19 Alarm Form SINT 20 Alarm Type SINT 21 Alarm Processing Mode SINT Pad SINT 0x396 N 1 24 Low Alert Threshold REAL 25 High Alert Threshold REAL 26 Low Danger Thresh
83. P August 2015 173 Chapter7 Configure Alarms Table 32 Alarms Parameter Values Help Enable Alarm Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check to enable the alarm Alarm Name Characters Enter a name of up to 32 characters There are no rules for the names content or uniqueness However the name is used when selecting Measurement Alarms as input to other functions such as Voted Alarm definition so unique names are recommended Additionally the name e Must start with a letter or underscore _ e Must consist of letters numbers or underscores e Cannot contain two contiguous underscore characters e Cannot end in an underscore Measurement Available selections are dependent on the Channel Type Select the measurement to be evaluated by the selected Measurement Alarm see Define Module Functionality page in Module Definition and the Channel Measurement Type See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 for the channel that is associated with each measurement See the measurements table See Table 33 on page 176 to view all available settings Condition Select from Select the desired condition e Greater Than e Less Than Inside Range e Outside Range Transducer Select from This selection specifies the behavior of the Measurement Alarm if a transducer fault occurs State Transducer Fault Considered Behavior e Transducer Fault Monitored Option Behavior Transducer Fault Not Considered Tr
84. Static Rod Drop Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 163 Chapter5 Configure Analog Outputs The Dynamix 1444 Series 1444 DYN04 01RA dynamic measurement module can output analog representations of measured data in the 4 20 mA format The functionality is suitable for driving strip chart recorders output to analog meters or to replace previous communication solutions that can have been available in legacy systems While 4 20 mA outputs are available they are not the preferred medium for data communication from the Dynamix system This page is presented only when an Analog Output Expansion Module 1444 AOFX00 04RB is present See Expansion Device Definition Dialog on page 90 When available one per measurement module this page is used to configure the outputs 164 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Relay Expansion Module Relay Page Chapter 7 Configure Relays Topic Page Relay Expansion Module 165 Relay Page 165 The Dynamix 1444 series relay expansion module is a four relay module that serves to functionally add relays to its host 1444 DYN04 01RA dynamic measurement module The 1444 RELX00 04RB module is designed for use with a dynamic measurement module that acts as its host serves its powers and manages the relay module configuration The relay expansion module acts as an extension of its host module So 1444 RELX00 04RB module operation
85. Tachometer Signal Conditioner Expansion Module and 1444 TB B Terminal Base Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name TXP 0 SIGO RET 0 TXP 1 SIG1 RET 1 Application Tach 0 Input Tach 1 Input S v Ey T z E S 5 B Ss Z T a a o pae y a 5 ra _ _ n2 pee po Oo wv uv v wv uv wv s 5 5 5 5 5 5 ee s s s s s g 15 2 2 2 2 2 2 ESE amp amp E E amp Terminal 7 8 9 10 11 12 Name SH SH NOT USED SH SH Application Shield Shield 2 2 2 2 c S S 5 g z 2 5 S j 5 z e z s S a S 7 S jE E 3 2 2 5 2 x TSCX Module Transducers The TSCX supports four types of speed sensor inputs e Eddy Current Probe e NPN PNP Proximity Switch e Self Generating magnetic Sensors e TTL Signal Input Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Proximity Probes The connected channel of the Tachometer Signal Conditioner must be configured with e Transducer Type Eddy Current Probe System and e Transducer Power 24V DC Wire the eddy current probe Figure 24 Channel 0 wiring for an eddy current probe sensor Floating Common wet ignal a gt _ Shield E __ 24VDC_ gt Recommended shield pin connection but can be landed to any available shield connection Figure 25 Channel 1 wiring for an eddy current probe sensor
86. The same bit allocations are used as in Module Control Attributes 2 and 16 Bytes 9 and 13 are unused Bytes 10 11 represent the previous status bytes 14 15 the new status Internal Power supply status e The expected OK state returned values are 255 195 AUX Processor status other include Object service bit 1 value 2 set in the case of a network fault example disconnected bit 2 value 4 set in the case of a network address conflict being detected Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 325 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 115 System Event Types Name Bytes 8 15 Application OPWN e Byte 10 is an index indicating the action Alarm Buffer Trigger Data Manager Object Alarm Buffer Reset Data Manager Object Reset Transient Data Buffer Zero DC measurement Zero Dual Channel measurement In the case of 3 4 and 5 where there are multiple measurements or buffers byte 11 indicates the instance number DSP reported status includes bit 7 value 128 set when the DSP is running from a configuration from its own Nonvolatile Memory bit 10 value 4 set when the DSP has received a different configuration from the NetX Relay Status Bits 0 to 12 represent the maximum possible system relay count of 13 a bit set to 1 indicated relay energized Calibration Status The high byte of the Channel TX Speed DWORD Four bits used a bit
87. When Inhibit is set all relays are held in their non alarm state 1 Setpoint Multiplier 0 Enable When set forces TRUE any defined Control 0 1 attribute of configured Voted Alarms 2 Setpoint Multiplier 1 Enable 3 Speed 0 0K When speed is passed on the output two speed values following this these controls allow definition of the status of the speed values If set 1 the speed status is considered in fault 4 Speed 1 0K 5 Control 0 When set activates 1 0 control per If 1 0 Gate Control is specified then the gate condition is satisfied with the control is set 6 Control 1 5 j T A If 1 0 Logic Control is specified then the voted alarm actuates when the control is set 7 Alarm Reset Resets all latched alarms where the alarm condition is no longer present 8 Alarm Buffer Trigger When set the Alarm Buffer triggers This copies the current Trend Buffer and high resolution data buffer If any post trigger data is specified then data acquisition continues until the buffer is filled 9 Alarm Buffer Reset Resets the alarm buffer if it is latched When the buffer is reset regardless if it is latched any existing content is lost 10 Transient Buffer 0 Reset Reset a latched buffer NN Transient Buffer 1 Reset When a buffer is reset regardless if it is latched any existing content is lost 12 Transient Buffer 2 Reset 13 Transient Buffer 3 Reset 14 Reserved 15 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2
88. a control parameter Multipliers Output Tag Limits The limits are passed to the module in the Controller Output assembly No multiplication is provided Adaptive N A When the Limit Source is Static Limits w Adaptive Multipliers click this to access the Adaptive Limits Multipliers editor Adaptive Multipliers are uniquely defined for each Measurement Alarm Danger High Any Enter a value to specify the limit that when the measurement is above below unsafe direction defines Limit a Danger Alarm condition Danger low Limit Alert High Any Enter a value to specify the limit that when the measurement is above below unsafe direction defines Limit an Alert Alarm condition Alert Low Limit Danger High Select from Select the controller output tag for the alarm limit that is referenced OutputTag O AlarmLimit 0 Select the controller output tag for the alarm limit that is referenced Limit e O AlarmLimit 1 Alert High O AlarmLimit 15 Output Tag Limit Alert Low Output Tag Limit Danger Low Output Tag Limit Limit gt 0 1000 000 For Static Limits normal mode enter the multiplier that is applied when the Set Point Multiplier Multiplier function is set The Limit Multiplier field does not display if you select Static Limits Without Adaptive Multipliers from the Apply Limits From pull down menu Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 175 Chapter7 Configure Alarms T
89. applications 0x1502 37 in s 0x1504 10 g 0x0B00 8 mm s 0x0B01 11 mg 0x0A00 10 gSE Spike energy measurement application 0x1703 degree Phase angle measurement orders S max 0x1C00 20 A Current measurement application types 0x1C02 21 mA Ox1FOF RPM Available only when the application uses one or more of the two available tacho inputs 0x0F01 RPM min 0x2200 4 m Displacement measurement all forms including vibration and position assessments 0x2203 5 mm 0x2204 6 micron 0x2207 2 in 0x0800 3 mil 0x2B00 13 m s Vibration velocity measurement applications 0x2B07 7 in s 0x0900 9 mm s Voltage measurement application types and sensor DC bias measurement for most other ner 7 V application types 0x2D01 1 mV Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 449 AppendixB CIP Objects The left most two characters of the units ID shown in the table indicate the class from which that unit of measurement originates The relevant CIP Standard and Custom EU Classes are listed in Table Table 279 Standard CIP Engineering Unit Classes Value Name 0x12 Temperature 0x13 Pressure 0x15 Acceleration 0x17 Angle 0x1C Current Ox1F Frequency 0x22 Length 0x2B Velocity 0x2D Voltage Table 280 Custom CIP Engineering Unit Classes Value Name 0x08 Length 0x09 Velocity Ox0A Bearing Defect Units Ox0B Acceleration Ox0C Pressure OxOF Other
90. area ATTENTION e In a hazardous area the module must be powered down before removal e Always consider the consequences for the system and the monitored machine before powering down or removing any module from service The Dynamix modules must be placed in a protective metal enclosure with a minimum recommended protection class of IP54 Multiple modules can be placed in one housing providing proper consideration has been given to the following e System design and planning e Mounting e Module and connection accessibility e Wiring cabling and routing e System operating temperature and reliability Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC Precautions While the module has been thoroughly tested for EMC compliance performance in real world situations depends on the care that is taken during system design and installation Follow the preferred practices listed Table 4 EMC Precautions Verify metal parts are well grounded Connect all inactive metal parts like cabinet walls and doors to ground Verify that the entire surface area is grounded and the connection to ground is low impedance Applies to the enclosure and any additional cable junction boxes Avoid using aluminum parts whenever possible for grounding Aluminum oxidizes easily which causes its resistance to vary Route cables with care Divide the wiring into categories power supply sensors and control signals Use sufficient separatio
91. assembly bits 1 and 2 or either of the physical discrete inputs to the module Pt0 Pt1 that can be assigned to this function See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 The selection lets either controller output tag SPM 0 Pt0 or controller output tag SPM 1 Pt1 be used A second attribute delay time is also provided for SPM control This value is used to define how long the SPM function remains active AFTER the SPM control has changed state The timer starts or restarts each time the output assembly control bit SetPointMultiplierOEn SetPointMultiplierOEn is set or cleared or ifusing the digital inputs each time Pt 0 Pt 1 is closed or opened This behavior is intended to force continued positive assertion of the function which precludes users inadvertently leaving the SPM function enabled As an alternative to the timer the module provides speed based multiplication see Adaptive Multipliers under Measurement Alarms Gating Gating is used to specify when a voted alarm is applied While the gate condition is TRUE the Voted Alarm is evaluated If the gate condition is FALSE the voted alarm is not evaluated if the voted alarm is TRUE when the gate condition becomes FALSE then the voted alarm transitions to FALSE unless latched See Latching on page 185 And unless latched any relays that are assigned to the voted alarm also transition Because satisfying any defined gate condition is a prerequisite to the voted
92. been applied 17 ucSpeedByte0 BYTE RPM value of the referenced speed source for the FFT data Actual RPM Value 100 Value provided is a 24 bit 3 byte integer First least significant byte bits 0 7 18 ucSpeedByte1 BYTE Second byte bits 8 15 19 ucSpeedByte2 BYTE Last byte bits 16 23 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 LineArray REAL The array of FFT line amplitude data 318 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Event Log Object Table 105 Waveform eTWF_TDx CIP Objects Appendix B Byte Offset Structure Member Data Description within Type Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 SamplePeriod nSecs REAL Time period between samples or speed and number of samples per revolution 12 Identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 RelativeTime UDINT A 24 bit micro second counter value for finely aligning data 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 SampleArray REAL The array of waveform data values samples Table 106 Tacho eTACHO_ TDx ByteOffset Structure Member Data Type Description within Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 Reserved REAL 12 Reserved DWORD 16 Reserved UDINT 20 ByteCount UDINT The si
93. by the relay expansion module itself Each expansion module performs start up tests of memory and function similar to the main module The relay expansion module performs the relay drive test on its relays when commanded by the main module Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 169 Chapter 6 170 Configure Relays Expansion Bus Fault A timeout function is implemented that requires that a Heartbeat from each expansion module is provided to help ensure that each module is communicating and that the bus is functioning A bus fault is reported if communication between the expansion module and its host main module fails the heartbeat period times out Latching Configuration of each relay of the main and expansion relay module also includes a Latch Enable control This control differs from the Latch Enable of the Voted Alarm See Voted Alarms Page on page 179 in that this Latch definition is associated only with relay behavior related to the Fault detection Resetting a latched relay re mains the same as for the standard alarm reset function Relay Drive Testing The module routinely performs a test of the drive circuit on all expansion module relays that are defined as fail safe See Voted Alarms Page on page 179 when the module compliance requirement See Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 is set to any of e API and SIL2 Low Demand Advise Only e API and SIL2 Low Demand Trip Ac
94. channel function Users must define the module at this level once during initial installation as the entries on this page are used throughout the configuration to enable disable or qualify further configuration attributes selections and options IMPORTANT __ If parameters are changed in module definition any dependent module configuration parameters are reset to default values 88 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Module Definition Versus Module Configuration In the Logix environment there are two steps to configure a new device e Defining the instance of the specific connected device e Configuring the device Module Definition Module definition is performed by using the various dialogs that are accessed through the General Page Change button At minimum the attributes that are defined in module definition include any that affect the structure of the configuration input or output assemblies because the Add on Profile AOP constructs these assemblies when the module definition is applied The 1444 series controller input assembly can be as simple as one measurement from each of four DC channels or as sophisticated as over 100 values that are measured from dynamic signals In either case in module definition specific measures must be selected to include in the input assembly To simplify the selection and to minimize errors further along in
95. code is returned This can be used as a polling method ifa timer is not used When the data is ready the data portion of the message contains the data the other fields are also populated as defined and the status code indicates success The instance and attribute can be set to 1 but they are ignored Table 206 0x4C Advanced CM Data Record Request Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 Buffer Select INT Specify the buffer to retrieve the data from eFFT 2 eT WF 3 or eTACHO 4 The BufferSelect does not change during a session 2 RequestedCount INT Set RequestedCount 1 The Requested Count does not change during a session 4 SessionInstance USINT Functionality replaced by Advanced Session Instance 5 ChannelSelect BYTE 4 bits indicating the source channel The ChannelSelect does not change during a session 6 SpecialRequest BYTE Set SR_ mAG_PHASE Bit 0 to request phase see PHASE DATA page 296 and magnitude data from an FFT buffer otherwise just magnitude data is returned Bits 1 and 2 are not used Set SR_FILTER Bit 3 to request that if samples are decimated or synchronously resampled then only 50 of the configured FFT lines are to be returned For further information see FFT Data Filter SR_FILTER under Sampling Control in the Channel Setup Object 7 Pad BYTE Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary 8 PacketCountDown DWORD The PacketCountDown is initially s
96. controller data bytes 10 11 are the new controller data 20 Object service Monitoring of key object services Byte 10 is an index indicating the action byte 11 is used to distinguish between instances 21 DSP reported status Changes in the DSP status DWORD Bytes 8 11 are previous DSP Status DWORD Bytes 12 15 are new DSP Status DWORD 22 Main transducer status Changes in the Channel Transducer Bytes 8 9 are previous TX status status WORD bits 0 15 bytes 10 11 are the new TX status bits 0 15 23 Speed tacho status Changes in the Speed tacho status Byte Byte 8 is previous state and 10 the current 24 Relay states Relay state change Bytes 8 9 are previous relay status bits 0 15 bytes 10 11 are the new relay status bits 0 15 25 AUX Module Exception A change in Auxiliary module exception Bytes 8 9 are previous codes exception data bytes 10 11 are the new exception data 26 Calibration status A change in module channel Byte 8 is previous state and 10 calibration status the current 27 DSP startup response Whether the DSP start up was judged Byte 3 indicates the startup normal or not state 0 not responding 1 normal 2 boot loader mode detected Notes Expansion Module Detection e The same bit allocations are used as in Module Control Attributes 2 and 16 Here bit set indicates that module is expected but missing Expansion Module Status Bytes 8 and 12 both indicate the particular module reporting the change
97. defines configuration and provides access to Order based measurement data One instance is linked to each available measurement channel with capability to define up to four tracking filters Table 142 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Tracking Filter Class Instance 1 Instance 1 for channel 0 2 Instance 2 for channel 1 3 Instance 3 for channel 2 4 Instance 4 for channel 3 Table 143 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Type Attribute 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision Table 144 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Type Attribute 1 Get V magnitude 0 REAL magnitude reading for 0 output when not first defined order configured or no speed 2 Get V Phase 0 REAL Phase reading 0 output when not 0 359 deg for first configured or no speed defined order 3 Get V magnitude 1 REAL magnitude reading for 0 output when not second defined order configured or no speed 4 Get V Phase 1 REAL Phase reading 0 output when not 0 359 deg for configured or no speed second defined order 5 Get V magnitude 2 REAL magnitude reading for 0 output when not third defined order configured or no speed 6 Get V Phase 2 REAL Phase reading 0 output when not 0 359 deg for third configured or no speed
98. different 210 When a sensor fails the external circuit can go to an open condition It can also be driven towards zero or the provided source power voltage typically 24V depending on the nature of the fault For an open condition the circuit design forces the bias to move rapidly to a fault state How quickly the bias level transitions to its fault state is dependent on the specified failure mode the bias level at the time of the fault and the bias limits entered It is not possible to assure that for every possible fault mode limit selection and signal conditioning solution that the bias transitions past its fault limits within a known time Consequently it is recommended that alarms be defined with not less than 1 second delay This delay assures that in the event of a transducer fault that the fault is detected before the alarm is enunciated Current Based Fault Detection For negatively powered eddy current probes only the Dynamix 1444 Series includes dedicated hardware to monitor the current being provided to the probe driver and the bias level returned This feature provides fast detection of supply current that drops below 2 mA or a positive bias voltage being detected Either or both detections trigger a wire off state to be declared which is normally then an input to the TX OK state Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 Clearing a Fault When monitoring
99. dip switch setting on the Expansion Relay terminal base is used to define the Expansion Relay module offset address Given that up to three Relay modules can be fitted per main module the following configurations can be defined These settings from left to right are on the bottom e 00 Not allowed e 01 Relay Module 1 e 10 Relay Module 2 e 11 Relay Module 3 IMPORTANT Abase switch address setting of 00 is illegal for a relay module and causes the relay module to display a critical error solid red Module Status Indicator Configure the 4 20 mA Terminal Base The two pole dip switch setting on the Expansion 4 20 mA terminal base is used to define the Expansion bus address for the single 4 20 mA module that can be fitted per main module These settings from left to right are on the bottom e 00 4 20 mA Analog Expansion Module e 01 11 Not used Settings for the AOFX module include e The AOFX module applies a fixed internal address that requires the terminal base switch to be set to 00 e A DYN module can only host one AOFX module 48 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Module Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Configure the Tacho Signal Conditioning Terminal Base The two pole dip switch setting on the Expansion TSC terminal base is used to define the Expansion bus address for the single TSC module that can be fitted per main module The
100. do not reflect the current auxiliary module status If communication with an expansion module is lost then the main module sets a status bit to indicate an expansion bus fault If communication are restored then normally the fault indication clears However if a configuration activity has failed then the fault indication remains set until a successful reconfiguration is completed Normally this reconfiguration is achieved by downloading the configuration from the controller to the host main module Bit Description 8 Reserved for reverse rotation detected 9 Reserved for zero speed detected 10 Speed 0 is estimated 11 Speed 1 is estimated 12 25V5 supply fail 13 25V5 supply fail 14 Tacho 0 sensor fail 15 Tacho 1 sensor fail 354 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Tacho Input Types CIP Objects Appendix B Following sensor types are supported for connection to Tacho Signal Conditioning expansion module Value Description 0 OFF 1 TTL Signal Input 2 NPN Proximity Switch 3 PNP Proximity Switch 4 Eddy Current Probe System 5 Self generating magnetic Probe TX Power Setup Following transducer power supply options apply per transducer output Value Description 0 OFF 1 CV 24V 25 mA voltage regulated output 2 CV 24V 25 mA voltage regulated output Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 35
101. down transient concludes when the referenced speed falls below the low speed threshold If during the coast down the speed crosses above the high threshold then the transient is suspended so sampling stops If sampling stops due to a suspended start up or coastdown then the data from the event is retained anyway if at least 20 of the discrete data records have been collected If less than 20 of the data was collected then the event data is discarded Latching If latching is enabled then a buffer latches once it has been filled so has no remaining empty records A latched buffer is not available for update until it is reset In the event a transient event occurs when no buffers are available the data manager functions as if a buffer were available triggering samples and monitoring status but no data is stored A transient buffer latch is reset by any of the following e Controller Output The TransientBufferxReset bit bits 10 13 of the controller output assembly s control tag where x is the number of the buffer 0 3 e Dynamix transient data manager object service e Uploading the transient Buffer The data manager automatically resets a buffer after it has been uploaded to a host Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 195 Chapter8 Trend and Transient Capture Notes 196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9
102. e m the channel sensitivity See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 in mV EU e x the measured value in Volts e b the calibration offset in the selected engineering units IMPORTANT Atime constant can also be applied to DC measurements to reduce the effect of noise or responsiveness to rapid changes in signal Rod Drop Used in reciprocating compressors Rod Drop is a measure of the position of the piston rod relative to the proximity probe mounting location Rod Drop provides an indirect measurement of wear of the piston rider band Because the distance between the probe and the piston rod varies over the length of the rods stroke the measurement must be triggered such that it is performed consistently at the same point in the stroke To accommodate this feature when configuring a Rod Drop measurement the tachometer trigger signal is used to trigger when the measurements are taken on each piston rod channel The relationship between the position of each reciprocating piston rod and the rotating trigger position tachometer trigger is a function of the specific mechanical design of the machine Therefore before defining the Rod Drop measurements determine for each piston e What the mechanical relationship is between the tachometer trigger point and the position of the rod in its stroke e Where to take the measurement along the piston rod The Rod Drop measurement is the average of the samples that are taken betw
103. e relating to the design and construction of such equipment given in Annex II to Directive 94 9 EC See the EC Declaration of Conformity at http www rockwellautomation com products certification for details e The type of protection is Ex nA IIC T4 Gc according to EN 60079 15 Comply to Standards EN 60079 0 2012 A11 2013 EN 60079 15 2010 reference certificate number DEMKO14ATEX1365X e Are intended for use in areas in which explosive atmospheres caused by gases vapors mists or air are unlikely to occur or are likely to occur only infrequently and for short periods Such locations correspond to Zone 2 classification according to ATEX directive 1999 92 EC The following applies to products with IECEx certification Such modules e Are intended for use in areas in which explosive atmospheres caused by gases vapors mists or air are unlikely to occur or are likely to occur only infrequently and for short periods Such locations correspond to Zone 2 classification to IEC 60079 0 e The type of protection is Ex nA IIC T4 Gc according to IEC 60079 15 Such modules comply to Standards IEC 60079 0 2011 IEC 60079 15 2010 reference IECEx certificate number IECEXUL14 0082X WARNING Special Conditions for Safe Use rN e This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation e This equipment shall be mounted in an ATEX IECEX Zone 2 certified enclosure with a minimum ingress protection rating of at least IP54 as defined
104. for which measurement channels can be enabled in either single or parallel mode This is as long as the DSP can process each configuration option Main setup for multiplexing operation using single configuration or multi parameter mode is under high level configuration control This determines the number of subchannels and the allocation of channels to time slots Settling and Data Acquisition times for the time slots are automatically set at minimum acceptable values that take account of signal processing requirements Table 212 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 MUX Class Instance 1 Instances 1 for subchannel A MUX configuration Table 213 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Type Attribute 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get V MUX Configured BOOL Whether this configuration uses MUX 9 Get V Number of Enabled USINT Enabled subchannels 1 Subchannels instances 16 Get V Overall Cycle Time REAL Time that is taken to complete a MUX cycle Table 214 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name DataType Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Attribute Read Time Slot Configuration Group of 9 configuration attributes 1 Get V Time Slot Channel WORD Bit wise channel All 16 bits Enables enables for time slots used 13 2 Get V Time Slot 0 D
105. gt 2 lt and lt comparison checks between a measured value such as Channel 1 Overall and a set of Danger and Alert level limits 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure Alarms Chapter 7 Alarm Measurement Definition Each Measurement Alarm can be uniquely defined to compare any of the measured values in the module The measurement is not necessary in the controller input assembly See Select Input Data for Input Tag on page 98 However the module must be configured to perform the measurement before it can be selected as input to a Measurement Alarm Alarm Limit Definition Each measurement alarm can be uniquely defined to apply limits that are either entered as static values that are part of the measurement alarm definition or are passed to the module as I O in the controller output table Static Alarm Limits Limits for high and low alert and danger levels can be entered When used the module compares the measured value with the limits each time the measurement is updated The limits can also be multiplied either by a set limit multiplier or by any of up to 5 Adaptive Multipliers Limit Multiplier Typically an alarm limit multiplier is used for alarms that are applied to machines that operate above their first critical natural frequency During startup these machines experience vibration excursions that can exceed the normal alarm limits as the speed of the machine tr
106. implemented by the use of a simple ribbon cable that spans one module to the next The packaging for each terminal base includes a cable that is designed to the exact length necessary to connect two adjacent modules The extended interconnect cables provide a means to extend the local bus between terminal bases on different DIN rails or in different areas of a cabinet Extended interconnect cables are rated to 300V and from 40 105 C 40 221 F The accessory list also includes a package of four standard length interconnect cables catalog number 1444 LBIC 04 These cables can be used to replace the cable included with each terminal base Ethernet Cables The 1444 products are designed to operate in harsh industrial environments and possibly close to electrically noisy or high voltage devices and wiring You must consider the environment over the entire run of the cable when determining an appropriate cable for the application Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 19 Chapter 1 20 About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module Channel Class and Category Dynamix 1444 Series monitors can be used with shielded or un shielded Ethernet media Shielded cable or entirely enclosing the cable within a shielded environment such as an electrical enclosure or metal conduit must be considered for cables longer than 3 m 9 8 ft to help ensure EMC compliance See Rockwell Automation documen
107. included in the Output Tag The module output assembly consists of one Control value and two optional arrays of floats two speed values and 16 alarm limit values The optional items are what are defined on this page Figure 36 Module Definition Select Data for Output Module Definition x See Sle 1444 DYNO401RA Chorei Data Configuration Options 1444 Expandion Module Comments Check this to include two speed members in the output tag Speed values written to the output tag can be used to manage FFT Bands Alarm Gating and other speed related functions in the module Sometimes a machine does not have a speed sensor tachometer available for the module to consume directly But often the controller knows the speed from a drive or other system device While the module requires a trigger type signal for some speed functions such as Order Tracking it needs only an RPM value for others such as Alarm Gating Alarms Checked 1 Unchecked 0 100 Check this to include 16 alarm members in the output tag Alarm limit values written to the output tag can be used as Alert or Danger limit levels in one or more Measurement Alarms For some applications static alarm values are insufficient because the behavior of the measured value changes normally as a function of the process For example the profile of vibration through the cycle of cutting by a machine tool follows a unique but repeatable pat
108. inhibited RELX 0 1 2 3 1 Tl 1 3 4 OFF 4 inhibited 0 1 RELX 1 2 2 3 i o Expansion modules not installed 1 RELX 2 3 2 3 Once voted alarm status records are allocated to any physical relays any remaining voted alarm status records are assigned to any voted alarms that were not already assigned having been associated with a physical relay This allocation is done simply by assigning un referenced enabled voted alarms in order to the next available voted alarm status record For example if the above configuration also enabled voted alarms 7 11 to use as virtual alarms then the voted alarm status record allocation would be Physical Device Configuration Voted Alarm Status Record Device Address Relay Relay Referenced Number Referenced Number Number Voted Alarm Voted Alarm Main 0 0 12 oO 12 0 0 1 0 RELXO 1 1 2 OFF 2 inhibited 2 3 1 3 1 3 4 OFF 4 inhibited 5 z 6 8 7 9 Expansion modules not installed 8 10 9 11 10 11 unused 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 For a default configuration where no expansion relay modules are installed and the main module relay is not used the following assignments would apply if the first four voted alarms are enabled It is possible for an enabled voted alarm that is not referenced by a physical relay to not be reference
109. is dependent on the availability of its host However the relay module can actuate relays independently of its host if communication to the host fail or are lost Relays generally mimic the output logic of a referenced voted alarm Relays can also be configured to act independently of the voted alarm on module expansion module communication or tachometer fault status Main Module Alarm Status to Activate On Latch Enable Communications Fault Expansion Module Fault Expansion Bus Fault Alarm Status to Activate On Expansion Bus Fault Configuration options for expansion relay module relays are shown only for connected expansion relay modules so either 4 8 or 12 expansion relay module relays can be configured Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 165 Chapter6 Configure Relays Table 31 Relays Parameter Main Module Relay Enable Values Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Help Check to enable the relay Main Module Relay Voted Alarm Number Blank or 0 12 presented in a list of enabled Voted Alarms This is the Voted Alarm that is associated with the main module relay If blank then at least one fault must be selected to act on Main Module Relay Alarm Status to Activate On Select from e Alert e Danger e Xdcr Fault e Disarm e Module Fault
110. is precisely centered between bins and there were no other signals present then the magnitude of each bin is precisely 2 that of the actual signal When viewing the FFT this presents two adjacent bins with equal and comparatively small peak amplitudes rather than one bin with 2x that amplitude which is what the signals amplitude actually is Note as well that as the frequency of the signal moves across a bin the proportion of its energy that bleeds into adjacent bins changes So if using a Rectangular Window a signal with a constant amplitude were to move 50 60 Hz lets say 10 bins then a Waterfall display shows the bins growing as the signal enters the bin to a maximum that is equal to the actual signal amplitude when the signal is centered in the bin and then falling to zero as the signal moves above the bin FFT Windows are used to smooth this effect such that the amplitude of the signal as represented by the amplitude of the bin that it is in is better represented But there are trade offs as these techniques all tend to make it more difficult to ascertain the specific frequency of a signal which bin is it So when selecting an FFT Window the key is to understand the intent Is it more important to know the exact amplitude of the signals that the FFT measures or is it more important to know the exact frequencies of the signals within the FFT Available FFT Windows Rectangular Description No window is applied Other
111. is used to assign alarming behavior to a selected measurement The source measurement can be selected from any one of the measurements that the module makes available The different instances are used to include various measurements in the alarm scheme Alternatively multiple instances can refer to the same measurement where multiple behaviors are required differing thresholds as an example Once the measurement alarm instances have been defined they are available to use in the Voted Alarm Object Then logical combinations of up to four measurement alarms can be defined The alarm type the measurement alarm behavior pertaining to transducer status TX OK determines how TX OK state is integrated into the voting logic Considering then just the individual measurement alarm contribution to the voted alarm or the simplest voted alarm logic 1001 e TX OK Considered Alarm IF Measurement in alarm AND TX OK e TX OK Monitored Alarm IF Measurement in alarm OR TX Fail e TX OK Not Considered Alarm IF Measurement in alarm It is the enabled outputs of the Voted Alarm Object that provide the actual alarms that can be assigned to relay outputs Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 369 AppendixB CIP Objects Dynamix Voted Alarm Object This voted complex alarm object defines the configuration of multiple input voted measurement alarms the resulting alarm behavior and provides access to
112. main Chd 3Band0 7 Do main Dynamix FFT Band Object Source of band frequency limits Speed Reference Cho 3Band0 7 SpeedRef Dynamix FFT Band Object Tacho source for band limits DC Page ormal Thrust and Proportional Cho 3DC Units Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer DC Units Voltage Measurement Units ormal Thrust and Proportional Chd 3DCTimeConstant Dynamix DC Measurement Object DC Measurement TC Voltage Time Constant Normal Thrust and Proportional cho 3DC Offset Dynamix DC Measurement Object DC Measurement Offset Voltage Calibration Offset Normal Thrust and Proportional cho 3DC SenseControl Dynamix DC Measurement Object DC Measurement Sense Control Voltage Sense Control Rod Drop Tachometer Cho 3DC RodDropTriggerSource Dynamix DC Measurement Object Rod Drop Trigger Source Rod Drop Target Angle cho 3DC RodDroplargetAngle Dynamix DC Measurement Object Rod Drop Trigger Angle Rod Drop Angular Range Chd 3DC RodDropAngularRange Dynamix DC Measurement Object Rod Drop Measurement Range Rod Drop Decay Time cho 3DC RodDropDecayTime Dynamix DC Measurement Object Rod Drop Decay Time Differential Expansion Ramp Angle ChO_1 SensorAAngle when Channel 0 Dynamix Dual Measurement Object Sensor A Ramp Angle Ch0_1 SensorBAngle when Channel 1 Dynamix Dual Measurement Object Sensor B Ramp Angle Ch2_3 SensorAAngle when Channel 2 Ch2_3 SensorBAngle when Channel 3 Dynamix Dua
113. not allowed including when one or more expansion modules are between them Connects the right sides of two main modules Relay Contact Protection Measures to limit contact wear and arcing across the contacts of a mechanical relay are highly dependent on the following e The current and voltage being switched and whether AC or DC e The load type resistive or inductive e System factors such as wiring Due to this application dependency it is not possible to integrate contact protection circuitry within the Dynamix hardware It remains the system designer s installer s responsibility to take appropriate external measures to mitigate these risks that are based on the reliability and functional safety requirements that can apply Commercial surge suppressors often DIN rail mounting can be based on RC MOV or Diode protection methods In general it is recommended to provide protection equipment close to its originating source Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Installation of the Dynamix 1444 Series system is based on one or more main modules and associated Expansion modules The mounting arrangement from left to right can be summarized as follows Installation Overview e Main module Expansion modules e Main module Expansion modules Figure 4 Main Terminal Base Overview Upper base connector
114. ofGEEEG o E Hescsrak e ll MEERAER TEMEN at p y fi i 25mm 25mm lin Tin in 158mm 6 22 in 50 mm Height 125 mm 4 92 in 2in The 50 mm 2 in clearance above and below the modules in combination with 45 angled pluggable connections provides for e Use of tooling to make remove electrical connections e Visible wire identification e Sufficient physical space to insert remove pluggable connections e Optimized air volume per module in relation to thermal performance 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Wiring Requirements A Chapter 1 WARNING All wiring must comply with applicable electrical installation requirements for example N E C article 501 4 b All modules whether main or Expansion have four removable connectors where the field wiring is made They come in a choice of spring cage or screw connection Both types benefit from the following e Screwdriver axis parallel to conductor axis e Positive connector retention captive screws e Test connections for 1 2 mm 0 047 in diameter test pins or 1 mm 0 039 in test plugs The DYN module connectors are 16 way and the Expansion module connectors are 6 way Each is keyed appropriate to location and module type Manufacturer technical data for these connectors is as follows Attribute Tightening torque mon max screw type onl
115. retain the value in millivolts For example a 2 4 Volt trigger level is a 2400 millivolt tag value Speed Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 When enabled checked the tachometer signals a fault when the measured speed is outside the specified Fault High Fault Low limits Speed High Limit 0 0 lt Speed High Limit Enter the high speed limit The value must be greater than the Speed Low Limit When enabled checked the tachometer signals a fault when the measured speed is outside the specified Speed High Speed Low limits Speed Low Limit 0 0 lt Speed Low Limit Enter the low speed limit The value must be lower than the Speed High Limit When enabled checked the tachometer signals a fault when the measured speed is outside the specified Speed High Speed Low limits Tach Expansion Module Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 When enabled checked the tachometer signals a fault when the tachometer expansion module is in fault Note If a module fault is detected if possible the TSC module continues to provide a signal to its various tacho outputs as for example a communication link timeout which does not preclude the function of the module Setting the Tach Expansion Module Fault communicates these detected module faults as a tacho sensor fault This page is not included in the AOP when no Tachometer Expansion Module is present See Tachometer Expansion Module on page 157 Roc
116. size of one event log record 16 bytes 8 PacketCountDown DWORD The host copies the PacketCountDown returned here into each subsequent Record Request When the PacketCountDown reaches 0 the session is complete and the final value in CompletedRecords is all that is transferred 12 Status DINT Any of the following can be returned e eUnrecognizedSession 1 e emaxSessionsReached 2 e ePacketCountOutOfSequence 3 e elnvalidBufferSelect 4 e eNoDataAvailable 5 e eGeneralError 6 For all successful requests eSUCCESS 0 is returned any other value ends the session 16 Data Array Each record is an array of DWORDs of size RecordSize This array of records can be large It is the calling applications responsibility to handle these records appropriately The DWORD type is just a placeholder for the actual types in the data structure that maps to this RecordArray See the next section for details DWORD 50 The Generalized Event Type Structure is as follows Table 114 Event Data eEVENT_LOG Byte Offset Structure Data Description within Member Type Structure 0 Event Type BYTE Events fall into one of these types SYSTEM 0x01 e ALARM 0x02 BUFFER 0x03 1 Event ID BYTE For each Event Type a range 0 up to a maximum 256 of Event IDs are defined See event specific definitions 2 Event Time DWORD Seconds since 1970 Seconds 6 Event Time WORD Microseconds Subsecond 8 Event Specific BYTE La
117. sources See Filters on page 118 Once defined the demand Buffer updates continuously in the background while imparting minimal additional loading to the module processors Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Tachometer Expansion Module Chapter 5 Configure the Tachometer Expansion Module Topic Page Tachometer Expansion Module 157 Tachometer Page 158 The 1444 TSCX02 02RB Tachometer Signal Conditioner expansion module is a two channel monitor that converts input signals from common speed sensing transducers into a once per revolution TTL class signal It is suitable for use by up to six connected 1444 DYN04 01RA dynamic measurement modules The tachometer signal conditioner commonly serves speed signals to main modules other than its host So unlike other expansion modules and except for configuration services the 1444 TSCX02 02RB module operates independently of its host module Therefore once configured the tachometer expansion module continuously serves TTL speed signals regardless of the state or availability of its host module or local bus Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 157 Chapter4 Configure the Tachometer Expansion Module Tachometer Page Table 28 Tachometer Page Overview The tachometer page includes parameters that are transmitted to a connected tachometer expansion 1444 TSCX02 02RA module for use in processing the raw speed sign
118. specifications Table 174 Object Instance Instance ID Description 0 Normal CM Data Class Instance 1 4 Instances 1 4 are respectively assigned to measurement channels 0 3 Table 175 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of ID Rule Type Attribute Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 16 Get V Synchronization Enable SINT Across module Future use synchronization control Set at zero 17 Get V Waveform FFT Storage BYTE Control of the way FFT Storage options Format TWF data is stored Fixed at 0x11 Onboard the module Table 176 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Type Attribute TWF and Common Parameters Group of 6 configuration attributes 16 Get V Enable BYTE Type of Normal CM data Enable control to be enabled 17 Get V Signal Source SINT Defines the data source Source selection Same for both TWF and Options FFT 18 Get V Number of Averages SINT Default is FFT averaging Averages 1 2 3 6 12 unless waveform 23 45 89 or 178 averaging is enabled in attribute 16 19 Get V Measurement Units ENGUNITS Setthe measurement Engineering units units that are basedon options selected data source 20 Get V Associated Tacho SINT Tacho source selection For tacho events Source 21 Get V Waveform
119. the Advanced CM Data Object gives access to dynamically configurable analysis data variable FFT lines and so on The service 0x4B configures requests the desired processing be implemented while the service 0x4C is used to request the resulting data One request can encompass multiple channels and data types to avoid the complication of varying record sizes the resulting data can be requested on one channel and data type per session basis See the Data Manager Object for access to historical data Trend and Alarm to the Normal CM Object for access to a Live version of that data Also see the Transient Data Manager Object for access to stored transient event data 406 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Advanced CM Data and Record Requests Recommendations for Network Side Implementation e DataRequest Packet e DataResponse Packet with estimated processing time e Wait e First RecordRequest Packet e First RecordResponse Packet The data is returned in multiple packets as an array of records of size RecordSize This can be a significant amount of data depending on the extent of the data requested The recommended way to handle this data transfer is to store the payload to a file for later retrieval It is recommended to store the first packet request and response packet to the file Thereafter store the record array payload that is contained within each subsequent packet If this
120. the Engineering Units for the Tracking Filter measurements These measurements are the units that are applied to all enabled tracking filters for the channel The rules for Units selection which is based on the Xdcr Units are provided in the following table CLASS CHANGE EU OPTION Temperature No change Pressure Change in class only Flow Angle Current Energy Frequency Power Voltage Acceleration Selections per following table Velocity Length For any acceleration velocity or displacement length units the measurement can include any required integration or differentiation simply by selecting the appropriate output units Displacement Velocity Acceleration m lt gt ms E gt m mm mm s mm s micron inch s inch s inch g mil mg Signal Detection Select from Select the signal detection method for all Tracking Filter magnitude e True pk measurements for this channel e True pk pk e RMS Measurement Resolution Speed 0 1 1 256 Enter the number of revolutions bandwidth to be applied to all tracking filters on this channel that are defined for use with this tacho 0 1 The Number of Revolutions over which the order results are calculated determines the narrowness of the filter with more revolutions resulting in a sharper narrower more effective filter see figures below However Ahigh number of r
121. the alarm limits source the high low danger alert limits are mapped to selected output tag locations When in this mode the module applies the alarm limits as read from the controller output tag This mode then enables programmatic control of the limits from the Logix controller which provides a far more powerful alarm management capability When output tag limits are applied the limits read from the output assembly are used directly and never multiplied Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure Alarms Chapter 7 Voted Alarms Page Profile Alarms In addition to being able to manage alarms similarly to the included static limits with multipliers solutions if programmed to do that the output tag limits solution offers an ability to apply profile alarms Profile alarms are used for applications where a machine performs a fixed repetitive cycle over a defined time period or range of another control parameter A profile alarm likely requires many limits with each correlated to a specific time or range of the control parameter during the cycle to create a moving envelope or profile of the expected behavior of the measurement The controller then loads the appropriate limits to the output assembly depending on where the machine is in the cycle Then the controller observes the input assembly status information to determine status In these cases the module detects and acts or notifies as appro
122. the lead probe for the CDE measurement otherwise the counter sense probe is used The implementation includes protection against one probe failure the CDE is not based on a probe in TX Fail if the other probe of the pair is TX OK and also incorporates a progressive changeover between probes This changeover is incorporated to avoid a sudden jump in the measurement value around the cross over point It is applied automatically over 15 of the offset of the normal sense probe about the changeover point The following graphic illustrates he operation of these features where the yellow highlights indicate the single channel providing the CDE data Both probes OK Counter Probe failed Normal Probe failed _CH1 counter CDE mil In the example with both probes OK there are three CDE results shown that are based on both probe results e The first as the normal sense probe approaches its limit is still weighted towards the data from that probe e The second close to the cross over point is nearly equally weighted e The third as the counter sense probe is taking over is now weighted towards the data from that probe Final CDE value can be separately adjusted by means of the overall axial offset attribute 18 above Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Tracking Filter Object CIP Objects Appendix B The Tracking Filter Object class code 0x393
123. the number of dynamic Fixed depth 64 data records that the buffer currently holds 5 Get V Alarm Data Set Usage USINT Not implemented Use attribute 24 6 Get V Alarm Data Set Status WORD Returns the current operational See Alarm Data Set Status in Attribute status Semantics Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 299 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 86 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values Rule 7 Get V Alarm Overall High Resolution UNIT Returns the number of overall data Fixed depth 320 Data Records records at the fast update rate that the buffer currently holds 8 Get V Alarm Overall Low Resolution UNIT Returns the number of low Fixed depth 640 Data Records resolution overall data records that the buffer currently holds 9 Get V Alarm Dynamic Data Records UNIT Returns the number of dynamic Fixed depth 64 data records that the buffer currently holds Update Rates Group of 3 configuration attributes 17 Get NV Trend Overall Update Multiplier INT The rate at which Trend Overall Multiples of 100 ms data records are stored basedon Default of 10 the fast update rate Range 1 32767 18 Get NV Trend Dynamic Update Multiplier DINT The rate at which Trend Dynamic Multiples of 100 ms data records are stored basedon Default of 10
124. the time constant the more responsive the measurement is to rapid changes or noise Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 4 Topic Page Filters 118 Overall 126 Tracking Filters 126 FFT 134 gSE 137 Bands 139 DC 143 Demand 155 The Input data page within Module Definition allows selection of measurements for inclusion in the controller input assembly However while that reserves a spot in the table it doesn t define how the measurements must be calculated The group of pages under module definition including filters overall tracking filters gSE bands DC and demand are where you can define the measurements Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 117 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Filters Table 17 Filters i Parameter FMAX 118 The Filters page defines the digital signal processing that is applied to each of the channel s two independent signal paths You can select the output from each path and from specific intermediate processing points as the source to calculate measurements such as Overall levels FFTs and FFT Bands Figure 46 Filter Configuration for Channel DC FMAX 1100 Tracking Filters FFT Bands rimary Signal Path Demand Mode 5 Channel 1 SRS Filters Overall Tracking Fitters EFT Decimation an Sample Rate I Channel 2 FFT FMAX Fiters
125. to calculate required ramp differential expansion coefficients for internal processing of Ramp Differential Expansion A normal probe with a plain target has a ramp angle of 0 Ramp angle applies to both probes A and B Typical ramps are around 12 up to 45 on occasion Ramp angles can be positive or negative depending on whether a concave convex ramp is used Allowed configuration range 45 45 Overall Axial Offset The channel pair is not currently configured for a differential expansion application read attribute requests for attribute 18 returns zero irrespective of the actual configured value Table 140 Common Services Service Service Name Code Implementation Description of Service Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Table 141 Object Specific Service Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x4B X Zero Dual Channel Option to take the current measurement value and assign to offset attribute considering current setting of this attribute value such as to zero the measurement channel e To satisfy security requirements this service executes if an alarm inhibit is being imposed via the 1 0 connection output data e This code is an instance level service the instance that is specified dictates the particular channel pair zero d Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P
126. to synchronous measurement Processing Modes e As Samples Per Revolution is increased The synchronous sample rate increases the measurement FFT bandwidth increases and there are more orders available for analysis A particular FFT has lower resolution lines per order or bandwidth number of lines The maximum machine rpm that can be measured reduces sampling frequency rpm x samples per rev Also note that for synchronous measurements the maximum sampling rate is limited to half the maximum asynchronous rate The number of orders available is related only to the number of samples per revolution selected as follows Samples Rev Orders 4 1 4 8 2 9 16 5 8 32 11 5 64 23 0 128 46 0 121 Chapter 3 Table 17 Filters Parameter Fmax Alternate maximum Speed 122 Measurement Definition Values Displays the result of 60 x 93750 x Sample Rate Divisor Samples Per Revolution x 2 Comments Displays the maximum speed RPM at which the machine can operate while measuring synchronously with the specified filter performance e Ifthe machine speed exceeds this RPM while in Synchronous Mode the measurement does not stop Rather the performance of the Low Pass Filter degrades until the speed increases above a hard stop filter value e As machine speed decreases there is no point at which the filter performance degrades But there is a hard stop limit to
127. update the storage of any new maximum speed is prevented To avoid that in the transition period from OK to Fail or Fail to OK a spurious new maximum speed value is captured the following measures are also implemented e New maximum speed evaluations are implemented on slightly historic speed values around 0 5 seconds old e Evaluations are inhibited for around 1 second and four tacho events following a Tacho Fail to e OK transition Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object CIP Objects Appendix B Although the preceding process cannot completely eliminate the possibility that a faulty tacho probe or loose wire can trigger spurious maximum speed values it is designed to minimize the likelihood of this happening Where no tacho signals are available the module can accept two speed values as part of the controller output data While these cannot support tracking filters they can if nominated as a tacho source drive speed related FFT bands For redundant tacho mode refer to the Module Control Object attribute 24 The measurement alarm object class code 0x396 defines configuration of two stage individual measurement alarms and provides access to the associated alarm status Defined measurement alarms can be used as input for logical alarms voted and or be used as non latching intermediate virtual alarm status Class attributes and services allow for alarm history in
128. 0 7 FaultHLimit Dynamix TSC Module Object Sensor OK High Threshold Fault Low Limit V DQ Tach 0 7 FaultLLimit Dynamix TSC Module Object Sensor OK Low Threshold Speed Fault Tach 0 7 SpeedFault Dynamix TSC Module Object Sensor OK Definition Speed High Limit Tach 0 7 SpeedHLimit Dynamix TSC Module Object High RPM Threshold Speed Low Limit Tach 0 7 SpeedLLimit Dynamix TSC Module Object Low RPM Threshold Tach Expansion Module Fault Tach 0 1 ExpansionModuleFault Dynamix TSC Module Object Sensor OK Definition 244 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 58 Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference CIP Objects Appendix B Time Slot Multiplier Page Time Slot 0 3 TimeSlotMultiplier 0 3 Dynamix MUX Object Time Slot 0 DAQ Time Multiplier HW Configuration Page Xdcr Units Chd 3Sensor DCEngineeringUnits Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer DC Units Xdcr Units Chd 3Sensor ACEngineeringUnits Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer AC Units Xdcr Sensitivity Chd 3Sensor DCSensitivity Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer DC Sensitivity Xdcr Sensitivity Chd 3Sensor ACSensitivity Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer AC Sensitivity Xdcr Power ChO 3Sensor TranducerPower Dynamix Transducer Object TX Power Setup Xdcr High Limit V DC Chd 3Sensor HLimit Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer OK Hi
129. 0 3 Source Expansion Module Relay Voted ExpansionRelay0 2 Relay0 3Source Dynamix Relay Module Object Relay 0 3 Source Alarm Number Expansion Module Relay Alarm ExpansionRelay0 2 Relay0 3Source Dynamix Relay Module Object Relay 0 3 Source Status to Activate On Expansion Module Relay Module ExpansionRelay0 2 Relay0 3TripOnModuleFaul Dynamix Relay Module Object Relay 0 3 User Relay Control Fault t Expansion Module Relay Expansion ExpansionRelay0 2 Relay0 3TripOnExpBusFault Dynamix Relay Module Object Relay 0 3 User Relay Control Bus Fault Expansion Module Relay Latch ExpansionRelay0 2 Relay0 3LatchEnabled Dynamix Relay Module Object Relay 0 3 User Relay Control Enable Trend Page Discrete Data ChO 3 Enable Trend DiscreteDatad 3En Dynamix Data Manager Object Trend Data Set Enable Discrete Data Update Rate Trend DiscreteUpdateMultiplier Dynamix Data Manager Object Trend Overall Update Multiplier Dynamic Data Ch0 3 Enable Trend DynamicDatad 3En Dynamix Data Manager Object Trend Data Set Enable Dynamic Data Update Rate Trend DynamicUpdateMultiplier Dynamix Data Manager Object Trend Dynamic Update Multiplier Data Set Definition Trend DiscreteParams 4 Dynamix Data Manager Object DWORD 0 Alarm Buffer Enable Trigger Trend AlarmTriggerSource Dynamix Data Manager Object Alarm Data Sto
130. 0 the fast update rate Range 10 327670 19 Get NV Alarm Overall Update Multiplier INT Defines overall record update rate Equal to Attribute 17 for use in alarm storage whichis Range 1 32767 based on the fast update rate Trend Data Storage A configuration attribute 24 Get V Trend Data Set Enable BYTE Activate Trend Storage on a per Bit enabled control Se Trend Data Set channel basis Enable under Attribute Semantics Alarm Data Storage Group of 5 configuration attributes 32 Get V Alarm Data Storage Trigger SINT Reference to Voted Alarm Object Source including OFF option 33 Get V Alarm Data Storage Latching SINT If latching the alarm data buffer 0 Not latching does not update on subsequent 1 Latching alarm excursions unless the latch has been reset 34 Get V Alarm Post Trigger for the SINT Overall post trigger setting forthe Range 0 8 High Resolution 100 ms update rate set in eighths Default 2 25 100 ms Overall Records of the total buffer length 80 320 records 35 Get V Alarm Post Trigger for the Low SINT Overall post trigger setting forthe Range 0 8 Resolution Configured Rate user configured update rate setin Default 2 25 Overall Records eighths of the total buffer length 160 640 records 36 Get V Alarm Post Trigger for SINT Overall post trigger setting forthe Range 0 8 Dynamic Data Records 10x dynamic data records set in Default 2 25 Configured Overall Rate eighths of
131. 0 Module Not Responding 1 Module Configured Analog module has a valid configuration 2 Code CRC Fault 3 High Temperature Warning 4 Link bus fail 5 Halt is Active 6 RAM Fault 7 RAM access error 8 11 Reserved Default 1 12 15 Reserved Table 48 Tachometer Signal Conditioner Module Status TSC Module Bit Status Description if 1 0 Module Not Responding 1 Module Configured TSC module has a valid configuration 2 Code CRC Fault 3 High Temperature Warning 4 Link bus fail 5 Halt is Active 6 RAM Fault 7 RAM access error 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 Speed 0 is estimated 11 Speed 1 is estimated 12 25V5 Supply Fail 224 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 13 25V5 Supply Fail 14 Tacho 0 sensor fail 15 Tacho 1 sensor fail Alarm Status Structure The alarm status structure consists of an array of 13 voted alarm status structures table 13 The input assembly excludes the specific status of measurement alarms These are only available when the measurement alarm is an input to a voted alarm in which case its status is available in the appropriate voted alarm input measure alarm 0 state parameter The data type for each attribute is either an int 16 bits or a dint 32 bit In each case status is defined by the state of the individual bits as provided in Table 13 It is possible for multiple bits to be set The status structure consists o
132. 015 233 Chapter9 Operate the Module Calibration 234 The dynamic measurement module includes no adjustable components so does not require periodic calibration To assure measurement accuracy within specification the digital signal processor DSP of the module self calibrates at each power up The calibration function generates a set of coefficients that are applied to measurements After each calibration these coefficients are checked against design limits Coefficients exceeding their design limits indicate a hardware fault So if the check fails a calibration failure is indicated by a solid red DSP status indicator and an appropriate bit set in the input status assembly s DSP status value If calibration fails the module operates for approximately one minute and then forces the DSP to restart and recalibrate This cycle repeats until calibration passes Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Status Indicators Status Appendix A This section defines status indicator location definition and behavior for main and Expansion modules Topic Page Status Indicators 235 Status Page 220 Main Module Status Indicators Main Module Status Indicators The dynamic measurement module 1444 DYN04 01RA includes 14 status indicators Twelve indicators are on the top of the module and one additional status indicator on each of the Ethernet connectors Table 54 provides descriptio
133. 02 AND 1002 0x61 97 2002 OR 2002 0x62 98 1002 AND 2002 0x63 99 2002 AND 1002 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 375 AppendixB CIP Objects Speed Gating Source Following sources can be identified as the source of the speed gating Table 172 Speed Gating Source Value Description 0 OFF 1 Tacho Speed 0 2 Tacho Speed 1 3 Factored speed from Tacho 0 4 Factored speed from Tacho 1 Higher Values Reserved 0x00 defines Speed gating is disabled multiple sources not allowed Speed Range Condition Defines speed range assessment type Speed Range Condition Value Description 0x00 0 High Level Greater than high range 0x01 1 Low Level Lower than low range 0x02 2 In Window Within defined low and high range 0x03 3 Out Window Outside defined low and high range 376 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Logic Gating Source Bit Description 0 Local Logic Input 0 1 Local Logic Input 1 2 Logic Gating Service Request 0 3 Logic Gating Service Request 1 4 7 Reserved 8 gate0_control in the controller output table 9 gate1_control in the controller output table 0x00 defines Logic gating as disabled Up to three sources are allowed with multiple configured sources and logic applied Logic Gating and Control Sense Default behavior is logic gating control is true when
134. 10 rpm Below 10 rpm the measurement defaults to a normal DC measurement although the configured rod drop TC not the DC TC still apply This measurement also provides a means by which rod drop mode is exited if the tacho pulses suddenly stop Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 341 AppendixB CIP Objects Rod Drop maximum machine speed The maximum machine speed is calculated such that there is always at least one sample available to base the measurement on The SRD Channel Setup Object Attribute 19 determines sample rate the decimation setting does not play any part Maximum RPM Sample Rate Hz Measurement Range Degrees 6 Round the result down to an integer RPM Target Positive Direction Allow sense control of the axial thrust measurement for displacement transducer type based applications The following options apply e Active Normal target movement away from probe ECP system output more negative is considered a positive DC output e Inactive Counter target movement towards probe ECP system output less negative is considered a positive DC output Table 135 Common Services Service Service Name Code Implementation Description of Service Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Table 136 Object Specific Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x4B X Zero
135. 15 Time Sync Object CIP Objects Appendix B Table 251 Common Services Service Implement Instance Service Name Description of Service Code ation Class Ox0E x X Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Table 252 Object Specific Services Service Implement Instance Service Name Description of Service Code ation Class 0x4B x Initiate Upload Start a file upload Ox4F X Upload Transfer Performs a file transfer upload The Time Sync Object class code 0x43 provides a CIP interface to the IEEE 1588 Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked Measurement and Control Systems This is commonly referred to as the Precision Time Protocol or PTP Table 253 Object Instances Instance ID Description Class Instance of the CIP Time Sync Object 1 Active instance of the CIP Time Sync Object Table 254 Class Attributes Attribute Access Data Type Description of Semantics of ID Rule Attribute Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Revision of Object Revision 3 2 Get maximum Instance UINT One Instance is supported 1 Table 255 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of ID Rule Values 1 Get Set NV PTPEnable BOOL Default 1 Enabled 2 Get IsSynchronized BOOL 1 Synchronized 3 Get SystemTimeMicroseconds ULINT Microseconds 4 Get SystemTimeNanoseconds ULINT Na
136. 26 Reserved 11 Reserved 27 Reserved 12 Reserved 28 Reserved 13 Reserved 29 Reserved 14 Reserved 30 AD1_2 V_PROTO1 Fault 15 Redundant Power Fault One of the power supply inputs is at 31 AD1_3 V_PROT23 Fault less than 17 Volts Table 36 Trend Buffer Status Trend Buffer Status Bit Status Description if 1 0 Trend Overall Low Res Records Cycling Static Trend data is being collected 1 Trend Overall High Res Records Cycling Alarm Trend data is being collected 2 Trend FFT Records Cycling Dynamic Trend data including FFT s is being collected 3 Trend Waveform Records Cycling Dynamic Trend data including TWF s is being collected 4 15 Reserved 218 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 37 Alarm Buffer Status Operate the Module Chapter 9 Alarm Buffer Status Bit Status Value Description 0 3 Low Resolution Overall Buffer 0 Disabled Buffer data type is not being captured 1 Armed Waiting for alarm event trigger 2 Populating Alarm event in progress 3 Data Ready Alarm data available 4 Latched Data available and latched until reset 4 7 High Resolution Overall Buffer same as above 8 11 FFT Data Buffer 12 15 Time Waveform Data Buffer Table 38 Transient Status Transient Status Bit Status Value Name Description 0 8 Transient Buffer 0 0 Free Available ready for transient event 1 Data Ready Normal Transient completed
137. 29 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 16 30 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 17 31 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 18 32 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 293 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 76 Configuration Group 22 Configuration Group 22 e Transducer Object 0x38E e Tacho and Speed Measurement Object 0x395 Group 22 contains configuration attributes from the following objects Source Object Source Instanc
138. 3 FFT Line Value Scaling SINT Allows line bin values to be returned scaled as Peak Peak to Peak or RMS 0 Peak 1 Peak to Peak 2 RMS 14 Pad INT Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary Instance 2 Channel 1 16 Enable BYTE A bit wise enable control 17 Number of Averages SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A 18 Waveform Record SINT Defines the number of samples in the Advanced CM waveform Length 19 FFT Line Resolution SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A but with extra indices e 5 3200 lines 6 6400 lines e 7 12800 lines 20 FFT Window Function SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A 21 FFT Line Value Scaling SINT Allows line bin values to be returned scaled as Peak Peak to Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Peak or RMS 0 Peak 1 Peak to Peak 2 RMS 397 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 202 Advanced CM Data Request Parameters 22 Pad INT Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary Instance 3 Channel 2 24 Enable BYTE A bit wise enable control 25 Number of Averages SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A 26 Waveform Record SINT Defines the number of samples in the Advanced CM waveform Length 27 FFT Line Resolution SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A
139. 4 Refer to ENET UM001 for more information Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Local Clock Synchronization Status Offset to Master Ethemet State Class Variance Local Clock Synchronization Status Offset to Master Ethemet State Class Variance Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Ha rdwa re Configuration Figure 43 Configuration for Channel Inputs Discrete Inputs Discrete Outputs and Dynamic Measurement Data Storage Page Xder Unts Xder SenstityimV U Xder Power Xder High LimarV OC Xder Low Limacv OC m 200 000 24 V OC gt irl 200 000 24V DC 25 Aw 14 000 8 000 mi m 200 000 26 VDC 25 mA h 14 000 8 000 m x 14 000 8 060 200 000 24 V OC 25 m Measurement Type Measurement Unts LX shat relative x X shah relative z v z LX shat relative zV aol X shat relative V all Discrete Input Assignment Discrete Output Assignment Pto Trp init Sypess Pw off Pti AlarmRelay Reset Co Pti off hd The Hardware Configuration Page includes parameters that are associated with the physical inputs and outputs of the module The page is divided into four general sections e Sensor Definition Parameters that define the sensor that is physically connected to each channel of the module IMPORTANT Because the available selections and defaults for the Sensor Definition parameters are set by the Measurement
140. 4 12 0x05 5 23 0x06 6 45 0x07 7 89 0x08 8 178 Table 238 Common Services Service Code 0x0E Implementation Service Name Instance Get Attribute Single Table 239 Object Specific Services Service Code 0x4B Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Implementation Service Name Class Instance X X Set Module Time Description of Service Returns the contents of the specified attribute Description of Service Allows a module time date to be set in the absence of a system time from the network Data UINT32 seconds since 1970 UINT32 nanoseconds 431 Appendix B CIP Objects Identity Object The Identity Object class code 0x01 provides identification and general information about the device The first instance identifies the whole device It is used for electronic keying and by applications wishing to determine what devices are on the network Table 240 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Identity Class Instance 1 Instance 1 of the Identity object Class Attributes The Identify Object supports the following Class Attributes Table 241 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Semantics of ID Rule Attribute Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Defines revision of Current revision 1 Identify
141. 5 AppendixB CIP Objects TX OK Definition Following options define the source conditions for reporting a tachometer Not OK condition Bit Description 0 Outside voltage window 1 Outside RPM window 2 SC module fault 3d Reserved Bit setting of 1 defines inclusion of the specified condition reserved bits and non desired configuration options are set to 0 Multiple bit selections are valid logical combination is OR 0x00 value defines no tacho transducer OK monitoring In general the TSC module continues to try to provide a signal to the various tacho outputs in spite of a detected failure For example a class attribute 17 configures the timeout value that the module uses to assess the link quality A link timeout only causes an indication of the fault any active tacho outputs and their OK status continues to be maintained Bit 2 in the proceeding table is provided to allow the facility for a TX not OK to be set in case an internal TSC module fault is detectable Table 149 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Instance Ox0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute 356 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Tacho and Speed Measurement Object CIP Objects Appendix B The Tacho and Speed Measurement Object class 0x395 defines the configuration of tacho and speed signals as processed a
142. 5 3 wire Acceleration Sensors or Other 3 wire Transducer Systems 67 2 wire Self Generating Velocity Sensors 0000 00 eee 67 3 wire Acceleration and Temperature Sensor 0 005 68 Temperature Transmitters cont kre reteset eee bees token 69 Tacho Signal from a Directly Connected Source 70 EtherNet IP Connect t residere sormena a artes ata Shia tidedhersrigina e 72 Wiring Expansion Modules n sssssususuesaneresrsrrerererrren 73 Relay Expansion Module nenene 74 4 20 mA Expansion Module lt 2 232 51025 20 does id aber 76 Tacho Signal Conditioning Expansion Module 78 Start the Module and Perform a Self test 1c1 i sae ciaeee steels he 85 Expansion Module Startup Behavior 0s ee ee eee eee 86 Chapter 3 General Page tet imta d e liek tees toh alioh ilies aeR BUR eh aut 88 Module Detinitions ios is satan eedsag sas dha Geers es 88 Module Definition Versus Module Configuration 89 Expansion Device Definition Dialog 0000005 90 Define Module Functionality Page s lt ites auscnee esis caraatees 92 Inpit Data Page eoi tel EEE E ETERS 95 Module Definition Select Data for Output Tag 100 Intern t Protocol Pages vra teu Aic ewe casa e a e a 101 Port Configuration Page s sessrsrrrerrerrrrsrsrrererrrere 102 Network Page ys tnies ororen suppu a En NA EREE ENa 103 TimeSync Pagesat ka eae ley A sh aaa SA 104 Hardware Confi
143. 5 327 AppendixB CIP Objects Dynamix Transducer Object The transducer object class code 0x38E defines the properties of the sensor that is connected to one of the four available physical inputs Attributes describe physical measurement parameters and transducer OK monitoring setup as also some sensor mounting geometry settings This object reports transducer DC Volts bias measurement and transducer status Table 119 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Transducer Class Instance Table 120 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Type Attribute 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get V TX Overall Status BYTE Coded information to Bits 0 3 represent represent transducer transducer Enabled and OK status enabled status 1 enabled Bits 4 7 represent transducer OK status 1 0K Table 121 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get V DC Bias REAL The DC level at the input in fixed Data units of DC Volts 2 Get V TX Detailed Status BYTE Detailed bit coded Transducer See TX OK Configuration Decoding Status Data Transducer Descriptions Group of 4 attributes that are used for reference purposes only 16 Get V Transducer Name SINT 32 Descriptive name 32 characters 17 Get V
144. 51 50 16 52 50 30 51 50 20 51 50 36 25 25 33 25 25 60 25 25 40 25 25 Table 22 Decimation Menu Selections SRD 24 32 Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu SRD 24 SRD 26 SRD 28 SRD 30 SRD 32 1 41526 io N o9 Tmo fi Tro Bo N 21 Jo N m4 1100 2 31 400 2 352 400 2 32 30 2 305 30 fa 286 300 3 25a 30 3 235 20 3 fas fa 3 23 20 3 in 200 4 fin fa 4 li 150 a fr fio 4 153 150 a w3 150 5 153 150 7 r 10 fe r fio Te 12 ho Js m4 Joo 7 w 10 i Tw 75 9 B 75 8 75 8 n 75 w l z 4 50 50 B 50 50 i fs 50 1 52 50 5 51 50 2 5 25 x 25 25 u Iz 25 B 5 25 30 25 25 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 125 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Overall Table 23 Overall Parameter Overall 0 Signal Source The dynamic measurement module of the Dynamix 1444 Series can measure two Overall values per channel Overall 0 and Overall 1 This page is used to configure these measurements For non multiplexed Module Personalities See Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 Overall measurements update at a rate of not slower than every 40 Milliseconds Overall 0 Signal Source Signal Detection Units Time Constant Overall 1 Signal Source Signal Detection Units Time Constant Va
145. 6 65 70 20 31 37 Sep 17 20 32 30 31 34 2014 21 Get NV DSP Firmware Build UDINT Build Version for example 10034 is V1 00 34 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 423 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 233 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 22 Get DSP Configuration CRC UINT 16 bit CRC for the DSP and Will be unchanged if configuration Auxiliary relevant changes are limited to CM features configuration 23 Get NetX DSP Error Status DWORD DSP bits 0 15 NetX bits Normal no error status 0 16 31 Bit 0 DSP Not responding Bit 1 DSP in boot loader mode Bit 2 Configuration process failed to complete Bit 16 Corrupt object file detected Main Module Tacho A configuration attribute 24 Get V Tacho Mode SINT Individual or Redundant 0 Individual Mode else Redundant Tacho Mode Main Module Opto Outputs 0 1 A group of 2 configuration attributes 32 Get V Opto Output 0 Allocation SINT Source configuration for Opto source this Opto isolated output 33 Get V Opto Output 1 Allocation SINT Source configuration for Opto source this Opto isolated output Main Module Local Onboard Relay A logical grouping of parameters 39 Get V Auto Local Relay Control BYTE Configuration of local relay Returns 0 if relay source is not a behavior in case
146. 9 Source Object J Source Instance SourceAttributeiD Name bataye i ws o ha o Sse RONSERNSNSi COS 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 0x399 4 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT Configuration Groups 20 and 21 Group 20 contains configuration attributes from the FFT Band Object 0x399 Instances 5 18 Group 21 contains configuration attributes from the FFT Band Object 0x399 Instances 19 32 Table 75 Configuration Groups 20 and 21 Source Object SourceInstance SourceAttributeiD Name Datalype ws o a e asore 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz feae 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 6 20 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT 290 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015
147. 93 Initiating a Transient Event sssusssunsrrerrenrrrrerre 193 Dynamic Datari s eien tutes teen ca E E 194 Sampling During a Transient Event 00 eee eee 194 Concluding a Transient Eventecs ces co cc ee veweys vet eaew nto 195 Patching che Nis E ch ot E E Rane aaa E 195 Chapter 9 Resetting the Module x s c poscnaw ate reese hence nau hekaw ee eee 197 Supported Reset Typestiis es renee hee wa vegeta a6 bene eel 197 Reset Procedures ufone ve ena atic adeeb tae ees 199 Updating Module Firmware dacs wher ersarrae sauna peduatatntys 203 Managing GET and SET Service Access 0 00 cc eee ee ence eae 204 SE AEE cen elute Maeda eri tae Ne cd ts plod on cre ie Ae 204 GET Srvaces Sas iccs slag clidis E Hersch ase hala dad ROR ASA 205 Managing Nonvolatile Memory Configuration 06 205 Saving a Configuration to Nonvolatile Memory 205 Deleting a Saved Configuration from Nonvolatile Memory 206 Setting PRL A AIECSS yeh ince Seateg edeis ate seiheyietntad aeeoa 207 Static IP Comhoutationic ss ciecniieed cisniaiadece econ eked 207 Automatic IP Conhiguitatotess casssniwionbsoaeeeen sarees 207 Time Management sessur te tadas 252 Ree oea eee eee 207 Mod le Inputs secerneren e a E orsvesteee seeds 209 1444 DYN04 01RA Dynamic Measurement Module 209 Channel Inpiits ysie dacetete eine ia aKa E EE E N 209 Transducer Fault Detection sccccci csinas cobarisan cain 209 1444 TSCX02 02RB Tachome
148. AL The filter Q factor or Separate definitions to Definition Frequency bandwidth support different Tacho 1 that is associated with settings in Fixed the selected processing frequency mode For mode fixed Q mode the AOP sets 20 and 21 equal 24 Get V Order Update REAL Approximation ofthe Seconds Rate Tacho 0 anticipated order measurement update rate that is based on signal processing and order setup 25 Get V Order Update REAL Approximation ofthe Seconds Rate Tacho 1 anticipated order measurement update rate that is based on signal processing and order setup Order Requirement Definitions Group of 4 configuration attributes 32 Get V Tracking filter 0 REAL Order 0 Definition 0 25 32 0 orders setup integer values return default value 1 0 Mag Phase as where only Mag is returned for non integer settings Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 144 Instance Attributes 33 Get V Tracking filter 1 REAL Order 1 Definition 0 25 32 0 orders setup integer values return default value 2 0 Mag Phase as where only Mag is returned for non integer settings 34 Get V Tracking filter2 REAL Order 2 Definition 0 25 32 0 orders setup integer values return default value 3 0 Mag Phase as where only Mag is returned for non integer settings 35 Get V Tracking filter3 REAL Order 3 Definition 0 25 32 0 orders setup integer valu
149. AQ REAL Time Slot 0 DAQ Time s Time 3 Get V Time Slot 1 DAQ REAL Time Slot 1 DAQ Time s Time 4 Get V Time Slot 2 DAQ REAL Time Slot 2 DAQ Time s Time 5 Get V Time Slot 3 DAQ REAL Time Slot 3 DAQ Time s Time 6 Get V Time Slot 0 REAL Time Slot 0 Settling s Settling Time Time 7 Get V Time Slot 1 REAL Time Slot 1 Settling s Settling Time Time 8 Get V Time Slot 2 REAL Time Slot 2 Settling s Settling Time Time Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 214 Instance Attributes 9 Get V Time Slot 3 REAL Time Slot 3 Settling s Settling Time Time Time Slot Configuration Group of 4 configuration attributes 16 Get V Time Slot 0 DAQ INT Time Slot 0 DAQ Time Range 1 255 Time Multiplier Multiplier Default 1 17 Get V Time Slot 1 DAQ INT Time Slot 1 DAQ Time Range 1 255 Time Multiplier Multiplier Default 1 18 Get V Time Slot 2 DAQ INT Time Slot 2 DAQ Time Range 1 255 Time Multiplier Multiplier Default 1 19 Get V Time Slot 3 DAQ INT Time Slot 3 DAQ Time Range 1 255 Time Multiplier Multiplier Default 1 Table 215 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Instance Ox0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Dynamix MUX Object The Dynamix MUX Object class 0x39B defines and controls a multiplexing capability of a m
150. Acquisition Time Slot Multiplier Time Slot 0 Time Slot 1 Time Slot 2 Time Slot 3 Parameter Values Comment Time Slot 0 0 65535 Enter the Time Slot Multiplier for channel 0 or channel pair 0 1 See Page Overview for a discussion of the Time Slot Multiplier and examples of how to use it Time Slot 1 0 65535 Enter the Time Slot Multiplier for channel 1 See Page Overview for a discussion of the Time Slot Multiplier and examples of how to use it Time Slot 2 0 65535 Enter the Time Slot Multiplier for channel 2 or channel pair 2 3 See Page Overview for a discussion of the Time Slot Multiplier and examples of how to use it Time Slot 3 0 65535 Enter the Time Slot Multiplier for channel 3 See Page Overview for a discussion of the Time Slot Multiplier and examples of how to use it 112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 The Time Slot Multiplier Page is accessible when the Module Personality is set to either of the multiplexed measurement selections e Multiplexed 4 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz or Static Paired e Multiplexed 4 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz or Static Individual IMPORTANT Module Personality is specified on the Module Definition gt Define Module Functionality page e Ifthe Module Personality is set to Multiplexed 4 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz or Static Paired then the Time Slot Multipliers are applied p
151. Ag Shaft Absolute pk pk Checked 1 Check this to include the Shaft Absolute pk pk member for the selected channel pair to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel Pair Tag Member 0 1 ChO_1Shaft AbsolutePk_Pk 2 3 Ch2_3Shaft AbsolutePk_Pk Axial Differential Expansion Checked 1 Check this to include the Axial Differential Expansion member for the selected channel pair to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel Pair Tag Member 2 3 Ch2_3AxialDiffxpansion If the channel type is DC then only one DC member can be selected Axial or Radial Differential Expansion DC Proportional or Rod Drop Radial Differential Expansion Checked 1 Check this to include the Radial Ramp Differential Expansion member for the selected channel pair to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel Pair Tag Member 0 1 ChO_1RampDiffExpansion 2 3 Ch2_3RampDiffExpansion If the channel type is DC then only one DC member can be selected Axial or Radial Differential Expansion DC Proportional or Rod Drop Overall n Checked 1 Check this to include the Overall 0 member for the selected channel to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel T Tang Member 0 Ch0Overall n 1 Ch10verall n 2 Ch20verall n 3 Ch30verall n 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 10 Input Data Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Parameter Values Comments Order n magnitude Checked
152. August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Behavior Smax Measurements In an XY application the Smax result magnitude and phase is calculated using the individual overall results and not at the sample level Using the two orthogonal processed scalar values in this way corresponds to Method A in the International Standards Using method A e The Smax amplitude can be overestimated but not under estimated e Any calculated phase angle is in the range 0 to 90 If the two scalar values are identical the phase reports 45 If the first channel of the pair has the larger amplitude the phase angle reads lt 45 If the second channel of the pair has the largest amplitude the phase angle reads gt 45 Shaft Absolute Vibration Measurements When configured in this mode the calculation of absolute shaft vibration is performed at a sample level This method is necessary because any simpler method based on overall values could be misleading as to the actual absolute vibration amplitudes Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 345 Appendix B CIP Objects 346 CDE Complementary Differential Expansion Measurements The two channels are configured with opposite sense and with suitable individual offsets such that at the nominal cross over point their individual measurements are zero DC Measurement Object instance attributes While the normal sense probe returns a negative displacement value then it is
153. Averages FFT Bands Page Enable ModuleControl chd 3DSP_FFT En Dynamix Module Control Object Enable Signal Source ModuleControl Chd 3DSP_FFT Source Dynamix Module Control Object Signal Source Measurement Units Number of Spectrum Lines ModuleControl Chd ModuleControl Chd 3DSP_FFT Units 3DSP_FFT FFTNumLines Dynamix Module Control Object Dynamix Module Control Object Measurement Units Line Resolution Signal Detection ModuleControl Chd 3DSP_FFT SignalDetection Dynamix Module Control Object FFT Line Value Detection Scaling FFT Window Type 246 ModuleControl Chd 3DSP_FFT Windowlype Dynamix Module Control Object Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Window Function CIP Objects Appendix B Table 58 Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference Number of Averages ModuleControl chd 3DSP_FFT AveragesCount Dynamix Module Control Object Number of Averages Enable cho 3Band0 7 En Dynamix FFT Band Object Channel Source Measurement Mode Chd 3Band0 7 Type Dynamix FFT Band Object FFT Band magnitude Type Band Limit Begin Cho 3Band0 7 LimitBegin Dynamix FFT Band Object Start frequency in Hz Dynamix FFT Band Object Start frequency in orders Band Limit End Cho 3Band0 7 LimitEnd Dynamix FFT Band Object Stop frequency in Hz Dynamix FFT Band Object Stop frequency in orders Do
154. B EN P August 2015 11 Table of Contents Notes 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Additional Resources Preface This manual describes the Dynamix 1444 Series dynamic measurement module The information in the following chapters discusses installation configuration and operation of the module The module measures dynamic inputs such as vibration pressure and static inputs such as thrust eccentricity and rod drop The 1444 DYN04 01RA module is designed specifically for integration with Allen Bradley Logix controllers connected across an industrial Ethernet network These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation Resource Description Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell publication 1770 4 1 Automation industrial system Product Certifications Website http www ab com Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Specifications Provides system specifications for the Dynamix 1444 Technical Data publication 1444 TD001 Series Monitoring System You can view or download publications at http www rockwellautomation com literature To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Allen Bradley Distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative Roc
155. C REAL 19 AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL 20 AC Overall magnitude Detection SINT 32 Configure Peak per revolution SINT Pad INT 0x390 1 33 Minimum RPM for Peak per revolution REAL 0x390 2 16 AC Overall Measurement Source SINT Pad SINT 0x390 2 17 AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 AC Overall Measurement RMS TC REAL 19 AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL 20 AC Overall magnitude Detection SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x390 3 17 AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x390 3 18 AC Overall Measurement RMS TC REAL 19 AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL 20 AC Overall magnitude Detection SINT 32 Configure Peak per revolution SINT Pad INT 0x390 3 33 Minimum RPM for Peak per revolution REAL 0x390 4 16 AC Overall Measurement Source SINT Pad SINT 0x390 4 17 AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 AC Overall Measurement RMS TC REAL 19 AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL 20 AC Overall magnitude Detection SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x390 5 17 AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x390 5 18 AC Overall Measurement RMS TC REAL 19 AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL 20 AC Overall magnitude Detection SINT 32 Configure Peak per revolution SINT Pad INT 266 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 69 Configuration Group 3 CIP Objects Appendix B Sour
156. Channel Option to take the current measurement value and assign to offset attribute considering current setting of this attribute value such as to zero the measurement channel e To satisfy security requirements this service only executes if an alarm inhibit is being imposed via the 1 0 connection output data e This is an instance level service the instance that is specified dictates the particular channel zero d 342 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Dual Measurement Object CIP Objects Appendix B This Dual Measurement Object class code 0x392 defines in combination with selected application type in measurement channel setup the additional behavior of the fixed channel pairs It provides access to available Dual Channel measurement results and defines channel pair specific configuration parameters for differential expansion Table 137 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Dual Measurement Class Instance 1 Instance 1 for transducer pair 0 1 2 Instance 2 for transducer pair 2 3 Table 138 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Type Attribute 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision Table 139 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get V S max Pe
157. D Name Data Type 0x39C 1 7 Relay 0 Source SINT 18 Relay 1 Source SINT 19 Relay 2 Source SINT 20 Relay 3 Source SINT 0x39C 1 36 Relay 0 User Relay Control BYTE 37 Relay 1 User Relay Control BYTE 38 Relay 2 User Relay Control BYTE 39 Relay 3 User Relay Control BYTE 0x39C 2 17 Relay 0 Source SINT 18 Relay 1 Source SINT 19 Relay 2 Source SINT 20 Relay 3 Source SINT 0x39C 2 36 Relay 0 User Relay Control BYTE 37 Relay 1 User Relay Control BYTE 38 Relay 2 User Relay Control BYTE 39 Relay 3 User Relay Control BYTE 0x39C 3 17 Relay 0 Source SINT 18 Relay 1 Source SINT 19 Relay 2 Source SINT 20 Relay 3 Source SINT 0x39C 3 36 Relay 0 User Relay Control BYTE 37 Relay 1 User Relay Control BYTE 38 Relay 2 User Relay Control BYTE 39 Relay 3 User Relay Control BYTE 0x392 1 16 Sensor 0 Ramp Angle REAL 17 Sensor 1 Ramp Angle REAL 18 Overall Axial Offset 0 1 REAL 19 Overall Radial Offset 0 1 REAL 0x392 2 16 Sensor 2 Ramp Angle REAL 17 Sensor 3 Ramp Angle REAL 18 Overall Axial Offset 2 3 REAL 19 Overall Radial Offset 2 3 REAL Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 265 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 69 Configuration Group 3 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x390 1 17 AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x390 1 18 AC Overall Measurement RMS T
158. DAQ time minimum DAQ time 5 Get V Time slot 3 REAL Time slot 3 S DAQ time minimum DAQ time 6 Get V Time slot 0 REAL Time slot 0 S Settling time Settling time 7 Get V Time slot 1 REAL Time slot 1 S Settling time Settling time 8 Get V Time slot 2 REAL Time slot 2 S Settling time Settling time 9 Get V Time slot 3 REAL Time slot 3 S Settling time Settling time Time Slot Group of 4 Configuration configuration attributes 16 Get V Time Slot 0 INT Time Slot 0 Default DAQ time DAQ time value 1 Multiplier Multiplier Range 1 255 17 Get V Time Slot 1 INT Time Slot 1 Default DAQ time DAQ time value 1 Multiplier Multiplier Range 1 255 18 Get V Time Slot 2 INT Time Slot 2 Default DAQ time DAQ time value 1 Multiplier Multiplier Range 1 255 19 Get V Time Slot 3 INT Time Slot 3 Default DAQ time DAQ time value 1 Multiplier Multiplier Range 1 255 Attribute Semantics The module calculates instance attributes 2 9 to ensure that the channel pair is active long enough for valid measurements overall TWF and FFT to be made That DAQ data acquisition time represents the minimum that is required If 410 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B desired you can then extend that time by use of the configured multipliers attributes 16 19 Table 219 Common Services Service Code Implementation Service Name Description of Service Class Instance Ox0E xX xX G
159. DC Measurement Offset REAL 19 DC Measurement Sense Control SINT 20 DC Measurement Type USINT 32 Rod Drop Trigger Source SINT 33 Rod Drop Trigger Angle INT 34 Rod Drop Measurement Range SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x391 1 35 Rod Drop Decay Time REAL 0x391 2 16 DC Measurement Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x391 2 17 DC Measurement TC REAL 18 DC Measurement Offset REAL 19 DC Measurement Sense Control SINT 20 DC Measurement Type USINT 32 Rod Drop Trigger Source SINT 33 Rod Drop Trigger Angle INT 34 Rod Drop Measurement Range SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x391 2 35 Rod Drop Decay Time REAL 0x391 3 16 DC Measurement Units ENGUNITS 3 Pad INT 0x391 3 17 DC Measurement TC REAL 18 DC Measurement Offset REAL 19 DC Measurement Sense Control SINT 20 DC Measurement Type USINT 32 Rod Drop Trigger Source SINT 33 Rod Drop Trigger Angle INT 34 Rod Drop Measurement Range SINT Pad SINT 268 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 70 Configuration Group 4 CIP Objects Appendix B Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad INT 0x391 3 35 Rod Drop Decay Time REAL 0x391 4 16 DC Measurement Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x391 4 17 DC Measurement TC REAL 18 DC Measurement Offset REAL 19 DC Measurement Sense Control SINT 20
160. FFT inch s The rules for units selection based on the transducer units see the HW Configuration on page 11 properties page m s are provided in this table mm s CLASS CHANGE EU OPTION Temperature No change allowed Bearing Defect Units Pressure Change in class only Flow Current Frequency Power Voltage Acceleration Velocity Length For any acceleration velocity or displacement length units the module can convert the measurement between equivalent Metric and English units Displacement Velocity Acceleration m m s m s mm M mm s M mm s micron inch s inch s inch V V g mil mg Speed Reference Speed Reference Oor 1 Select the speed reference that is associated with the TWFs and FFTs processed from this channel The module does 156 not use the speed reference but stores it for reference by any higher level software systems that must associate a shaft rotation speed with the measurement The demand page defines the acquisition of time waveform data for demand or advanced condition monitoring data requests Available services enable data requests on demand from the demand advanced data buffers with each request uniquely definable per the requestor specifications which can include various post processing tasks including FFT processing This page is presented when the channel is configured for Dynamic measurements Demand data lets a deep data buffer be defined at any one of the enabled data
161. General Page 88 gSE 137 Hardware Configuration Page 105 1 0 Message Formats 215 Identity Object CIP objects 433 inputs module 209 channel inputs 209 digital inputs 212 speed inputs 211 Install the Module 49 Installation Overview 43 Internet Protocol Page 101 M Main Module wiring 51 Measurement Alarm Object CIP objects 361 Measurement Alarms Page 173 455 Index 456 Message Router Object CIP objects 434 Module Applications 15 Module Control Object CIP objects 423 Module Definition 88 Module Installation 49 Mount the Terminal Base Unit 45 MUX Object CIP objects 408 Network Connectivity 22 Network Page 103 Nonvolatile Storage Object CIP objects 446 Normal CM Data Object CIP objects 379 0 Objects Mapped to Configuration Parameters CIP objects 244 Output Configuration Page 162 outputs module 213 Overall 126 P Perform a Self Test 85 Port Configuration Page 102 Product Description 17 Q Quality of Service Object CIP objects 442 Relay Expansion Module 165 Relay Expansion Module outputs 214 Relay Module Object CIP objects 412 Relay Page 165 Relays 186 Reset 197 S services 215 Speed Page 115 Start the Module 85 Status Indicators 235 System Components 21 System Overview 17 T Tacho and Speed Measurement Object CIP objects 357 Tachometer Expansion Module 157 Tachometer Page 158 Tachometer Signal Conditioner Expansion Module outputs 213 condi
162. IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 26 Get V Overall INT Speed interval at which the overall transient 1 1000 RPM in 1 RPM steps Delta RPM data records are stored 0 no delta RPM storage SU Separate delta RPM for run up and coast down events 27 Get V Overall Delta RPM CD INT Speed interval at which the overall transient 1 1000 RPM in 1 RPM steps data records are stored 0 no delta RPM storage Separate delta RPM for run up and coast down events 28 Get V Overall Delta Time SU INT Delta time interval that triggers overall value s data storage when RPM change re mains Range 1 3600 within delta RPM value 29 Get V Overall Delta Time CD INT Delta time interval that triggers overall value s data storage when RPM change re mains Range 1 3600 within delta RPM value 30 Get V Disable Dynamic Data Storage BYTE Ability to disable dynamic data storage ifit Bit 0 for SU is not of interest Bit 1 for CD disable Range 0 3 31 Get V Extra Startup Sample Time INT Extends the time duration of a start up S event Range 0 32767 Transient Static Data Source Group of 4DWORDs where each bit indicates whether that measurement is included or not 64 Get V DWORD 0 DWORD Range 0 4294967295 65 Get V DWORD 1 DWORD Range 0 4294967295 66 Get V DWORD 2 DWORD Range 0 4294967295 67 Get V DWORD 3 DWORD DWORD 3 is onl
163. ITS data type 008 251 Dynamix Configuration Manager Object 00 0 eee e ees 252 a r a 5 1s E A EES ely 252 Py ooarg etheen d e wee eee ei a e e kre 253 Attribute Semantics ve sekinten e A a a 253 Object Specific Services s icicerantstassea sd tates een was 258 Configuration Group Lvccemenmewedh kare t unas eerssereinenks 258 Configuration Group 3 lt 6 ice tees se ahelice ShNb eA ean ele telat 265 Configuration Group 4 cans Sin dtcsidoudoieseteocaveckanoa nes 268 Configuration Groups 5 16 cc uadetyanatasas av aweutvaianats 271 Configuration Group 17 wos cortciet tees iedereeeneerdecteies 273 Configuration Group lS ak iciiwess wos bvdite onesie tateoytadts 277 Configuration Group 19 s sususisssrsrsrrrerererrreres 281 Configuration Groups 20 and 21 s ssssssrsrsererrrrrrere 290 Configuration Group 22 20 2500 2 teks l cae Vi tain ee bays bead 294 Configuration Group 73 ix scarce as sau Mod gecnauad 295 Configuration Group 2 4ixcen ted oe narvsepamin are noatua awa gereaee 295 Configuration Gtoupi2 Gas ticsiikhet chook ee thee ead 296 Configuration Group 26 cise sisromiouer sant evaeaa aces 296 Configuration Group 27 6405405 95 pinsasinecnuanesi aes claeee 297 Configuration Group Zs cay wetaewedaksant ends Sereee etwas 297 Configuration Group 29 isc eu lamar ed dani th a atest dns 298 Dynamix Data Manager Object 00 c cece cece e eee eee eees 299 Attribute SEMANTICS oe crn batornsiesecsatn ten Meria
164. Interval 32 Get V Relay 0 Auto Relay BYTE Configuration of relay behavior in case Relay control Control of detected fault condition which is based on associated voted alarm 33 Get V Relay 1 Auto Relay BYTE Configuration of relay behavior in case Relay control Control of detected fault condition which is based on associated voted alarm Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 413 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 222 Instance Attributes 34 Get Relay 2 Auto Relay BYTE Configuration of relay behavior in case Relay control Control of detected fault condition which is based on associated voted alarm 35 Get Relay 3 Auto Relay BYTE Configuration of relay behavior in case Relay control Control of detected fault condition which is based on associated voted alarm Relay Configuration Group of 4 configuration attributes 36 Get Relay 0 User Relay BYTE User configuration Relay Control of Relay control Control relay behavior in case of detected fault condition 37 Get Relay 1 User Relay BYTE User configuration Relay Control of Relay control Control relay behavior in case of detected fault condition 38 Get Relay 2 User Relay BYTE User configuration Relay Control of Relay control Control relay behavior in case of detected fault condition 39 Get Relay 3 User Relay BYTE User configuration Relay Control of Relay control Control relay behavior in case of detected fault condi
165. K Configuration included in a TX OK assessment 33 Get V Transducer OK High Threshold REAL High voltage threshold for the TX V OK monitoring window Range 22 21 34 Get V Transducer OK Low Threshold REAL Low voltage threshold forthe TX V OK monitoring window Range 22 21 Attribute Semantics TX OK Configuration Decoding Bit Description when bit is set 1 0 Channel enabled 1 Transducer enabled 2 Transducer fault 3 Wire off indicated In the case of Module Personality Real Time 2 Dynamic 4 kHz Dual Path Dual path uses both channel pairs to process a single pair of transducer signals without requiring external linking of the signal inputs The sensors are connected normally to channels 0 amp 1 but are processed by both channel pairs channel 0 to channel 2 and channel 1 to channel 3 Consequently only channels 0 and 1 should be used for transducer status Wire off refers to additional failure sensing applied to Eddy Current Probe systems which are powered by the module Wire off is only incorporated into Transducer Fail when specific configuration criteria are met If those criteria are not met and or the capability has been disabled by setting attribute 32 to a non zero value then bit 3 will be forced OK zero value If the wire off detection capability is being actively used then in the event of a transducer fail being indicated the value of bit 3 will confirm if a wire off has b
166. Measurement Module Chapter 1 The Dynamix 1444 series is a machinery protection system comprising at least one DYN module that has four channels for vibration or related measurements two TTL speed inputs and one relay output Expansion modules then provide more output and input capacity that cannot be accommodated within that DYN module The use of expansion modules is entirely optional and dependent on the specific application requirements Qual Analog Tacho Bus Main Module Exp Module lt Redundant Main Supply input Redundant Main Supply input For critical applications the DYN modules support EtherNet IP communication including Device Level Ring DLR configurations and accept wide ranging 18 32 V 24V nominal redundant power inputs When expansion modules are used the following apply e Any expansion modules are fitted to the right of their host DYN module e Expansion modules provide more relays 4 20 mA outputs and tachometer signal conditioning facilities e A local bus ribbon cable connects the main to its expansion modules providing Current limited fuse protected power for the expansion modules Local communication main with expansion A dual tacho bus that distributes the TSCX modules TTL outputs e The tacho bus can be extended to other DYN modules by fitting a bus cable from the end of the expansion module group or from the left side of the associated DYN mo
167. Menu Selections SRD 5 9 Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu SRD 5 SRD 6 SRD 7 SRD 9 1 7324 7300 1 6104 6100 1 5232 5200 1 4069 4100 2 1831 1800 2 1526 1500 2 1308 1300 2 1017 1000 3 1221 1200 3 1017 1000 3 872 900 3 678 700 4 916 900 4 763 800 4 654 700 4 509 500 5 732 700 5 610 600 5 523 500 5 407 400 124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Table 20 Decimation Menu Selections SRD 5 9 Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu SRD 5 SRD 6 SRD 7 SRD 9 6 610 600 6 509 500 6 436 400 6 339 300 7 523 500 7 436 400 8 327 300 10 203 200 9 407 400 10 305 300 13 201 200 13 157 150 12 305 300 15 203 200 17 154 150 20 102 100 18 203 200 20 153 150 26 101 100 27 75 75 24 153 150 30 102 100 35 75 75 41 50 50 36 102 100 40 76 75 52 50 50 80 25 25 49 75 75 61 50 50 103 25 25 73 50 50 120 25 25 144 25 25 Table 21 Decimation Menu Selections SRD 12 22 Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu SRD 12 SRD 18 SRD 20 SRD 22 1 3052 3100 1 2035 2000 1 1831 1800 1 1665 1700 2 763 800 2 509 500 2 458 500 2 416 400 3 509 500 3 339 300 3 305 300 3 277 300 5 305 300 4 254 300 4 229 200 4 208 200 7 218 200 5 203 200 6 153 150 5 166 150 10 153 150 6 170 150 9 102 100 8 104 100 15 102 100 10 102 100 12 76 75 11 76 75 20 76 75 13 78 75 18
168. Module status operational status 6 Get NV Serial Number UDINT 7 Get NV Product Name SHORT_STRING 1444 RELX00 04RB Individual Relay Status Group of 4 configuration attributes 8 Get V Relay 0 Status BYTE Bit Coded Output Alarm Relay Status Relay status decoding 9 Get V Relay 1 Status BYTE Bit Coded Output Alarm Relay Status Relay status decoding 10 Get V Relay 2 Status BYTE Bit Coded Output Alarm Relay Status Relay status decoding 11 Get V Relay 3 Status BYTE Bit Coded Output Alarm Relay Status Relay status decoding Relay Configuration Group of 4 configuration attributes 17 Get V Relay 0 Source SINT Link to corresponding voted alarm Relay source decoding object instance and output type 18 Get V Relay 1 Source SINT Link to corresponding voted alarm Relay source decoding object instance and output type 19 Get V Relay 2 Source SINT Link to corresponding voted alarm Relay source decoding object instance and output type 20 Get V Relay 3 Source SINT Link to corresponding voted alarm Relay source decoding object instance and output type 21 Get V Auxiliary Link timeout INT Link timeout 200 ms for open compliance 100 ms otherwise 22 Get V Relay Drive Test Enable BYTE Bit coded relay drive test enables Test enable 23 Get V Relay 0 Drive Test INT Test interval ms Interval 24 Get V Relay 1 Drive Test INT Test interval ms Interval 25 Get V Relay 2 Drive Test INT Test interval ms Interval 26 Get V Relay 3 Drive Test INT Test interval ms
169. OTUSED NOTUSED OUTPUT1HI OUTPUT 1 L0 Application 4 20 mA Output 3 4 20 mA Output 2 S z 5 z D BE E E Terminal 7 8 9 10 11 12 Name SH SH NOT USED SH SH Application Shield Shield 5 E z Z S le z lt Z S p SE E z 5 5 5 2 2 SIS S 3 S Tacho Signal Conditioning Expansion Module The lower module connector carries the tacho sensor inputs while the upper module connector carries the local tacho outputs In addition the TSC module has two further buffered outputs made available at the BNC connectors For each of the two input channels there is a separate signal and return connection and if needed a transducer power supply connection The polarity of that supply output is configurable on a per channel basis When the input to a TSC module is a multiple event per revolution pulse there are choices to what some of the outputs represent The first of the two outputs that is provided on the upper module terminals 18 and 14 is automatically configured to be the same as the output provided on the tacho bus expected to be one event per revolution 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 The second of the two outputs provided on the upper module terminals 17 and 13 is configurable to be the same frequency as the input or as a processed divided down output All of these outputs are TTL
170. Object 2 Get V maximum Instance UINT 1 6 Get V maximum Class Attribute UINT 7 7 Get V maximum Instance UINT 102 Attribute Table 242 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Semantics of ID Rule Attribute Values 1 Get NV Vendor ID UINT 1 RA 2 Get NV Device Type UINT 109 3 Get NV Product Code UINT 72 4 Get NV major Revision USINT Firmware revision See Minor Revision USINT oante 5 Get V Status WORD 6 Get NV Serial Number UDINT 7 Get NV Product Name SHORT_STRING 1444 Dynamix 8 Get V State USINT 9 Get NV Conf Consist Value UINT 101 Get NV Hardware Revision USINT major Revision See semantics USINT Minor Revision 102 Get NV Sub Minor Revision UDINT Sub Minor Revision gt 0 432 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Semantics Firmware Revision Identity Object instance attribute 4 and vendor specific attribute 102 refer directly to the netX communication processor firmware revision but also reflect an overall version identification for a firmware release A breakdown of the associated Firmware Revisions included in a release is tabulated in the following table Release Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Auxiliary TSCX 4 20mA 2 001 2 2 001 2 1 01 02 3 10 3 10 3 10 2 001 7 2 001 7 1 01 08 3 10 3 10 3 13 Hardware Revision Identity Object instance attribute 101 is a vendor specific attribute that is used to identify the hardware revi
171. Object Signal Source Measurement Units Cho 3Complex Units Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Measurement Units Number of Samples Cho 3Complex TWFSamples Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Waveform Record Length Speed Reference Cho 3Complex SpeedRef Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Associated Tacho Source Enable FFT Data Storage Cho 3Complex FFTEn Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Enable Number of Spectrum Lines Cho 3Complex FFTNumLines Dynamix Normal CM Data Object FFT Line Resolution Signal Detection Cho 3Complex FFTSignalDetection Dynamix Normal CM Data Object FFT Line Value Detection Scaling FFT Window Type Cho 3Complex FFTWindowlype Dynamix Normal CM Data Object FFT Window Function Number of Averages Cho 3Complex AveragesCount Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Number of Averages Average TWF Cho 3Complex AvgI WFEn Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Enable gSE Page High Pass Filter Frequency Ch 3Filter HighPassFreq Dynamix Channel Setup Object HP Filter 3 dB Point Speed Reference ChO 3Complex SpeedRef Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Associated Tacho Source Maximum Frequency ChO 3Filter LowPassFreq Dynamix Channel Setup Object LP Filter 3 dB Point Number of Spectrum Lines Cho 3Complex FFTNumLines Dynamix Normal CM Data Object FFT Line Resolution FFT Window Type Cho 3Complex FFTWindowType Dynamix Normal CM Data Object FFT Window Function Number of Averages hd 3Complex AveragesCount Dynamix Normal CM Data Object Number of
172. P interface instances Data Type DWORD Description of Attribute Bits 0 3 value e 0 Not configured e 1 Configuration based on BOOTP DHCP or NV stored configuration 2 IP address based on the address switches module base Bits 4 and 5 relate to pending configuration changes in configuration attributes see standard for details Bit 6 ACD Status is set when an address conflict is detected Bit 7 ACD Fault is set when the current interface configuration cannot be used due to an ACD Semantics of Values 2 Get Configuration Capability DWORD Bit 0 set BOOTP client capable BIT 2 set DHCP client capable Bit 4 set Interface Configuration attribute is settable Bit 5 set Hardware configurable address switches Bit 6 Not set A change in the Interface Configuration attribute takes place immediately Bit 7 set The module is ACD capable 0xB5 10110101 3 Get Set Configuration Control DWORD 4 Get Physical Link Object STRUCT 5 Get Set Interface Configuration STRUCT 6 Get Set Host Name STRING 8 Get Set 442 TTL Value USINT Multicast related Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 1 255 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 267 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Semantics of ID Rule Attribute Values 9 Get Set Multicas
173. Personality Multiplexed 4 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz or Static Paired Multiplier 3 Meas el Pair Number 3 35 7 23 23 i 23 23 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 3 7 Table 16 Multiplier Examples for Module Personality Multiplexed 4 Ch Dynamic 40 kHz or Static Paired Multiplier 4 3 2 1 3 3 3 1 2 1 3 1 Meas Channel uer 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 0 0 2 1 0 1 2 2 1 2 0 3 0 0 2 4 2 1 0 5 1 6 3 7 2 8 2 9 10 2 11 1 13 3 14 2 15 2 16 114 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Speed Page Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 The Speed Page parameters define the source and processing that is applied to the module s two speed measurements Figure 45 Configure Speed Inputs as eS however all other characters can be letters numbers or underscores Cannot contain two contiguous underscore characters and cannot end in an underscore l General a Connection Mode Normal Module Info Speed Time Slot Multiplier Input Name Speed Multiplier Source HW Configuration 0 7 00 Tach Bus 0 l pa hacen Definis 1 100 Tach Bus 1 7 Filters Overall i Tracking Filters Acceleration FFT Input TTL Trigger eT i Demand 0 Positive i
174. RB e The tachometer fault status inputs terminal connections from the tachometer signal conditioner expansion module 1444 TSC X02 02RB or other source e The SpeekOKO 1 bits in the controller output control tag See Tachometer Page on page 158 for further information on defining fault detection for a tachometer signal conditioner expansion module Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure Relays Chapter 6 Communication Fault A communication fault is reported if a fault occurs with the ethernet link from the module Expansion Module Fault An expansion module fault is reported if any of the connected expansion modules report a module fault Each expansion module performs start up tests of memory and function similar to the main module The relay expansion module performs the relay drive test on its relays when commanded by the main module Expansion Bus Fault 10 A timeout function is implemented that requires that a Heartbeat from each expansion module is provided to help ensure that each module is communicating and that the bus is functioning If the heartbeat period times out bus fault is reported in case communication fail between the main and any of its expansion modules fails Expansion Module Fault Output The following faults can be detected and acted on by any of the 1444 series expansion relay module 1444 RELX00 04RB relays Module Fault This is a fault reported
175. REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 13 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 13 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 13 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD Not used Input Assembly Index SINT Not used Output Assembly Index SINT Pad INT Not used Number of input members UINT DWORD 0 member list DWORD DWORD 1 member list DWORD DWORD 2 member list DWORD DWORD 3 member list DWORD BYTE 0 output member list BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 280 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Configuration Group 19 Group 19 contains configuration attributes from these objects e Current Output Module Object 0x39D e Normal CM Data Object 0x398 e Advanced CM Data Object 0x39A e FFT Band Object 0x399 Instances 1 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Appendix B 281 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 74 Config
176. Record SINT Defines the numberof Index 0 5 Length samples in the Normal CM waveform FFT Specific Configuration Group of 3 configuration attributes Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 379 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 176 Instance Attributes 25 Get V FFT Line Resolution SINT Defines the FFT line FFT resolution options resolution that is used in the Normal CM FFTs 26 Get V FFT Window SINT Definition of window FFT window options Function function for FFT signal processing 28 Get V FFT Line Value SINT Allows line bin values 0 Peak Detection Scaling to be returned scaled as 1 Peak to Peak Peak Peak to Peak or i RMS 2 RMS default Attribute Semantics Waveform FFT Storage Format A bit wise control for the storage of the Normal CM Data Table 177 Waveform FFT Storage Format Bit Description 0 FFT as Float 1 FFT as 16 bit FFT as 8 bit Reserved Waveform as Float Waveform as 16 bit AJ wm AJ wj N Waveform as 8 bit Reserved Single setting applies to all stored Normal CM data Trend Alarm and Transient for all channels This parameter has been made available within the configuration such as to permit future Smart memory allocation Currently the internal storage is fixed as float shown in bold previously and represented as a return value of 0x11 TWE FFT data i
177. Signal Conditioner Module Status assembly structure on controller input see I O message formats module status structure Digital Inputs Two inputs are provided to accept TTL signals The TTL signals need a clear distinction between low and high values such that a trigger threshold of 2 5V does not falsely trigger on high or low signal level or noise These inputs are intended for control functions such as a switch for turning ON OFF startup multiplier function 1444 TSCX02 02RB Tachometer Signal Conditioner Expansion Module Two inputs are provided to connect common eddy current probes PNP proximity switches self generating magnetic speed sensors or TTL speed signals 1444 RELX00 04RB Relay Expansion Module The relay expansion module does not accept analog inputs 1444 AOFX00 04RB 4 20 mA Output Expansion Module The 4 20 mA output expansion module does not accept analog inputs 212 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Module Outputs Operate the Module Chapter 9 The Dynamix 1444 Series Monitor Systems accepts the following outputs 1444 DYN04 01RA Dynamic Measurement Module Six outputs of two types are provided Channel Buffer Outputs Four outputs one per channel are provided via ESD and short circuit protected 20V supplies The outputs are accessible by BNC connectors or terminal pins that are independently resistive current limiting protected Digital Outputs Two O
178. T 32 Trigger Mode SINT Pad SINT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 263 Appendix B Table 68 Configuration Group 2 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad INT 0x394 1 33 Trigger Threshold INT 34 Trigger Slope Edge SINT 40 Sensor OK Definition BYTE 41 Sensor OK High Threshold INT 42 Sensor OK Low Threshold INT 43 High RPM Threshold REAL 44 Low RPM Threshold REAL 48 Tacho Bus Output SINT 49 TSCX Terminal BNC Output SINT Pad INT 0x394 2 16 Input Sensor Type SINT 24 Sensor Power Supply SINT 25 Sensor Target pulses per revolution INT 32 Trigger Mode SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x394 2 33 Trigger Threshold INT 34 Trigger Slope Edge SINT 40 Sensor OK Definition BYTE 4 Sensor OK High Threshold INT 42 Sensor OK Low Threshold INT 43 High RPM Threshold REAL 44 Low RPM Threshold REAL 48 Tacho Bus Output SINT 49 TSCX Terminal BNC Output SINT Pad INT 264 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Configuration Group 3 Group 3 contains configuration attributes from these objects e Relay Module Object 0x39C e Dual Measurement Object 0x392 e AC Measurement Object 0x390 Table 69 Configuration Group 3 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute I
179. T Band 6 Order 2 Phase FFT Band 7 Order 3 Magnitude _ Not 1x _ Order 3 Phase Proportional DC E Bias Gap Rod Drop co Cancel Help Parameter Values Comments Speed 0 Checked 1 Check this to include the Speed0 member to the input tag Unchecked 0 The speed written is the value measured from the TTL input 0 or 1 or from the controller output 1 0 and without applying any Speed Multiplier that can be configured Tag Member Speed0 Speed 1 Checked 1 Check this to include the Speed1 member in the input tag Unchecked 0 The speed written is the value measured from the TTL input 0 or 1 or from the controller output 1 0 and without applying any Speed Multiplier that can be configured Tag Member Speed1 FactoredSpeed 0 Checked 1 Check this to include the Factored Speed member to the input tag The Factored Speed is the measured speed multiplied Unchecked 0 by the Multiplier specified on the Speed page Tag Member FactoredSpeed0 FactoredSpeed 1 Checked 1 Check this to include the Factored Speed1 member to the input tag The Factored Speed is the measured speed multiplied Unchecked 0 by the Multiplier specified on the Speed page Tag Member FactoredSpeed1 Speed 0 maximum Checked 1 Check this to include the Speed0 max member to the input tag Unchecked 0 Speed maximum is the maximum observed speed measurement since last reset This is the maximum Speed not Fa
180. TL signal communicated over the Local Bus 52 53 Tacho Bus 0 1 Fault The Local Bus Tacho status 54 55 Pt0 1 Discrete Input Replicated from the Discrete Input 56 59 Transducer 0 3 Fault Transducer Status 127 Module Status Module Status Channel Type gSE Input Tag Measurement Type selections Comment gSE Spike Energy gSE is a processing technique capable of detection of low energy impacts The measure is suitable for early detection of faults in rolling element bearings or gears and detection of other periodic or random low energy impact events Channel Type Static DC Input Tag Measurement Type selections Comment Rod Drop Rod Drop A triggered position rod drop measurement taken at a fixed consistently the same position of the rod during the stroke Axial Differential Expansion Comp Differential Exp A B Axial The measurement of shaft axial displacement using a pair of axial eddy current probe monitoring a shaft collar target such that the measurement range is optimally the sum of the ranges of the individual probes Radial Differential Expansion Comp Differential Exp A B Radial The measurement of differential expansion with axial radial eddy current probe pair viewing concave or convex ramp shaft Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 109 Chapter2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Proportional DC Transmitter Temperature F Transmitter Temper
181. Terms Normal Uniform Performance Gives poor peak amplitude accuracy good peak frequency accuracy Usage Use this only for transient signals that die out before the end of the time sample or for exactly periodic signals within the time sample such as integer order frequencies in synchronously sampled data Flat Top Description Other Terms Sinusoidal Performance Gives good peak amplitude accuracy poor peak frequency accuracy for data with discrete frequency components Use this when amplitude accuracy is more important than frequency resolution In data with closely spaced peaks a Flat Top window can smear the peaks together into one wide peak Tip Because the Bands FFT is exclusive to the bands function so is not stored or communicated externally in any way the Flat Top FFT Window is recommended to assure the best measurement accuracy Hanning Description A general purpose window that is similar to a Hamming window Performance Gives fair peak amplitude accuracy fair peak frequency accuracy Usage It is used on random type data when frequency resolution is more important than amplitude accuracy Most often used in predictive maintenance Hamming Description Performance A general purpose window that is similar to a Hanning window Gives fair peak amplitude accuracy fair peak frequency accuracy It provides better frequency resolution but decreased amplitude accuracy when compared to the
182. The instance and attribute can be set to 1 but they are ignored The host sends the following CM Record Request Parameters as part of an 0x4C service request Data Type Description 0 BufferSelect INT Specify the buffer to retrieve the data from eHIGH_RES_TREND 0 eLOW_RES_TREND 1 eFFT 2 eT WF 3 eTACHO 4 e eHIGH_RES_ALARM 5 e eLOW_RES_ALARM 6 e eFFT_ALARM 7 e eTWF_ALARM 8 eTACHO_ALARM 9 The BufferSelect does not change during a session RequestedCount UNIT RequestedCount 0 returns all records in the buffer RequestedCount 1 returns the most recently collected record Any other positive count returns that number of records from the buffer If the count is greater than the max available records the max available records are returned instead The RequestedCount does not change during a session SessionInstance USINT The SessionInstance is initially specified as 0 but on subsequent calls the SessionInstance returned in CM Record Response must be passed here ChannelSelect BYTE 4 Bits indicating the source channel The ChannelSelect does not change during a session see Channel Select This field is ignored for all overall buffer types eHIGH_RES_ TREND eLOW_RES_ TREND eHIGH_RES_ ALARM eLOW_RES_ ALARM SpecialRequest BYTE Set SR_ mAG_PHASE Bit 0 to request phase and magnitude data from an FFT buffer otherwise just magnitude data is returned B
183. This format supports speed values to 167 772 15 rpm with a resolution of two decimal places Example with data on the wire of 0x 10DC7D05 e 0x10 16 samples per revolution e 0x057DDC 359 900 e RPM 359 900 100 3599 rpm 60 Hz Whether the data is asynchronous or synchronous can be known from the identifier field This data has the following format Bits Description 0 1 Measurement channel 0 1 2 3 from which the data originates 2 Data source Transfer path 0 or 1 3 4 Transfer path 0 data source 0 pre filter 1 mid filter 2 post filter 5 6 Transfer path 1 data mode bit 5 0 asynchronous bit 5 1 synchronous then bit 6 indicates which tacho was used 7 Associated tacho source from the Normal CM Data Object 8 15 Measurement engineering units index not CIP code 16 31 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 389 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 187 Tacho eTACHO Byte Offset Structure Member Data Description within Type Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 Reserved REAL 12 Reserved DWORD 16 Reserved UDINT 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 34 TimingArray UDINT The array of tacho time values 24 bit micro second counter The identifier structure contains coded information recording the source pertaining to fi
184. Transducer Orientation INT Definition of sensor orientation 0 359 degree input range in angle in degrees Orientation increments of 1 angle is usually a radial angular orientation 18 Get V Transducer Location SINT Transducer location definition 0 Unknown 1 Radial 2 Axial 19 Get V Transducer Output Sense SINT Sensor output sense information Fixed at zero only The DC measurement object has normal counter control Transducer Output Definition Group of 5 configuration attributes 24 Get V Transducer AC Units ENGUNITS Transducer measurement units Supported engineering units that are used for AC measurement base 25 Get V Transducer AC Sensitivity REAL TX AC Sensitivity in mV TX AC Range 1 20000 units 26 Get V Transducer DC Units ENGUNITS Transducer measurement units Supported engineering units that are used for DC measurement base 328 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 121 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B 27 Get V Transducer DC sensitivity REAL Transducer DC sensitivity in mV Range 1 20000 TX DC units 28 Get V TX Power Setup SINT Coded configuration for sensor Transducer OK Configuration power supply configuration Definition is independent of the selected transducer application type TX OK Detection Group of 3 configuration attributes 32 Get V Transducer OK Configuration BYTE Definition of which conditions are Transducer O
185. Type selection in the Channel Definition group it can be easier to select the appropriate Measurement Type value before configuring the sensor attributes e Channel Definition Parameters that define the integration and filtering requirements for each channel e Discrete I O Definition Parameters that define how the module s discrete input and output channels are used e Dynamic Data Storage One parameter that defines how the module internally holds dynamic data that is captured by the module Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 105 Chapter 2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Table 14 Hardware Configuration Parameter Xdcr Units Values The supported engineering units include the following Comment Select the Engineering Units the sensor measures and to which the transducer sensitivity is referenced in mV Engineering Unit V inch s bar kw UK g min The Channel Type Module Definition and the Measurement Type mV m s2 mbar MW m3 min determine the available selections m mm s psi VA gSE mm inch s A kVA RPM micron g mA VAR RPM min inch mg K kVAR EU mil Pa l min m s kPa oF cfm mm s MPa Ww US g min The Engineering Units cannot be set or changed if the Channel Type is OFF or gSE Xdcr Sensitivity Any real number between 1 and 20 000 Enter the sensitivity of the conn
186. User Manual Allen Bradley Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Catalog Numbers 1444 DYNO4 01RA 1444 TSCX02 02RB 1444 RELXO0 O4RB and 1444 AOFX00 04RB Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation configuration and operation of this equipment before you install configure operate or maintain this product Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes laws and standards Activities including installation adjustments putting into service use assembly disassembly and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwe
187. X00 04RB expansion modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Relay Expansion Module Figure 33 The Relay Expansion Module Page E 1444 DYNO4 01 RA Output Data 5 1444 Expansion Module Type 1440 RELX00 04RB 4 Pt Relay Output 1444 TSCx02 02RB popes fy 1444 RELX00 04RB 0K cancel Help Use the parameters on this page to edit the address of a connected relay expansion module for the selected 1444 DYN04 01RA dynamic measurement module Verify that the physical address set in the relay expansion module terminal base matches the value entered here Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 91 Chapter2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Define Module Functionality Page Use the define module functionality page to specify the high level application of the module This page is also where the general measurement definitions for the module and each channel are made The selections made here are used throughout the tool including on other module definition pages and the configuration pages to guide further selections In configuration the relays are numbered as follows e 1444 DYN04 01RA onboard Relay relay 0 e 1444 RELX00 04RB at address 0 relays 1 4 e 1444 RELX00 04RB at address 1 relays 5 8 e 1444 RELX00 04RB at address 2 relays 9 12 IMPORTANT __ If
188. a session 2 RequestedCount UINT RequestedCount 0 returns all records in the buffer RequestedCount 1 returns the most recently collected record Any other positive count returns that number of records from the buffer If the count is greater than the max available records the max available records is returned instead The RequestedCount does not change during a session 4 SessionInstance USINT The SessionInstance is initially specified as 0 but on subsequent calls the SessionInstance returned in CM Record Response must be passed here 5 ChannelSelect BYTE 4 Bits indicating the source channel The ChannelSelect does not change during a session This field is ignored for all overall buffer types eOVERALL_TDO eOVERALL_TD1 eOVERALL_TD2 eOVERALL_TD3 6 SpecialRequest BYTE Bits 0 1 and 2 are not used Set SR_FILTER Bit 3 to request that if samples are decimated or synchronously re sampled then only 50 of the configured FFT lines are to be returned For further information see FFT Data Filter SR_FILTER under Sampling Control in the Channel Setup Object 7 Pad BYTE Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary 8 PacketCountDow n DWORD The PacketCountDown is initially specified as 0 but on subsequent calls the PacketCountDown returned in the response must be passed here Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Ch
189. a wire off condition for powered eddy current probes when a faulted sensor is replaced or a loose wire is reconnected measurements that are made on the associated channel can spike as they transition to their normal state This condition is often exacerbated by momentarily intermittent on off connections as wires are connected and tightened in place To prevent further alarms due to these transitory events the module will latch any wire off state for 30 seconds after the fault condition has cleared before transitioning a faulted transducer to its normal non faulted state Speed Inputs Two inputs are provided to accept transistor transistor logic TTL signals The TTL signals need a clear distinction between low and high values such that a trigger threshold of 2 5V does not falsely trigger on high or low signal level or noise These inputs are designed to sample sufficiently fast to satisfy the module speed measurement specifications Speed Input Fault Detection Speed input fault detection is dependent on the type of input provided The following table lists the each of the supported types of speed input and how the module manages fault detection for each of them Source Fault Detection Local TTL Tach Input No fault detection is associated with TTL signal input However an associated tachometer status signal a TTL can be wired to the associated digital input for the selected speed input When the local Logic I
190. able 33 Measurement Alarm Measurement Selection Options Measurement Channel Type Measurement Type Overall 0 1 Channel 0 3 Dynamic gSE Any Static Eccentricity DC V Channel 0 3 Dynamic gSE Any Order magnitude 0 4 Dynamic Any Channel 0 3 Order is Enabled Order Phase 0 4 Channel Dynamic Any 0 3 Order is Enabled Order value is an integer no fractions FFT Band 0 8 Channel 0 3 Dynamic gSE Any FFT Band is Enabled Not 1X Channel 0 3 Dynamic Any Order 0 is Enabled Order 0 value 1 0 DC Channel 0 3 Static Any SMAX magnitude Channel Pair 0 Dynamic X shaft relative 1 2 3 Y shaft relative Aeroderivative SMAX Phase Channel Pair 0 1 2 3 Shaft Relative LP HP filtered Shaft Absolute pk pk Channel Dynamic Ch A Shaft Relative LP HP filtered Pair 0 1 2 3 Ch B Std case absolute vibration AV to D or Std case absolute vibration V to D Speed 0 1 If Speed input is Enabled Any Factored Speed 0 1 Speed maximum 0 1 Speed Rate of Change 0 1 Axial Differential Expansion Static Ch A Complementary Differential Expansion A Channel Pair 0 1 2 3 Ch B Complementary Differential Expansion B Ramp Differential Expansion Static Ch A Ramp Differential Expansion A Channel Pair 0 1 2 3 Ch B Ramp Differential Expansion B Rod Drop 0 3 Static Rod Drop Measurement Alarms provide the usual
191. accordance with applicable code of practice In case of malfunction or damage no attempts at repair should be made The module should be returned to the manufacturer for repair Do not dismantle the module This equipment is certified for use only within the surrounding air temperature range of 25 70 C 13 158 F The equipment must not be used outside of this range Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Exposure to some chemicals can degrade the sealing properties of materials used in the WARNING This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation following devices e DYN module Relay RL1 Epoxy e Expansion Relay Module Relay RL1 through RL4 Epoxy Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 European IECex Hazardous Location Approval The following applies to products marked II 3 G Such modules e Are Equipment Group Il Equipment Category 3 and comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements
192. acho bus register this identification event and start restart a tacho event count e each tacho event is then similarly identified on the independent main modules same count value is applied to the same tacho event 400 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B To retrieve synchronized data the following approach is used e an 0x4B service is sent with Sync Data Control set to zero any of the modules e the module replies with Sync Data Control set to a specific value a particular tacho event number e send an 0x4B service to the remaining modules with the specific Sync Data Control value that was received from the first request e request the data itself with Ox4C services to all modules see next section Synchronization can be applied using either one of the two possible TSCX tacho signals but the associated Advanced CM tacho source setting on each of the channels modules must reflect the same tacho signal An eDeniedRequestAlreadyInProgress status indicates that an earlier request is in progress and the data from that request has yet to be collected Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 401 AppendixB CIP Objects 0x4C Advanced CM Data Record Request This request is sent after the Advance CM data request has returned an anticipated processing time and that time has elapsed If the request is made before the data is ready a resource not available status
193. actuate and therefore any relays assocated wtih it See 1 0 Control on the Voted Alarm page for further information Speed 0 Fault If wiring a TTL tacho source to the terminal base rather than via the Speed 1 Fault local bus this input can be used to communicate the tacho channel status 108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 14 Hardware Configuration Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Parameter Values Comment Discrete Outputs Parameter Values Comment Pt0 1 The 1444 DYN04 01RA includes two discrete opto isolated outputs These provide output of selected status conditions or replication of selected input signals i Function Description 0 OFF Output is not used 1 13 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Alarm The status of the selected Voted Alert Status Alarm when the alarm is configured to activate on an alert condition 17 29 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Danger The status of the selected Voted Alert Status alarm when the alarm is configured to activate on danger conditions 33 45 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Fault The status of the selected Voted Alert Status alarm when the alarm is configured to activate on a transducer fault condition 48 49 Local TTL Tacho 0 1 Input Replicated from the TTL signal connected to the terminal pins 50 51 Tacho Bus 0 1 Replicated from the T
194. ad INT 0x393 3 20 Tracking Filter Definition Tacho 0 REAL 21 Tracking Filter Definition Tacho 1 REAL 32 Tracking Filter 0 setup REAL 33 Tracking Filter 1 setup REAL 34 Tracking Filter 2 setup REAL 35 Tracking Filter 3 setup REAL 0x393 4 16 Tracking Filter Configuration BYTE Pad SINT 0x393 4 17 Order Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 Order Measurement Scaling SINT 19 Tracking Filter Mode SINT Pad INT 0x393 4 20 Tracking Filter Definition Tacho 0 REAL 21 Tracking Filter Definition Tacho 1 REAL 32 Tracking Filter 0 setup REAL 33 Tracking Filter 1 setup REAL 34 Tracking Filter 2 setup REAL 35 Tracking Filter 3 setup REAL 270 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 71 Configuration Groups 5 16 CIP Objects Appendix B Configuration Groups 5 16 The Measurement Alarm Object has 24 instances spread across 12 groups two instances per configuration group In the following table for a particular group N 1 2 Group 5 Examples e Group 5 N 1 source instances 1 and 2 to e Group 16 N 23 source instances 23 and 24 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x396 N 16 Alarm Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x396 N 7 Alarm Measurement Identifier INT 19 Alarm Form SINT 20 Alarm Type SINT 21 Alarm Processing Mode SINT Pad SINT 0x396 N 24 Low Alert Threshold REAL 25 High Alert Threshold REAL 26
195. age is NOT a 40 kHz type or either of 2000 18 _ the aero derivative types 1800 20 1700 22 Available for all 4 kHz and 18 kHz Module Personalities Module Definition and if the Measurement Type 1500 24 Hardware Page is NOT a 40 kHz type 1400 26 1300 28 1200 30 1100 32 Note If the Channel measurement type Aeroderivative the Range is limited to 22 32 0nly in the case of Individually Multiplexed channels is a divisor allowed per channel The module provides two hardware analog to digital converters ADC s one for channels 0 amp 1 and one for channels 2 amp 3 Each ADC samples at 93 750 samples per second 187 500 for 40 kHz personalities However the ADC s include a Sample Rate Divide SRD capability that reduces the rate of samples output to the module Because the sample rate drives the resulting maximum frequency and because it is desirable to put as much of that processing in the hardware rather than firmware the Dynamix module allows users to set the SRD value effectively specifying the maximum frequency FMAX that is available from the ADC Users do not directly set the SRD Rather a menu is provided which lists appropriate FMAX selections that have corresponding SRD values The available FMAX selections vary with the personality The value that is written to the configuration assembly is the Sample Rate Divisor not t
196. ain module The appropriate choice of the Module Type enables Multiplexing Multiplexing is not a means to connect different signals to the inputs Rather it is to provide a method to allow use of all four channels when the sample rate requirement is greater than the module can perform continuously on four channels Table 216 Object Instances Instance ID Description Class Instance for the MUX Object 1 Instance 1 Table 217 Object Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Descriptionof Semantics Attribute of Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT The MUX object revision 8 Get NV MUX BOOL Yes this 1 Yes Configured configuration uses MUX 9 Get NV Number of USINT Not Used Fixed at 1 enabled subchannels 10 Get Overall cycle REAL Time to s actual time complete to measured MUX cycle Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 409 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 218 Instance Attributes Attribute AccessRule NV Name DataType Descriptionof Semantics of ID Attribute Values Read Time Slot Configuration 1 Get V Time slot WORD Bit wise All 16 bits channel channel used enables enables for time slots 0 to 3 2 Get V Time slot 0 REAL Time slot 0 S DAQ time minimum DAQ time 3 Get V Time slot 1 REAL Time slot 1 S DAQ time minimum DAQ time 4 Get V Time slot 2 REAL Time slot 2 S
197. ains the parameters shown below table 14 It communicates the status of the dynamic measurement module s single onboard relay relay 0 and the status of the relays in each of the up to three connected expansion relay module s relays 1 4 5 8 and 9 12 The table consists of discrete bits one per relay When set the bit indicates that the associated relay is energized The status structure consists of these parameters Relay Status Bit Status Description if 1 0 Relay 0 Energized main module relay is energized 1 Relay 1 Energized Relay Expansion Module 0 Relay 0 is Energized 2 Relay 2 Energized Relay Expansion Module 0 Relay 1 is Energized 3 Relay 3 Energized Relay Expansion Module 0 Relay 2 is Energized 4 Relay 4 Energized Relay Expansion Module 0 Relay 3 is Energized 5 Relay 5 Energized Relay Expansion Module 1 Relay 0 is Energized 6 Relay 6 Energized Relay Expansion Module 1 Relay 1 is Energized 7 Relay 7 Energized Relay Expansion Module 1 Relay 2 is Energized 8 Relay 8 Energized Relay Expansion Module 1 Relay 3 is Energized 9 Relay 9 Energized Relay Expansion Module 2 Relay 0 is Energized 10 Relay 10 Energized Relay Expansion Module 2 Relay 1 is Energized 11 Relay 11 Energized Relay Expansion Module 2 Relay 2 is Energized 12 Relay 12 Energized Relay Expansion Module 2 Relay 3 is Energized 13 15 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P
198. ak REAL Processed S max Peak output 0 output when not an XY application 2 Get V Phase angle of the S max Peak REAL Phase angle of attribute 1 0 output when not an XY Vector application 5 Get V Axial Differential Expansion REAL Processed axial differential expansion 0 output when not configured output CDE or Ramp 6 Get V Radial Ramp Diff Expansion REAL Processed radial differential expansion 0 output when not configured output ramp only 8 Get V Shaft Abs Vib Peak REAL Processed shaft abs vib pk output 0 output when not configured 9 Get V Shaft Abs Vib pk pk REAL Processed shaft abs vib pk pk output 0 output when not configured Differential Expansion Group of 4 configuration attributes 16 Get V Sensor A Ramp Angle REAL Ramp angle for sensor input A in Setup information degrees 17 Get V Sensor B Ramp Angle REAL Ramp angle for sensor input B in Setup information degrees 18 Get V Overall Axial Offset REAL An overall axial offset in DC Applicable to Ramp and CDE measurement units applications Range 50000 50000 19 Get V Overall Radial Offset REAL An overall radial offset in DC Ramp only measurement units Range 25000 25000 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 343 Appendix B 344 CIP Objects Attribute Semantics Output Enable Transducer disabled status overrules the enabled channel processing setup Ramp Angle Ramp angle is held explicitly for information used
199. al CM data can be set to higher lines samples and this setting reflects in Trend and Alarm data but stored Transient Data is 800 line FFT and 2048 point TWF FFT Window Options Following window processing options are selectable Index FFT Window 0x00 0 Normal Rectangular 0x01 1 Flat Top 0x02 2 Hanning 0x03 3 Hamming Table 180 Averages Index Number of Averages 0x00 0 1 0x01 1 2 0x02 2 3 0x03 3 6 0x04 4 12 0x05 5 23 0x06 6 45 0x07 7 89 0x08 8 178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 383 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 183 CM Record Request Parameters 0 BufferSelect Table 181 Common Services Service Code Ox0E Implementation Service Name Description of Service Instance Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Table 182 Object Specific Services Service Implementation ServiceName Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x4B Reserved Reserved 0x4C x Normal CM Data Data types consisting of multiple bytes are Record Request transferred in little endian format least significant byte first Also a data communication session starts at the first service request and ends after the final response of the exchange or after timeout of 30 seconds 0x4C CM Record Request Normal CM data is retrieved using a series of reque
200. al that has been decimated or resampled synchronously as described previously one of the internal LP filters has to be used to provide anti aliasing protection for the resampled stream Due to the relatively slow roll off of these filters they have to be positioned well within the expected FFT FMAX This positioning means that a proportion of the FFT lines reflect frequencies at which the signal amplitudes are significantly attenuated If the FFT Data Filter capability is enabled appropriate bit set in the FFT request then if the data to be returned is affected by this then only 50 of the Normal lines are returned This return allows for the worst case of the 24 dB octave filter With this control you have the choice at the point of request whether to receive the full or the reduced filtered Data Set e Ifthe bit is set and the data is not decimated or synchronously re sampled then 100 of the available FFT lines are returned e Whether the data has or has not been filtered is indicated by a bit in ucDataSelect of the FFT header e The actual filter setting is not checked simply whether this filter is decimated or synchronously resampled data e Where data filtering results in different number of lines being returned the data requests will be appropriately grouped for like data lengths This data filter can be requested on any CM data object that supports the return of FFT spectral data Higher Frequency modes 334
201. alarm The module provides two methods of gating speed and I O Logic gate control Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure Alarms Chapter 7 Speed gating lets you select either of the two speed inputs either the direct or factored speed value a high and or low speed limit and the customary conditional lt lt 2 gt The gate is TRUE and the voted alarm that is applied when the measured speed satisfies the condition evaluates to TRUE For I O Logic gate control the control signal can be provided either from the controller via its control output tag or from either of the discrete inputs when properly assigned See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 For controller based gate management 2 bits are provided in the controller output s control tag bits 5 and 6 Either control 0 1 can be specified for each voted alarm When the control bit is set 1 then the gate is TRUE and the voted alarm is evaluated Gating can also be controlled by use of either of the discrete inputs The assigned discrete input must be configured on the hardware configuration page and must also be selected 0 1 in the specific voted alarm definition Relay Control When a relay is assigned a voted alarm as its input it inherits the voted alarm latching and fail safe definitions Latching Latching applies to both the logical voted alarm and to any associated physical relay When an alar
202. aled measurements are calculated as the Square Root of 2 x the RMS value 2x if pk pk or approximately 1 707 or 2 414 x the RMS value These are recommended when the measurement must consider the total energy in the signal Overall 0 1 Units Displays the Engineering Units for the measurement The Units for Overall 0 are the units after any integration is applied and are the same as Measurement Units shown on the Hardware Configuration page The Units for Overall 1 are the same as the Xdcr Units specified in the Hardware Configuration page as this measurement is always taken from the signal before any required integration is applied Overall 1 Time Constant 0 100 60 000 Enter the time constant for the overall measurement Notes The time constant is written to the RMS or the PEAK tag value depending on the selected Signal Detection method above e The detection time constant defines the output smoothing filter for RMS based detection methods or the decay rate of the peak detection methods Set longer time constants to reduce the responsiveness of the measurement to rapid changes spikes noise or shorter to increase the responsiveness Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 127 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Tracking Filters The dynamic measurement module of the Dynamix 1444 Series can apply up to four tracking filters per channel This page is used to con
203. als Measurement Pulses Per Revolution Transducer Type 0 500 Positive 0 000 Negative Y v Tach Expansion Module Fault High Limit rpm Low Limit rpm Parameter Values Comments Transducer Power Select the power requirement for the connected sensor Transducer Power Value Note Set to Off if the sensor is self powered such as a Off Magnetic Pickup or if it is powered from a separate 0 source including a barrier or isolator 24V DC 1 24V DC 2 Auto Trigger Enable Checked 1 When Auto trigger is enabled checked the module Unchecked 0 automatically sets the trigger threshold When not enabled unchecked the Trigger Level specified is applied Note Auto Trigger is not available in the initial release firmware Trigger Level 32 000 lt Trigger Level lt 32 000 Enter the desired trigger level in Volts ex 2 4 The Tachometer Signal Conditioner module trigger function applies a fixed hysteresis of 800 mV Consequently the minimum pulse height that can be triggered is approximately 1 volt Note The tag and object retain the value in millivolts For example a 2 4 Volt trigger level yields a 2400 millivolt tag value Trigger Slope Enter the direction of the desired trigger slope Trigger Slope Value Note The trigger is leading edge if the slope is the i same as the direction as the pulse positive sl
204. amix Transient Data Manager Object Overall Delta Time SU Coast Down Delta RPM Trigger TransientCapture CoastDownDeltaRPM Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object Overall Delta RPM CD Coast Down Delta Time Trigger TransientCapture CoastDownDeltaTime Dynamix Transient Data Manager Overall Delta Time CD Object Engineering Units ENGUNITS data type The Dynamix 1444 series supports the following engineering units Each unit is assigned a specific value which is what is used to populate the member of the configuration assembly so is communicated to the module In the CIP Library all attributes of type ENGUNITS require a value as shown Table 59 Engineering Units ENGUNITS data type Value Descriptor Value Descriptor Value Descriptor 11520 V 4873 Pa 3330 kVA 11521 mV 4874 kPa 3331 VAR 8704 m 3072 MPa 3332 kVAR 8707 mm 4871 bar 5139 l min 8708 micron 4872 mbar 5122 cfm 8711 inch 4864 psi 5129 US g min 2048 mil 7168 A 2560 UK g min 11008 m s 7170 mA 2561 m min 2304 mm s 4610 K 2560 gSE 11015 inch s 4608 ec 2561 gE 5376 m s 4609 oF 7951 RPM 2816 mm s 9728 w 3841 RPM min 5378 inch s 9734 kw 3840 EU 5380 g 3328 MW 2817 mg 3329 VA IMPORTANT __ If there is a need to set engineering unit values then care must be taken to help ensure that the units of the sensor and subsequent converted or integrated units are consistent with the func
205. an be returned e eUnrecognizedSession 1 e emaxSessionsReached 2 e ePacketCountOutOfSequence 3 e elnvalidBufferSelect 4 e eNoDataAvailable 5 e eGeneralError 6 For all successful requests eSUCCESS 0 is returned any other value ends the session 16 Data Array DWORD 50 Each record is an array of DWORDs of size RecordSize This array of records can be large It is the calling applications responsibility to handle these records appropriately The DWORD type is just a placeholder for the actual types in the data structure that maps to this RecordArray See the next section for details Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 385 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 185 FFT eFFT The Record Type Structures are as follows Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 SamplePeriodInSecs REAL Can be used to calculate the bandwidth for the FFT 12 Identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 ucDataSelect BYTE If Bit 0 is set phase array follows the mag array in the returned data array Otherwise just the magnitude array is returned Bits 1 amp 2 indicate FFT scaling 0 Peak 1 Peak to Peak 2 RMS Bit 3 is set if FFT Data Filter has been applied 17 ucSpeedByte0 BYTE RPM value of the referenced speed source fo
206. ance of the CIP Time Sync Object0 Class Instance 200 Module EDS file Table 249 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Semantics of ID Rule Attribute Values 3 Get Number of UINT Number of instances present 0 65535 Instances 32 Get Directory Array of Attribute 3 indicates the array For the EDS STRUCT depth instance Instance Number UINT OxC8 Instance Name STRINGI EDS and Icon Files File Name STRINGI EDS txt Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 435 Table 250 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of ID Rule Type Attribute Values 1 Get State 2 Get Instance name STRINGI EDS and Icon Files 3 Get Instance Format Version UINT 1 4 Get File Name STRINGI EDS txt 5 Get File Revision USINT major Minor As within the EDS file 6 Get File Size UDINT Bytes 7 Get File Checksum INT 8 Get Invocation Method USINT 255 Not Applicable 9 Get File Save Parameters BYTE 0 10 Get File Type USINT 1 Read Only 11 Get File Encoding Format USINT 0 Binary Attribute Semantics State 0 Nonexistent 1 No file loaded 2 Fled loaded 3 Transfer Upload Initiated 4 Transfer Download Initiated 5 Transfer Upload in Progress 6 Transfer Download in Progress 7 Storing 8 255 Reserved Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 20
207. and signal analysis including integration e Supports Spike Energy gSE measurements e Implements HP and LP filters 4 pole Butterworth with infinitely variable 3 dB points e Sophisticated and flexible alarm logic e Protection alarm checking typically every 40 ms e Relay output SPDT rated for 30V DC and 250V AC e FFT analysis capability Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Product Description System Overview About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 1 Configurable for specialist measurements such as Rod drop Ramp or complementary differential expansion Eccentricity Absolute shaft vibration Over 20 different measurement parameters per measurement channel such as RMS peak FFT band RMS order magnitudes phase and speed Onboard storage of Trend data discrete and dynamic data records Alarm Event data discrete and dynamic data records Transient data discrete and dynamic data records Expansion modules available to enhance system capabilities 4 channel Relay output module up to three per each DYN module 2 channel Tacho Signal Conditioning module 4 channel 4 20 mA output module The Dynamix series consists of just six core part numbers and various accessories for connectors and cables A minimum Dynamix 1444 Series monitoring system consists of the following One DYN module which is comprised of a terminal base a module and e
208. and type 83 integrates this signal to displacement whereas type 80 does not The tacho signals are expected to be representative of gas generator and power turbine shaft speeds Running a tracking filter from each tacho allows the 1x components in the signal from each contributing source shaft to be identified and measured e LP HP filtering with 60 dB per octave characteristic e Two fixed 5 Hz bandwidth tracking filters for the gas generator 1x and power turbine 1x e The first order is must be Tacho 0 the second order Tacho 1 e Outside a speed range of 5 400 Hz the output of the tracking filters is set to zero e Expected SRD is 32 minimum that is allowed is 22 e In this SRD range full CM capability including synchronous sampling are available 4 These are applications in the general dynamic category where for up to 4 kHz bandwidth full filtering processing measurement and condition monitoring capabilities are available SRD is adjustable from 32 9 the latter providing the 4 kHz bandwidth 5 Types 92 and 93 are for Dynamic Pressure applications Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 255 Appendix B 256 CIP Objects Type 93 instigates a special processing scheme that is optimized for faster update of FFT band measurement data to support gas turbine combustion monitoring Other measurement processing including CM data transfer is not supported in this mode Type 92 su
209. annel Select Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel 0 1 2 3 Reserved The Dynamix 1444 as part of an 0x4F service response return the following Table 102 Ox4F Service Responses Byte Offset StructureMember Data Description within Type Structure 0 SessionInstance USINT The host copies the SessionInstance returned here into each subsequent CM Record Request Up to 3 instances are supported 1 DynamicChannel USINT Indicates the dynamic channel for this record Channels 0 3 are valid channels 2 Completed Records UINT This is incremented each time that another complete record has been transferred There are often several packets per completed record 4 RecordSize UINT For a given session the RecordSize returned here is fixed 8 PacketCountDown DWORD The host copies the PacketCountDown returned here into each subsequent Record Request When the PacketCountDown reaches 0 the session is complete and the final value in CompletedRecords is all that is transferred 12 Status DINT Any of the following can be returned e eUnrecognizedSession 1 e emaxSessionsReached 2 e ePacketCountOutOfSequence 3 e elnvalidBufferSelect 4 e eNoDataAvailable 5 e eGeneralError 6 e eLiveMeasurementinProgress 13 For all successful requests eSUCCESS 0 is returned any other value ends the session 16 Data Array DWORD Each record is an array of DWORDs of size RecordSize This array of 50 records can be l
210. annel Setup Object HP Filter 3 dB Point Alternate Processing Path Processing Ch0 3Filter AltPathMode Dynamix Channel Setup Object Alternate Path control Mode Fmax Alternate Decimation Ch0 3Filter AltPathFMAXDecimation Dynamix Channel Setup Object Decimation attribute 23 Low Pass Filter Alternate Frequency ChO 3Filter LowPassFreq Dynamix Channel Setup Object Alternate LP Filter 3 dB Point Alternate Path Tachometer Ch 3Filter SyncTachoSource Dynamix Channel Setup Object Synchronous Tacho Source Alternate Path Synchronous Pulses Per Revolution ChO 3Filter SynchSamplesPerRevolution Dynamix Channel Setup Object Synchronous Samples Per Revolution Overall Page Overall 1 Signal Source Ch0 30verall SourceB Dynamix AC Measurement Object AC Overall Measurement Source Overall 0 Signal Detection Ch0 30verall SignalDetectionA Dynamix AC Measurement Object AC Overall magnitude Detection Method Overall 1 Signal Detection Cho 30verall SignalDetectionB Dynamix AC Measurement Object AC Overall magnitude Detection Method Overall 0 Time Constant Chd 30verall RMSTimeConstantA Ch 30verall PkTimeConstantA Dynamix AC Measurement Object Dynamix AC Measurement Object AC Overall Measurement RMS TC AC Overall Measurement Peak TC Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 245
211. anning Measurement mil X Number of Averages 1 X Bands Band Enable Measurement Mode Speed Reference Band Overall X Orders v Band Overall xj Orders x Band Overall xj 0 10 100 00 hz xj x Band Overall xj 0 10 100 00 hz xj hd Band Overall xi 0 10 100 00 hz xj xi Band Overall xi 0 10 100 00 hz v xi Band Overall v 0 10 100 00 hz z v Band Overall Md 0 10 100 00 hz Md Y Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 139 Chapter 3 Table 27 Bands Measurement Definition Parameter Values Comments Enable Enable checked Check the box if the FFT Bands is calculated from this channel Disabled not checked Signal Source Select from Select the signal source for the FFT to be used in the Bands measurements See the Filters page for a description of the ADCout various signal source locations Pre Filter The Pre Filter selection is available only if the Primary Path Decimation 1 no firmware decimation to assure that data e Mid Filter is alias free Post Filter e Alternate Path Sample Rate See Help Displays the Sample Rate as shown in the Filters page for the selected data source Maximum Frequency See Help Displays the maximum Frequency as shown in the Filters page for the selected data source Measurement Units See Help Select the Engineering Units for the FFT to be used in FFT Band measurements T
212. ansducer Fault The Alarm is not evaluated so never TRUE if the transducer is in a Fault Considered condition Any alarm that was TRUE actuated clears if the associated transducer goes into fault Transducer Fault The Alarm is forced to TRUE actuated when the transducer is in a Fault Monitored condition This is regardless of the value of the measured parameter Transducer Fault The behavior of the alarm remains strictly defined by the measurement Not Considered Depending on the nature of a transducer fault and the specifics of the measurement a fault can force the measurement high or low Also consider Dual Channel The above applies if either sensor faults Measurements Speed Measurements The above applies if the speed transducer faults Speed Dependent The above applies if the associated transducer faults OR if the speed Measurements transducer faults Deadband 0 20 Enter a deadband hysteresis as a percentage of the alarm limit or alarm window range This is the amount that the measured value must increase above or fall below the non alarm state direction the limit after exceeding it before the alarm condition clears The intent of the deadband is to minimize chatter where a measurement oscillates around the alarm limit and causes the alarm condition to repeatedly set and unset For window alarms the deadband is the stated percentage of the range of the window high low
213. any saved IP address or the saved configuration A type 2 hard reset is executed by sending a type 2 reset service Because a module immediately loads its configuration from nonvolatile memory and begins monitoring a module does not persist in its hard reset state Reset Procedures The following table summarizes the information that is held in the volatile and nonvolatile memories and indicates what each type of reset deletes Delete on Reset Common Out of Box Hard Reset Type 0 Type 1 Type 2 Trend and Transient Data Yes Alarm Trend Data Host Controller ID Executing Configuration Saved Configuration No Yes Connection Information Event Log No Hardware Type 0 Common Reset To perform a type 0 common reset 5 Disconnect power from the module 6 Wait at least 2 seconds 7 Restore power to the module The module powers up and connects to the network that uses the connection information previously established After completing its self test procedure the module loads the configuration that is saved in nonvolatile memory and begins monitoring Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 199 Chapter9 Operate the Module Hardware Type 1 Out of Box Reset To perform a type 1 out of box reset 1 In Studio 5000 Logix Designer go to the connection page of the module properties and inhibit the module File Edm View Search Logic Communications Toots Window Help
214. arate alarm threshold factor can be applied 366 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 160 Source Selection CIP Objects Appendix B Hysteresis Hysteresis is defined here as a percentage rather than a fixed deadband value e For threshold alarms the deadband is the stated percentage of the threshold e For window alarms the deadband is the stated percentage of the range of the window high low The following are examples of hysteresis e An over threshold alarm of 10 hysteresis 10 gives hysteresis threshold at 9 10 of the threshold away from the threshold e An outside window alarm of 0 to 10 hysteresis 10 gives hysteresis thresholds at 1 and 9 10 of the window range away from each threshold e An outside window alarm of 10 to 10 hysteresis 5 gives hysteresis thresholds at 9 and 9 5 of the window range away from each threshold Source Selection Based on the 4 DWORD bit allocations that are used for defining what data is contained in the Trend Transient and Controller Input assemblies Index DWORD 0 Index DWORD 1 Index DWORD 2 Index DWORD 3 0 Overall 0 ChannelO 32 Order 2 Phase Channel 0 64 FFT Band 20 96 Factored Speed 0 1 Overall 0 Channel1 33 Order 2 Phase Channel 1 65 FFT Band 21 97 Factored Speed 1 2 Overall 0 Channel 2 34 Order 2 Phase Channel 2 66 FFT Band 22 98 Axial Differe
215. are the new Trend Buffer status 02 Alarm Data Set Status Bytes 8 9 are previous Alarm Buffer status bytes 10 11 are the new Alarm Buffer status 03 Transient Data Set Status Bytes 8 9 are previous Transient Buffer status bytes 10 11 are the new Transient Buffer status Notes Buffer events indicate a change in status of these buffers example armed to populating or population to data ready Worked Example of Event Decoding Each event log entry is a 16 byte record consisting of a number of sub structures Example hex data on the wire 01 15 71F53854 9600 00 00 00 00 00 40 00 00 Table 118 Event Log Entries Subsection Location Example Event Type Byte 0 01 Event ID Byte 1 15 Event time seconds Bytes 2 5 5438F571 Event time subseconds Bytes 6 7 0096 Event Data Bytes 8 15 00 00 00 00 00 40 00 00 Decoding Example e Event type 0x01 System event e Event ID 0x15 DSP reported status decimal 21 e Event time 0x5438F571 11 October 2014 10 16 33 local time e Event time 0x0096 15 ms 150 x 0 1 ms so 10 16 33 015 e Event Data up to 4 bytes of pre event data 4 bytes of post event data e Fora DSP reported status event all 8 bytes are used e Pre event status is 0x00000000 e Post event status is 0x00004000 Analysis bit 14 of the DSP status has changed from 0 to 1 meaning a link or auxiliary module error has been detected Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 201
216. arge It is the calling applications responsibility to handle these records appropriately The DWORD type is just a placeholder for the actual types in the data structure that maps to this RecordArray See the next section for details Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 317 AppendixB CIP Objects The Record Type Structures are as follows Table 103 Overall Data eOVERALL_TDx Byte Offset StructureMember DataType Description within Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 Reserved DWORD 12 Reserved DWORD 16 OverallEnableBlockO DWORD Static Data Source 1 of 4 attributes 64 67 20 OverallEnableBlock1 DWORD 24 OverallEnableBlock2 DWORD 28 OverallEnableBlock3 DWORD 32 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 36 OverallArray REAL The array of overall data Table 104 FFT eFFT_TDx Byte Offset StructureMember Data Description within Type Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 SamplePeriod nSecs REAL Time period between samples or speed and no of samples per revolution 12 Identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 ucDataSelect BYTE Not used for transient data Only Magnitude data is available Bit 3 is set if FFT Data Filter has
217. arm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 275 Appendix B Table 72 Configuration Group 17 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x397 5 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 5 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 6 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 6 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 6 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 7 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT
218. arm Object Alarm Type Relay Control Latch Enable VotedAlarm00 13 LatchEn Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Behavior Relay Page Main Module Relay Enable ModuleControl RelaySource Dynamix Module Control Object Relay Source Main Module Relay Voted Alarm ModuleControl RelaySource Dynamix Module Control Object Relay Source Number Main Module Relay Alarm Status to ModuleControl RelaySource Dynamix Module Control Object Relay Source Activate On Main Module Relay Module Fault ModuleControl ModuleFault Dynamix Module Control Object User Local Relay Control Main Module Relay Tach Fault ModuleControl TachFault Dynamix Module Control Object User Local Relay Control Hd Module Relay Communication ModuleControl CommunicationFault Dynamix Module Control Object User Local Relay Control au Main Module Relay Expansion ModuleControl ExpModuleFault Dynamix Module Control Object User Local Relay Control Module Fault i Module Relay Expansion Bus ModuleControl ExpBusFault Dynamix Module Control Object User Local Relay Control ault Main Module Relay Latch Enable ModuleControl LatchEnabled Dynamix Module Control Object User Local Relay Control Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 249 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 58 Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference Expansion Module Relay Enable ExpansionRelay0 2 Relay0 3Source Dynamix Relay Module Object Relay
219. articularly noticeable on the positive bias where it is approximately 1 3 V This is by design and has no effect on functionality 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 14 Hardware Configuration Parameter Xdcr Low Limit V DC Values 24 000 24 000 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Comment Low voltage threshold for the TX OK monitoring window A sensor bias voltage less than this value forces a transducer fault condition To aid transducer failure detection the signal input circuitry imposes in the absence of a functioning transducer a bias voltage at the input The bias applied is automatically selected based on the power supply configured for that channel Power Typical Bias Voltage at Input OFF 1 7 VDC 24V DC 4 mA 3 9 VDC 24V DC 25mA 3 9 VDC 24V DC 25mA 13 VDC Within a channel pair 0 amp 1 2 amp 3 there will be slight differences in the bias voltages particularly noticeable on the positive bias where it is approximately 1 3 V This is by design and has no effect on functionality Xdcr Location Select from the following e Unknown e Radial e Axial Select the location of the transducer that pertains to the alignment of the sensor with the monitored shaft Use Radial if the most sensitive direction of measurement is perpendicular to the shaft Use Axial of the most sensitive direction of measure
220. as Valve z This is list of the different output configurations Table 29 Output Configuration Parameter Values Comment Enable Enabled checked or Not Check the box to enable output from each respective Enabled not checked 4 20 mA output channel Measurement Available selections are Select the measurement to be output on the referenced dependent on the Channel Type see Define Module Functionality page in Module Definition and the Channel Measurement Type See Hardware onfiguration Page on page 105 for the channel that is associated with each measurement See Table 30 on page 163 to view all available settings Analog Module channel Low Engineering Any Enter the value in Engineering Units that is to correspond to an output magnitude of 4 mA High Engineering Any Enter the value in Engineering Units that is to correspond to an output magnitude of 20 mA Units N A Displays the Engineering Units for the selected measurement Fault Mode Output State Select from Select the desired behavior on fault Hold Last Value If Hold Last Value the output re mains at the last measured lt 4mA value before the fault occurred gt 20mA If lt 4 mA the output is driven to 2 9 mA If gt 20 mA the output goes to 21 mA Faults that result in the defined behavior include e Transducer Fault for the channel associated with the measurement e Expansion Bus Failure e Expansion Mo
221. as the zero position adjusting the probe gap to say 10 Vdc This value is equivalent to 1 27 mm 50mils for a probe sensitivity of 7 87 V mm 200mv mill The OFFSET value is entered as 1 27 mm 50mils Note For TOWARD setting enter the OFFSET as a Plus value This value also means movement Toward the Active pads result in a decreasing gap voltage 146 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Monitoring Thrust Position with an HMI The typical approach in configuring the HMI to visualize the rotor thrust position is to configure the monitor to show a plus value for thrust against the active pads sometimes referred to as normal Also the monitor can show a minus value for thrust against the inactive pads sometimes referred to as counter The monitor zero value must be set with the rotor hard against the active thrust pads or at a setting that is provided by the machine OEM who can advise on the Hot Float Example Steam Turbine application imperial units with Rotor showing five mils of movement against the active thrust pads MILS MILS 4m s 30r 20 10 5 o 5 10 s 20 sL 5 5 AWAY AWAY Cho Ch1 This movement could represent the normal running position for this rotor due to the effect of the increased Hot Float with the machine at running temperature and load IMPORTANT Donot change the probe gap setting or the monit
222. at the outlet of the High Pass Filter e Ifa signal includes a DC offset it will only be removed AC coupled within the High Pass Filter If no HPF is applied the signal will include any DC offset DC coupled Alternate Processing Path Processing Mode Processing Mode OFF Synchronous w 48 dB LP Filter Asynchronous w 48 dB LP Filter Select the sampling mode and the Low Pass Filter quality to apply to the Alternate Signal Path data Alternate Path processing is performed only if Alternate Path is selected as a data source on the FFT Bands or Demand data pages If it is not specified as a source Alternate Path data is not processed regardless of its definition Synchronous Measurement modes are available only when a physical speed signal is available see Speed page Source can be from any of Tach Bus 0 1 or Local TTL Tach Input 0 1 Decimation Alternate Select a level of decimation to apply by selecting the desired Maximum Frequency FMAX for the alternate signal path See the following Decimation Tables for available selections When asynchronously sampling the alternate signal path provides a decimation stage that further divides the sample rate in firmware from the output of the ADC This selection presents selected FMAX values based on the Module Personality Module Definition and the sample rate out of the ADC The value written to the configuration assembly is the Alternate Path Decimat
223. ategory 1 conductors Ifin a continuous metallic wireway or conduit route at least 0 08 m 3 in from category 1 conductors of less than 20 A 0 3 m 1 ft from AC power lines of 20 A or more but only up to 100 kVA 0 6 m 2 ft from AC power lines of greater than 100 kVA Ifnotin a continuous metallic wireway or conduit route at least 0 15 m 6 in from category 1 conductors of less than 20A 0 3 m 1 ft from AC power lines of 20 A or more but only up to 100 kVA 0 6 m 2 ft from AC power lines of greater than 100 kVA Route conductors external to all raceways in the enclosure or in a raceway separate from any category 1 conductors with the same spacing as listed for category 2 conductors where possible Use the spacing that is given in these general guidelines with the following exceptions e Where connection points for conductors of different categories on a device are closer together than the specified spacing e Application specific configuration for which the spacing is described in a publication for that specific application These guidelines are for noise immunity only Follow all local codes for safety requirements Given the Dynamix 1444 series system component top and bottom I O access we recommend that you use cable ducts to organize and provide separation of I O wiring In the case of high voltage relay contact wiring 120 250V AC and or high current load assign top or bottom relay contacts or use Expa
224. ature C Transmitter Temperature K DC Current DC Voltage Proportional voltage measurements Position Common thrust axial position measurement Measures the offset and direction of movement Accelerometer Temperature F Accelerometer Temperature C Accelerometer Temperature K Proportional voltage measurements Eccentricity The measurement of shaft bow the shaft peak to peak displacement at slow roll speed by either of two methods with or without a speed input Channel Type Dynamic AC Input Tag Measurement Type selections Comment Shaft Absolute pk pk Shaft Relative LP HP filtered Calculates the peak to peak shaft absolute radial displacement measured from the sum of A shaft to case relative displacement eddy current probe measurement and A case absolute displacement measurement from an integrated velocity transducer or double integrated accelerometer that is mounted in line with the eddy current probe The first channel of the pair must be the accelerometer or velocity sensor and its Measurement Type must be one of absolute vibration A to D absolute vibration AV to D absolute vibration V to D The second channel of the pair must be the displacement sensor and its Measurement Type set to Shaft Relative LP HP 110 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Channel Type
225. averses the critical frequency Without applying this multiplier the vibration levels can exceed danger setpoints which can force a machine trip during a normal machine startup Control of the limit multiplier on off is provided through the set point multiplier SPM function A bit on the controller output assembly or by a physical input switch to the module manages the SPM SPM is defined as part of any voted alarm definition that uses the measurement alarm See Voted Alarms Page on page 179 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 177 Chapter 7 178 Configure Alarms Adaptive Multipliers The five adaptive multipliers are alternatives to the single SPM managed static limit multiplier Adaptive multipliers enable a method for the automatic application of an alarm limit multiplier that is based on a measured attribute such as speed When using adaptive multipliers each of the multipliers is associated with a range of whatever the control parameter is If the value of the control parameter is outside of the specified ranges such that no multiplier is applicable then a multiplier of 1 0 is used Output Tag Limits A third alternative to how limits are defined is to use output tag limits When enabled on the select data to be added to the output tag page in module definition 16 values REALs are included in the controller output assembly for use as alarm limits When output tag limits is selected as
226. be treated the same The Transducer OK status is based on the following checks For the Transducer Status to be OK the following must be true e The transducer DC bias voltage must be within the configured OK window limits attributes 33 34 e The channel must have passed an internal calibration check at last startup 330 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Channel Setup Object CIP Objects Appendix B Where the sensor is a negatively powered Eddy Current Probe the module will perform two additional checks e The transducer power supply provided by the module is delivering at least 2mA e The transducer DC bias voltage remains negative These two checks are based on hardware monitoring designed to be quickly detect any discrepancy and are referred to as wire off detection Once a wire off condition has been detected this failure is latched for 30 seconds any reoccurrence causing this timer to be restarted such that recovery from a wire off condition will be 30 seconds after the last detected event This measure aims to ensure that signals have stabilized Table 122 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Instance Ox0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute The Channel Setup Object class code 0x38F defines the basic sample rate decimation and filter cutoff frequencies and alternate path proce
227. bjects Appendix B The data that is sent with an Advanced CM data request is divided into two separate sections the class section and four instance sections This process is similar to how EtherNet IP classes are constructed with one class instance and multiple instance instances The host sends the following Advanced CM Data Request Parameters as part of an 0x4B service request Table 202 Advanced CM Data Request Parameters Byte Offset Structure Member Data Description within Type Structure Class Instance 0 Pad USINT 1 Advanced Session USINT Seconds to have ownership of Advanced CM setup Timeout 2 Advanced Session UINT Set to 0 unless restarting an existing unexpired request where Instance you d pass in the Advanced Session Instance from the previous response 4 Sync Data Control UINT Used to request synchronized data from multiples modules Instance 1 Channel 0 6 Pad WORD Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary 9 Number of Averages SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A 10 Waveform Record SINT Defines the number of samples in the Advanced CM waveform Length 11 FFT Line Resolution SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A but with extra indices e 5 3200 lines 6 6400 lines e 7 12800 lines 12 FFT Window Function SINT Identical control to that use in the Normal CM Data Object 0x30A 1
228. blication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 287 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 74 Configuration Group 19 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad SINT 0x398 3 19 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 20 Associated Tacho Source SINT 21 Waveform Record Length SINT 24 FFT Enable SINT 25 FFT Line Resolution SINT 26 FFT Window Function SINT 27 FFT Averages SINT 28 FFT Line value detection scaling SINT Pad SINT 0x398 4 16 Enable BYTE 17 Signal Source SINT 18 Number of averages SINT Pad SINT 0x398 4 19 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 20 Associated Tacho Source SINT 21 Waveform Record Length SINT 24 FFT Enable SINT 25 FFT Line Resolution SINT 26 FFT Window Function SINT 27 FFT Averages SINT 28 FFT Line value detection scaling SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 0 16 Synchronized data control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39A 1 16 Source Selection SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 1 17 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 Associated Tacho Source SINT 19 Waveform Record Length SINT Pad INT 0x39A 2 16 Source Selection SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 2 17 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 Associated Tacho Source SINT 19 Waveform Record Length SINT Pad INT 0x39A 3 16 Source Selection SINT 288 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 74 Configurati
229. by the band Mode Band Overall e Band maximum pk e Freq of Band maximum pk Band Overall Returns the calculated RMS value of the band e Band maximum pk Returns the magnitude of the bin with the highest amplitude within the band This value is in Peak Peak to Peak or RMS value as defined by the signal detection that is defined for the bands FFT above Freq of Band maximum pk Returns the frequency in Hz of the bin that contains the highest amplitude within the band Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 141 Chapter 3 Table 27 Bands Parameter Band 0 7 Band Limit Begin Measurement Definition Values If domain Hz then must be gt 0 If domain Orders then must be gt 0 1 Comments Enter the begin frequency or order for the band e The module calculates the specific FFT bin that this value equates to e Ifan order value is entered the bin number that this corresponds to changes as machine speed changes If the calculated bin is less than 0 1 or greater than the Nyquist Frequency for the selected data source then the FFT Band value is 0 Band 0 7 Band Limit End If domain Hz then must be gt Band Limit Begin above and lt Nyquist Frequency If domain Orders then must be gt Band Limit Begin above and lt 50 0 Enter the ending frequency or order for the band e The module calculates the specific FFT bin that this value equates t
230. c Data Source DWORD 67 DWORD 3 Transient Static Data Source DWORD Dynamix Data Manager The Data Manager Object class code 0x38B defines the setup data storage and Object Table 86 Instance Attributes data access for Dynamix Trend and Dynamix Alarm data records The Normal CM Data Object 0x398 configures which dynamic data is available to the Data Manager Object Table 84 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Data Manager Class Instance 1 Table 85 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Data Manager Setup Instance Name Description of Attribute 1 Revision Defines revision of Dynamix Data Manager Object Attribute ID Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values Rule 1 Get V Trend Data Set Usage BYTE Not implemented fixed at zero Use attribute 24 2 Get V Trend Data Set Status BYTE Returns the current operational Bit 0 is set when the Low Resolution mode Overall Trend records are cycling Bit 1 is set when the High Resolution Overall Trend records are cycling Bit 2 is set when the FFT dynamic records are cycling Bit 3 is set when the TWF dynamic records are cycling Bits 4 to 7 are not used Cycling means that the buffer has filled and is now overwriting earlier entries 3 Get V Trend Overall Data Records UINT Returns the number of staticdata Fixed depth 641 records that the buffer 4 Get V Trend Dynamic Data Record Sets UNIT Returns
231. cal Bus Extension Cables cise vse cde lavcenvete nae 4l Relay Contact Protection ji220c0 sys ose ogee ioe 42 Installation Overview ac winwweaew dentate ta rsmnen ete knunsatadenaste 43 Mount the Terminal Base Wtitiek wat oct ease ei ae aa Sree eB SO Ree 45 Establish Bus Connections ac cuStatg sdotne as wee paste ceed ees anes 46 Configure the Terminal BaseS cchicsos 3 Viel enna ee yee decries 47 Configure the Main Terminal Base sic ivskes ou keseseiweevreces 47 Configure the Relay Terminal Bas 5ncisuknsesddonesens hecnees 48 Configure the 4 20 mA Terminal Base iv s0s cc ererseetes panies 48 Configure the Tacho Signal Conditioning Terminal Base 49 Install thie MiG dil esses a a ack id es es So Sel ache cele eect peck nents as 49 Wiring OYerVie We aeearg 0 phina peie nina pitt Salsas bwin waarmee 50 Wiring the Main Module iccw cnc genaicee bistw duno eseeert hier 51 Upper Base Connector ios acinawiies cae deee ev sad es tues 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 5 Table of Contents Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Upper Module Connectors c2ccc3 esi Ge 58 Lower Module Connectors ses ave sa ah den tasked eee anania 60 Lower Base Connector cece ccc e cece nce ence eee e ea eeenees 62 DYN Module Transducers 055 wa ttieeicd ee ss bebekexedeiees 63 Proximity Probes roscoe icenaren peed anda he OPS be omnes 63 2 wire Acceleration Pressure or Piezoelectric Velocity Sensors 6
232. ce Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x390 5 33 Minimum RPM for Peak per revolution REAL 0x390 6 16 AC Overall Measurement Source SINT Pad SINT 0x390 6 17 AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 AC Overall Measurement RMS TC REAL 19 AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL 20 AC Overall magnitude Detection SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x390 7 17 AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x390 7 18 AC Overall Measurement RMS TC REAL 19 AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL 20 AC Overall magnitude Detection SINT 32 Configure Peak per revolution SINT Pad INT 0x390 7 33 Minimum RPM for Peak per revolution REAL 0x390 8 16 AC Overall Measurement Source SINT Pad SINT 0x390 8 17 AC Overall Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 AC Overall Measurement RMS TC REAL 19 AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL 20 AC Overall magnitude Detection SINT Pad SINT Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 267 AppendixB CIP Objects Configuration Group 4 Group 4 contains configuration attributes from these objects e DC Measurement Object 0x391 e Tracking Filter Object 0x393 Table 70 Configuration Group 4 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x391 1 16 DC Measurement Units ENGUNITS Pad INT 0x391 1 17 DC Measurement TC REAL 18
233. channel 0 1 2 3 from which the data originates 2 Data source Transfer path 0 or 1 3 4 Transfer path 0 data source 0 pre filter 1 mid filter 2 post filter 5 6 Transfer path 1 data mode bit 0 asynchronous bit 5 1 synchronous then bit 6 indicates which tacho was used 7 Associated tacho source from the Normal CM Data Object 8 15 Measurement engineering units index not CIP code 16 31 Reserved Behavior Data that are stored during a transient event consists of both overall and dynamic data Attributes 64 67 specifies the overall data to be captured e Those attributes can specify different data to that data stored in the Trend Buffer or that transferred across the I O connection e The set of measurements can be freely chosen from all channel and measurement combinations e A maximum of 61 measurements is supported the speed reference for the transient event is added automatically e Each overall record consists of current values of all configured measurements triggered by a change in rpm or elapsed time 320 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B The dynamic data is generally that specified by the Normal CM data object It is limited to a maximum of 800 line FFT and 2048 point TWF Each dynamic record consists of TWF FFT generally from across the four channels triggered by a change in rpm or elapsed time Dynamic records are captured at one tenth t
234. cho Bus 0 4 Tacho Bus 1 5 mapped to 1 0 data Speed 0 Fixed source locations for data and OK status 6 mapped to 1 0 data Speed 1 Fixed source locations for data and OK status Higher Values Reserved 0x00 defines this Tacho as disabled multiple sources not allowed Selection allows theoretically that an equal source can be used for both object instances Tacho OK Source Selection For the main tacho sources Bus 0 Bus 1 I O 0 and I O 1 a dedicated Tacho OK provision is made and is selected automatically For the Local Tacho inputs however it is sometimes possible to provide an OK signal using a local logic input The Tacho OK source selection can be used to configure whether this feature is enabled or not To use the corresponding logic input as an OK indication set the OK source equal to the Tacho source Examples Tacho source selection 1 e Tacho OK source selection 1 uses local Logic Input 0 e Any other value results in permanent Tacho OK state Tacho source selection 2 e Tacho OK source selection 2 uses local Logic Input 1 e Any other value results in permanent Tacho OK state Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 359 Appendix B 360 CIP Objects When the local Logic Inputs are being used as described in the previous examples leave open for a Tacho OK state and short the appropriate input to trigger a Tacho Fail condition Table 153 Common Services Service Im
235. cifying Sampling Control decimation in the main asynchronous processing stream 19 Get V SRD SINT SRD Sample Rate Divider Sampling Control Range 2 12 20 Get V Alternate Path Control SINT Alternate path control 0 Asynchronous 1 Synchronous 2 Not Used 3 Asynchronous with independent 48 dB octave LP filtering 21 Get V Synchronous Tacho Source SINT Only applicable when alternate path isset 1 Tacho 0 to option 1 or 2 2 Tacho 1 22 Get V Synchronous Samples Per INT Only applicable when alternate path isset 4 8 16 32 64 128 Revolution to option 1 or 2 23 Get V Decimation INT Only applicable when alternate path isset Range 1 255 to option 3 Constraints due to attribute 24 are as described in Sampling Control 24 Get V Alternate LP Filter 3 dB REAL Only applicable when alternate path is set Hz Point Range 10 5000 332 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Semantics Enabled Instances Following bit coding scheme is used to identify which channel setup instances are enabled Bit Description 0 3 Measurement channels 0 3 0 disabled 1 enabled 4 7 Reserved for full multiplexing 8 12 Reserved for full multiplexing 13 15 Reserved set to 0 Disabled instances return error 0x08 Service Not supported when disabled instances are addressed with common services Sampling Control The following are different aspects of Sampli
236. configuration Module definition then includes additional dependant attributes These attributes are used to filter the selection of the input assembly attributes based on the application and the types of inputs to each channel Other attributes that are controlled in module definition include specification of connected expansion modules which define the complete hardware available for configuration as well as other high level attributes that are not expected to be edited once the device is initially defined IMPORTANT When Module Definition is applied the AOP creates instances of the Configuration Input and Output assemblies After editing an existing Module Definition the AOP will reset only configuration parameters that have a dependency on a changed Module Definition parameter e For example if a Channel Input Type is changed then only the parameters associated with the changed channel will be set to their default values Users should thoroughly review the configuration after making any change to an existing Module Definition Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 89 Chapter 2 90 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Module Configuration Module Configuration consists of all normal configuration pages that are added to the tree below the standard General Connections and Module Info pages For the Dynamix 1444 Series much of what is enabled in these pages is determined base
237. configured for Run up data mode buffers storage 4 Get V Coast Down Data Set Usage BYTE Provide information as to which of the 4 Bits 0 3 for the 4 normal buffers are configured for coast down data mode buffers storage 5 Get V Transient Buffer Status DWORD Coded reference to the current status ofeach 4x4 bits for of the 4 buffers such as Free Populating the Normal Data Ready Processing and Latched Transient conditions buffers High Level Transient Operation Group of 2 configuration attributes 16 Get V Transient Data Mode Control WORD Configuration of transient data collection Range 0 1825 Mode Normal or fast transient buffer allocations and so on 16 Get V Transient Dynamic Data SINT Future functionality Fixed value 0 Source Selection Default is whatever the Normal CM Data defines Transient Data Acquisition Group of 9 configuration attributes 23 Get V Source of Speed Data SINT Source of speed data for transient data Range 1 4 acquisition 24 Get V Low Speed Threshold DINT Defines the speed threshold that initiatesa RPM startup transient and identifies where a Range 1 28000 coast down transient stops 25 Get V High Speed Threshold DINT Defines the speed threshold that initiatesa RPM coast down transient and identifies where a start up transient stops Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Range 50 29000 311 Appendix B Table 98 Instance Attributes C
238. conversion In addition to resistance value and precision functional requirements consider resistor power rating pertaining to heating and maximum surface temperature under normal and fault conditions A list of appropriate terminals for each channel follows Typical Core Designation Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Power 1 5 9 13 Return 2 6 10 14 Fit Load Resistor 3 and 4 7and8 11 and 12 15 and 16 Complete the configuration as follows e Configure the sensitivity as Load R 16 TX Range millivolt degree e Set an appropriate offset so 4 mA 0 1 For slightly higher accuracy include the effect of the channel input resistance Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 69 Chapter 1 70 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Tacho Signal from a Directly Connected Source While it is expected that a TSC Expansion module is the normal source of a tacho signal for a system each DYN module can accept up to two local or direct tacho inputs IMPORTANT As these are not isolated from other module circuitry it is not recommended that multiple tacho inputs from across different 1444 Series DYN modules are connected to the same tacho source The local inputs are designed for situations where there is a TTL level tacho signal available a tacho sensor with an open collector output such as NPN type or connection to an Opto output on another modu
239. cted 3 Partial network fault 4 Rapid fault restore cycle 10 Get Active Supervisor Address STRUCT See standard 12 Get Capability Flags DWORD Module does not provide ring supervisor or redundant gateway functions Capability flag is fixed at 130 440 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Quality of Service Object Table 260 Common Services CIP Objects Appendix B Service Implement Instance Service Name Code ation Class 0x01 X Get_Attributes_ All Ox0E X X Get_Attribute_Single The Quality of Service Object class code 0x48 is part of the standard Hilscher netX100 EIP protocol stack Before ODVA testing this object is completed updated in line with the latest stack released by Hilscher Table 261 Object Instances Instance Description ID 0 Class Instance of QOS Object 1 Instance 1 of the QOS Object Table 262 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of ID Rule Type Attribute Values 1 Get NV Revision USINT Defines the current revision ofthe Current Revision 1 QOS Object 2 Get NV maximum USINT 1 instance Table 263 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of ID Rule Attribute 1 Get V 802 10 Tag Enable USINT Virtual LAN Tagging 4 Get V DSCP Urgent USINT Differentiated Services Code Point
240. ction of bits Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 445 AppendixB CIP Objects The Status attribute reports the status that is based on the state of an instance of the object The assignment of values to r Status is as follows Value Description 0 Nothing new no update 1 Success on transfer 2 Success on programming 3 Failure on transfer 4 Failure on programming 5 Faulted Table 276 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name code Class Instance Ox0E x X Get Attribute Single Common Codes and Structures Table 277 Generic CIP Status Codes Code Name Description 0x00 0 Success Service was successfully performed by the object specified 0x01 1 Connection failure A connection related service failed along the connection path 0x02 2 Resource unavailable Resources are needed for the object to perform the requested service were unavailable 0x03 3 Invalid parameter value See Status Code 0x20 which is the preferred value to use for this condition 0x04 4 Path segment error The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the processing node Path processing stops when a path segment error is encountered 0x05 5 Path destination unknown The path is referencing an object class instance or structure element that is not known or is not contained in the processing node Pa
241. ction options terminal inputs tacho bus 1 0 data or OFF 17 Get V Tacho OK Source SINT Choice of OK source when OK source options using the local tacho inputs 18 Get V Tacho Name SINT 32 Tacho descriptive name 32 characters 19 Get V Speed Multiplier REAL Definition of multiplier for Default of 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 the factored Speed measurement Range 0 01 100 357 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 152 Instance Attributes 21 Get V Tacho Trigger SINT main module has 0 Positive Slope Edge configurable edge 1 Negative detection Rate of Change of Group of 2 configuration Speed attributes 24 Get V ROC Delta Time REAL Delta Time The time Range 0 1 20 s between speed values that Default of 0 5 s are used to evaluate the rate of change 25 Get V ROC TC REAL The time constant that is Range 0 1 20 s applied to the measured speed values before they are used for ROC assessment Trigger threshold for the main module is fixed at 2 5V 358 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Default of 0 2 s are not normally gt ROC delta time CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Semantics Tacho Source Selection This selection defines which source to use for this tacho and speed processing input Value Description 0 OFF 1 Local TTL Tacho Input 0 2 Local TTL Tacho Input 1 3 Ta
242. ctions 0x00 defines the relay as disabled multiple sources not allowed Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Relay Drive Test Enable Relay drive test enable and settings are automatic based on higher level configuration like SIL and Voted alarm allocations Bits 0 3 for relays 0 3 bit value is set to 1 if the test is enabled When enabled the test period configured in reflected in attributes 23 24 25 26 The routine relay drive circuit test applies only to fail safe applications where the drive can be momentarily de energized Failure of a routine drive circuit test is flagged in the status information that is returned via the main module Table 226 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service ON des stan Ox0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Get requests to certain attributes require data to be requested from the auxiliary module itself If that module is not present active on the bus an embedded server error is returned in response to the request Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 419 Appendix B Dynamix Current Output CIP Objects Module Object The Current Output Module Object class code 0x39D configures the 4 20 mA current outputs of the single supported current output expansion module This object defines the setup for the Current Ou
243. ctored Speed So it excludes any multiplier that can be specified on the Speed page Tag Member Speed0 max Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 95 Chapter 2 Table 10 Input Data Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Parameter Values Comments Speed 1 maximum Checked 1 Check this to include the Speed1 max member to the input tag Unchecked 0 Speed maximum is the maximum observed speed measurement since last reset This is the maximum Speed not Factored Speed So it excludes any multiplier that can be specified on the Speed page Tag Member Speed1 max Speed 0 Rate of Change Checked 1 Check this to include the SpeedORateOfChange member to the input tag This is the Rate of Change of the Speed not of Unchecked 0 the Factored Speed So it excludes any multiplier that can be specified on the Speed page Tag Member Speed0RateOfChange Speed 1 Rate of Change Checked 1 Check this to include the Speed 1RateOfChange member to the input tag This is the Rate of Change of the Speed not of Unchecked 0 the Factored Speed So it excludes any multiplier that can be specified on the Speed page Tag Member Speed1RateOfChange SMax pk pk Checked 1 Check this to include the S MAX magnitude member for the selected channel pair to the input tag Unchecked 0 Channel Pair Tag Member 0 1 ChO_1SMAXMAg 2 3 Ch2_3SMAXM
244. d See 0x4F Transient Record Request Ox4F Transient Record Request Transient data is retrieved using a series of request response unconnected messages One service is used to both start and continue with a session The first request initiates the session and subsequent requests return values that the service returns When the packet count down value returned reaches 0 the session is completed The instance and attribute can be set to 1 but they are ignored Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 315 Appendix B 316 CIP Objects The host sends the following Transient Record Request Parameters as part of an Ox4F service request This process is identical to the Data Manager Object 0x38B Service 0x4C CM Buffer Upload Both services call the same service handling code That code is why the buffer select codes do not overlap with the codes for the Data Manager Object Table 101 Ox4F Transient Record Request Byte Structure Offset Member within Structure Data Type Description 0 BufferSelect INT Specify the buffer to retrieve the data from e eOQVERALL_TDO 10 eFFT_TDO 11 e eTWF_TDO 12 eTACHOL_TDO 13 e eQVERALL_TD1 14 eFFT_TD1 15 e eTWF_TD1 16 eTACHOL_TD1 17 e eQVERALL_TD2 18 eFFT_TD2 19 e eTWF_TD2 20 eTACHOL_TD2 21 eQVERALL_TD3 22 eFFT_TD3 23 e eT WF_TD3 24 eTACHOL_TD3 25 The BufferSelect does not change during
245. d by a voted alarm status record For more information see Dynamix 1444 Monitoring System User Manual publication1444 UM001 Voted Alarm Logic Clarification When defining the logic to apply in a voted alarm the Logic control uses the form A out of B In all cases the number B refers to the first B entries in the measurement alarm input list Alarm Status To Activate On Alert v Danger Transducer Fault Measurement Alarms Input0 Alarm0o Inputt Alarm01 Input2 Alarm02 v Input3 Alarm03 Zj Logic hd Relay Control Each input_ member can be assigned to any enabled measurement alarm Consequently the Logic can be made to apply to any group of measurement alarms Measurement Alarms Inputo Alarm05 Input1 Alarm02 Input2 Input3 Alarmoo v Table 49 Voted Alarm Status Voted Alarm Status 0 12 Bit Status Description 0 Activated One or more associated relay outputs and status indicators is set 1 Disabled Alarm is disabled 2 Latching Configured as latching 3 Alarming Required conditions for the alarm state are true Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 227 Chapter9 Operate the Module Table 49 Voted Alarm Status 4 Bypassed Alarm is bypassed associated relays status indicators held in non alarm state 5 SPM Setpoint
246. d for the Sensor mV OK monitoring window Range 24000 24000 43 Get V High RPM Threshold REAL High RPM Threshold for the Sensor RPM OK monitoring window Range 50 30000 44 Get V Low RPM Threshold REAL Low RPM Threshold for the Sensor RPM OK monitoring window Range 0 5 29000 TSC Output Configuration Group of 2 configuration attributes 48 Get V Tacho Bus and TSCX terminal SINT Define processed signal typetobe 0 1 rev signal connections output 0 output on the Tacho bus and 1 multi pulse raw signal terminal output 0 Fixed at 0 49 Get V TSCX terminal connections SINT Define processed signal type tobe 0 1 rev signal output 1 output via terminal interface 1 multi pulse raw signal Fixed at 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 353 AppendixB CIP Objects Attribute Semantics TSC Module Status The Auxiliary TSC module reports its status as part of the normal exchanges with the main module The bit assignments are as follows Bit Description Auxiliary module not responding Auxiliary module configured MSP code CRC fault MSP high temperature Link fail Halt active Ni wm AJ wl N MSP RAM fault MSP RAM access error Bits 0 7 are common to all types of auxiliary module bits 8 to 15 are specific to type The auxiliary module controls Bits 1 15 the main module sets bit 0 If bit 0 is set the remaining bits
247. d normal load this clearance or float increases by potentially as much as 50 and is referred to as the Hot Float Normal practice is to establish the Cold Float by Bumping the rotor shaft between the inactive and active pads and measuring this distance Bumping is used to push the rotor it requires the coupling spacer to be removed and can require jacking equipment first against one set of pads and then against the other This process establishes the Cold Float the Hot Float can only be determined by reference to the machine OEM The two most common applications where thrust monitoring is encountered are steam turbines and compressors Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Steam Turbines Steam turbines normally Thrust toward the Exhaust End of the machine For example from the High pressure end toward the Low pressure end The turbines normally have the thrust bearing positioned at the HP end of the machine as shown in the following diagram Thrust Position Sense Direction Away Machine Shaft Inactive Pads Center Position THRUST COLLAR x Running Position The thrust probes are also at this end of the machine therefore the direction of normal thrust is AWAY from the probes It is difficult if not impossible to set the rotor in the middle of the float Normal practice is to locate the rotor hard a
248. d on any of the selected fault conditions Latch control for the alarm input is included in the Voted Alarm definition Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure Relays Chapter 6 Relay Management Overview Relays are commonly used in a monitoring system to provide annunciation of a change in machine condition trip a machine preclude start of a machine The relay management system provides a flexible implementation where relays can be defined to act on e Any voted alarm which includes any faults that are implicit in the voted alarm definition e Any voted alarm which includes any faults that are implicit in the voted alarm definition and selected system faults e Any selected system faults a dedicated fault relay Alarm Output Each relay can reference one voted alarm However because the status of the voted alarm could be alert danger transducer fault disarm or module fault the specific status necessary to actuate the relay must also be defined A voted alarm can be configured to actuate on alert danger and or transducer fault You can also define how the measurement alarms input to the voted alarm behave if a transducer fault occurs This flexibility provides the tools necessary to define systems with relays that for example e Actuate only when the voted logic is based on actual alarm level measurements e Actuate when the voted logic is based on alarm level or faulted measurements
249. d on the selections in Module Definition Configuration attributes can be changed without concern for the physical device definition connected expansion modules and sensor types such as alarm limits measurement definitions and trend configuration In many cases the available selections are limited by those attributes within the available selections for that type of device Expansion Device Definition Dialog Part of defining a 1444 series module is specifying any connected expansion modules It can make sense to specify modules before working through the other module definition dialogs because it defines the physical installation The expansion device definition dialog is used to add any expansion modules that are hosted by the selected 1444 DYN04 01RA module The tool provides controls to select a device and assign an address Expansion Device 1444 TSCX02 02RB x Address From the expansion device pull down menu select the type of expansion module to add to the tree and connect to the selected dynamic measurement module Use the address pull down menu to select an address 0 1 2 for a connected relay module 1444 RELX00 04RB See Relay Expansion Module on page 91 e Configuration of expansion modules is included in the configuration of the expansion module s host module e Addresses are set automatically for connected Tachometer Signal Conditioner 1444 TSCX02 02RB and 4 20 mA analog 1444 AOF
250. d standard SPDT relays Each SPDT relay that is used in a DPDT solution can be on the same or different expansion relay module but exclude the SPDT on the main module 1444 DYN04 01RA That relay includes slightly different functionality than the expansion module relays Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 171 Chapter6 Configure Relays Notes 172 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Chapter 7 Configure Alarms The Dynamix 1444 Series 1444 DYN04 01RA dynamic measurement module includes a sophisticated alarming system that can meet the alarm detection voting and relay management requirements of any monitoring application Three linked elements define the alarm system including measurement alarms voted alarms and relays Topic Page Measurement Alarms Page 173 Voted Alarms Page 179 Relays 186 Measurement Alarms Page Page Overview The following overview describes the dynamic measurement module v Enable Alarm Alarm Brg 1X Overall Alarm Settings Measurement Overall 0 Channel 0 z Deadband 10 Condition over Threshold Zi Alert Alarm Delay 0 000 s Transducer Fault Behavior Actuate Alam z Danger Alarm Delay 0 000 s Limit Apply Limits From Static Limits X Static Limits Danger High 8 00 Alert High 6 00 Alert Low 0 00 Danger Low 0 00 Limit Multiplier 1 00 Copy Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN
251. d to advantage in Multiplexing and Cross Module Synchronization modes Likewise there are large circular buffers for corresponding Tacho Times The size relationship between these two buffers is 16 1 For example a full set of Tacho Times is available whenever the sample rate synchronous or asynchronous is equivalent to at least 16 samples per revolution Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 411 AppendixB CIP Objects Dynamix Relay Module Object 412 For multiplexed measurements it is possible for the available Tacho Times to not always provide full coverage for the sample data This occurs when low frequency slow speed measurements where fewer than 16 samples per revolution and the full extent of the circular sample buffers is used This can lead to errors in the speed measurement Individual mode is also implemented where each channel is allocated to its own individual time slot As this provides little operational advantage over paired mode the latter is recommended for all multiplexing applications The Relay Module Object class code 0x39C configures the relay outputs of the associated relay expansion modules 1 3 units per host main module each serving 4ea mechanical relays The object defines the setup for the Relay Output expansion modules and the interaction of these expansion modules with the main module The same host module can accommodate up to three Relay Output modules There is an ob
252. ddress switches Bottom set screws 2 ea Upper base connector Base to module connector PID label area Module type label area i ___________lower base connector 44 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Mount the Termin al The following generic DIN rail mounting scheme applies to all terminal base Base Unit mounting 1 Hook the base assembly from the bottom under the DIN rail The presence of coding switches identifies the bottom side of the terminal base 2 Hook over the top and let gravity drop the terminal base into place 3 The terminal base is in the center position to the DIN rail Once hooked fasten the two center set screws to secure the base to the rail Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 45 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Establish Bus Connections 46 4 Tighten the two bottom set screws to secure the terminal base to the base plate such to prevent rocking effect while applying mechanical pressure to the base E xD Reverse the process to remove a base Loosen the screws to create sufficient clearance for removal of the terminal base Before configuring the terminal base and installing the main module
253. ded where possible to ground the cable shield at the instrument side PE terminals protective earth ground bar or cable glands and not at the transducer end Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 39 Chapter 1 40 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Local Bus Connection main expansion A Common bus runs along the base parts of the main and its associated Expansion modules which interconnect with ribbon cable It integrates the following e Serial communication bus between the main and its associated Expansion modules e Power bus Expansion modules are powered from the module base e Tacho bus the TSC provides up to two tacho signal outputs The system is installed with an associated Expansion module fitted to the right side of the module The base mounted headers are latched and for additional security cannot be removed or inserted while there is a module in place on that base Figure 3 Expansion Base Part with Left and Right Ribbon Cable Fitted o 0 0 Right ribbon towards next Left ribbon expansion module or the left towards host ppb side of the next non host a DYN module td main module OOO LI e
254. dentify OR functionality of specified inputs 374 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B To avoid that the SPM control can be left active the module initiates the alarm threshold multiplier on a change of state of the control It does not initiate on the state itself The SPM action then times out after the time specified in the configuration has elapsed If the control state changes further within the timer period the SPM action continues and the timer is refreshed restarted When being used set the multiplier ON time attribute 33 to a non zero value otherwise the feature is disabled Alarm Types The following high level functionality can be defined Table 170 Alarm Types Description 0 Non Fail Safe If assigned to a relay in the alarm condition the relay coil would be energized 0x01 1 Fail Safe If assigned to a relay in the alarm condition the relay coil would be de energized Voting Logic Defines the high level voting construction that is used for the logical alarm processing Supported high level modes that are based on X out of Y logic and limited more complex combinations Table 171 Voting Logic Value Description 0x00 0 1001 0x01 1 1002 0x02 2 2002 0x03 3 1003 0x04 4 2003 0x05 5 3003 0x06 6 1004 0x07 7 2004 0x08 8 3004 0x09 9 4004 0x60 96 10
255. despite that typ typically the maximum heat dissipation is fixed and actual dissipation heat dependent on module configuration and operating state When powered the buffered outputs consume a significant amount of quiescent operating power approximately 0 8W which also imparts more heat Because the buffered outputs are infrequently used in most applications it is recommended that the buffered outputs not be powered during routine operation See Buffered Outputs on page 60 for information on how to enable disable the outputs Reliability Considerations Closely related to the previous section overall system reliability is greatly affected by operating temperatures Therefore it is highly recommended to minimize the internal operating temperatures of the modules Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 35 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System System Space and Clearance Requirements Design and layout of the system enclosures is a key consideration in any installation Verify that there is sufficient space for access to and fitting removal of the top and bottom connectors and a wiring cable ducting scheme that maintains appropriate separations For proper airflow and installation of the module the following minimum air spacing must be maintained around the system Figure 2 Clearance Requirements 102 mm 54mm 50mm 4 92 in 2 13 in 2in i Hsos05c3p3p303050 sta
256. dicato r PWR Green Solid RO Green Solid LNS Green Solid R1 Green Solid MS Green Flashing R2 Green Solid R3 Green Solid If the Status Indicators are not as shown above see Table on page 241 Table 8 Analog Output Expansion Module Status Color Behavior Status Color Behavior Indicator Indicato r PWR Green Solid OPO OFF LNS Green Solid OP1 OFF MS Green Flashing 0P2 OFF OP3 OFF If the Status Indicators are not as shown above see Table on page 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 3 This chapter details how to define and configure the 1444 dynamic measurement module and set associated parameters Topic Page General Page 88 Module Definition 88 Internet Protocol Page 101 Port Configuration Page 102 Network Page 103 Time Sync Page 104 Time Sync Page 104 Hardware Configuration Page 105 Time Slot Multiplier Page 112 Speed Page 115 IMPORTANT Many parameters presented by the AOP are named differently than in the various objects within the module that it refers to Consequently the parameter names listed in the CIP Objects Library Appendix B in some cases do not match the parameters presented on the AOP See the Cross Reference at the beginning of the CIP Objects Library to determine the specific names of parameters as presented on the AOP stored in the co
257. dual delays Time Alert measurement alarm are an integer in ms input must be Range 0 65500 continuously present before being reported as an Alert alarm event 34 Get V Delay Sustain DINT Duration that a Individual delays Time Danger measurement alarm are an integer in ms input must be Range 0 65500 continuously present before being reported as a Danger alarm event Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 156 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B 35 Get V Alarm Multiplier REAL Indicates how the 1 in effect disabled thresholds are adjusted gt 41 alarm less when the alarm likely threshold multiplier etaim more function is invoked likely Range 0 01 to 100 Adaptive Monitoring Group of 11 configuration attributes 40 Get V Adaptive INT The data source forthe Source selection Monitoring Source control variable 4 Get V Range 1 Upper REAL Defines first range area Range 0 50000 Control Value upper limit of control value 42 Get V Range 1 Alarm REAL Defines applicable alarm 1 in effect disabled Multiplier multiplier for first range gt 1 alarm less area likely lt 1 alarm more likely Range 0 01 to 100 43 Get V Range 2 Upper REAL Defines second range Range 0 50000 Control Value area upper limit of control value 44 Get V Range 2 Alarm REAL Defines applicable alarm 1 in effect disabled Multiplier
258. dule as required The expansion relay module can initiate an alarm or placing the machine in a safe state if it detects the DYN module is no longer responding correctly or in a timely manner Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 21 Chapter1 About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module Network Connectivity and Considerations 22 Within the system the DYN module uses an RS 485 proprietary local bus for communication with its Expansion modules The DYN module interfaces to the EtherNet IP network as an adapter device using single node addressing Given presence of two Ethernet RJ45 ports and integrated network switch the system can be used in different network topologies e Linear e Star e DLR Given available internal switch a linear module to module Ethernet connection can be established without the need for a local Ethernet router switch A linear topology is not considered to be a preferred solution given that any module or cable failure results in loss of communication to that part of the network downstream of the fault The star topology uses a multi port Ethernet router switch to establish point to point connections to DYN modules in the network This topology increases network reliability although it doesn t offer point to point connection redundancy IMPORTANT As the Dynamix 1444 Series is basically a one port device with a two port switch the normal star topology redundanc
259. dule Self Check Fail Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure Analog Outputs Chapter 5 Table 30 Output Configuration Page Measurement Selection Options Measurement Channel Type Measurement Type Overall 0 1 Channel 0 3 Dynamic gSE Any Static Eccentricity DC V Channel 0 3 Dynamic gSE Any Order magnitude 0 4 Channel Dynamic Any me Order is Enabled Order Phase 0 4 Channel 0 3 Dynamic Any Order is Enabled Order value is an integer no fractions FFT Band 0 8 Channel 0 3 Dynamic gSE Any FFT Band is Enabled Not 1X Channel 0 3 Dynamic Any Order 0 is Enabled Order 0 value 1 0 DC Channel 0 3 Static Any SMAX magnitude Channel Pair 0 1 2 3 Dynamic X shaft relative SMAX Phase Channel Pair 0 1 2 3 PA E Shaft Absolute pk pk Channel Pair 0 1 Dynamic ChA 2 3 Shaft Relative LP HP filtered ChB Std case absolute vibration AV to D or Std case absolute vibration V to D Speed 0 1 Factored Speed 0 1 Speed maximum 0 1 Speed Rate of Change 0 1 If Speed input is Enabled Any Axial Differential Expansion Channel Static ChA Complementary Differential Pair 0 1 2 3 Expansion A ChB Complementary Differential Expansion B Ramp Differential Expansion Channel Static Ch A Ramp Differential Expansion A Pair 0 1 2 3 Ch B Ramp Differential Expansion B Rod Drop 0 3
260. e The bit assignments are as follows Instance ID Description 0 Auxiliary Module Not Responding 1 Auxiliary Module Configured 2 MSP Code CRC Fault 3 MSP High Temperature 4 Link Fail 5 Halt Active 6 MSP RAM Fault 7 MSP RAM Access Error Bits 0 7 are common to all types of auxiliary module bits 8 to 15 are specific to type The auxiliary module controls Bits 15 and the main module sets bit 0 If bit 0 is set the remaining bits do not reflect the current auxiliary module status Bit Description 8 Output 0 Is Not Inhibited 9 Output 1 Is Not Inhibited 10 Output 2 Is Not Inhibited 11 Output 3 Is Not Inhibited 12 Reserved 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved In the unlikely event the auxiliary module is found to be in Boot Loader mode not running operation firmware the main module sets the auxiliary module status to a special code Decimal 65 534 Hexadecimal OxFFFE Binary 11111111 11111110 422 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Module Control Object Table 233 Class Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B Although the auxiliary module is responding it is in a non operational state and is classed as a failure from the perspective of a Fault Relay Table 230 Not OK Configuration Bit Description 0 No Action 1 Force Low 2 9 mA 2 Force High 21 mA Table 231 Common Services Service
261. e 134 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 24 Get V Actual DC Measurement TC REAL Actual implemented DC TC value that Seconds is based on channel data acquisition setup Rod Drop Group of 5 configuration attributes 32 Get V Rod Drop Trigger Source SINT Enable rod drop measurement Rod drop configuration processing and identify the tacho details source 33 Get V Rod Drop Trigger Angle INT The target angle for the rod drop 0 359 degrees measurement the mid point of the range 34 Get V Rod Drop Measurement SINT The angular range of the rod drop 2 20 degrees Range measurement Step 2 35 Get V Rod Drop Decay Time REAL The rod drop measurement decay Range 0 1 60 s time 40 Get V Rod Drop maximum machine INT Calculated account of trigger range RPM Speed and sampling rate Attribute Semantics Enabled Instances The following bit coding scheme is used to identify active static DC measurement instances Byte Bit Description 1 0 3 DC measurement instances 1 8 0 disabled 1 enabled hee Reserved and set to 0 2 0 Not used in protection mode Ae Reserved and set to 0 3 0 Reserved and set to 0 4 Reserved and set to 0 340 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Output Enable Transducer disabled status overrules enabled channel processi
262. e PersonalityApplied Dynamix Configuration Manager AOP Module Type Object Speed Page Mode ModuleControl TachoMode Dynamix Configuration Manager Tacho Mode Object Name TachName 0 7 Dynamix Configuration Manager Tach 0 Name Tach 1 Name Object Speed Multiplier Speed 0 7 Multiplier Dynamix Tacho and Speed Speed Multiplier Measurement Object Source Speed 0 7 TachSource Dynamix Tacho and Speed Tacho Source Measurement Object TIL Trigger Speed 0 7 TachTriggerSlope Dynamix Tacho and Speed Tacho Trigger Measurement Object Acceleration Update Rate Speed 0 7 AccelUpdateRate Dynamix Tacho and Speed ROC Delta Time Measurement Object Acceleration Time Constant Speed 0 7 AccelTimeConstant Dynamix Tacho and Speed ROC TC Measurement Object Tachometer Page Transducer Type Tach 0 17 Sensorlype Dynamix TSC Module Object Input Sensor Type Transducer Power Tach 0 7 Power Dynamix TSC Module Object Sensor Power Supply Auto Trigger Tach 0 1 AutoTrigger Dynamix TSC Module Object Trigger Mode Trigger Level Tach 0 1 TriggerLevel Dynamix TSC Module Object Trigger Threshold Trigger Slope Tach 0 1 TriggerSlope Dynamix TSC Module Object Trigger Slope Edge Pulses per Revolution Tach 0 1 PulsePerRevolution Dynamix TSC Module Object Sensor Target Pulses Per Revolution DC volts Fault Tach 0 7 DCVFault Dynamix TSC Module Object Sensor OK Definition Fault High Limit V DC Tach
263. e Relay 1 failed drive test 14 Relay 3 drive failure Relay 2 failed drive test 15 Relay 3 drive failure Relay 3 failed drive test Table 45 Relay Module 2 Status Relay Module 2 Bit Status Description if 1 0 Module Not Responding 1 Module Configured Relay module 2 has a valid configuration 2 Code CRC Fault 3 High Temperature Warning 4 Link bus fail 5 Halt is Active 6 RAM Fault 7 RAM access error 8 Relay 0 not inhibited Relay 0 is inhibited 9 Relay 1 not inhibited Relay 1 is inhibited 10 Relay 2 not inhibited Relay 2 is inhibited 11 Relay 3 not inhibited Relay 3 is inhibited 12 Relay 0 drive failure Relay 0 failed drive test 13 Relay 1 drive failure Relay 1 failed drive test 14 Relay 3 drive failure Relay 2 failed drive test 15 Relay 3 drive failure Relay 3 failed drive test Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 223 Chapter9 Operate the Module Table 46 Expansion Module Response Codes Expansion Module Response Codes Bits Status Description 0 2 Relay Module 0 If an expansion module sends an exception response the value is po Relay Module i aia enna not recognized 6 8 Relay Module 2 3 Message and message content do not agree 9 11 Analog Output Module i a 12 14 Tachometer Signal Conditioner Module 15 Reserved Table 47 4 20 mA Module Status 4 20 mA Module Bit Status Description if 1
264. e Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x38E 1 16 Transducer Name SINT 32 7 Transducer Orientation INT 18 Transducer Location SINT 19 Transducer Output Sense SINT 0x38E 2 16 Transducer Name SINT 32 17 Transducer Orientation INT 18 Transducer Location SINT 19 Transducer Output Sense SINT 0x38E 3 16 Transducer Name SINT 32 17 Transducer Orientation INT 18 Transducer Location SINT 19 Transducer Output Sense SINT 0x38E 4 16 Transducer Name SINT 32 17 Transducer Orientation INT 18 Transducer Location SINT 19 Transducer Output Sense SINT 0x395 1 18 Tacho 0 Name SINT 32 0x395 2 18 Tacho 1 Name SINT 32 294 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 77 Configuration Group 23 CIP Objects Appendix B Configuration Group 23 Group 23 contains configuration attributes from the following objects e TSC Module Object 0x394 e Measurement Alarm Object 0x396 Instances 1 5 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x394 1 17 Input Name 0 SINT 32 2 17 Input Name 1 SINT 32 0x396 1 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 2 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 3 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 4 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 5 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 Table 78 Configuration Group 24 Configuration Group 24 Group 24 contains configuration attributes from the Measurement Alarm Object 0x396 Instances 6 12 Configuration Group 25 Source Object Source Instance S
265. e TWF Data Storage Number of 2048 v FFT Measurement v Enable FFT Data Storage Number of Spectrum 800 v Peak v FFT Window Hanning Averaging Number of Averages 1 nA Average TWF Copy Comment Select the checkbox to save the time waveform TWF The module saves the TWF to any defined Trend buffers and Disabled not checked makes the most recent sample available for external access Tip External access to Live TWF and FFT data as defined on this page requires that the TWF and or FFT be enabled here AND that Dynamic Data be enabled on the TREND page Clear the checkbox so the waveform does not save Note FFT processing requires that the module measure a TWF using the TWF attributes defined on this properties page however saving the FFT does not require saving the TWF If you do not choose to save the TWF the module discards it after the calculating the FFT Signal Source Sample Rate Select from e Pre Filter e Mid Filter Post Filter e Alternate Path Select the signal source for TWF and the FFT See the Filters on page 20 properties page for a description of the various stages of signal processing where you can get the processed data The Pre Filter selection is available only if the Primary Path Decimation is set to 1 in the Filters properties page to help ensure that data is free of aliasing Signal Source selections for FFT s FFT Page and Demand data De
266. e module circuitry 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Wiring Power Figure 9 connects positive and negative power to the first from left of two identical connectors for each See Main Module Connectors on page 52 for the complete list of power connections Figure 9 Typical Wiring for Single and Redundant Power Solutions Supply 0 Supply 1 24VDC 24VDC Power Power Supply Supply Be be 5 DECANA QOQOGDORC RODEO o ie 000 AIIIN o COCR ETE ETI O Wiring Power to Multiple Modules Figure 10 shows positive and negative power IN connected to the first of two identical connectors for each and power OUT from the second of two identical connectors See Upper Base Connector on page 52 for the complete list of power connections Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 53 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Figure 10 Typical Wiring for Single Power Solutions to Multiple Module Supply 0 24VDC Power Supply Figure 11 shows positive and negative power IN connections to the first of two identical connectors for each and power OUT from the second of two identical connectors See Upper Base Connector on page 52 for the complete list of power connections 54 Rockwell Automation P
267. e normal fast sampling method Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Demand In addition to its real time and continuous measures the 1444 DYN04 01RA dynamic measurement module can serve additional data on demand Demand data is accessed by using explicit data requests to the Demand Data Objects Signal Source Post Filter z Sample Rate 2930 Samples s FMAX 1144 hz Measurement Units mil TWF Measurement Measurement Units mil v Speed Reference o0 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 155 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Parameter Values Comments Signal Source Select from Select the signal source for TWF and the FFT See the Filters on page 20 properties page for a description of the Pre Filter various stages of signal processing where you can get the processed data The Pre Filter selection is available only if e Mid Filter the Primary Path Decimation is set to 1 in the Filters properties page to help ensure that data is free of aliasing Post Filter e Alternate Path Signal Source selections for FFT s FFT Page and Demand data Demand Page for the same channel cannot be set to different primary path sources Both can be set to the same source or e One must be set to Alternate Path Measurement Select from Select the engineering units for the TWF and
268. e within the entire frequency span of the unfiltered spectrum from 0 Hz to the Nyquist Frequency using all 2048 lines of the FFT The Number of Lines presented here are the lines for the filtered FFT FMAX frequency range which is the FFT that is processed and returned on request by software 135 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Table 25 FFT Parameter Values Comment Signal Detection Select from Select the scaling detection method for the FFT line bin values e Peak e Peak to Peak e RMS FFT Window Type Select from Select the window function to apply in the FFT signal processing This table lists the available FFT window types e Rectangular e Flat top Window type Description Hanni vain Rectangular e No window is applied Also called Normal Uniform Gives poor peak amplitude accuracy best peak frequency accuracy e When amplitude accuracy and repeatability are important use this only for transient signals or for exactly periodic signals within the time sample such as integer order frequencies in synchronously sampled data Flat Top e Also called Sinusoidal Gives good peak amplitude accuracy poor peak frequency accuracy for data with discrete frequency components e Use this when amplitude accuracy is more important than frequency resolution In data witl closely spaced peaks a Flat Top window can smear the peaks together into one wide peak Hanning e Ageneral purpose window t
269. easurement However if an LPF is applied then data processed from an FFT of the signal at frequencies near to and above the LPF corner will be attenuated by the filter LPF Corner Frequency can be between 10 Hz and the lower of 45 kHz or the result of If Fmax Primary Decimation 1 then 93750 2 048 x Sample Rate Divisor Otherwise If Channel Measurement Type Aeroderivative then 93750 2 60 x Fmax Primary Decimation x Sample Rate Divisor Otherwise 93750 4 0 x Fmax Primary Decimation x Sample Rate Divisor If the result of the above is lt 10 then the LPF is set to 10 Hz Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 FFT bin than the value displayed as the FFT FMAX is also dependent on the selected number of lines for the FFT e If Primary Path Decimation 1 so the FMAX is the same as the ADC Out FMAX then this value will be the same as the ADC out FMAX Ifthe Primary Path FMAX is gt 1 then the FFT FMAX is the calculated value from 93750 SRD x Primary Path Decimation x 2 56 x 2 Enter the frequency where the filter has attenuated the signal by 3 dB Frequencies higher than this are attenuated 24 dB octave 60 dB octave if the Channel Measurement Type is Aeroderivative IMPORTANT If the LPF frequency is within 5 Hz of its maximum default value it will be disabled OFF e If firmware decimation is used then the maximum frequencies of the LPF corner can be forced lo
270. ect the source data for the FFT Band objects allows for future support for linking to Normal Advanced CM data objects Current support is for the Module Control object only DSP based FET Table 188 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 FFT Band Class Instance 1 32 Table 189 Class Attributes Instances 1 32 provide for flexible assignment of the FFT bands to any measurement channel 0 3 for a 4 channel protection module Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get V Enabled Instances DWORD Bit wise coding of enabled FFT Decoding information Band instances 32 bits used 9 Get V Channels with FFTBands WORD Bit wise coding of channels with 0 No FFT bands that are allocated FFT Bands 4 bits used or 1 One or more FFT bands that are allocated to this channel 10 Get V Channel 0 FFT Bands DWORD Active instances for 0 This FFT band not allocated measurement channel 0 1 This FFT band is allocated to this channel 11 Get V Channel 1 FFT Bands DWORD Active instances for measurement channel 1 12 Get V Channel 2 FFT Bands DWORD Active instances for measurement channel 2 13 Get V Channel 3 FFT Bands DWORD Active instances for measurement channel 3 Table 190 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access NV Name Data Type Descri
271. ected sensor in mV Engineering Unit EU as specified in Xdcr Units above Xdcr Power Select from the following Select OFF for any self powered sensor or for sensors that are powered from another source including a barrier e 24VDC 4mA e 24V DC 4 mA This is a constant current CC source It is required for e 24V DC 25 mA standard IEPE ICP accelerometers and other sensors that require a 4 e 24VDC 25mA mA CC source Select the power option appropriate for the connected sensor s 24V DC 25 mA This is a regulated positive voltage source Many position measurement sensors such as LVDTs and some vibration sensors require a 24V supply e 24V DC 25 mA This is a regulated negative voltage source It is suitable for all API 670 compliant eddy current probes and other sensors that require a 24V supply Xdcr High Limit V 24 000 24 000 High voltage threshold for the TX OK monitoring window A sensor bias DO voltage greater than this value forces a transducer fault condition To aid transducer failure detection the signal input circuitry imposes in the absence of a functioning transducer a bias voltage at the input The bias applied is automatically selected based on the power supply configured for that channel Power Typical Bias Voltage at Input OFF 1 7 VDC 24V DC 4 mA 3 9 VDC 24V DC 25mA 3 9 VDC 24V DC 25mA 13 VDC Within a channel pair 0 amp 1 2 amp 3 there will be slight differences in the bias voltages p
272. ed CM Data Object CIP objects 394 Analog Expansion Module 161 Applications 15 Assembly Object CIP objects 435 B Bands 139 C Calibration 234 Channel Setup Object Object CIP objects 331 CIP objects 243 244 252 299 311 319 328 331 335 339 343 347 352 357 361 370 379 392 394 408 412 420 423 433 434 435 436 438 441 442 443 444 446 447 Common Codes and Structures CIP objects 447 Complex Alarm Object CIP objects 370 Components 21 Configuration manager object CIP objects 252 Configure the terminal bases 47 Connectivity Considerations 22 Connector EtherNet IP 72 Current Output Module Object CIP objects 420 D DC 143 DC Measurement Object CIP objects 339 Demand 155 description configuration parameters 157 161 165 187 Design Considerations 30 Device Level Ring Object CIP objects 441 Dual Measurement Object CIP objects 343 DYN Module Transducers 63 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Index Dynamic Data Manager Object CIP objects 299 Dynamic Measurement module CIP objects 243 Dynamic Measurement Module outputs channel buffer outputs 213 digital outputs 213 Dynamic Measurement Module calibration 234 Dynamix FFT Band Object CIP objects 392 Ethernet Link Object CIP objects 444 EtherNet IP Connector 72 Event Log Object CIP objects 319 Expansion Modules 73 FFT 134 File Object CIP objects 436 Filters 118 G
273. edits are made to the Module Configuration it resets all other configurations to their default values Figure 34 The Define Module Functionality Page Module Definition rr laa esp 1 444 DYN04 01RA Output Data 5 1444 Expansion Module Revision 2 x 1 t 1444 TSCX02 02RB 1444 RELXO0 04RB Hedonic Keying Compatible Module Connection Data Module Standard Dynamic Measurement Power Single Application Compliance None Personality Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic 5 kHz or Static Channel Input Type Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 9 Module Functionality Parameter Power Supply Values Single Redundant Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Comment Specify if the module is powered by a single or dual power supplies When powered by dual supplies redundant mode the module monitors each power supply input and signal its status by using bit 15 of input tag member AuxProcesorStatus The status bit is set 1 if this parameter is set to Redundant 1 and either of the supply voltages is less than 17V DC Redundant power is required for all API and SIL level applications ComplianceMode not equal to None Using External Redundant Supplies If the application requires API 670 or SIL compliance and powe
274. ee structure definition 19 Get Set NV Configuration Group 11 See structure definition 20 Get Set NV Configuration Group 12 See structure definition 21 Get Set NV Configuration Group 13 See structure definition 22 Get Set NV Configuration Group 14 See structure definition 23 Get Set NV Configuration Group 15 See structure definition 24 Get Set NV Configuration Group 16 See structure definition 25 Get Set NV Configuration Group 17 See structure definition 26 Get Set NV Configuration Group 18 See structure definition 27 Get Set NV Configuration Group 19 See structure definition 28 Get Set NV Configuration Group 20 See structure definition 29 Get Set NV Configuration Group 21 See structure definition 30 Get Set NV Configuration Group 22 See structure definition 31 Get Set NV Configuration Group 23 See structure definition 32 Get Set NV Configuration Group 24 See structure definition 33 Get Set NV Configuration Group 25 See structure definition 34 Get Set NV Configuration Group 26 See structure definition 35 Get Set NV Configuration Group 27 See structure definition 36 Get Set NV Configuration Group 28 See structure definition 37 Get Set NV Configuration Group 29 See structure definition 252 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 61 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Sema
275. een detected Be aware that there is the possibility of multiple checks simultaneously triggering an indication of transducer failure Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 329 AppendixB CIP Objects TX Power Setup Following transducer power supply options apply per transducer output Value Description 0 OFF 1 CC 24V 4 mA constant current output 2 CV 24V 25 mA voltage regulated output 3 CV 24V 25 mA voltage regulated output Following transducer power supply options apply per transducer input To aid transducer failure detection the signal input circuitry imposes in the absence of a functioning transducer a bias voltage at the input The bias that is applied is automatically selected based on the power supply that is configured for that channel Value Description 0 OFF Bias Off typically around 1 7 V DC at the input 1 CC Bias Negative typically around 3 9 V DC at the input 2 C Bias Negative typically around 3 9 V DC at the input 3 CV Bias Positive typically around 13 V DC at the input Within a channel pair there will be slight differences in the bias voltages particularly noticeable on the positive bias where it is of the order of 1 3 V This is by design and has no effect on functionality Transducer OK Configuration 0 automatic all relevant checks included 1 wire off monitoring excluded any value in range 1 to 7 will
276. een the Start and Stop positions as defined by the Trigger Angle and the Angular Range Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 149 Chapter 3 Measurement Definition 150 Differential Expansion Used in steam turbine monitoring Differential Expansion is the measure of the difference between the thermal growth of the rotor and the thermal growth of the case During machine startup it is used by Operators to help ensure that the heat up is managed so that the rotating and stationary components of the machine do not touch In a steam turbine the rotating blades are affixed to the turbine rotor while its stationary blades are connected to the machine casing As steam turbines operate at high temperatures these components experience significant thermal growth from their nonoperating cold shutdown state Because of differences in the mass material and construction of the rotor and case the rate of thermal growth of each as the machine heats during startup are different A rotor always expands faster than the case This difference in thermal growth rates manifests in a varying distance between the rotating and stationary blades with the potential for the distance to reduce until the rotating and stationary components touch So when starting these machines it is important to do so in a manner that helps ensure that the differential between rotor and case expansion never exceeds design tolerances To monitor Dif
277. elate to decimated sample streams decimation is set automatically based on filter settings Normal and Advanced CM data is available if their sources are both set post filter 3 No alternate path processing or tracking filter functionality is supported Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B gSE is a special mode that is designed to be applied to both channels of a channel pair with no SRD adjustment The dynamic pressure application type not filtered version instigates a special processing scheme that is optimized for faster update of FFT band measurement data The application type includes disabling overall measurement processing to support gas turbine combustion monitoring Other measurement processing is not supported in the mode Table 64 Compliance Mode Index Description 0 Open 1 API 670 only Table 65 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x0D Apply Attributes Applies pending configuration attributes use any instance Ox0E X x Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute 0x10 X Set Attribute Single Sets the specified attribute Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 257 AppendixB CIP Objects Object Specific Services Table 66 Object Specific Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code
278. ell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 Setting The IP Address The Dynamix 1444 Series supports both static and automatic IP Address Configuration IMPORTANT Whena static IP is used the address is fixed to the terminal base But when automatic the address is held in the module itself This distinction drives different behaviors when replacing or moving modules to help troubleshoot a problem or for other reasons Static IP Configuration The main module terminal base 1444 TB A includes three switches that set the last octet of the address See Configure the main Terminal Base page 41 for information on the using the terminal base address switch Automatic IP Configuration Dynamix supports both BOOTP and DHCP methods of setting the module address To use either of these methods set the three IP address switches to 000 Time Man agement The Dynamix 1444 Series modules include an onboard real time clock The clock which has a maximum drift accuracy of 100 ms per year maintains time in Coordinated Universal Time UTC format and is set by synchronizing with the controller time using the IEEE 1588 standard version 2 based CIP Sync protocol The Dynamix 1444 primarily uses time for captured data This data includes event log entries demand data trend and alarm trend data and transient data It also stamps the current time to any live FFT and TWF data returned a
279. ement Object 343 Dynamix Tracking Filter Object 347 Dynamix TSC Module Object 352 Dynamix Tacho and Speed Measurement Object 357 Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object 361 Dynamix Voted Alarm Object 370 Dynamix Normal CM Data Object 379 Dynamix FFT Band Object 392 Dynamix Advanced CM Data Object 394 Dynamix Relay Module Object 412 Dynamix Current Output Module Object 420 Dynamix Module Control Object 423 Generic Objects Identity Object 433 Message Router Object 434 Assembly Object 435 File Object 436 Time Sync Object 438 Device Level Ring Object 44 Quality of Service Object 442 TCP IP Interface Object 443 Ethernet Link Object 444 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 243 AppendixB CIP Objects Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference Topic Page Nonvolatile Storage Object 446 Common Object Content Common Codes and Structures 447 The following table maps the parameters on each page of the AOP to its controller tag and to the specific object attribute of the module that it populates Some tags are hidden and if the compliance requirement of the module is set to any SIL level most tags are hidden Table 58 Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference Parameter Tag Member Object Attribute Define Module Functionality Power Supply ModuleControl RedundantPowerSupply Dynamix Module Control Object Redundant Power Supply Personality Modul
280. en e Processor Status MS Flashing green Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 237 Appendix A 238 Status As indication of controller faults or warnings MS Red Flashing red for fault such as cannot read valid module type code and solid red for self check failure Processor over temperature is treated as a critical self check failure solid red indication A fault is signaled for temperatures over 85 C MS BLUE indicates a communication error a warning status only However a communication error can ultimately result in a critical link failure IMPORTANT Expansion modules are not considered part of status indicator requirements set by ODVA for EtherNet IP equipment The expansion modules have a total of seven status indicators comprising a group of three common system status indicators and a further group of four which are module type specific The behavior and indication that is provided by the status indicators varies between module startup and operation Operating Status Indication The following tables provide descriptions of each expansion modules status indicators Tacho TSC Module The first two status indicators reflect the two tacho channels and the second two the output signal available on the channel BNC connectors Tacho Channels If the tacho channel is enabled the status indicator is green The status indicator flashes off when a pulse is detected At low speed eve
281. er channel pair channels 0 and 1 and channels 2 and 3 When monitoring using either of the Multiplexed Personalities the Time Slot Multipliers are used when it is necessary for some channels to update more frequently than other channels When using the Multiplexed Personalities the module does not continuously measure each channel Rather measurements are made on one channel or channel pair at a time Once it completes each measurement it moves to the channel or channel pair that is next on the schedule as determined by the Time Slot Multiplier values If all channels have the same multiplier value then the measurements cycle one to the next and back to the first But if any of the multipliers are greater than the others then that channel or channel pair is sampled more frequently by the ratio of the multipliers than the channels with lower multiplier values Table 15 and Table 16 provide examples of how the channels update with various multiplier values specified IMPORTANT Determining how long it takes to cycle through the channels in a multiplexed application can be estimated by considering the measurement definition for each channel or channel pair In general the time it takes to measure a channel is equal to the period of the specified time waveform Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 113 Chapter 2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Table 15 Multiplier Examples for Module
282. er of UNIT 2 Instances Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 443 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 271 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of ID Rule Values 1 Get Interface Speed UDINT 0x64 100 Mbps 2 Get Interface Flags DWORD 3 Get Physical Address STRUCT Array of 6 USINT values MAC address 4 Get Interface Counters STRUCT Array of 11 UDINT values 5 Get Media Counters STRUCT Array of 12 UDINT values 6 Get Set Interface Control STRUCT Two control bits are supported Bit 0 Set for 802 3 auto negotiated enabled Bit 1 Forced duplex mode set for full duplex only applicable with autonegotiation disabled If auto negotiate is disabled the Forced Interface Speed parameter indicates the speed at which the interface will operate in megabits per second Examples for 10 mpbs the value will be 10 9 Get Set Administrative State Enable disable 1 Enable 2 Disable 10 Get Interface Label SHORT_STRING port 1 port 2 Table 272 Common Services Service Implement Instance Service Name Code ation Class Ox0E x xX Get Attribute Single 0x10 X Set Attribute Single 444 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Nonvolatile Storage Object CIP Objects Appendix B The Nonvolatile Storage Object class code 0xA1 is a vendor specific object that on the Dynamix 1444 provides a means f
283. erfaces Each connector is keyed to its respective mating header two per connector and each of the terminals is uniquely numbered Some external links can be made between terminals depending on application requirements to enable for example a transducer power supply for a 2 wire transducer connection Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 51 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Upper Base Connector Terminal Name Application Description 49 RET_1 Module Power Supply 1 Return 50 RET_1 51 24V_1 Supply 1 24V 52 24V_1 53 RET_0 Supply 0 Return 54 RET_0 55 24V_0 Supply 0 24V 56 24V_0 57 OVR Buffered Outputs Override High 58 OVR Override Low 59 Shield Shield Cable shield connection points 60 Shield 61 Shield 62 Shield 63 Shield 64 Shield Main Module Connectors These connections provide duplicate terminals for twin wide ranging DC supplies 24V nominal The duplicate terminals provide a means for daisy chaining power from one base to the next subject to an overall current limit and knowing a star connection approach is preferred to avoid excessive voltage drop There is internal diode protection against reverse polarity and for the purposes of automatic supply selection when redundant sources are connected to inputs 0 and 1 The supply side connections are isolated from the remainder of th
284. ering Dynamix Current Output Module Object 4 mA Output Scaling Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 247 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 58 Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference High Engineering Cho 3AnalogOut HighEngineering Dynamix Current Output Module 20 mA Output Scaling Object Fault Mode Output State Chd 3AnalogOut FaultValue Dynamix Current Output Module Current Output Not OK Object Configuration Measurement Alarm Page Enable Alarm MeasAlarm00 23 En Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Enable Object Alarm Name MeasAlarmName00_04 x0 4 Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Name Object MeasAlarmName05_11 0 6 Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Name Object MeasAlarmName12_18 0 6 Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Name Object MeasAlarmName19_23 0 4 Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Name Object Measurement MeasAlarm0o 23 1D Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Measurement Identifier Object Condition MeasAlarm00 23 Condition Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Form Object Transducer Fault Behavior MeasAlarm00 23 SensorFaultAction Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Type Object Deadband MeasAlarm00 23 AlarmDeadband Dynamix Measurement Alarm Hysteresis Object Alert Alarm Delay Time MeasAlarm00 23 AlertDelayTime Dynamix Measurement Alarm Delay Sustain Time Alert Object Danger Alarm Delay Time MeasAlarm00 23 DangerDelayTime Dy
285. erminals NC Normally closed C Common NO Normally open Normal is the relay contact state when unpowered ATTENTION The relay connections can carry high voltage The base part carries mainly Shield connections that are provided as a termination point for cable screens shields In addition one or more must be used to connect Shield to a local ground of the user s choice Do not make any connections to terminals 9 10 19 or 24 Terminal 24 23 22 21 20 19 Name NOT USED SH SH SH SH NOT USED Application Shield Upper Base Connector Description Do not connect Cable shield connection points Do not connect 74 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Terminal 18 17 16 15 14 13 Name REL 2 NC REL 2 COM REL 2 NO REL 3 NC REL 3 COM REL 3 NO Application Relay 2 Relay 3 S zZ iS O cs 2 3 z 3 z ls S 5 S 5 S z g E z E g J 2 S 2 2 S 2 1444 RELX00 04RB Relay Expansion Module and 1444 TB B Terminal Base Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name REL 0 NC REL 0 COM REL 0 NO REL 1 NC REL 1 COM REL 1 NO Application Relay 0 Relay 1 S 2 S E E 3 8 3 g S S z e z z g 2 2 S 2 2 S 2 Terminal 7 8 9 10 11 12 Name SH SH NOT USED SH SH Application Shield Shield a E 5 3 S z 2 S z
286. ervice specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive data value such as half a value REAL data type 0x13 19 Not enough data The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation 0x14 20 Attribute not supported The attribute that is specified in the request is not supported 0x15 21 Too much data The service supplied more data than was expected 0x16 22 Object does not exist The object that is specified does not exist in the device 0x17 23 Service fragmentation sequence not in progress The fragmentation sequence for this service is not currently active for this data 0x18 24 No stored attribute data The attribute data of this object was not saved before the requested service 0x19 25 Store operation failure The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the attempt 0x1A 26 Routing failure request packet too large The service request packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path to the destination The routing device was forced to abort the service 0x1B 27 Routing failure response packet too large The service response packet was too large for transmission on a network in the path from the destination The routing device was forced to abort the service 0x1C 28 Missing attribute list entry data The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that the service needed to perform the requested behavior 0x1D 29 Invalid attribute value
287. es return default value 4 0 Mag Phase as where only Mag is returned for non integer settings Attribute Semantics Order Measurement Units Actual selection of Order engineering units are a subset of the master engineering units list The selection is also based on active measurement application for the applicable measurement channel related to sensor type and signal processing Options prompt the selection of units that indirectly enables differentiation or integration of the base signal Operating Mode Current implementation only supports constant Q mode This attribute is therefore reserved 0 to support future fixed frequency mode The associated configuration parameter instance is read only until fixed frequency mode is supported For Aero derivative application types 80 and 83 where fixed bandwidth tracking filters for the gas generator 1x and power turbine 1x are required on a per channel basis A 5 Hz fixed bandwidth mode is automatically implemented on order 0 TO and order 1 T1 Outside a speed range of 5 400 Hz the output of these tracking filters is set to zero Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 349 Appendix B 350 CIP Objects General Order Setup For one byte bit wise control is used to allow for enabling individual tracking filters and assigning a tacho channel Four 2 bit arrangements are used Bit Description 0 Tracking filter 0
288. es that are detected Unexpected auxiliary modules will not be communicated with and therefore are always undetected Redundant Tacho Mode When redundant tacho mode is enabled the two configured tacho sources for tacho 0 amp 1 serve as redundant sources for each other Example e Tacho 0 is detected as being in a Not OK state so it is automatically switched to Tacho 1 source e IfTacho 0 source is OK then Tacho 1 state is checked and if Not OK is switched to Tacho 0 source Note the following e The switching process does not change the underlying configuration e lt Asatacho source switch has been implemented both tacho signals appear OK e Bit 23 of the Channel TX Speed Status DWORD 4 flags that a tacho source has been actively switched Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Local Relay Control CIP Objects Appendix B Bit wise setting controlling how the local relay behaves under fault circumstances Table 235 Local Relay Control Bit Description 0 main Module Fault 1 Auxiliary Module Fault 2 Auxiliary Bus Communication Fail 3 E IP Communication Failure 4 Tacho Fault 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Latching There are three parameters using these bit definitions Parameter Description Auto Local Relay Control This follows the logic that when associated with a fail safe voted alarm a main module fault also activate the relay so the appropria
289. establish the Expansion bus connections between modules The Expansion bus provides power and communication from a DYN module to associated Expansion modules positioned to the right and distributes the tacho bus to up to six main modules These modules include the TSCX modules host and mounted to the left or right of the TSCX module Based on system design the required module to module connections can be made with interconnect cables refer to the Local Bus module to module interconnect cables section in Local Bus Connection main expansion on page 40 These ribbon cable assemblies can then be fitted between various module types Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the Terminal Bases Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 We recommend that you combine the installation of the ribbon interconnect cables with the process of mounting the terminal bases This way the bases can be clamped to the DIN rail and the interconnect cable can easily be fitted without subjecting it to excessive mechanical stress Install and secure the first terminal base Install the interconnection cable to the first module right side Install the second terminal base Connect the interconnection cable to the second module left side A ob WY N Secure the second terminal base Verify that the ribbon cable interfaces are properly locked down in the headers Access to the connec
290. et Attribute Returns the Single contents of the specified attribute Behavior Multiplexing provides a means of utilizing all 4 channels of a module in a situation where the required processing can only be implemented on two or less channels at a time Examples are gSE or 40 kHz modes where only one channel pair can be active due to the high sample rate and signal processing required By using Paired channels Multiplexing mode the module automatically switches between channel pairs which makes measurements as each pair becomes active note that module transducer power is not switched In paired mode the time slots are allocated as follows e Time slot 0 channels 0 1 e Time slot 1 channels 2 3 e Time slot 2 channels 0 1 e Time slot 3 channels 2 3 Based on the configured Normal CM data requirements and other considerations as appropriate the module advises and implements the minimum DAQ Data Acquisition Time to allow those measurements to be properly serviced As Advanced CM data is based on ad hoc on demand requests potentially for higher number of lines different averaging this is not automatically catered for If it is planned to send more demanding Advanced CM Data requests then this is allowed by suitably increasing the time multiplier to a value greater than 1 attributes 16 19 The module maintains circular sample buffers of much greater depth than required for the longest TWF or highest line FFT this depth is use
291. etting how fast dynamic data updates depends on module performance which is a function of module configuration and circumstances IMPORTANT _ The discrete data is not processed from the same TWF or FFT that is captured in the dynamic data buffer e FFT derived measurements FFT Bands are processed from an independent FFT that is calculated by the module s DSP specifically for that purpose See Bands on page 139 This is another FFT than the one defined on the FFT page and calculated in the modules microprocessor e Non FFT derived measurements such as Overall 1x magnitude DC values are processed from the data stream with possible different filtering sampling or integration selections See Filters on page 118 so also do not necessarily correlate with the captured TWF or FFT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 189 Chapter8 Trend and Transient Capture Alarm Buffer The alarm buffer consists of a copy of the trend buffer s 640 discrete and 64 dynamic records that are sampled at their user specified rates Also there is a second high resolution 320 record discrete buffer that is sampled at a fixed 100 millisecond update rate For each of the data sets the low and high resolution discrete buffers and the dynamic data buffer independent definition of how much of the buffer to capture post trigger is provided This lets any portion of the 640 320 and 64 record buffers be updated after the trigge
292. evolutions results in an accurate measurement of the specified order However at low speeds a high number of revolutions settings can slow the measurement response to changes A low number of revolutions setting results in a broad filter that passes signals other than that of the specified order value However the lower the number of orders the more responsive it is to changes Atypical value is 10 the default A high value is 30 but values up to 256 are possible Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 133 Chapter3 Measurement Definition FFT Table 25 FFT Parameter Enable TWF Data Storage Values Enable checked Tracking filters are used to provide real time magnitude and phase measures of shaft speed relative signals Each tracking filter applies a 48 dB octave band pass filter that is centered on the specified order frequency The module measures the magnitude of each filtered signal and when whole integer orders are specified the phase of the filtered value For non multiplexed module personalities See Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 tracking filter measurements update at a rate of not slower than every 40 milliseconds This page is used to define the FFT measurement configuration for the channel Signal Source Post Filter 7 Sample 2930 Samples Maximum Frequency 1144 hz Measurement mil zZ Speed Reference So 1 TWF Measurement v Enabl
293. f these parameters dint VotedAlarm 13 The data type for each attribute is either an int 16 bits or a dint 32 bit In each case status is defined by the state of the individual bits as provided in Table It is possible for multiple bits to be set Voted Alarm Status Values IMPORTANT Voted alarm status records do not associate 1 1 to the 13 voted alarm definitions Reference the alarm number attribute bits 10 13 of each voted alarm status record to identify the voted alarm that the entry applies to Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 225 Chapter 9 226 Operate the Module Voted Alarm Status Record Assignment Voted alarm status records are applied first to physical relay This assures that every physical relay has an associated voted alarm status record even if the relay is not used For example if an application includes one 1444 REX00 04RB expansion relay module address 1 and the configuration enabled relays 0 and 2 from the expansion module referencing them to voted alarms 0 and 1 plus enabled the main module s onboard relay with it referencing voted alarm 12 then the voted alarm status records would be allocated as shown here Physical Device Configuration Voted Alarm Status Record Device Address Relay Relay Referenced Number Referenced Number Number Voted Alarm Voted Alarm Main 0 0 12 0 12 0 1 0 0 1 2 OFF 2
294. ferential Expansion transducers can be placed on a collar or ona ramp that has been machined onto the turbine Differential Expansion requires two position measurements sensors that must be input to either of the module s channel pairs 0 1 or 2 3 This page presents the applicable parameters for the selected channel Both channels must be configured appropriately to complete the measurement Two modes of differential expansion measurement are supported Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Radial Cancel Ramp Differential Expansion Radial Cancel also called Ramp Differential Expansion is used when one or both of the sensors are installed such that they monitor the movement of an angled surface or ramp Figure 47 Radial Cancel Mode two angles A g N n f U u radial movement 4 axial movement h ag j Ay t l one angle i In radial cancel mode the movement of the shaft is detected by measuring the gap between the probe tip and a ramp of known and consistent angle to the center line of the shaft If two ramps are present measure them as shown The potential lift error of shaft position that is caused by jacking oil pressure is eliminated in the module calculations Where only one ramp is available the lift error must be considered and this is achieved by using a second probe operating on a portion of the shaf
295. figure these filters and their measurements when at least one of the speed inputs is a TTL source Tacho Bus or TTL Input Measurement mil tA Signal True PK bd Measurement Resolution Speed 0 one Measurement 10 00 revs Resolution Speed 1 Tracking Filters can be applied only for Module Personalities of e Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic 4 kHz or Static e Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic 4 kHz Dual Path Additionally the channel must be configured for Dynamic Measurements Up to four tracking filters can be configured per channel Each filter can be configured to track any order from 0 25x to 32 0x referenced to either of the two tachometer inputs Tracking Filters apply a constant Q bandwidth changes with speed and provide accurate measurements at any speed greater than approximately 15 RPM 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Aero Derivative Measurements For Aero derivative measurement types Hardware Page the following fixed assignment must be configured e Order 0 must be set to Tachometer Input 0 gas generator tacho and a 1x order e Order 1 must be set to Tachometer Input 1 power turbine tacho anda 1x order The Aero derivative measurement types provide fixed 5 Hz bandwidth tracking filters for the gas generator 1x and power turbine 1x It is not necessary to specially configure the mode or filter definitio
296. forces an alarm when TX status is NOK 0x02 TX OK Not Considered Don t care about TX OK state Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 365 AppendixB CIP Objects Alarm Processing Mode The following alarm processing modes are supported per alarm output Table 159 Alarm Processing Mode Value Description 0x00 0 Normal use of fixed alarm level 0x01 1 Adaptive Monitoring allow Onboard module configuration for 5ea different alarm level threshold sets that are linked to speed or other parameter 0x02 2 Profile Alarming where the alarm profile is external from the main module configuration and are communicated using the 1 0 table In adaptive alarming mode a control variable is defined and the magnitude of that variable dictates a factor that is applied to the configured alarm thresholds This action is applied in a number of discrete bands or ranges which are defined in attributes 41 50 The control variable is often speed but can be selected from among any measurement available to the module refer attribute 40 An illustrative example which is based on speed and use of all five available ranges is as follows e Range 1 lt 500 rpm e Range 2500 to e 1000 rpm e Range 3 1000 to e 1500 rpm e Range 4 1500 to e 2000 rpm e Range 5 gt 2000 rpm The upper control value for each range is shown in bold Range 5 doesn t have an upper limit For each of the five ranges a sep
297. formation Table 154 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Measurement Alarm Class Instance 1 24 Alarm Measurement object instances 1 24 Unused instances exist and are accessible but have a disabled state Table 155 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Attribute Semantics of Values ID Rule Type 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get V Active DWORD Defines the active Bit coding 24 used Instances measurement alarms 9 Get V Common BOOL Boolean status indicating Alert presence ofat least one alert condition 10 Get V Common BOOL Boolean status indicating Danger presence of at least one danger condition 11 Get V Common TX BOOL Boolean status indicating Fail presence of at least one TX Fail condition 12 Get V Alarm STRUCT Array of events Time History Stamp measurement output alarm status representing last x number of entries A change in the alarm status triggers an entry Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 361 Appendix B 362 CIP Objects Table 156 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name DataType Description of Semantics of ID Rule Attribute Values 1 Get V Individual Alarm BYTE WORD Bit coded individual Status options Status measurement alarm status General Alarm Configuration Group of 6 config
298. gainst the active thrust pads and use it as the zero position The probe gap is then adjusted to the middle of its linear range typically setting the gap to 10 Vdc which is equivalent to 1 27 mm 50mils for a probe sensitivity of 7 87 V mm 200mv mill The OFFSET value is then entered as 1 27 mm 50mils meaning minus 1 27 50 Note For AWAY setting enter the OFFSET value as a Minus value This value also means that movement toward the active pads result an increasing gap voltage Example S I units Normal Thrust and Proportional Voltage Units mm X Time Constant 1 000 Calibration Offset 1 27 Sense Control Away X Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 145 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Example Imperial units Normal Thrust and Proportional Voltage Units mil X Time Constant 1 000 Calibration Offset 50 00 Sense Control Away P Compressors A compressor will normally Thrust toward the suction end of the machine which is often at the none drive end and the thrust bearing is also typically installed at this location COLD FLOAT ZONE Sr i 1 l i t THRUST lt i Machine Shaft i 1 GOLAR Thrust Probes Inactive Pads x t i 4 Active Pads Center Position Running Position In this situation the direction of normal thrust is TOWARD the probes The normal practice is again to set the rotor against the Active pads and use it
299. ge 98 Use this method to daisy chain the external TTL signal to be sure that there is isolation between modules However it can induce some amount of phase error Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 71 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System EtherNet IP Connector 72 Typically Ethernet network connections are made with pre assembled standard patch cords to interconnect modules according to the desired network topology Each module has an integrated switch and two functionally equal Port 1 and Port 2 RJ45 connectors The total length of Ethernet cable connecting main to main main to controller or main to switch must not exceed 100 m 328 ft If the entire channel is constructed of stranded cable no fixed cable then calculate maximum length as follows Maximum Length 113 2N y meters Where e N the number of connections in the channel e y the loss factor compared to fixed cable typically 1 2 1 5 IMPORTANT See Ethernet Cables channel class and category and recommended cables under Cable Connector and Mounting Accessories page 12 foro further information on Ethernet connectivity Wire the RJ45 connector as shown 8 NC 7 NC 6 RD g 5 NC 4 NC 14 3 R 2 D 1 T Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Wiring Expansio
300. ge BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 1 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 273 Appendix B Table 72 Configuration Group 17 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x397 1 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 2 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 2 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 2 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 3 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Confi
301. gh Threshold Xdcr Low Limit V DC Cho 3Sensor LLimit Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer OK Low Threshold Xdcr Location Chd 3Description Location Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer Location Xdcr Orientation deg Cho 3Description Oreintation Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer Orientation Name Cho 3Description Name Dynamix Transducer Object Transducer Name Measurement Type Module Chd 3AppType Configuration Manager Object Channel Application Type Pto 1 TripInhibitSource Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Trip Inhibit Bypass source AlarmResetSource Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Reset Source VotedAlarm00 72 Logiclnput Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Multiplier Control VotedAlarm00 12 LogicGateSource Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Logic Gating Source VotedAlarm00 12 LogicLogicSource Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Logic Control Source Speed 0 7 TachFaultSource Dynamix Tacho and Speed Tacho OK Source Measurement Object Pto 1 ModuleControl Pt00 70utputAssign Dynamix Module Control Object Opto Output 0 7 Allocation Filters Page Sample Rate Divisor ChO 3Filter SampleRateDivisor Dynamix Channel Setup Object SRD Fmax Primary Decimation Cho 3Filter MAXDecimation Dynamix Channel Setup Object Decimation Low Pass Filter Primary Frequency ChO 3Filter LowPassFreq Dynamix Channel Setup Object LP Filter 3 dB Point High Pass Filter Primary Frequency ChO 3Filter HighPassFreq Dynamix Ch
302. guration Pate s eresrsreresrerrerererer 105 Time Slot Multiplier Page sunenenunerrererrrrrrerererrer 112 Speed Pag reccs divided sae a An E EEE 115 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Configure the Tachometer Expansion Module Configure Analog Outputs Configure Relays Configure Alarms Table of Contents Chapter 4 Filters sats Grete cad hie hoc Matec ha ted a ee 118 Overall iets ye act cane e tard 4 ote Sas EATE nae hone teria ack ates 126 Tracking Filters 2555 cheSaSdesse a a E E les Peas 128 Aero Derivative Measurements 0 ccc cece eee e eens 129 Not l X Measurement s nahea a a oe a aA chee dex 129 Ord t Phasescatts eee othe Set ele Oe oe ot do 130 Influence of Sample Rate and Tracking Filter Definition Settings 130 Readies de A AE AAE Ut esa cl M eis vol dae ae as Oise 134 BOE chlo ate cece ist coat nk ena tia tng thy a ae hee 137 IEE Te OEE tte Seeks aoc alee aT EEE EN EE 139 DOA N N E a a So RT 143 Demandis eaa Sean aa hemes ai aan AT 155 Chapter 5 Tachometer Expansion Module ii054 2 2 csvicd ei eietd ioe 157 Tachometer Pasa sacs inch ale t A aeons Saige Weta rere 158 Page Wet Wis hie n eee A NG areca petra ra 158 Chapter 6 Analog Expansion Module cusaiuevavayec asia wot erwinenracs 161 Output Configuration Page siciccs ictus cases nd bakedeeeeeuee 9955 162 Page CVS LIC Wanara onneani aa are arp heya RE ER a 162 Chapter 7 Relay Expans
303. guration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 3 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT 274 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 72 Configuration Group 17 CIP Objects Appendix B Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad INT 0x397 3 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 4 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 4 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 4 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 0x397 4 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 5 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Al
304. gust 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Number of samples per revolution occupies the first byte the remaining three bytes are used for a scaled speed value speed x 100 This format supports speed values to 167 772 15 rpm with a resolution of two decimal places Example with data on the wire of 0x 10DC7DOS5 e 0x10 16 samples per revolution e 0x057DDC 359 900 RPM 359 900 100 3599 rpm 60 Hz Whether the data is asynchronous or synchronous it can be determined for the identifier field with use of the following format Bits Description 0 1 Measurement channel 0 1 2 3 from which the data originates 2 Data source Transfer path 0 or 1 3 4 Transfer path 0 data source 0 pre filter 1 mid filter 2 post filter 5 6 Transfer path 1 data mode bit 5 0 asynchronous bit 5 1 synchronous then bit 6 indicates which tacho was used 7 Associated tacho source from the Normal CM Data Object 8 15 Measurement engineering units index not CIP code 16 31 Reserved Behavior Through the object specific service 0x4C the data manager object gives access to historical data Trend and Alarm See the normal CM object for access to Live Dynamic data Also for the Advanced CM data object for access to dynamically configurable analysis data variable FFT lines and so on and to the Transient data manager object for access to stored transient event data CM Record Request Recommendations for Network side i
305. gust 2015 203 Chapter9 Operate the Module Managing GET and SET Service Access 204 Accessing data and managing module configuration requires the initiating device to communicate SET and GET commands to the various objects as defined in the CIP Objects Library However while GET commands are allowed from any device for security reasons the module places restrictions on the use of SET commands SET SET service commands are used to change the module configuration As changing the configuration can pose a security risk the module does not accept a SET command from any device other than the controller with which the module has established a CIP transport class 1 connection even if that device is not accessible e When aclass 1 connection is established the module remembers the ID of the connected controller Class 3 connections include the ID of the host device that is sending the command If the ID s do not match the module compares the ID communicated with the Class 3 connection request to that of its host controller and disallows the connection e Ifthe module does not have an open class 1 connection following a reset or if the host normally closed its connection Then the module does not hold a host ID and accepts class 3 connection SET commands from any device e While not unique to a class 1 connection the connection status of the module is indicated by its Network Status NS Indicator IMPORTANT _ Ifthe host co
306. h3FFTBand7 76 ChONot1X Not 1x values 77 Ch1Not1X 78 Ch2Not1X 79 Ch3Not1X 80 choDc DC measurement values 81 Ch1DC 82 Ch2DC 83 Ch3DC 84 Ch0_1S MAXMag SMAX magnitude values 85 Ch2_3SMAXMag 86 Ch0_1SMAXPhase SMAX Phase values 87 Ch2_3SMAXPhase 88 Ch0_1Shaft Absolute Pk_Pk Shaft Absolute values 89 Ch2_3Shaft Absolute Pk_Pk 90 Speed Speed values 91 Speed1 92 FactoredSpeed0 Speed values 93 FactoredSpeed1 94 Speed0 max maximum speed since last reset 95 Speed1 max 96 SpeedORateOfChange Speed rate of change per minute 97 Speed1RateOfChange 98 ChO_1AxialDiffExpansion Differential Expansion values 99 Ch2_3AxialDiffExpansion 100 ChO_1RampDiffExpansion 101 Ch2_3RampDiffExpansion 102 ChORodDrop Rod Drop values 103 Ch1RodDrop 104 Ch2RodDrop 105 Ch2RodDrop 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 53 Output Assembly Operate the Module Chapter 9 Output Assembly The output assembly consists of one control integer optionally followed by two speed values and or an array of 16 alarm values The speed and or alarm limit values are present when specified in module definitions The control integer is an array of bits with each bit managing a specific control function as defined in this table Bit Control Description 0 Trip Inhibit When set Trip Inhibit prevents any alarm activation and or cancel standing alarms including the associated alarm action relay
307. han the minimum expected reply size This status code can serve for other causes of invalid replies 0x23 35 Buffer overflow The message received is larger than the receiving buffer can handle The entire message was discarded 0x24 36 Message format error The server does not support the format of the received message 0x25 37 Key failure in path The Key Segment that was included as the first segment in the path does not match the destination module The object specific status indicates which part of the key check failed 0x26 38 Path size invalid The size of the path that was sent with the Service Request is either not large enough to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much routing data was included 0x27 39 Unexpected attribute in list An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set currently 0x28 40 Invalid member ID The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified Class Instance Attribute 0x29 41 Member not able to be set A request to modify a non modifiable member was received Ox2A 42 Group 2 only server general This error code can only be reported by DeviceNet Group 2 Only servers with 4K or less code space failure and only in place of Service not supported Attribute not supported and Attribute not able to be set 0x2B 43 Unknown Modbus error A CIP to Modbus translator received an unknown Modbus Exception Code Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P
308. hat is similar to a Hamming window e Gives fair peak amplitude accuracy fair peak frequency accuracy Use this on random type data when frequency resolution is more important than amplitude accuracy Most often used in predictive maintenance Hamming e A general purpose window that is similar to a Hanning window e Gives fair peak amplitude accuracy fair peak frequency accuracy It provides better frequenc resolution but decreased amplitude accuracy when compared to the Hanning window Use this to separate closely spaced frequency components compared to Hanning while providing better peak amplitude accuracy than a Rectangular window Number of Averages Select from Select the number of averages for the FFT or TWF see Average TWF later in this topic 1 Ifyou select Average TWF the module performs in the average time domain available when you define the 2 measurement to use synchronous sampling Otherwise the module performs with an average on the linear FFT 3 data e 6 When averaging the module updates the individual TWFs and FFTs as quickly as possible How fast this occurs 12 depends on the overall processing demands on the module which is a function of the module configuration and 23 the current load This along with the fact that the module always captures TWFs with maximum overlap makes it e 45 impossible to define precisely how long in time it takes for the module to acquire any specific number of 89 samples
309. he AC Measurement Object class code 0x390 defines configuration of an AC overall measurement by selecting source smoothing constants and definition of measurement units Two instances are linked to each available transducer channel Table 128 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 AC Measurement Class Instance 1 8 AC measurement setup and data for channels 0 3 e Instances 1 e Instances 3 e Instances 5 e Instances 7 2 for transducer channel 0 AC measurements A and B 4 for transducer channel 1 AC measurements A and B 6 for transducer channel 2 AC measurements A and B 8 for transducer channel 3 AC measurements A and B The second instance in each case relates to a secondary overall measurement B with another source measurement units and potentially different detection method to the primary overall Example primary mm s RMS secondary g peak Currently other instance attributes are common to the pair of instances measurements but work to support the setting of independent time constants for overall 0 and overall 1 A and B is ongoing Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 335 Appendix B CIP Objects The gSE application supports only one overall measurement per channel Overall 0 The Dynamic pressure application is FFT band focused optimized so does not support either of the overall measurements
310. he FMAX Values from 1 32 are allowed Not all 32 selections are provided in the FMAX menu The FMAX values that are listed are approximate values Once selected the actual FFT FMAX what an FFT returns is listed after FFT FMAX to the right of the menu In the case of synchronous sampling one option in the Alternate Signal Path the FMAX divided by the number of samples per shaft revolution dictates the maximum machine speed that the module can successfully monitor Because the module applies the SRD in hardware rather than firmware specify the largest FMAX SRD possible to minimize any further firmware based decimation requirement Doing so reduces the load on the processor which can improve module performance for any non safety or protection related functions Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 17 Filters Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Parameter Values Comments Sample Rate Displays the sample rate from the ADC based on the selected FMAX The displayed value is the calculated value from 93750 Sample Rate Divisor FFT FMAX Displays the maximum frequency of an FFT processed from the ADC Out The actual maximum frequency for an FFT will be slightly lower by one signal source FFT bin than the value displayed as the FFT FMAX is also dependent on the selected number of lines for the FFT ADC out FFT FMAX is the calculated value from 93750 SRD x2 56 Primary Path Process
311. he alarm and trip points in the counter direction In all cases refer to the machine OEM for specific advice on the setting of alarm and trip points Updating a system from Version 1 AOP and Firmware to Version 2 If the existing system has the initial release AOP V053 and Firmware V2 1 3 and a The firmware in the 1444 Module is updated to a later version such as 2 1 7 no changes to the configuration are necessary b If both the AOP and firmware versions are updated to version 2 then the configuration must be modified as follows For an AWAY configuration the OFFSET must be changed to a Minus value and for a TOWARD configuration the OFFSET value must be changed to a Plus value The earlier version 1 AOP and Firmware required the opposite to these settings Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Proportional Voltage Proportional DC Voltages are output from various sensors and systems representing pressure amperage flow and other attributes When it is necessary to measure these with the 1444 dynamic measurement module one or more channels can be defined for Static inputs And if it is necessary to provide this measure to the controller via the input assembly then the measured Proportional DC value can be selected for module output See Select Input Data for Input Tag on page 98 Proportional voltage measurements are calculated as y mx b where
312. he configured overall rates to match their relative storage depths Four transient buffers are provided so up to four different transient events can be stored on the module If long transient events are expected it is possible by configuration to designate that more buffers of the same type be used for the same transient event It is also possible to configure buffer latching so that the captured data would represent the first transient events rather than the most recent Transient buffers can be reset clear current data set status to free ready to accept new data by the I O connection or by the object specific services provided Both methods can reset individual transient buffers Table 108 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Event Log Class Instance Table 109 Class Attributes Attribute Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute ID 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision 8 Get NV Last Alarm STRUCT Time Stamp of last Alarm logged Time Date Can be 16 bytes 9 Get NV Last Event STRUCT Time Stamp of last Event logged Time Date Can be 16 bytes 10 Get NV Erase Cycles UDINT Number of update erase cycles so far lt 100 000 advised Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 321 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 110 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance
313. he latter case the trunking method can be used where multiple parallel cables can be connected between switches such to increase bandwidth For supported products the redundancy level is increased Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 23 Chapter1 About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module Notes 24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Chapter 2 Monitoring System Topic Page Design Considerations 30 Installation Overview 43 Mount the Terminal Base Unit 45 Establish Bus Connections 46 Configure the Terminal Bases 47 Install the Module 47 Wiring Overview 50 Wiring the Main Module 51 DYN Module Transducers 63 EtherNet IP Connector 72 4 20 mA Expansion Module 76 Wiring Expansion Modules 73 Tacho Signal Conditioning Expansion Module 78 Start the Module and Perform a Self test 85 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 25 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System A A A 26 Environment and Enclosure ATTENTION This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment in Overvoltage Category Il applications as defined in IEC 60664 1 at altitudes up to 2000 m 6562 ft without derating This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and will not provide adequate protection to radi
314. he perspective of a Fault Relay Relay Status decoding The relay status uses two bits to communicate whether the relay is assigned or off and whether it is energized or not e bit 0 assigned e bit 1 energized Examples of expected values e value 0 Offand de energized e value 1 assigned and de energized e value 3 assigned and energized Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Relay Control CIP Objects Appendix B Bit wise setting controlling how the relay behaves under fault circumstances Table 224 Relay Control Bit Description 0 main Module Fault 1 Auxiliary Module Fault 2 Auxiliary Bus Communication Fail 3 E IP Communication Failure 4 Tacho Fault 5 Reserved 6 Reserved 7 Latching The status of bits 1 and 2 reflect conditions detectable by the auxiliary module itself and the remainder rely on the main module There are three parameters using these bit definitions Parameter Description Auto Relay Control This follows the logic that when associated with a fail safe voted alarm a main auxiliary module fault also activates the relay so the appropriate bits are set Otherwise it is zero Read only to the user User Relay Control This allows the user to select from a number of faults that can also be considered Relay Control This is a bit wise logical AND of the Auto and User controls This is what is implemented and is read only t
315. he rules for Units selection which is based on the Engineering Units of the selected Data Source are provided in the following table CLASS CHANGE EU OPTION Temperature No change Pressure Change in class only Flow Angle Current Energy Frequency Power Voltage Acceleration Velocity Length e For any acceleration velocity or displacement length units the measurement can be converted between equivalent Metric and English units Displacement Velocity Acceleration m m s m s A A mm mm s mm s micron inch s inch s inch M vig mil mg Number of Spectrum Lines Select from Select the number of lines of resolution to be provided in the FFT that is used to calculate the FFT Bands 100 200 400 800 1600 Signal Detection Select from Select the scaling detection method for the FFT line bin values e Peak e Peak to Peak RMS 140 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 27 Bands Parameter FFT Window Type Values Select from e Rectangular e Flat top e Hanning e Hamming Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Comments Select the window function to apply in the FFT signal processing e FFT Windows Purpose FFT Windows are applied to address the problem of signals that occur at frequencies that are not centered within a frequency bin In these cases energy from the signal can be dispersed among adjacent bins such that the amplitude of neither bin represents the actual mag
316. hen the PacketCountDown reaches 0 the session is complete and the final value in CompletedRecords is all that are transferred 12 Status DINT Any of the following can be returned e eUnrecognizedSession 1 e emaxSessionsReached 2 e ePacketCountOutO0fSequence 3 e elnvalidBufferSelect 4 e eNoDataAvailable 5 e eGeneralError 6 For all successful requests eSUCCESS 0 is returned any other value ends the session 16 Data Array DWORD 50 Each record is an array of DWORDs of size RecordSize This array of records can be large It is the calling applications responsibility to handle these records appropriately The DWORD type is just a placeholder for the actual types in the data structure that maps to this RecordArray See the next section for details 306 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 92 Record Type Structures CIP Objects Appendix B The Record Type Structures are as follows High and Low Resolution Trend e HIGH_RES_TREND eLOW_RES_ TREND eHIGH_RES_ALARM eLOW_RES_ ALARM Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 SamplePeriodInSecs REAL Can be used to calculate the bandwidth for the FFT 12 Identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 ucDataSelect BYTE If SR_ mAG_PHASE Bit 0 is set phase array follows the
317. hen the input signal is LOW below the configured threshold Source Selection The DSP FFT can be sourced from one of the first four sources or the last one when those particular processing elements are configured as active Channel set up Object Index Source 0x00 0 ADCOUT select ADC output stream raw sampled data 0x01 1 Pre Filter before application specific filters and potentially after application specific signal pre processing 0x02 2 Mid Filter Selected mid Filter identifies inclusion of application Low Pass Filter 0x03 3 Post Filter Selected post Filter identifies inclusion of both application Low and High Pass Filter including potentially enabled integration stages 0x04 4 Alternate path a CM alternate processing path available when so configured in the Channel set up Object 430 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Units CIP Objects Appendix B Actual selection of Measurement engineering units are a subset of the master engineering units list It is based on active measurement application for the applicable measurement channel related to sensor type and signal processing Index FFT Resolution 0x04 4 1600 lines Index FFT Window 0x00 0 Normal Rectangular 0x01 1 Flat Top 0x02 2 Hanning 0x03 3 Hamming Index Number of Averages 0x00 0 1 0x01 1 2 0x02 2 3 0x03 3 6 0x04
318. his arc could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding e Ifyou connect or disconnect wiring while the field side power is on an electrical arc can occur This arc could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding e Exposure to some chemicals will degrade the sealing properties of materials that are used in the following devices e Relay RL1 Epoxy We recommend that you periodically inspect these devices for any degradation of properties and replace the module if degradation is found Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 27 Chapter 1 28 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System A ATTENTION If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Before installing configuring operating or maintaining this product read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section for installing configuring or operating equipment Users should familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes laws and standards Installation adjustments putting into service use assembly disassembly and maintenance shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel in
319. how low the LPF cutoff can be set Low Pass Filter Hard Stop Limits When measuring synchronously the module is limited in how high or low it can set the Low Pass Filter corner So if the calculated filter corner per the above exceeds the hard stop limit high or low the filter corner no longer increases or decreases The Hard Stop Limits are based only on the Sample Rate Divide value and are calculated as High Limit 32000 SRD Low Limit 32 SRD The following table shows the hard limits for selected SRD values Low Pass Filter Hard Stop Limits SRD 1 8 16 24 32 Low 32 4 0 2 0 13 1 0 High 32000 4000 2000 1333 1000 The Primary and Alternate signal paths both originate from the output of the Analog to Digital Converter ADC The ADC samples each channel at 93750 samples second for all 4 kHz and 18 kHz Module Personalities or 187500 Hz for the 40 kHz personalities See Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 For 18 kHz modes the output of both ADC channels can be decimated in its hardware by a factor of 2 32 Applying the divider with as large a factor as practical for the application is important because the lower the data rate from the ADC the less time the module spends processing the digital samples This divider leaves more time available to perform other functions Out of the ADC the signal is split into its two paths e The Primary Path applies the low and high pass f
320. ice sends the necessary configuration data During the transmission if an error is detected the module aborts the process e Evaluate Attributes Upon receipt of configuration data the module evaluates each attribute concerning its allowed range If any attribute is not within its allowed range the module transmits a failure message Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 205 Chapter 9 206 Operate the Module e Apply the configuration Once the configuration is communicated successfully the host device sends an Apply message to command the module to implement the changes When an apply service is received the module further evaluates the data to detect dependency errors violations of limitations to parameters due to their dependency on other parameter settings If an error occurs in values of dependent parameters the apply service responds with a failure If no errors are detected then the module applies the changes to the executing configuration It also then saves the updated configuration to nonvolatile memory Deleting a Saved Configuration from Nonvolatile Memory Once a configuration is saved in nonvolatile memory it can only be deleted by executing an out of box type 1 reset See Resetting the Module on page 197 Only one configuration is retained in nonvolatile memory The saved configuration is automatically updated each time that a valid configuration is applied Rockw
321. ield not connected at this end Recommended shield pin connection but may be landed to any available shield connection Jumper 66 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 3 wire Acceleration Sensors or Other 3 wire Transducer Systems Configure the channel for the appropriate polarity supply 25V or 25 V A list of appropriate terminals for each channel follows Typical Core Designation Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel Channel 3 Power Supply 1 5 9 13 SIG 20r3 60r7 10 or 11 140r 15 In general most 3 wire transducer systems requiring 25V or 25V at no more than 25 mA can be accommodated by connecting as above 3 wire sensors are wired identically to eddy current probes power polarity is set in module configuration See Figures 15 18 for wiring illustrations 2 wire Self Generating Velocity Sensors Being self generating no transducer power connection is required A list of appropriate terminals for each channel follows Typical Core Designation Channel 0 Channel Channel2 Channel 3 SIG 20r3 60r7 10 or 11 140r 15 Return 4 8 12 16 Also use this wiring solution for externally powered 2 wire sensors Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 67 Chapter 1 68 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System 3 wire Acceleration and Temperature Sensor Exarnple for Chan
322. ience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation support overview page or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to help ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http www rockwellautomation com rockwellautomation about us sustainability ethics product environmenta
323. igured Configured status not configured and bus OK and bus NOT OK MS Module status Processor Processor Processor activity OK warning critical error CHO Channel 0 Channel notin Channel Pulse ChannelTX Pulse detection 25 5V Pulse status use TXOK detection fault error fail detection CH1 Channel 1 Channel notin Channel Pulse ChannelTX Pulse detection 25 5V Pulse T status use TX OK detection fault error fail detection OPO Output 0 Output notin Output 1 Bus or rela Output gt 1 status use event rev drive fail event rev OP1 Output 1 Output notin Output 1 Bus or rela Output gt 1 status use event rev drive fail event rev 1 At low speed the flash rate reflects pulse rate but the flash rate limits at the maximum flash rate of the Status Indicator 2 If two channels are enabled both show the same state as these supplies are common 3 Blue status indicates normal operation but signals that measurements taken on the buffered outputs are gt 1 Rev an important detail when connecting the buffered output to other instruments Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 239 Appendix A Status Table 56 AOFX Status Indicators 4 20 mA Output Status Indicators Each status indicator represents the state of that particular channel o
324. il output state 1 alarm conditions met 13 TX Fail output disabled 14 TX Fail alarm state 1 alarm 15 TX Fail is a First out alarm Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 373 AppendixB CIP Objects Alarm Usage The following options define the output type of the voted alarm condition Table 167 Alarm Usage Bit Description 0 Alert 1 Danger 2 TX Fail cory Reserved 0x00 defines disabled Voted Alarm multiple settings are allowed noting that the same voted logic is applied within and only within each output type Alarm Behavior These options defined the functionality of the logical alarm output Table 168 Alarm Behavior Value Description 0x00 0 Non Latching alarm follows actual status 0x01 Alarm Multiply Control 1 Latching alarm output retains the alarm condition once activated until a reset is issued while the current active safe OK level applies The following sources can be identified as input for Alarm Multiply SPM trigger Table 169 Apply Multiply Control Bit Description 0 Logic Input 0 Module hardware digital input 1 Logic Input 1 Module hardware digital input Controller SPM 0 Controller SPM 1 AJ wl N Alarm Multiply Service Request SPM 0 wm Alarm Multiply Service Request SPM 1 Reserved 0x00 defines disabled Alarm Multiply function multiple settings i
325. iltering and integration that is required of the application and defined in part by the Channel Measurement Type See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 The signal processing in this path is defined in three distinct steps Pre Filter Mid Filter and Post Filter where each can serve as the data source for various measurements see Table e Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 e The Alternate Path is available for applications that require more measurements with another Fmax or synchronously sampled data Data from this path is available only at its conclusion Table 18 Data source options for each measurement Measurement Signal Sources ADC Out Primary Path Alternate Path Pre Filter Mid Filter Post Filter me gSE Tracking Filters Overall 1 2 3 Not 1x SMAX Shaft Absolute TWF 1 2 3 4 5 FFT 1 2 3 4 5 FFT Bands 1 2 3 4 5 Demand Data 1 2 3 4 5 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 123 Chapter 3 Measurement Definition The following tables include the Decimation menu selections for each of the selectable Sample Rate Divide SRD values selected by the ADC FMAX menu Along with the displayed menu value the table shows the decimation value that is written to the configuration assembly and the actual FFT FMAX that the measurement wo
326. imation x 2 78 The LPF is the corner frequency for the filter The corner frequency is defined as the point where the signal is attenuated by 3dB This means that some attenuation will occur at frequencies less than the LPF corner frequency While any attenuation from the LPF will be consistently applied across measurements if it is necessary to assure that band measurements are not attenuated by the LPF then do not set band limits at frequencies greater than the FFT FMAX value shown at the top of the page 142 For standard dynamic channels the dynamic measurement module calculates FFT bands from a unique FFT that is calculated specifically for the band measurements This enables optimization of the definition of the FFT bands for this purpose It provides a higher performance solution than the common FFT or gSE FFT measurement by configuring the band measurements to update faster in most cases This page is presented when the channel is configured for dynamic or Spike Energy gSE measurements see Channel Type selection Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 DC Measurement Definition Chapter 3 While the dynamic measurement module is designed for measuring dynamic signals such as vibration it is also capable of many types of static DC type measurements such as thrust differential expansion or rod drop This page is where these are configured Normal Th
327. in Alarm Non Fail Safe energized de energized Fail Safe de energized energized Fail Safe is applicable only to physical relays that are assigned to the Voted Alarm The intent of Fail Safe is to help ensure that if a loss of power occurs to the relay such that it fails in a safe state which is generally the same as the Alarm state Relay Control Latch Enable Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check to enable Latching on this Voted Alarm Latching is applied to the Voted Alarm and is extended to any relays that are assigned to the alarm Alatched Voted Alarm and associated relay can be reset after the alarm condition has cleared by setting the AlarmReset bit bit 7 in the controller output s Control tag or if a discrete input is assigned this function See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 then by signaling that input Inputs There are two elements to the inputs of a voted alarm including the measurement alarm status and a list of measurement alarms The status definition provides the specific conditions that this voted alarm acts on alert and or danger and or transducer fault The other input is a list of up to four enabled measurement alarms to use as input to the voting logic For example 1 out of 2 3 out of 4 182 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure Alarms Chapter 7 Logic Logic is the A out of B voting that is applied to the inputs Se
328. in EN IEC 60529 and used in an environment of not more than Pollution Degree 2 as defined in EN IEC 60664 1 when applied in Zone 2 environments The enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool e This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation e Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 140 of the rated voltage when applied in Zone 2 environments e Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded connectors or other means provided with this product e Donot disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous API 670 Compliance The 1444 series is designed in accordance with the relevant sections of the 5th Edition of the American Petroleum Institutes API standard 670 Machinery Protection Systems 1 Whether or not a system complies is dependent on the specific components provided the various optional elements of the standard that the user requires and the configuration of the installed system Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 29 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Design Considerations 30 Removal or Insertion Under Power RIUP Removal or Insertion Under Power RIUP of any 1444 series main or expansion module is permitted only in a nonhazardous
329. ing Mode Asynchronous This is the sampling mode for the Primary Signal Path It is not editable Decimation Primary Select a level of decimation to apply by selecting the desired Maximum Frequency FMAX for the primary signal path See the following Decimation Tables for available selections The primary signal path includes a decimation stage that further divides the sample rate in firmware from the output of the ADC This selection presents selected FMAX values based on the Module Personality Module Definition and the sample rate out of the ADC The value written to the configuration assembly is the Primary Path Decimation not the FMAX Values from 1 255 are possible Not all selection are provided in the FMAX menu The FMAX values listed are approximate values Once selected the actual FFT FMAX what an FFT returns is listed after FFT FMAX below the menu Sample Rate Primary Displays the sample rate of the data in the Primary Signal Path The displayed value is the calculated value from 93750 SRD x Primary Path Decimation FFT FMAX Primary Displays the maximum frequency FMAX of an FFT at the Pre Filter Mid The actual maximum frequency for an FFT will be slightly lower by one Low Pass Filter Primary Frequency Filter or Post Filter stage of processing A Low Pass Filter can be applied to the measurement to assure that unwanted high frequency signals are not included in the overall m
330. ion Detection threshold or options window detection methods 42 Get V Lower Speed REAL Lowspeedthreshold RPM Threshold definition Range 4 19000 43 Get V Higher Speed REAL High speed RPM Threshold threshold definition Range 5 20000 Logic Gating A configuration attribute 48 Get V Logic Gating Source WORD Source definition for Logic gating source the logic gating options trigger data including OFF Logic Control A configuration attribute 56 Get V Logic Control WORD Source definition for Refer logic gating Source the logic control source options but note trigger data that only one logic control source is allowed Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Attribute Semantics Voted Alarm Status CIP Objects Appendix B Voted Alarm instance has up to three outputs that can be used Alert Danger and TX OK The Voted alarm status is bit orientated as follows with a common four bits then further sets of 4 bits for the Alert Danger and TX Fail outputs Table 166 Voted Alarm Status Bit Description 0 Latching 1 Bypass Inhibit Active 2 SPM active 3 Spare 4 Alert output state 1 alarm conditions met 5 Alert output disabled 6 Alert alarm state 1 alarm 7 Alert is a first out alarm 8 Danger output state 1 alarm conditions met 9 Danger output disabled 10 Danger alarm state 1 alarm 11 Danger is a first out alarm 12 TX Fa
331. ion not the FMAX Values from 1 255 are possible Not all selections are provided in the FMAX menu The FMAX values listed are approximate values Once selected the actual FFT FMAX what an FFT returns is listed after FFT FMAX below the menu Because the module applies the SRD in hardware rather than firmware whenever possible select the required FMAX at the DC output and leave the Alternate Path Decimation equal to 1 FMAX ADC our FMAX Doing so reduces the load on the processor which may improve module performance for any non safety or protection related functions i Sample Rate Alternate Displays the sample rate of the data in the Primary Signal Path The displayed value is the calculated value from 93750 SRD x Alternate Path Decimation FFT FMAX Alternate 120 Displays the maximum frequency FMAX of an FFT processed from the Alternate Path The actual maximum frequency for an FFT will be slightly lower by one FFT bin than the value displayed as the FFT FMAX is also dependent on the selected number of lines for the FFT e If Alternate Path Decimation 1 so the FMAX is the same as the ADC Out FMAX then this value will be the same as the ADC out FMAX e Ifthe Alternate Path FMAX is gt 1 then FFT FMAX is the calculated value from 93750 SRD x Alternate Path Decimation x 2 56 x 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 17 Filters Parameter L
332. ion Modules va ocncxi Sed IG ee 165 Relay Pate nor eie i nia ae teas Era A E E EE tonal 165 Relay Management Overview sus susserssrrrrrrrrerrrre 167 Alarm Output sa e e e aE E a EE E TEES 167 Main Module Fault Output 2022 ier cce segs yee Sehaateae 168 Expansion Module Fault Output 2 03 2 24 sce eecev eevee se 169 Relay Drive Testing acca santa cots hha e Na E 170 Double pole Double throw DPDT Relay Solutions 171 ING CES pci inset ec E arene eater Deen cana E davis ons eo wre oes 172 Chapter 7 Measurement Alarms Page tii iiceecv ines tai as eeiesed CEES 173 Page OWI EW iin cs Sreuctrenwawee ae aasnumitbeheramatetunsss 173 Alarm Measurement Definition 0 e cece ee ences 177 Voted Alarms Pagerie Siiulsastietiad E E sab EEE 179 RGA Va orcas oP cinta tant Aree her ewer bet sl alee eee aa 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 7 Table of Contents Trend and Transient Capture Operate the Module Chapter 8 Treid Pagere iat hte ented s ioien bl dawa ut oe caine bids 187 Page OVEIMEW Saints u eene Ca aap aaa EESO a eae aati 187 Discrete Data Buttets s53a 5004 2535 40 Sodan aegauwe ieee oee4 188 Trend DUM ER rre ranana trae ET nad a 189 Dynami Bullets cece ae eke etme a E EA A E eaan 189 Alarm Buffer airada naue Pert A EA 190 Transi ht Capt te Pagesrresrrsiis ue tioa sapere EE E aaa 192 Page OVETVIEW ik E e EE a a RAEE he ee ha 192 pa a ees 193 OET ON EEE E E E E E E E T 1
333. ion temperature code When combining products within a system the most adverse temperature code lowest T number can be used to help determine the overall temperature code of the system Combinations of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation Informations sur l utilisation de cet quipement en environnements dangereux Les produits marqu s CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D ne conviennent qu une utilisation en environnements de Classe Division 2 Groupes A B C D dangereux et non dangereux Chaque produit est livr avec des marquages sur sa plaque d identification qui indiquent le code de temp rature pour les environnements dangereux Lorsque plusieurs produits sont combin s dans un syst me le code de temp rature le plus d favorable code de temp rature le plus faible peut tre utilis pour d terminer le code de temp rature global du syst me Les combinaisons d quipements dans le syst me sont sujettes a inspection par les autorit s locales qualifi es au moment de l installation WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous e Do not disconnect connections to this equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws sliding latches threaded con
334. it is not necessary that they have the same number of 512 samples Therefore the Number of Spectrum Lines for the FFT is not related to this Number of Samples for the e 1024 TWF e 2048 4096 8192 Speed Reference Speed Reference 0 or 1 Select the speed reference that is associated with the TWFs and FFTs processed from this channel The module does not use the speed reference but stores it for reference by any higher level software systems that must associate a shaft rotation speed with the measurement Enable FFT Data Storage Enable checked Select the checkbox to make the module process and save the FFT so it is available to be read externally from the Disabled not checked module The module also saves the FFT in the Trend buffers Tip External access to Live TWF and FFT data as defined on this page requires that the TWF and or FFT be enabled here AND that Dynamic Data be enabled on the TREND page Clear the checkbox so the FFT does not process in the module Number of Spectrum Lines 1600 or 800 not The number of lines for the FFT over the frequency range of 0 to the FMAX of the selected signal source Filters Page editable e Ifno decimation is applied to the signal then bands will be calculated from a 1600 line FFT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Ifthe signal source includes decimation then the FFT will be 800 lines Note FFT Bands can be calculated from any frequency rang
335. itch is defined for logic control then indicates switch status else indicates status of assigned 1 0 contro 30 Logic Control Status 1 If a digital input switch is defined for logic gating then indicates status of assigned 1 0 control else is unused 31 Reserved e The alarm number is presented in the assembly in bit format The alarm instance is the decimal value represented by the 4 bits For example test _AlarmStatus 0 VotedAlarmInstance0 0 test AlarmStatus 0 VotedAlarmInstance1 1 test _AlarmStatus 0 VotedAlarmInstance2 0 test _AlarmStatus 0 VotedAlarmInstance3 0 The proceeding table indicates the status of voted alarm number 2 However e The voted alarm instance provided in the status assembly is a value from 1 13 To get the voted alarm instance as referenced to the AOP 0 12 subtract 1 from the decimal value of the presented 4 bit value 228 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 51 Relay Status Table 50 Alarm Status Structure Operate the Module The status structure consists of these parameters Chapter 9 dint VotedAlarm 13 int Relay int Reserved The data type for each attribute is either an int 16 bits or a dint 32 bit In each case status is defined by the state of the individual bits as provided in Table 1 It is possible for multiple bits to be set Relay Status Structure The relay status structure cont
336. ither spring or screw clamp removable plug connectors for both the module and terminal base Appropriate enclosure Sensors Power supply unit Expansion modules provide enhanced or optional I O capabilities that are application dependent 4 channel relay output modules RELX 4 channel 4 20 mA output module AOFX 2 channel Tacho Signal Conditioning module TSCX Up to three RELX modules and one each AOFX and TSCX module can be connected to one DYN module Interconnections between a DYN module and its Expansion module and to extend the tacho bus from one such group to further DYN modules are by ribbon cable assembly Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 17 Chapter1 About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module The following parts listings conform to this hierarchical structure e Assembly level of module and base excluding connectors Connector level choice of screw or spring clamp type Component level module or base as spare replacement item Table 1 1444 Series Catalog Numbers Type Module Catalog Number Measurement modules Dynamic measurement module 1444 DYN04 01RA Speed modules Tachometer signal conditioner expansion module 1444 TSCX02 02RB Relay modules Relay expansion module 1444 RELX00 04RB Analog output modules 4 20 mA expansion module 1444 AOFX00 04RB Terminal bases Dynamic measurement module terminal base 1444 TB A Table 2 Removable Plug C
337. its 1 and 2 are not used Set SR_FILTER Bit 3 to request that if samples are decimated or synchronously re sampled then only 50 of the configured FFT lines are to be returned For further information see FFT Data Filter SR_FILTER under Sampling Control in the Channel Setup Object Pad BYTE Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary PacketCountDown DWORD The PacketCountDown is initially specified as 0 but on subsequent calls the PacketCountDown returned in the CM Record Response must be passed here Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 305 AppendixB CIP Objects Channel Select Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel 0 1 2 3 Reserved The host sends the following CM Record Request Parameters as part of an 0x4C service request Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 SessionInstance USINT The host copies the SessionInstance returned here into each subsequent CM Record Request Up to three instances are supported 1 DynamicChannel USINT Indicates the dynamic channel for this record Channels 0 though 3 are valid channels 2 CompletedRecords UNIT This is incremented each time that another complete record has been transferred There are often several packets per completed record 4 RecordSize UNIT For a given session the RecordSize 8 PacketCountDown DWORD The host copies the PacketCountDown returned here into each subsequent CM Record Request W
338. ity fast transient capture using long time records Nort all bit combinations are valid total number of buffers that are allocated must be no more than 4 Startup buffers are allocated first to the lower buffers Source of Speed Data for Transient Data Acquisition Any one of the following can be identified as the speed reference used in transient data acquisition Value Description 1 Tacho Speed 0 2 Tacho Speed 1 3 Factored speed from Tacho 0 4 Factored speed from Tacho 1 Higher Reserved Values Table 99 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Instance 0x0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute The data types consisting of multiple bytes are transferred in little endian format least significant byte first 314 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Also note that a data communication session starts at the first service request and ends after the final response of the exchange However it is subject of an inactivity timeout of 30 seconds Table 100 Object Specific Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code ae DCT Class Instance 0x4B X X Reset transient buffer 0 Buffer specific controls 0x4C X X Reset transient buffer 1 0x4D X X Reset transient buffer 2 Ox4E X X Reset transient buffer 3 Ox4F X Transient Buffer Uploa
339. ject instance per module When one or more Relay modules are included in a system not only must the configuration aspects of this object be addressed but the presence of each module must also be flagged by appropriate setting of the Module Control Object class attribute 16 Configured Auxiliary Modules Table 220 Object Instances Instance ID Description Address Switch Settings 0 Relay Module Class Instance 1 First Relay Expansion Module SWI SW2 as 0 1 2 Second Relay Expansion Module SWI SW2 as 1 0 3 Third Relay Expansion Module SWI SW2 as 1 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B A base switch address setting of 00 is illegal for a relay module and causes it to display a critical error solid red Status Indicator Table 221 Class Attributes Attribute Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values ID 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision Table 222 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 4 Get NV Firmware Revision STRUCT Retrieves Firmware Revision of the Firmware Revision information Relay expansion module 4 Get NV major Version USINT 4 Get NV Minor Version USINT 5 Get V Expansion Module Status WORD Coded information on Relay Module Relay
340. ject 3 When a buffer is reset even if it is not configured to latch the status is set to Armed and with Zero Stored Records ATTENTION After an alarm buffer is reset any existing stored data is no longer available Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 191 Chapter8 Trend and Transient Capture Transient Capture Page Page Overview V Enable Transient Capture Speed Reference Speed 0 z Disable Dynamic Data Capture on Start Up Low Speed Limit 400 RPM Disable Dynamic Data Capture on Coast Down High Speed Limit 3590 RPM V Enable Latching Start Up Number of Buffers 2 t Post Start Up 1 0 E Daa Sara Sample Time Delta RPM Trigger 15 A RPM Overall 0 Channel 0 Al R R Overall 0 Channel 1 Delta Time Trigger 1 0 min s Overall 0 Channel 2 2 Overall 0 Channel 3 F Coast Down FFT Band 0 Channel 0 be Gr nities 2 FFT Band 0 Channel 1 FFT Band 0 Channel 2 f FFT Band 0 Channel 3 aS Delta RPM Trigger 15 A RPM rrr nand f1 Channa Select Discrete Record Measurements Delta Time Trigger 1 0 min s The transient capture page enables definition of the modules transient data management facility The capabilities that are provided are intended to help ensure the capture of critical data necessary to diagnose machine condition during its run up start and run down stop events The capabilities are designed to help ensure this regardless of whether the even
341. jury or death Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment PPE Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment PPE gt gt gt Allen Bradley Dynamix Rockwell Software and Rockwell Automation are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies New and Updated Information Summary of Changes This manual contains new and updated information Changes throughout this revision are marked by change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph This table contains the major changes made to this revision Topic Page Ethernet Cable Information 15 Filters 109 Decimation Menu Selections 114 Tracking Filter Information 118 Normal Thrust Selection 135 Concluding Transient Events 177 Time Management 183 Transducer Fault Detection 189 Tachometer Signal Condition Input Fault Detection 189 Sampling Control 306 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Summary of Changes Notes 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Preface About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Table of Contents Table of Contents Additional REsOUrCeS cucu iis syne cote oe adi tate eh ciere Aes Metre 13 Chapter 1 Applications enosn a a a sear unad sobs ec eteedes 15 Maim Feature
342. ke precedence This can occur as routine functions dependent on configuration or as a consequence of circumstance any higher priority immediate processing demands such as an action taken on alarm or a host data request e Low Resolution At a user specified timer in multiples of 100 milliseconds the module retains a record for its long term low resolution buffer Low Resolution samples are updated independent of the High Resolution data Therefore even if the timers were to trigger at the same millisecond the measurements read to the two buffers can be different This is because the measurement tasks of the module execute at a higher priority than buffer management Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Trend and Transient Capture Chapter 8 Trend Buffer The trend buffer is composed of 640 records that are sampled at the low resolution rate and that overwrite in a circular first in first out manner The buffer updates continuously when the module is in RUN mode Dynamic Buffer In addition to the discrete measurement buffer the trend function can also holda buffer of dynamic data records The dynamic data buffer is composed of 64 records each containing a time waveform and or FFT for each channel as defined on the FFT page Dynamic data records are sampled in the same manner as the Low Resolution discrete data by using its own 100 millisecond multiplier However regardless of the multiplier s
343. kwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 159 Chapter4 Configure the Tachometer Expansion Module Notes 160 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Analog Expansion Module Chapter 6 Configure Analog Outputs Topic Page Analog Expansion Module 161 Output Configuration Page 162 4 20 mA analog outputs are enabled by the addition of a 1444 AOFX00 04RB Analog Output Expansion Module The Dynamix 1444 series analog output expansion module is a four channel module that outputs 4 20 mA signals that are proportional to measured values of the module s host 1444 DYN04 01RA dynamic measurement module The 1444 AOFX00 04RB module is designed for use with a dynamic measurement module that acts as its host serves its power and manages the analog configuration of the module The analog output expansion module is designed to act as an extension of its host module So the 1444 AOFX00 04RB module s operation is dependent on the availability of its host Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 161 Chapter 5 Output Configuration Page 162 Configure Analog Outputs Page Overview Channel Enadie Overal 0 7 7 Overal 7 Overat 0 C Measurement Overal 0 Chansel 0 Low Engeeerng High En zeaeres uaes Faut Mode Ostput sise z 0 Hoki Las Vaive x i000 Hoti Last Vaive x 00 Hoki Las Vale z OM Hoki L
344. kwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 307 AppendixB CIP Objects Waveform eT WE eTWF_ALARM Table 94 Record Type Structures ByteOffset Structure Member Data Description within Type Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 SamplePeriodInSecs REAL Time period between samples 12 Identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 RelativeTime UDINT A 24 bit micro second counter value for finely aligning data 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 SampleArray REAL The array of waveform data values samples Tacho ETACHO e TACHO_ALARM Table 95 Record Type Structures Byte Offset Structure Member Data Description within Type Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec INTUD Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 Reserved REAL 12 Reserved DWORD 16 Reserved UDINT 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 TimingArray UDINT The array of tacho time values 24 bit micro second counter For FFT and TWF data For asynchronous data the actual sample period is transferred REAL format For synchronous data the same four bytes are used to transfer the number of samples per revolution and an indicative speed for the transferred data 308 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P Au
345. kwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 13 Preface Notes 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Applications Chapter 1 About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module The Dynamix 1444 Series dynamic measurement module is a four channel general purpose monitor that can serve almost any industrial machinery protection or condition monitoring application The module supports measurements of dynamic inputs such as vibration pressure and static inputs such as thrust eccentricity and rod drop The module can be used for monitoring shaft casing and pedestal vibration shaft and rod position casing expansion and other critical dynamic and position measurements on rotating machinery To achieve this degree of adaptability the module marries an extraordinarily flexible firmware and an incredibly powerful multi processor hardware platform The 1444 DYN04 01RA module is designed specifically for integration with Allen Bradley Logix controllers connected across an industrial Ethernet network This makes the 1444 Series unequaled in its ability to serve as a synergetic member of larger total facility control and information management systems Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 15 Chapter 1 About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module The 1444 Series includes the main module 1444 DYN04 01RA plus three optional expansion modules
346. l Measurement Object Dynamix Dual Measurement Object Sensor A Ramp Angle Sensor B Ramp Angle Differential Expansion Overall Axial Offset Differential Expansion Overall Radial Offset Ch0_1 AxialOffset when Channel 0 or 1 Dynamix Dual Measurement Object Overall Axial Offset Ch2_3 Axial0ffset when Channel 2 or 3 ChO_1 RadialOffset when Channel 0 or 1 Dynamix Dual Measurement Object Dynamix Dual Measurement Object Overall Axial Offset Overall Radial Offset Ch2_3 RadialOffset when Channel 2 or 3 Dynamix Dual Measurement Object Overall Radial Offset Eccentricity Tachometer ChO 30verall ConfigurePkPerRevolution Dynamix AC Measurement Object Configure Peak Per Revolution Eccentricity Minimum pk revolution Chd 30verall MinPeakPerRevolutionRPM Dynamix AC Measurement Object Minimum RPM Demand Page Signal Source cho 3Demand Source Dynamix Advanced CM Data Object Source Selection TWF Measurement Units cho 3Demand TWFUnits Dynamix Advanced CM Data Object Measurement Units Speed Reference Cho 3Demand SpeedRef Dynamix Advanced CM Data Object Associated Tacho Source Analog Output Page Enable Cho 3AnalogOut En Dynamix Current Output Module Current Output Enable Object Measurement Chd 3AnalogOut MeasurementID Dynamix Current Output Module Current Output Measurement Object Identifier Low Engineering Chd 3AnalogOut LowEngine
347. l acc ace eee nd tate Boa Sher oene awe a a a 351 Dynamix TSC Module Object i sS snnch gene s cediuss oes ee eecnes 352 Attribute Semantics acide eee cans pepe ode canals ds 354 Dynamix Tacho and Speed Measurement Object 04 357 Attribute Semantics Gc dae vie Gant aaa tee aG 359 Behavior aiem Aig eae ihe a arp ek Base ama oa 360 Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object 6 0 0 c svek cede denne neck 361 Attribute Seimauticsscuee ss kate coats tow bee ee aA ke 365 Wii VIO ne 2 eke etna cain Sets Cnet eas Anne Bl Gos eB ane toa 369 Dynamix Voted Alarm Object 2iciiastes i saeeu se edited bas 370 Class Attribute Semantics 2 34 vexed dae cetakineowe en ocd 371 Attribute Semantics uuuseesseuuurreererrrurrreeerrrerr 373 Beha O sexe hax are seed Seer a a a ayn a a 378 Dynamix Normal CM Data Object orara ee e e Eaa EEE E N ge pen a EE 379 trea BU CES MAN CIC 82h cad accut ried ade ee Saint omen eae 380 B havio fest x to sea uncer gaat ies os Dera ns presale 390 Dynamix FFT Band Object vxiciitnvcsssavevskse tached cuawewneees 392 Attribute Semin sssnc c ds PASS oie tahoe saudades aed 393 Dynamix Advanced CM Data Oech tet ei tirede aaa ee weak uN Circle di he oe ed 394 Attribute SeEmAntiCS coins oh ia Mec ads eera Oebue aan E AEE Rees 395 MBG AION Z masma aa a sod seater iron aaa R EE 406 Dynamix MUX Object vc tcp oe nionceihodd Ghali Neue etanaedhthiy 408 Dynamix MUX OD ects Saas tcie od eo yea sees Waa tage erga 409 Dyna
348. l compliance page Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A S Kar Plaza Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Supersedes Publication 1444 UM001A EN P December 2014 Copyright 2015 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
349. l ete muta anne 301 Availability of Dynamic Data 4 eel ce cui sedi aia ee ee ie 304 Object Specific SERVICES orses utin aa EE EE EEEE ERE 304 Behavior rinan nee a dude dees ER a S RRNA 309 Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object 00 cece eee eee 311 Attribute Semantics dessin etek dg seb ec hiker meee sed 313 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 9 Table of Contents Dynamix Event Log Object sicus erie rasa iS ed eS 319 Behavior e Pon nt hat act clara ecg hse cds endera a eh eR eae 324 Dynamix Transducer Object au cu42 Ve seer eelaa tance eave ueiet 328 Attribute Seiianitlesi 56 os Satu ahlc eget wee ha ee us cacoes 329 Dynamix Channel Setup Objecten aia eat wong pita egoa py E EEREN 331 Attribute Semantics cscs ohh outan iis hte eea ea itoloses utente te 333 Dynamix AC Measurement Object ps suceseotsensewhietann aio EERE EEES 335 Attribute SEMA CSetaid wits dteees baked ONL tel Meld ce bole i maa 337 Dynamix DC Meas r ment Object cis cna ntettun edie ranen a Sada e iena 339 AteribUtes cian ticS scales aso ed ehh ae ee een Bh 340 Dynamix Dual Measurement Object sas cacscte died 2545 sa e E E pe Rea 343 Attribute Semantiesyscruccown ded eeced edna kaw Ge ooadaus ata nks 344 Behaviors fois cl chic hE etal cbt plead Cale O Ante a theca 345 Dynamix Tracking Filter Objecto rreren ha tam alata atite webs a A a ad nau 347 Attribute Semantics ose een eek i ane ae se erent 349 Ben aviO
350. l for the alarm input is included in the Voted Alarm definition Expansion Module Relay Enable Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check to enable the relay Expansion Module Relay Voted Alarm Number Blank or 0 12 presented in a list of enabled Voted Alarms This is the Voted Alarm that is associated with the Expansion Module relay If blank then at least one fault must be selected to act on Expansion Module Relay Alarm Status to Activate On Select from e Alert e Danger e Xdcr Fault e Disarm e Module Fault Alert Danger and Transducer Fault are states that the Voted Alarm can actuate on see Voted Alarm page If Disarm is selected the relay is in Bypass mode If Module Fault is selected then the relay actuates only on the specified faults not just Module Fault Expansion Module Relay Module Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must actuate on a fault in either the main Module or the Relay Expansion Module When Fail Safe Enable is checked for the selected Voted Alarm if Alarm Status to Activate On is set to Module Fault this control is checked and disabled Expansion Module Relay Expansion Bus Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must actuate on a fault of the Expansion Bus Expansion Module Relay Latch Enable 166 Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check this when the relay must latch after having actuate
351. le For any of the three signal source types connect the signal to terminal 17 and the common return connection to terminal 18 Figure 23 NPN type transducer connection 32488 M When an external signal is used to serve multiple DYN modules the recommended wiring solution is as follows 1 Wire the source signal to the first modules TTL inputs per Tacho Inputs on page 55 2 On the first module wire one of its outputs to the next module s TTL inputs 1 per Opto isolated Outputs on page 52 49 o gt TOETO 0 SS gt L 1000000 Ilo Mh Linn IA J i A000 NN O O D O M ccrerrrererererrryso MAS e 16 abena ra 40 Hi gt 17 Sig 39 Lo gt 18 Ret a7 ase Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter Example of wiring Discrete Output 0 to Tacho Input 0 M E lessesesecosnssnet BE ME o w Ne 00000000000 Le 17 E 32 ag eaaa 32 38 Hi gt 21 Sig 37 Lo gt 22 Ret EIEI Example of wiring Discrete Output 1 to Tacho Input 1 3 Daisy chain further modules be repeating 1 and 2 4 To output the TTL signal the wired Opto isolated Output must be 1 configured to replicate the Local TTL Tach 0 Input or Local TTL Tach 1 Input as appropriate See Hardware Configuration on pa
352. lections are provided which support various combinations of four inputs and include Logic 10ut Of 1 1 Out Of 4 1 Out Of 2 2 Out OF 4 2 Out OF2 3 Out OF 4 1 Out Of 3 4 Out Of 4 2 Out OF 3 1 Out Of 2 AND 1 Out Of 2 3 Out OF3 2 Out Of 2 OR 2 Out Of 2 1 Out Of 2 AND 2 Out Of 2 2 Out Of 2 AND 1 Out Of 2 For the AND and OR combinations the inputs are grouped in the order entered that is inputs 0 and 1 for the BEFORE the AND OR statement logic and inputs 2 and 3 for the AFTER the AND OR statement logic For a vote to resolve to TRUE 1 the logic must be satisfied with inputs that are all in the same condition and as defined for the voted alarm alert danger fault In addition to defining the condition and inputs for the logical assessment voted alarms enable definition of several control attributes These include managing set point multiplication gating controls and relay controls Set Point Multiplication SPM enables application of the limit multiplier to any measurement alarms that are linked to the voted alarm where the measurement alarm is applying only static limits SPM control includes two items the input to use and any delay required Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 183 Chapter 7 184 Configure Alarms SPM Control Input The SPM function can be controlled from either of two inputs These inputs can be either the SPM bits included in the controller output
353. lector Outputs The DYN module includes two Opto isolated outputs 0 and 1 40 00H The connections are functionally polarity sensitive and are designated H High and L Low As the name suggests these connections are isolated from any others on the module These Opto isolated outputs support reverse connection protection within defined current load specifications Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 59 Chapter 1 60 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Buffered Outputs In addition to the BNC outputs a buffered output is provided for each channel 0 3 on the upper module connector Although having independent resistive current limiting the buffered and BNC outputs of any one channel share the same drive circuitry All signal related inputs and outputs unless otherwise indicated share the same analog ground return IMPORTANT By default the buffered outputs are not powered and no signal is available See Buffered Output Override on page 55 for more on how to enable the Buffered Outputs Lower Module Connector The following are functions of the lower module connector Sensor Connections The lower module connector is where the sensor connections are made Terminal Name Application Description 1 TXPO Sensor 0 Transducer 0 Power 2 SIGO Transducer 0 Signal 3 SIGO 4 RETO Transducer 0 Return 5 TXP1 Sensor 1 Tra
354. level The output that is provided on the BNC is always a buffered version of the respective input tacho signal When the input signal is known to be multiple events per revolution the TSC module sets either status indicator 6 or 7 blue as a warning that the BNC output of that channel carries a multiple event per revolution signal This is to serve as a warning to a local analyst A signal return one connection for the two terminal outputs of each channel is provided on the upper base connector Otherwise the base part carries mainly Shield connections that are provided as a termination point for cable screens shields In addition one or more must be used to connect Shield to a local ground of the user s choice Do not make any connections to terminals 9 or 10 Tacho input connections Terminal 24 23 22 21 20 19 Name RET SH SH SH SH RET Application Tacho Return Shield Tacho Return Z S 2 z 5 5 T c Z E SZ a 4 5 2 5 a 8 g 3 g gt A c YU Terminal 18 17 16 15 14 13 Name TO OUTO TO OUT 1 RET RET T1 OUTO T1 0UT1 Application Tacho 0 Outputs Tacho Returns Tacho 1 Outputs S 5 2 ESE S Z z z 5 z z a 32 gt a co Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 79 Chapter 1 80 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System 1444 TSCX02 02RB
355. list The service is returning the list of attributes that are supplied with status information for those attributes that were invalid 0x1E 30 Embedded service error A vendor specific error has been encountered The Additional Code Field of the Error Response defines the particular error encountered Use of this General Error Code only needs performed when none of the Error Codes that are presented in this table or within an Object Class definition accurately reflect the error Ox1F 31 Vendor specific error A vendor specific error has been encountered The Additional Code Field of the Error Response defines the particular error encountered Use of this General Error Code only needs performed when none of the Error Codes that are presented in this table or within an Object Class definition accurately reflect the error 0x20 32 Invalid parameter A parameter that is associated with the request was invalid This code is used when a parameter does not meet the requirements of this specification and or the requirements defined in an Application Object Specification 0x21 33 Write once value or An attempt was made to write to a write once medium For example WORM drive PROM that has medium already written already been written or to modify a value that cannot be changed once established 0x22 34 Invalid reply received An invalid reply is received For example reply service code does not match the request Service Code or reply message is shorter t
356. ll Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence gt gt IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures ARC FLASH HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a motor control center to alert people to potential Arc Flash Arc Flash will cause severe in
357. llowing e Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV or e Protected Extra Low Voltage PELV e To comply with UL CUL requirements this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with the following e Limited Voltage Supply If the input power supply is restricted to 8A no additional protection is necessary However for supplies with higher current ratings that serve multiple groups of main modules the first module of the daisy chain requires an 8A current limiting fuse for protection Power return line of the main system power supply must be grounded for electrical safety reasons The required power supply rating can be calculated based on the following per module allowances Module Type Power Load 18V Supply 24V Supply 32V Supply Main 11 5W 640 mA 480 mA 360 mA Expansion relay 1 6W 90 mA 70 mA 50 mA Expansion 0 76 W 40 mA 30mA 22mA 4 20mA Expansion TSC 4W 225 mA 170 mA 125 mA Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Each redundant supply must be able to provide the full load no facility for load sharing is provided and the higher of the two applied voltages powers the module There are internal protective non replaceable fuses on each of the power inputs and on the bus supply to the Expansion modules In addition there is similar protection on each of the main and Expansion modules The Expansion modules are
358. llows Typical Core Designation Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 SIG 3 7 11 15 Return 4 8 12 16 Then link these terminals 1and2 5and 6 9and 10 13 and 14 Figures 19 22 show typical wiring for 2 wire constant current sensors including IEPE Acceleration Velocity and Pressure Sensors Figure 19 2 wire IEPE Sensors Channel 0 Wiring Pin A Signal Pin B Common Common Signal E Cable shield not connected at this end Shield gt Recommended shield pin connection but may be landed to any available shield connection Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 65 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Figure 20 2 wire IEPE Sensors Channel 1 Wiring Pin A Signal Pin B Common Cable shield not connected at this end Common gt ATTA TTT Signal gt O Shei 23 gt Se Recommended shield pin connection but may be landed to any available shield connection Figure 21 2 wire IEPE Sensors Channel 2 Wiring Pin A Signal Pin B Common Cable shield not connected at this end slI100000000 BZ Recommended shield pin connection but may be landed to any available shield connection Figure 22 2 wire IEPE Sensors Channel 3 Wiring Pin A Signal Pin B Common Cable sh
359. lters mode asynchronous or synchronous related tacho source and engineering units for the data If the mode is indicated as being synchronous the SamplePeriodInSecs field contains the number of samples per revolution Behavior Through the Object specific service 0x4C the Normal CM Object gives access to Live Dynamic data See the Data Manager Object for access to historical data Trend and Alarm See the Advanced CM Data Object for access to dynamically configurable analysis data variable FFT lines and so on and the Transient Data Manager Object for access to stored transient event data Although in general multi user access is supported by this object the live data option is single user only In such a case error code 13 will be returned to any subsequent requestor eLiveMeasurementInProgress and that software will need to resubmit the request 390 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Normal CM Record Request Recommendations for Network side implementation The data is returned in multiple packets as an array of records of size RecordSize it can be a significant amount of data depending on the extent of the data requested The recommended way to handle this data transfer is to store the payload to a file for later retrieval It is recommended to store the first packet request and response packet to the file Thereafter store the record array payload that is contained
360. lues Value is fixed as Post Filter Post Filter True Pk z V 0 500 s Mid Filter x True Pk a V 0 500 s Comment The signal source for the first Overall measurement is fixed at the output of the Primary Signal Path Post Filter This is the fully filtered LP and HP and if necessary integrated signal see Filters page Overall 1 Signal Source 126 Select from e Pre Filter e Mid Filter Select the signal source for the second Overall measurement See the Filters page for a description of the various signal source locations Note The Pre Filter selection is available only if the Primary Path Decimation 1 no firmware decimation to assure that data is alias free Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 23 Overall Parameter Overall 0 1 Signal Detection Values Select from Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Comment Select the signal detection method for the Overall e True pk e True pk pk e RMS e Scaled pk e Scaled pk pk magnitude measurement Notes e True measurements are measurements that are based on the actual peak or peak to peak values in the signal These are recommended when the measurement must consider the actual maximum of the measurement such as maximum displacement or when non sinusoidal signals such as impacts must be detected Note though that this method is also more sensitive to noise e Sc
361. m is latched it does not reset until the condition has cleared is no longer in the alarm state and then the reset command is been signaled There are four methods available to reset a voted alarm and all relays that reference it e Controller output 2 bits are included in the control tag of the controller output e Discrete Inputs Either of the two discrete inputs can be assigned to reset alarms See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 e Either of two alarm reset service requests can be sent to the module e The AOP status page which executes the service request Each voted alarm includes a control selection that defines which of the two inputs of any of the above types is used to reset the alarm In this way it is possible to define a more discrete control over which voted alarms are reset on command Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 185 Chapter7 Configure Alarms Fail Safe The voted alarm fail safe definition is not used by the voted alarm logic Rather it is inherited by any relays that reference the alarm See Relay Page on page 165 When defined as fail safe the coil of the relay is energized when not in an alarm condition and de energized when it is in the alarm condition This means that if the module fails as the result of or due to a loss of power to the relay that the relay moves to its alarm position This is presumably its safe condition Relays Relays are
362. mag array in the LineArray Otherwise just the magnitude array Bit 3 is set if FFT Data Filter has been applied 17 Reserved1 BYTE 18 Reserved2 UINT 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 LineArray REAL The array of FFT line amplitude data Table 93 Record Type Structures FET eFFT eFFT_ALARM Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 SamplePeriodInSecs REAL Time period between samples or speed and number of samples per revolution 12 identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 ucDataSelect BYTE If Bit 0 is set phase array follows the mag array in the LineArray Otherwise just the magnitude array Bits 1 and 2 indicate FFT scaling 0 Peak 1 Peak to Peak 2 RMS 17 ucSpeedByted BYTE RPM value of the referenced speed source for the FFT data Actual RPM Value 100 Value provided is a 24 bit 3 byte integer First least significant byte bits 0 7 18 ucSpeedByte1 BYTE Second byte bits 8 15 19 ucSpeedByte2 BYTE Last byte bits 16 23 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 LineArray REAL The array of FFT line amplitude data If the FFT is a synchronous measurement then the RPM value is also provided in the SamplePeriodInSecs parameter In that case the two RPM values are identical Roc
363. mage the machine Startup procedures are provided to slowly bring the turbine to speed and temperature so that rotors have time to straighten out on their own Key to this process is monitoring the amount of bow eccentricity so that a machine can be safely started The eccentricity measurement is similar to the common overall measurement in that it is the measure of the difference between the maximum and minimum peaks in a signal However for a normal overall measurement this is measured by sampling rapidly while continually updating the minimum and maximum values and calculating the difference This is done without consideration of shaft rotation So when the shaft is spinning rapidly the measure could span multiple revolutions and when spanning slowly can be measured from less than one revolution For eccentricity measures this latter case result in a misleading reading as the overall value grows and shrinks depending on the position of the shaft relative to the sensor as the measurements are made To solve this problem the eccentricity measure can be defined so that it is made on a per revolution basis regardless of how long that revolution takes to complete This is why a tachometer can be associated with the eccentricity measurement When using a tachometer for eccentricity the minimum pk revolution RPM parameter is used to define a speed where the measurement method transitions from the single peak per revolution method to th
364. mand Page for the same channel cannot be set to different primary path sources Both can be set to the same source or e One must be set to Alternate Path Displays the Sample Rate from the Filters properties page for the selected data source 134 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 25 FFT Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Parameter Values Comment Maximum Frequency Displays the maximum Frequency from the Filters properties page for the selected data source Fmax Measurement Units Select from Select the engineering units for the TWF and FFT inch s The rules for units selection based on the transducer units see the HW Configuration on page 11 properties page m s are provided in this table mm s CLASS CHANGE EU OPTION Temperature No change allowed Bearing Defect Units Pressure Change in class only Flow Current Frequency Power Voltage Acceleration Velocity Length For any acceleration velocity or displacement length units the module can convert the measurement between equivalent Metric and English units Displacement Velocity Acceleration m m s m s mm M mm s M mm s micron inch s inch s inch V V g mil mg Number of Samples Select from Select the number of samples to be captured in the TWF While this TWF and the TWF that the module uses to 256 calculate the FFT below begin with the same sample
365. measures read from the Post Filter signal source see Filters page Measurement Units N A Displays the engineering units that results from applying the Measurement Type function to the selected Transducer Units This is the engineering unit that is associated with dynamic measures read from the Post Filter signal source see Filters page Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 107 Chapter2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Table 14 Hardware Configuration Parameter Values Comment Discrete Inputs Parameter Values Comment Pt0 1 Set bit 0 for PtO or bit 1 for Pt 1 in the attribute that is associated with the selected The 1444 DYNO4 01RA includes two discrete TTL class input channels control These let users physical wire an input to the module that can be used in any of several described manners Function Description Trip Inhibit Bypass Inhibits trips with all voted alarms that define the Logical Input as its control Alarm Relay Reset Resets all latched voted alarms where the alarm condition has cleared which resets any associated physical relays Voted Alarm SPM Control Manages Setpoint Multiplication for measurement alarms that are inputs to the associated voted alarm Voted Alarm Gate Control Manages Alarm Gating for the associated voted alarm Voted Alarm Logic Control Use this to wire an external input that when actuated forces the associated Voted Alarm to
366. ment is parallel to the shaft The module does not use Transducer Location but retains it for reference by higher level systems Xdcr Orientation deg 0 359 in 1 increments Degrees are referenced 0 to the vertical top dead center TDC of the shaft and increment in the clockwise direction when viewed from the driver end of the machine train e The direction of shaft rotation does not affect orientation e Transducer orientation is used in the S MAX and Absolute Shaft Vibration calculations and for reference by higher level systems Name 0 32 characters Name must start with a letter or underscore _ All other characters can be letters numbers or underscores Name cannot contain two contiguous underscore characters and cannot end in an underscore The module does not use Transducer Name but retains it for reference by higher level systems Measurement Type See following table Also see table Channel Application Type in Dynamix Configuration Manager Object Measurement Type selections are intended to simplify configuration of various common applications It defines what filtering will be applied LP HP the quality of the filtering roll off and if the measurement will be integrated or double integrated Displays the engineering units that results from applying the Measurement Type function to the selected Transducer Units This is the engineering unit that is associated with dynamic
367. mix Relay Module Object tercer aicomtnetennsens anagram R aaah 412 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table of Contents Attribute Semantics Wake aside aad tee ee Gs 415 Dynamix Current Output Module Object usunne 420 Attribute Semantics oocsscssrssccccerrrrrreeecerrrrese 422 Dynamix Module Control Object s cccs2eaiwuechesavivieokanncses 423 Attribute Semidti tesa cys hn 8 eaacdecne ae sale tants ies Dae 427 Identity Object saves es tieotnesmipa sie ieee i ia aise 433 Class Atthiplites tcc aici nnee a wines a aS TA 433 Attribute Semantics aa stack vis ts nda hata aaa dae 434 Message Router Object 055 ts wee dsesen atmams ne veeeke was ean neon 434 Assembly Object ai xu he veces tok al oho Uke bald ee Rees all 435 Attribute Semaarics 2662 was tata osrng stele taawarad eee sees 436 Pi GCE orere see este strate wd che ach ori sin eater cate Ea 436 Time Syne Object n esesdviceiirereieni isheseaiy viet ord ioie 438 Device Level Ring Object esnsnserersrrrrrrrrerrererrrrere 441 Quality of Service Object 9 testa th ometamasesiees coeeeane 442 TCP IP Interface Object ciniaarweswawaenkcsats Kumi houses teak 443 Ethernet Link Object reie eaaa N A a tet 444 Nonvolatile Storage Object snusnsuerererrrrrrrrerrrrererrere 446 Common Codes and Structures usses Sak oe awdegttenanes 447 Engineering Units sssssuserrsrrerrsrrrrrrrrrrrererere 449 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001
368. mplementation The data is returned in multiple packets as an array of records of size RecordSize this data amount can be a significant depending on the extent of the data requested The recommended way to handle this data transfer is to store the payload to a file for later retrieval Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 309 AppendixB CIP Objects It is recommended to store the first packet request and response packet to the file Thereafter store the record array payload that is contained within each subsequent packet If this procedure is followed the packet arrangement within the file would be as follows e RecordRequest Packet e RecordResponse Packet with first packet payload at the end e Second Response Packet payload e Subsequent Response Packet payloads e Last Response Packet payload Instigate further sessions to retrieve data from any other required buffers or channels Retrieval of any record from the file can then be accomplished as follows 1 Open the file 2 Read a record with size of CM Record Request from the head of the file 3 Access the BufferSelect variable to determine the type of record the file holds 4 Read a record with size CM Record Response from the file pointer 5 Access the RecordSize variable to determine the size of the record 6 Start at the address of the first Record in the Data Array in the first CM Record Response Then index to any record by using the Reco
369. multiplier for second gt 1 alarm less range area likely lt 1 alarm more likely Range 0 01 to 100 45 Get V Range 3 Upper REAL Defines third range area Range 0 50000 Control Value upper limit of control value 46 Get V Range 3 Alarm REAL Defines applicable alarm 1 in effect disabled Multiplier multiplier for third range 57 alarm less area likely lt 1 alarm more likely Range 0 01 to 100 47 Get V Range 4 Upper REAL Defines fourth range Range 0 50000 Control Value area upper limit of control value 48 Get V Range 4 Alarm REAL Defines applicable alarm 1 in effect disabled Multiplier multiplier for fourth gt 1 alarm less range area likely lt 1 alarm more likely Range 0 01 to 100 49 Get V Range 4 Upper REAL Defines fifth range area Range 0 50000 Control Value upper limit of control value Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 363 Appendix B 364 CIP Objects Table 156 Instance Attributes 50 Get V Range 4 Alarm REAL Defines applicable alarm 1 in effect disabled Multiplier multiplier for fifth range 1 alarm less area likely lt 1 alarm more likely Range 0 01 100 Profile Mode Group of 4 configuration attributes 64 Get V Profile mode SINT 1 0 Alarm Tag Reference Range 0 15 Reference for Low defining dynamic low No hysteresis Alert Threshold alert alarm threshold support 65 Get V P
370. multiplier is active 6 Reserved 7 First Out Set if the first alarm to activate since last Reset or Bypass 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 10 13 Alarm Number Voted alarm instance that this refers to 0 13 14 15 Activate Status 0 Normal 1 Alert 2 Danger 3 TX Fault 16 Inp Meas Alarm 0 State State of the measurement alarm referenced for alarm input 0 17 Inp Meas Alarm 0 TX OK TX OK status of the measurement alarm referenced for alarm input 0 18 Inp Meas Alarm 1 State State of the measurement alarm referenced for alarm input 1 19 Inp Meas Alarm 1 TX OK TX OK status of the measurement alarm referenced for alarm input 1 20 Inp Meas Alarm 2 State State of the measurement alarm referenced for alarm input 2 21 Inp Meas Alarm 2 TX OK TX OK status of the measurement alarm referenced for alarm input 2 22 Inp Meas Alarm 3 State State of the measurement alarm referenced for alarm input 3 23 Inp Meas Alarm 3 TX OK TX OK status of the measurement alarm referenced for alarm input 3 24 Speed Gate Status 0 not gating 1 gating 25 Speed Gate TX OK TX OK status of the input used for speed gating 26 Logic Gating Status 0 Ifa digital input switch is defined for logic gating then indicates switch status else indicates status of assigned 1 0 gating control 27 Logic Gating Status 1 Ifa a input switch is defined for logic gating then indicates status of assigned 1 0 gating control else is unuse 28 Reserved 29 Logic Control Status 0 Ifa a input sw
371. n Values Characters Comments Enter an up to 32 character name There are no rules for the names content or uniqueness However the name is used when selecting Voted Alarms as input to other functions such as Relay definitions so unique names are recommended Additionally the name e Must start with a letter or underscore _ e Must consist of letters numbers or underscores e Cannot contain two contiguous underscore characters e Cannot end in an underscore Alarm Status to Activate On Alert Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check if Measurement Alarms with a status of Alert are evaluated as TRUE when used as inputs to this Voted Alarm Alarm Status to Activate On Danger Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check if Measurement Alarms with a status of Danger are evaluated as TRUE when used as inputs to this Voted Alarm Alarm Status to Activate On Transducer Fault Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check if Measurement Alarms with a status of Transducer Fault are evaluated as TRUE when used as inputs to this Voted Alarm Measurement Alarm Input 0 All enabled Measurement Alarms Select the Measurement Alarm to use in Instance 0 of the Voted Alarm logic Measurement Alarm Input 1 All enabled Measurement Alarms except the Measurement Alarm that is selected for Input 0 Select the Measurement Alarm to use in Instance 1 of the Voted Alarm logic Measurement Alarm Input 2
372. n 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 387 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 186 Waveform eTWF Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 SamplePeriodInSecs REAL Time period between samples or speed and no of samples per revolution 12 Identifier DWORD Data source mode tacho source and measurement units 16 RelativeTime UDINT A 24 bit micro second counter value for finely aligning data 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 SampleArray REAL The array of waveform data values samples Asynchronous Measurements SamplePeriodinSec ByteCount TWF Period sec 4 Synchronous Measurements number_of_samples ByteCount 4 samples_per_rev The first byte of the SamplePeriodInSec value RPM_in_Hz The last three bytes of the SamplePeriodinSec value TWF Period sec number_of_samples RPM_in_Hz samples_per_rev 388 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B FFT and TWF data For asynchronous data the actual sample period is transferred REAL format For synchronous data the same four bytes are used to transfer the number of samples per revolution and an indicative speed for the transferred data Number of samples per revolution occupies the first byte the remaining 3 bytes are used for a scaled speed value speed x 100
373. n Modules Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 An Expansion module has four removable 6 way terminal connectors two interfacing directly to the removable module and two to the terminal base The base and module mounted headers are able to accept either a screw or spring terminal connector BNC buffered outputs two IMPORTANT O ERARA o Upper base connector Ld Ure osu o_o Allen Bradley 1444 TSCX02 02RB Tachometer Signal Conditioner ii e CHO CH1 OPO OP1 eooo A Lower module connector O sanS JO 3 PoE a f o HEHEHE O Lower base connector BNC outputs apply only to the TSC Expansion module type Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 73 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Allocations to the base or module are broadly based on the following functional requirements e Signal inputs outputs and relay connections are direct to the module to minimize connection length and number of interfaces e The base connectors provide mainly Shield connections noting the same base part is used across all three types of Expansion module Each connector is keyed to its respective mating header two per connector and each of the terminals is uniquely numbered Relay Expansion Module There are four SPDT relays included in the relay output module 0 3 with the three contact connections for each being made available at the module t
374. n Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 68 Configuration Group 2 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x39E 0 87 Channel 2 DSP FFT Signal Source SINT 88 Channel 2 DSP FFT Measurement Units ENGUNITS 89 Channel 2 DSP FFT Line Resolution SINT 90 Channel 2 DSP FFT Window Function SINT 91 Channel 2 DSP FFT Number of averages SINT 92 Channel 2 DSP FFT Line value detection scaling SINT 93 Channel 3 DP FFT Enable SINT 94 Channel 3 DSP FFT Signal Source SINT 95 Channel 3 DSP FFT Measurement Units ENGUNITS 96 Channel 3 DSP FFT Line Resolution SINT 97 Channel 3 DSP FFT Window Function SINT 98 Channel 3 DSP FFT Number of averages SINT 99 Channel 3 DSP FFT Line value detection scaling SINT 0x395 1 16 Tacho source SINT 17 Tacho OK Source SINT Pad INT 0x395 1 19 Speed Multiplier REAL 21 Tacho Trigger Slope Edge SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x395 1 24 ROC Delta Time REAL 25 ROC TC REAL 0x395 2 16 Tacho source SINT 17 Tacho OK Source SINT Pad INT 0x395 2 19 Speed Multiplier REAL 21 Tacho Trigger Slope Edge SINT Pad SINT 0x395 Pad INT 0x395 2 24 ROC Delta Time REAL 25 ROC TC REAL 0x394 0 18 Mode Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x394 1 16 Input Sensor Type SINT 24 Sensor Power Supply SINT 25 Sensor Target pulses per revolution IN
375. n between the wire groups Always run any high current high voltage lines and signal data lines in separate conduits or bundles Run the signal lines as closely as possible to the ground areas for example bus bar metal rails and cabinet metal Further details about wiring category and routing are provided in the following sections as well as wiring category identifications in the applicable specifications section Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Table 4 EMC Precautions Use shielded screened cables Chapter 1 Use shielded cables for all lines signal control and module power e For the analog sensor input each channel must be separately shielded one shield for each channel in a multi core cable Properly terminating the shield wires mm of the cable is unshielded Keep the unshielded part of the cables as short as possible It is ideal if only the last 100 e Preferably use an EMC cable gland to obtain a 360 ground connection to the enclosure Alternatively connect the shielded wire directly after entering the cabinet or the enclosure on a grounded bus bar and fix it with a cable clamp The modules provide SHIELD terminals that can be used for shield wire termination However from a performance perspective the previously described methods are preferred Note that the SHIELD terminals are connected together but otherwise is
376. n case of active eccentricity application and assessment on a per revolution basis these attributes determine enable option and the low RPM limit where once per revolution assessment defaults to normal peak value assessment Option Description 0x00 Peak per revolution disabled 0x01 Tacho Speed 0 0x02 Tacho Speed 01 Higher Values Reserved Lower RPM limit range 4 600 RPM recommended default of 10 RPM Table 131 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Instance Ox0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix DC Measurement Object CIP Objects Appendix B The DC Measurement Object 0x391 defines configuration of DC overall measurement by selecting smoothing constants and definition of measurement units One instance is linked to each available transducer channel and is fully separate from the DC Volts overall value Table 132 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 DC Measurement Class Instance 1 4 DC measurement setup and data for channels 0 3 Instances 1 for transducer channel 0 DC measurement e Instances 2 for transducer channel 1 DC measurement Instances 3 for transducer channel 2 DC measurement Instances 4 for transducer channel 3 DC measurement Table 133 Class Attributes
377. n parameters to achieve this result Not 1X Measurement The Not 1X measurement is implemented by setting e Tracking Filter 0 must be set to 1x either tacho can be used e The same measurement Engineering Units for both the order and the overall 1 Overall Page measurements The Not 1X measurement then calculates the difference between the Overall 1 measurement and the first order result The Not 1x functionality is primarily provided for XY applications and while the tracking filters can be used to provide integrated measurement data the Not 1x measurement is not usable in these applications The Not 1X measurement data is always presented in the same detection type as the order measurement this measurement does not rely on the overall 1 being configured similarly The Not 1X measurement can if desired provide a Not 2x or other indication by simply changing the order configuration of the first tracking filter on any particular channel The Not 1X is calculated whenever the first tracking filter is enabled irrespective whether it is configured for order 1 1x Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 129 Chapter 3 130 Measurement Definition Order Phase The order phase is measured from the trigger edge to the maximum positive signal peak which is known as phase lag convention In the following illustration where the pulse represents the tacho signal and the sine wave the signal e
378. n to the shield bus of the module Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 57 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Upper Module Connector Terminal Name Application Description 33 NO Relay Outputs Normally Open 34 C Common 35 NC Normally Closed 36 SPARE Do not connect 37 O1L Opto isolated Outputs Digital Output 1 Low 38 01H Digital Output 1 High 39 ooL Digital Output 0 Low 40 00H Digital Output 0 High 41 RET Buffered Outputs Channel 3 Return 42 BUFF3 Channel 3 Signal 43 RET Channel 2 Return 44 BUFF2 Channel 2 Signal 45 RET Channel 1 Return 46 BUFF1 Channel 1 Signal 47 RET Channel 0 Return 48 BUFFO Channel 0 Signal Relay Output There is one SPDT relay included in the DYN module with the three contact connections being made available at the terminals A typical purpose for this module relay is to signal module status NC Normally closed C Common NO Normally open Normal is the relay contact state when un powered Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Figure 13 Wiring Relays iaae orma an tee Ne een eeeee fe eeeees Spare Terminal 36 is left unused for isolation reasons Do not make any connections to this terminal Opto isolated Open Col
379. namix Measurement Alarm Object Delay Sustain Time Danger Apply Limits From MeasAlarm00 23 LimitMode Dynamix Measurement Alarm Alarm Processing Mode Object Danger High Limit MeasAlarm00 23 HDangerAlarmLimit Dynamix Measurement Alarm High Danger Threshold Object Alert High Limit MeasAlarm00 23 HAlertAlarmLimit Dynamix Measurement Alarm High Alert Threshold Object Alert Low Limit MeasAlarm00 23 LAlertAlarmLimit Dynamix Measurement Alarm Low Alert Threshold Object Danger Low Limit MeasAlarm00 23 LDangerAlarmLimit Dynamix Measurement Alarm Low Danger Threshold Object Danger High Output Tag Limit MeasAlarm00 23 HDangerAlarmOutputRef Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object Profile mode Reference for High Danger Threshold Alert High Output Tag Limit Alert Low Output Tag Limit MeasAlarm00 23 HAlertAlarmOutputRef MeasAlarm00 23 LAlertAlarmOutputRef Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object Profile mode Reference for High Alert Threshold Profile mode Reference for Low Alert Threshold Danger Low Output Tag Limit MeasAlarm00 23 LDangerAlarmOutputRef Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object Profile mode Reference for Low Danger Threshold Limit Multiplier MeasAlarm00 23 LimitMultiplier Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object Alarm Multiplier Control Parameter MeasAlarm00 23 AdaptiveSource Dynamix Measurement Alarm Object
380. nectors or other means that are provided with this product Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 If this product contains batteries they must only be changed in an area that is known to be nonhazardous AVERTISSEMENT Risque d Explosion e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher l quipement e Couper le courant ou s assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de d brancher les connecteurs Fixer tous les connecteurs externes reli s cet quipement l aide de vis loquets coulissants connecteurs filet s ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit e La substitution de composants peut rendre cet quipement inadapt une utilisation en environnement de Classe Division 2 e S assurer que l environnement est class non dangereux avant de changer les piles Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be free of ignitable concentrations WARNING Consider the following e Ifyou insert or remove the module while Backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding e When you connect or disconnect the Removable Terminal Block RTB with field side power applied an electrical arc can occur T
381. nel 1 FFT Band 1 Channel 2 FFT Band 1 Channel 3 Overall 0 Channel 0 Overall 0 Channel 1 Overall 0 Channel 2 m Select Discrete Measurements Dynamic Data Cho Enable V Ch1 Enable W Ch2 Enable v Ch3 Enable Update Rate 600 0 s Alarm Buffer V Enable Trigger Trigger On E Any Alarm Voted Alarm 0 he Voted Alarm Condition Alert V Enable Latching Post Trigger Low Resolution 35 me for Dynamic Data Post Trigger Low Resolution 25 v for Discrete Data Post Trigger High Resolution 25 The Trend Page is used to configure both the Trend and the Alarm Capture functions Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 187 Chapter 8 188 Trend and Transient Capture Discrete Data Buffers The trend definition includes selections that are associated with discrete and dynamic data Dynamic data refers to time waveforms and FFT Discrete data are any single value data including DC measurements speeds and values that are processed from a dynamic signal such as overall or 1x magnitude The module updates data to the discrete buffer at two different rates e High Resolution In the background the module continually samples the data at a fast update rate of approximately 100 milliseconds A total of 320 records are retained sampled at this rate The update rate can vary from the defined 100 milliseconds as higher priority processor demands ta
382. nels 0 amp 2 a Accelerometer signal Red 4 b signal Black A Link terminals 1 amp 2 Temperature signal White Such a sensor has two outputs and therefore occupies two input channels of a DYN module The acceleration and temperature signals are allocated to channels in separate channel pairs so that the module configuration can be optimized The vibration channel must be configured for a positive constant current supply and the transducer power output that is connected to the spare signal connection link terminals 1 and 2 in channel 0 2 example in the preceding graphic Depending on the transducer that is used the sensor can power both the vibration and the temperature sensing circuitry from one constant current supply For sensor types that require a separate power supply for each repeat power linking and configuration for the temperature channel as well A list of appropriate terminals for each channel follows Typical Core Designation Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Acceleration SIG 3 7 Return 4 8 Then link these terminals 1and2 5and 6 Temperature SIG 11 15 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Temperature Transmitter Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Configure the channel for a 24V supply A load resistor is required at the input terminals to provide the necessary current voltage
383. nfiguration the module event log and its connection information including any saved IP address A type 0 common reset is executed by sending a type 0 reset service or by cycling module power Because a module immediately loads its configuration from nonvolatile memory and begins monitoring a module does not persist in its common reset state Type 1 Out of Box Reset An out of box reset deletes all trend alarm and transient data and wipes the executing configuration and the ID of its host controller It also deletes any saved configuration from nonvolatile memory An out of box reset also deletes the connection information of the module including any IP address saved in memory A type 1 out of box reset is executed by sending a type 1 reset service or by powering up the module with its terminal base IP address set to 888 A module persists in its out of box reset state until a configuration has been downloaded to the module Until a valid configuration is received the module operates in its default out of box configuration a basic voltmeter with no defined measurements alarms or any configured output Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 Type 2 Hard Reset A hard reset deletes all trend alarm and transient data and wipes the executing configuration and the ID of its host controller A hard reset does not delete the module connection information including
384. nfiguration assembly and held in the various objects in the module Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 87 Chapter2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module General Page The general page contains controls to name describe and define the system You can also set the EtherNet IP address or host name from the general page Figure 32 The General Page a Module Properties Local 1444 DYN04 01RA 2 1 lace Connection Type 1444 DYNO4 01RA Dynamix Condition Monitor 2 Port Module Info Vendor Allen Bradley Tachometer Parent inal Ethernet Address Speed Time Slot Multiplier Name Demo Private Network 192 168 1 89 HW Configuration pee Measurement Definition space PP Address Channel 0 Filters Host Name cobs Module Definition Tracking Filters cata A FFT k Change Bands Revision 21 Demand Electronic Keying Compatible Module Channel 1 Filters Connection Data a Overall Module Type Standard Dynamic Measur Tracking Files Compliance Requirement None FFT Personality Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic Bands Demand Channel 2 4 Channel 3 Analog Output Configurat ce Measurement Alarms Voted Alarms Relay Trend Transient Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Time Sync lt i gt Status Offline Cancel A Help eo eae i r er Module Definition The Module Definition pages provide high level definitions of module application and
385. ng Control Table 126 Sampling Control Category Description Fundamentals SRD represents sample rate divide and must be set equal across a channel pair 0 1 and 2 3 unless multiplexing individual channels Actual sample rate is the base sample rate that is divided by the SRD With the A D in single mode most applications the base sample rate is 93 750 Hz With the A D in double mode frequencies up to 40 kHz the base sample rate is 187 500 Hz Limits Asynchronous and Synchronous Processing Based on Nyquist the setting of SRD sample rate determines the maximum frequency that can be assessed In the case of synchronous sampling the maximum frequency and the configured number of samples per revolution dictates the maximum machine speed that can be successfully processed The module confirms a maximum machine rpm for a given configuration by way of instance attribute 2 Further guidelines are as follows Filter 3 dB points must always be set at less than Sample rate 2 048 e Bandwidth of an FFT in the same configuration is less and calculated by Sample rate 2 56 The center frequency of the highest line of an N line FFT is given by Sample rate N 1 2 56 N Example for SRD 32 single mode e Filter 3 dB must be less than 1431 Hz e FFT bandwidth decimation 1 is 1144 41 Hz Corresponding center frequency of highest line of an 800 line FFT is 1142 98 Hz 1600 line FFT is 1143 69 Hz Note The preceding info
386. ng a session 2 RequestedCount UNIT RequestedCount 0 returns all records in the buffer RequestedCount 1 returns the most recently collected record Any other positive count returns that number of records from the buffer If the count is greater than the max available records the max available records is returned instead The RequestedCount does not change during a session 4 SessionInstance USINT The SessionInstance is initially specified as 0 but on subsequent calls the SessionInstance returned in the response must be passed here 5 Reserved BYTE 6 Pad INT Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary 8 PacketCountDown DWORD The PacketCountDown is initially specified as 0 but on subsequent calls the PacketCountDown returned in the response must be passed here 322 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B The Dynamix 1444 return the following as part of an 0x4B service response Table 113 0x4B Service Responses Byte Offset Structure Data Description within Member Type Structure 0 SessionInstance USINT The host copies the SessionInstance returned here into each subsequent Record Request Up to 3 instances are supported 2 Completed Records UINT This is incremented each time that another complete record has been transferred There are often several packets per completed record 4 RecordSize UINT In this case it is fixed at the
387. ng setup DC Units Actual selection of DC engineering units is a subset of the master engineering units list The selection is based on active measurement application for the applicable measurement channel related to sensor type and signal processing Rod Drop Configuration Rod drop processing is assessed in parallel to normal DC measurements Rod drop units of measurement is the same as the configured DC Measurement units Instance must be active and rod drop function must be enabled to obtain access to the rod drop measurement value Trigger source Option Description 0x00 Rod drop disabled 0x01 Tacho Speed 0 0x02 Tacho Speed 01 Higher Values Reserved The following explain the rod drop functionality in more detail e The rod drop functionality is enabled disabled by virtue of the selected channel application type If the rod drop application has been selected then for the configuration to be legitimate an appropriate tacho source must be selected If the rod drop application is not selected then the setting of the trigger source is irrelevant For example in those circumstances 0x00 Off can be used but does not have to be used e The rod drop measurement is made every revolution except in the case where the configured measurement range encompasses the trigger point itself In that situation the measurement is made every other revolution e The rod drop measurement is only applicable at speeds greater than
388. nitude of the signal For example If no window is applied the Rectangular Window If the frequency of a signal is precisely centered between bins and there were no other signals present then the magnitude of each bin is precisely 1 2 that of the actual signal When viewing the FFT this presents two adjacent bins with equal and comparatively small peak amplitudes rather than one bin with 2x that amplitude which is what the signals amplitude actually is As the frequency of the signal moves across a bin the proportion of its energy that bleeds into adjacent bins changes So if using a Rectangular Window a signal with a constant amplitude were to move 50 60 Hz lets say 10 bins then a Waterfall display shows the bins growing as the signal enters the bin to a maximum equal to the actual signal amplitude when the signal was centered in the bin and then falling to zero as the signal moved above the bin FFT Windows are used to smooth this effect such that the amplitude of the signal as represented by the amplitude of the bin that it is in is better represented But there are trade offs as these techniques all tend to make it more difficult to ascertain the specific frequency of a signal which bin is it So when selecting an FFT Window the key is to understand the intent Is it more important to know the exact amplitude of the signals that are measured by the FFT or is it more important to know the exact frequencies of the signals
389. nnections to terminals 3 4 9 10 15 16 19 or 24 76 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Use of the same power supply that serves the Dynamix module is allowed if it can serve the additional load However when the same power supply is serving additional loads such as additional Dynamix modules While the supply can adequately serve the rated normal operating loads of all devices surge currents during startup of other devices surge currents during startup of other devices can affect the current provided to Loop Power which can result affect current levels measurements on the system Terminal 24 23 22 21 20 19 Name NOT USED SH SH SH SH NOT USED Application Shield Z 5 s z z 5 5 z pe S s S S g S al gt a gt z 5 2 x 2 2 2 To D a YU a Terminal 18 17 16 15 14 13 Name OUTPUT2HI OUTPUT 2 LO NOTUSED NOTUSED OUTPUT3HI OUTPUT3 LO Application 4 20 mA Output 2 4 20 mA Output 3 S z amp X 2 a a 5 ele E E E 1444 AOFX00 04RB Analog Output Expansion Module and 1444 TB B Terminal Base Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 77 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Terminal 1 2 3 4 5 6 Name QUTPUTOHI OUTPUT 0 LO N
390. nnel 3 28 Order 2 Mag FFT Band 16 Speed 0 maximum Channel 0 29 Order 2 Mag FFT Band 17 Speed 1 maximum Channel 1 30 Order 2 Mag FFT Band 18 Speed 0 Rate of Change Channel 2 21 Order 2 Mag FFT Band 19 Speed 1 Rate of Change Channel 3 Table 89 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x05 X X Reset Alarm buffer reset 0x0E X X Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute A latched alarm buffer requires a reset to rearm it ready for a new trigger alarm event status is set to armed zero stored records indicated and earlier data is no longer available An alarm buffer reset is sent by the reset service above or via the controller output data If an alarm buffer reset is sent the buffer will reset rearm as described irrespective of whether latching is configured This reset acts as a marker that the data has been read is finished with The reset also provides for a clear indication of when a new event has been detected Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 303 Appendix B 304 CIP Objects Availability of Dynamic Data Immediately after power cycle or configuration download dynamic data takes some time to become available as internal sample buffers must be populated based on the new time configuration In most cases the delay may be a few seconds However for configurations with very low sample ra
391. normally could be overwritten by a new event 2 Data Latched Normal Transient completed normally buffer latched 3 Transient in progress RPM Delta RPM data acquisition in progress 4 Transient in progress Time Delta Time data acquisition in progress 5 Data Ready Aborted Speed returned above below initiating threshold could be overwritten by a new event 6 Data Latched Aborted Speed returned above below initiating threshold could be overwritten by a new event 7 Data Ready time out Speed crossed initiating threshold then timed out could be overwritten by a new event 8 Data Latched time out Speed crossed initiating threshold then timed out buffer latched 4 7 Transient Buffer 1 same as above 8 11 Transient Buffer 2 12 15 Transient Buffer 3 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 219 Chapter9 Operate the Module Table 39 DSP Status DSP Status Bit Status Description if 1 Bit Status Description if 1 0 DSP Ready If bits 0 1 and 2 are 0 the DSP is ready 16 Any calibration timeout anything else the DSP is either starting f TA 1 up or changing configuration 17 Relay 0 Inhibit active main Module Relay is inhibited 2 18 Relay 0 drive fail main Module Relay failed drive test 3 Functionally Safe Mode Module Compliance Requirementis set 19 Loop Time Warning Extended loop time warning to a SIL level 4 DSP Memory Fault 20 Multiplexing Multi
392. noseconds 5 Get OffsetFromMaster LINT Nanoseconds 6 Get Set maxOffsetFromMaster ULINT Nanoseconds 7 Get MeanPathDelayToMaster LINT Nanoseconds 8 Get Grand MasterClockInfo STRUCT USINT 8 Clockldentity Encoded MaC ADDR UINT ClockClass 0 255 0 best UINT TimeAccuracy Index values Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 437 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 255 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of ID Rule Values UINT OffsetScaledLogVariance lower best UINT CurrentUtcOffset seconds WORD TimePropertyFlags UINT TimeSource Atomic GPS Radio UINT Priority1 UINT Priority2 9 Get ParentClockInfo STRUCT USINT 8 Clockldentity Encoded MAC ADDR UINT PortNumber UINT ObservedOffsetScaledLogVarianc e UDINT ObservedPhaseChangeRate 10 Get LocalClockInfo STRUCT USINT 8 Clockldentity Encoded MAC ADDR UINT ClockClass 0 255 0 best UINT TimeAccuracy Index values UINT OffsetScaledLogVariance UINT CurrentUtcOffset seconds WORD TimePropertyFlags UINT TimeSource Atomic GPS Radio 11 Get NumberO0fPorts UINT 1 12 Get PortStatelnfo STRUCT UINT NumberO0fPorts 1 ARRAY UINT PortNumber UINT PortState Index 1 9 13 Get NV PortEnableCfg STRUCT UINT NumberO0fPorts ARRAY UINT PortNumber UINT PortEnable 1 Enabled 14 Get Set NV PortLogAnnounceln
393. nputs are being used a described in the proceeding statement leave open for a Tacho OK state and short he appropriate input to trigger a Tacho Fail condition Tach Bus No fault detection is associated with the TTL signal itself However the tachometer signal conditioner module communicates transducer status via additional signal lines on the Local Bus 1 0 Speed When speed is communicated from the controller as tags in the controller output assembly the module reads speed input status from output assembly bits 3 Speed 0 OK and 4 Speed 1 OK When used set the Speed OK bit 1 for FAULT or 0 for NORMAL Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 211 Chapter9 Operate the Module Tachometer Signal Condition Input Fault Detection Transducer fault detection is based on bias voltage level measured speed or on tachometer signal conditioner module fault as follows Fault Detection Method Description Bias Fault Bias level fault detection functions similarly to bias fault detection for the normal channel inputs see proceeding information Speed Fault Considers the transducer is in fault of the pulse rate equivalent is slower or faster than the specified speed Module Fault The Tachometer Signal Conditioner Expansion module detects a module fault When a fault is detected it is communicated as simply Transducer Fault on the local bus Further detail is available in the Tachometer
394. ns of the meaning of the 12 status indicators on the top of the main module Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 235 AppendixA Status Table 54 DYN Module Status Indicators Status Description OFF Green Blue Red Red Green Blue Green Indicator Solid Flashing Solid Flashing Solid Flashing Flashing Flashing off off off PWR Power status 6 5Vpower 6 5Vpower not OK OK RUN Auxprocessor Powered off Application O Srunning Configuration run status or not running activity running MS Module Powered off Operational No During FW major fault Duplicate IP Firmware status configuration update not address Update in indicates recoverable process update is being written to memory NS Network No network Connected No Duplicate IP Connection Firmware status connection connections address timeout Update in process 0s Operating Powered off OK Normal Redundant If DSP Status Inhibit Firmware Status power fail Indicator is update in flashing process green Configuring If DSP Status Indicator is solid green or off Storing to memory DSP DSP Run Powered off DSP paused DSP running Setpoint DSP isin boot or not Multiplier loader mode running active OK DSP Status Powered off OK Calibration Firmware
395. nsducer 1 Power 6 SIG1 Transducer 1 Signal 7 SIG1 8 RET1 Transducer 1 Return 9 TXP2 Sensor 2 Transducer 2 Power 10 SIG2 Transducer 2 Signal 11 SIG2 12 RET2 Transducer 2 Return 13 TXP3 Sensor 3 Transducer 3 Power 14 SIG3 Transducer 3 Signal 15 SIG3 16 RET3 Transducer 3 Return Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 For each channel 0 3 there is a set of four connections e Transducer power configurable per channel for negative or positive supply or constant current e Duplicate signal input connections e Signal return connection Providing duplicated input signal connections accommodates various both 2 wire and 3 wire transducers For 2 wire constant current sensors the appropriate supply is configured and an external link is made to connect signal and power output connections A further signal connection and associated return lets the sensor be connected without placing multiple wires in one terminal All signal inputs are single ended with a 24V range and designed for transducers that provide an output voltage proportional to the measured physical parameter The transducer power is individually configurable per channel for one of the three following outputs 24V 4 mA constant current or 24V or 24V at up to 25 mA Besides these functional operating modes the transducer power output can also be configured as disabled
396. nsion bus extension cables to position applicable relay modules in a more suitable location within the overall system Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Temperature Considerations While the 1444 series modules operate at rated temperature when mounted vertically or horizontally the system components have been designed for natural convection cooling based on a horizontal orientation Therefore to assure optimal heat dissipation the recommended mounting orientation is horizontal in an upright vertical position as shown in Figure 1 Figure 1 Module Mounting Position 32476 M The module plastics design enables natural convection or unducted airflow by its ventilation slots on both sides of the module such to support a chimney effect from bottom to top IMPORTANT As where the terminal base of Expansion modules has a fully passive nature some electronics are present within the DYN module terminal base Despite low power dissipation the main terminal base is also equipped with ventilation slots and some level of internal airflow ducting from bottom to top We recommend that you verify these ventilation slots are not blocked OO 7 aoe ae SS SS SS Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 33 Chapter 1
397. nstance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x397 10 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 11 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 0x397 11 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 11 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 11 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 12 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 12 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 279 Appendix B Table 73 Configuration Group 18 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad INT 0x397 12 42 Lower Speed Threshold
398. nt rates the repetitive flash off reflects actual detections However the rate of flashing is limited to the MSP run flash rate so that at higher speeds the flashing is simply an indicator of events and not necessarily the actual time of those events A normal expected state for a healthy channel is flashing green machine running Ifa tacho sensor failure is detected the blue rather than green status indicator is active An internal power supply fault out of specification 25 5V supply triggers the red Status Indicator to be active If both channels are enabled both similarly indicate that fault but whether it affects tacho operation depends on the module configuration whether a transducer is used and which one Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 55 TSCX Status Indicator BNC Connectors Status Appendix A If the channel is enabled and one event per revolution is configured then the status indicator is green If the channel is enabled and multiple events per revolution are configured then the status indicator is blue The indicator serves as a warning to any local analyst using that output Status Description OFF Green Blue Red Red Green Blue Green Indicator Solid Flashing Solid Flashing off Solid Flashing Flashing Flashing off off PWR Power status 5Vpowernot 5Vpower OK OK LNS Local network Tacho module Conf
399. ntial Expansion Channel Pair 0 3 Overall 0 Channel 3 35 Order 2 Phase Channel 3 67 FFT Band 23 99 Axial Differential Expansion Channel Pair 1 4 Overall 1 ChannelO 36 Order 3 Mag Channel 0 68 FFT Band 24 100 Ramp Differential Expansion Radial Channel Pair 0 5 Overall 1 Channel 1 37 Order 3 Mag Channel 1 69 FFT Band 25 101 Ramp Differential Expansion Radial Channel Pair 1 6 Overall 1 Channel 2 38 Order 3 Mag Channel 2 70 FFT Band 26 102 Rod Drop Channel 0 7 Overall 1 Channel 3 39 Order 3 Mag Channel 3 71 FFT Band 27 103 Rod Drop Channel 1 8 DC V Channel 0 40 Order 3 Phase Channel 0 72 FFT Band 28 104 Rod Drop Channel 2 9 DC V Channel 1 41 Order 3 Phase Channel 1 73 FFT Band 29 105 Rod Drop Channel 3 10 DC V Channel 2 42 Order 3 Phase Channel 2 74 FFT Band 30 106 11 DC V Channel 3 43 Order 3 Phase Channel 3 75 FFT Band 31 107 12 Order 0 Mag 44 FFT Band 0 76 Not 1X Channel 0 108 Channel 0 13 Order 0 Mag 45 FFT Band 1 77 Not 1X Channel 1 109 Channel 1 14 Order 0 Mag 46 FFT Band 2 78 Not 1X Channel 2 110 Channel 2 15 Order 0 Mag 47 FFT Band 3 79 Not 1X Channel 3 111 Channel 3 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 367 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 160 Source Selection Index DWORD 0 Index DWORD 1 Index DWORD 2 Index DWORD 3 16 Order 0 Phase 48 FFT Band 4
400. ntics of Values 1 Get Configuration Status BYTE Defines module configuration status 0 Out Of Box State no configuration loaded 1 Configuration loaded from nonvolatile memory 2 Configuration downloaded from controller 17 Get NV AOP Module Type SINT AOP definition module personality Module Type 18 Get NV Module Type applied SINT Defines module personality Module Type 25 Get NV Compliance Mode SINT Whether considered a safety critical Compliance Mode application and if so what level such as API or API and SIL Channel Application Types 32 Get NV AOP Channel 0 Application INT AOP definition application types Application Index Type 33 Get NV AOP Channel 1 Application INT Type 34 Get NV AOP Channel 2 Application INT Type 35 Get NV AOP Channel 3 Application INT Type 36 Get NV Channel 0 Application Type INT Applied application types Application Index 37 Get NV Channel 1 Application Type INT 38 Get v Channel 2 Application Type INT 39 Get NV Channel 3 Application Type INT 64 Get CIP Sync Support BYTE Availability of CIP Sync 1 Available Attribute Semantics Table 62 Module Type Index Description 1 RT 4 Dynamic 4 kHz 2 RT 2 Dynamic 18 kHz 2 Static 32 RT 2 Dynamic 4 kHz Dual Path 64 RT 2 Dynamic 40 kHz 128 MX 4 Dynamic 40 kHz Paired Channels 96 MX 4 Dynamic 40 kHz Individual Channels The listed values are NEGATIVE 128 and NEGATIVE 64 not dash
401. ntroller of the module fails such that the connection closes unexpectedly the module cannot be configured until that same controller is restored or until the module has been power cycled type 0 or 1 reset Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Managing Nonvolatile Memory Configuration Operate the Module Chapter 9 GET Services GET service commands which use a CIP transport class 3 connection are allowed from any device A maximum of three class 3 connections other than one from its host controller can be connected at any one time This is the limit to the number of devices that can simultaneously access data from the module in addition to its host controller The Dynamix 1444 Series main module maintains a copy of its valid executing configuration in its nonvolatile memory At power up if a valid configuration is held in this memory it is loaded and executed This assures that on power cycle that the module immediately begins functioning as required even if communication to its host controller are not available The following sections describe the processes in saving a configuration to the nonvolatile memory of the module and deleting the configuration from the memory Saving a Configuration to Nonvolatile Memory The communication of a configuration to the module involves several steps e Communicate the data Using the SET Service of the modules configuration manager object the remote dev
402. o e fan order value is entered the bin number that this corresponds to changes as machine speed changes If the calculated bin is less than 0 1 or greater than the Nyquist Frequency for the selected data source then the FFT Band value is 0 Band 0 7 Domain Select from Hz e Orders Select the domain that the limits are entered in If set to order domain then begin and end limits are calculated with each sample Band 0 7 Speed Reference Select from OFF e Speed 0 e Speed 1 Factored Speed 0 e Factored Speed 1 Select the source for the speed to be used in the band limit calculation if Do main Orders See the Speed page for further information on speed sources Nyquist Frequency The Nyquist Frequency is defined as sample rate of the signal source divided by 2 It is the FMAX of the unfiltered FFT calculated by the FFT algorithm As the Nyquist Frequency does not consider anti alias or low pass filtering any FFT Bands defined for frequencies above the FFT FMAX are not assured to be free of aliasing or to not have been attenuated by the low pass filter To assure alias free measurements do not define FFT bands at frequencies greater than default Low Pass Filter setting for the selected signal path The default LPF is calculated as Decimation 1 Decimation gt 1 Filter 24 dB Decimation gt 1 Filter 48 dB 93750 SRD x 2 048 93750 SRD x Decimation x 4 93750 SRD x Dec
403. o was used 7 Associated tacho source from the Normal CM Data Object 8 15 Measurement engineering units index not CIP code 16 31 The 16 bit tacho event counter cross module synchronization scheme Example where identifier lower 16 bits are 0x 0024 e 00 indicates that measurement unit is Volt e Bits 2 amp 5 are set to indicate path 1 is in use and synchronous sampling is enabled so data is based on synchronous sampling Table 211 0x4D Advanced CM Data Session Reset Service Request Byte offset within Structure Member Data Type Description structure 0 Advanced Session UINT The Advanced Session Instance Instance to be reset 2 Pad UINT Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 405 AppendixB CIP Objects Response to an 0x4D service request is as follows Byte offset within Structure Member Data Type Description structure 0 Status DINT Status codes 0 eSUCCESS e Returned after all successful requests 1 eUnrecognizedSession 2 eMaxSessionsReached 3 ePacketCountOutOfSequence 4 elnvalidBufferSelect 5 eNoDataAvailable 6 eGeneralError 7 eDeniedRequestAlreadylnProgress 8 eSessionAccessDenied Is returned if trying to reset the advanced setup with the wrong Advanced Session Instance 9 eAdvancedMeasurementRequestInProgress 10 eRequestQueued Behavior Through the Object specific services 0x4B and 0x4C
404. o communication services in such environments This equipment is supplied as open type equipment for indoor use It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those specific environmental conditions that are present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from accessibility to live parts The enclosure must have suitable flame retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA or be approved for the application if nonmetallic The interior of the enclosure must be accessible only by the use of a tool Subsequent sections of this publication contain more information regarding specific enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications In addition to this publication see e Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional installation requirements e NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529 as applicable for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures Prevent Electrostatic Discharge ATTENTION This equipment is sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation Follow these guidelines when you handle this equipment e Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static e Wear an approved grounding wriststrap e Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards e Do not touch circuit com
405. o the user The objective being that more faults that the relay reacts to can be added above those implicit in the Voted Alarm selection or dedicate the relay only to the indication of certain selected faults Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 417 Appendix B 418 CIP Objects Relay control like voting logic is implemented by the main module instructing the auxiliary module on how to set its relay outputs in any particular circumstance However to guard against the situation where a main module or link failure prevents proper instruction reaching it on detecting a communication link failure the auxiliary module sets any fail safe relays to their alarm state de energized This function is an automatic autonomous action by the auxiliary module Table 225 Relay Source Decoding Bit Description 0 OFF 1 13 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Output Type Alert 14 16 Reserved 17 29 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Output Type Danger 30 32 Reserved 33 45 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Output type TX OK Higher Values Reserved 126 Dedicated Bypass Active Relay 127 Dedicated Fault Relay Relay Control Determines Faults As the special functions 126 and 127 are not the result of Voted alarms there is no definition of type suggest fail safe is adopted for these Local Relay Control also includes a Latching bit to give a latching control to these special fun
406. oastDownDisable Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object Transient Data Mode Control Enable Latching TransientCapture LatchEn Dynamix Transient Data Manager Transient Data Mode Control Object Enable Overflow TransientCapture OverflowEn Dynamix Transient Data Manager Transient Data Mode Control Object Data Set Definition TransientCapture DiscreteParams 4 Dynamix Transient Data Manager DWORD 0 3 Object Speed Reference TransientCapture ControlSpeedRef Dynamix Transient Data Manager Source of Speed Data Object Low Speed Limit TransientCapture LowSpeedLimit Dynamix Transient Data Manager Low Speed Threshold Object High Speed Limit TransientCapture HighSpeedLimit Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object High Speed Threshold 250 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 58 Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference CIP Objects Appendix B Start Up Number of Buffers TransientCapture NumStartUpBuffers Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object Transient Data Mode Control Start Up Post Start Up Sample Time TransientCapture PostStartUpSample Time Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object Extra startup sample time Start Up Delta RPM Trigger TransientCapture StartUpDeltaRPM Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object Overall Delta RPM SU Start Up Delta Time Trigger TransientCapture StartUpDeltaTime Dyn
407. odules are used in a system then the modules do not need connected In cases where it is necessary to separate modules two extension cables are provided 1444 LBXC 0M3 01 Local Bus Extender Cable 0 3 m 1444 LBXC 1M0 01 Local Bus Extender Cable 1 0 m IMPORTANT The extension cables are intended for INCABINET use only The ribbon cables are only minimally shielded Consequently care must be taken to assure that cables are not routed across or near to high voltage or other cables that can induce noise into the network When connecting modules be sure that the right sides of two main modules are never connected While the connectors are keyed to prevent this it is possible to defeat the keying by twisting the cable or by removing the keys Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 41 Chapter 1 42 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System damage to the modules and unexpected or improper operation of any WARNING Connecting the RIGHT sides of two main modules could result in connected expansion modules The Local Bus Extension cables are designed keyed to allow connection of the RIGHT side of any main module to the LEFT side of any main or expansion module as illustrated below E E mw CETTE gerere w vA LLEETETETITI a5 gt 7 tu Tr am n SU T a a Any other connection that results in the RIGHT sides of two MAIN MODULES 1444 DYN02 01RA being connected is
408. of revolutions minimizes the influence of other components at near frequencies A Speed 2 m Reys Jio i Order 1 Q a g N Amplitude 1 1 1 1 0 15 2 0 2 5 3 0 3 5 4 0 45 5 0 Order Table 24 Tracking Filters Parameter Values Comment Enable 0 3 Enable checked Disabled not checked Check the box of the tracking filters that are used Note Tracking Filters impart a significant performance demand on the module Enabling tracking filters that are not necessary adversely affects module performance related to non protection related measurements and functions Tacho Source 0 3 Select from Select the TTL signal source to use as the trigger for the selected tracking Tach Input 0 Tach Bus 0 Tach Input 1 Tach Bus 1 filter Note The signal source must be a TTL source and must be assigned to the corresponding speed input 0 1 Order 0 3 0 25 32 0 Enter the order that the selected filter is to track Notes The tracked order is the entered multiple of the running speed of the selected input tacho Integer values 1 0 2 0 return both magnitude and phase values non integer values return only magnitude values phase is set to 0 132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 24 Tracking Filters Parameter Measurement Units Values See Help comments Measurement Definition Chapter 3 Comment Select
409. of voted alarm detected fault condition Relay control which is based on associated voted alarm 40 Get NV User Local Relay Control BYTE User configuration of local Relay control relay behavior in case of detected fault condition 4 Get NV Local Relay Control BYTE Actual behavior of local Relay control relay in case of detected fault condition 42 Get V Relay Source SINT Link to corresponding Relay source decoding voted alarm object instance and output type 43 Get V Relay Drive Test Enable BOOL Whether the relay drive Automatic on SIL Fail safe setting circuit is being routinely tested 44 Get V Relay Drive Test UINT Test interval ms Interval 64 Get V Redundant Power Supply SINT Whether the module is 0 Not redundant being powered 1 Redundant redundantly Channel 0 DSP FFT Group of 7 configuration attributes 72 Get V Enable SINT An enable control Only 0 Disable enable if FFT bands are 1 Enable required from this channel 73 Get V Signal Source SINT Defines the data source Source 74 Get V Measurement Units ENGUNITS Measurement units 75 Get V Line Resolution SINT Fixed at 1600 lines 76 Get V Window Function SINT Definition of window Window function used 77 Get V Number of Averages SINT FFT averaging Averages 424 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 233 Class Attributes Attribute ID
410. ol unset the Voted Alarm Control inputs include the Control tag of the controller output control 0 bit 5 control 1 bit 6 or either of the discrete inputs if appropriately assigned See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 181 Chapter7 Configure Alarms Table 34 Voted Alarms Parameter Name Values Comments 1 0 Control Select Control 0 or Control 1 1 0 control enables a control input to be used to manage activating a voted alarm regardless of other definition and the state of any defined measurement alarm inputs If defined when the selected 1 0 control bit is set the voted alarm actuates The capability can provide either of Ameans to test the relay output behavior of the voted alarm without having to satisfy the defined alarm conditions e A means to use the controller to manage associated relays directly In this condition the remainder of the voted alarm definition is inconsequential as it is used only to map relays for direct controller management Control inputs include the Control tags of the controller output bits 5 and 6 or either of the discrete inputs if appropriately assigned See Hardware Configuration Page on page 105 Relay Control Fail Safe Enable Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Check to enable Fail Safe for any relay that is assigned to this Voted Alarm Fail Safe Relay Coil Status Behavior In Alarm Not
411. olated from all module circuitry and the DIN rail The installer uses one or more of the SHIELD terminals to connect to a ground of their choosing e Usea direct connection from the cable shield to the protective conductor e Connect only one end of the shield to ground for hazardous area systems preferably at the field end For known EMI hot spots use of overall conduit or double shielded cabling with shield grounded at both ends is preferred e When an additional junction box is used for dividing a multi core cable into separate cables verify that the cable shields are isolated from the metal enclosure of the distribution box The distribution box must be made of metal Make a uniform reference potential reference ground conductor Wiring Categories and Routing Avoid ground loops by connecting the installations and cabinets to a central ground The following wiring categories are defined to help with proper segregation of all wires and cables as part of the planning process for system layout and installation such to promote noise immunity Category Group Description Examples 1 Control and AC Power High power conductors e ACpower lines for power supplies and 1 0 that are more tolerant of electrical noise than circuits category 2 conductors and can also cause more High power digital AC 1 0 lines noise to be picked up by adjacent conductors High power digital DC 1 0 lines 2 Signal and Communication Low p
412. old REAL 27 High Danger Threshold REAL 32 Hysteresis SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x396 N 1 33 Delay Sustain Time Alert DINT 34 Delay Sustain Time Danger DINT 35 Alarm Multiplier REAL 40 Adaptive Monitoring Source INT Pad INT 0x396 N 1 41 Range 1 upper control value REAL 42 Range 1 Alarm Multiplier REAL 43 Range 2 upper control value REAL 44 Range 2 Alarm Multiplier REAL 45 Range 3 upper control value REAL 272 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 71 Configuration Groups 5 16 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x396 N 1 46 Range 3 Alarm Multiplier REAL 47 Range 4 upper control value REAL 48 Range 4 Alarm Multiplier REAL 49 Range 5 upper control value REAL 50 Range 5 Alarm Multiplier REAL 64 Profile mode Reference for Low Alert Threshold SINT 65 Profile mode Reference for High Alert Threshold SINT 66 Profile mode Reference for Low Danger Threshold SINT 67 Profile mode Reference for High Danger Threshold SINT Configuration Group 17 Group 17 contains voted alarm object class attributes and instances 1 7 Table 72 Configuration Group 17 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x397 0 16 Trip Inhibit Bypass Source BYTE 17 Alarm Reset Source BYTE Pad INT 0x397 1 16 Alarm Usa
413. on 370 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Class Attribute Semantics Source Selection The following sources can be identified as inputs for Trip Inhibit Bypass and Reset functionality Table 164 Class Attribute Source Selection Bit Description 0 Logic Input 0 Module Hardware Digital Input Logic Input 1 Module Hardware Digital Input Input 1 0 Alarm Service Request A wj N 7 Reserved Multiple selections identify OR functionality of specified inputs Applies to all Voted alarms and all Relays Where a logic input is being used left open they are inactive close connect the pair of terminals to action a reset or an inhibit action That action is maintained for as long as the connection is made Table 165 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name DataType Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Attribute 1 Get V Voted Alarm Status WORD Bit coded individual Status options voted alarm status Alarm Usage and Behavior Group of 4 configuration attributes 16 Get V Alarm Usage BYTE What measurement Alarm usage options alarm outputs are used None used OFF 17 Get V Alarm Name SINT 32 Aname to identify 32 characters this voted alarm instance 18 Get V Alarm SINT Latching or non Alarm behavior options Behavior latching 19 Get V Alarm Type SINT Any output
414. on Spike Energy is also sensitive to other ultrasonic signals such as pump cavitation high pressure steam or airflow turbulence in liquids or control valve noise And while repetitive impacts are easier Spike Energy has also proven capable of detecting random impact events singular cases of mechanical impact that can occur at any time and that impart low energies This page is presented when the channel is configured for Spike Energy gSE measurements see Channel Type selection Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 The FFT Band is a powerful tool that is commonly used in condition monitoring applications It is also useful in process applications such as detecting the presence of cavitation in a pump or for monitoring combustion in a gas turbine An FFT Band either calculates the total energy or returns the maximum amplitude or its frequency between two frequencies of an FFT The Bands can be calculated from a unique FFT defined on this page or from the gSE FFT if a gSE Channel Notes If measuring from a gSE channel then e The FFT definition parameters Sample Source or Number of Lines are not used e The gSE FFT used for the band measurement is processed using the parameters that are provided on the gSE page Bands FFT Measurement Enable Signal Post Filter x Number of Spectrum 1600 Sample 2930 Samples s Signal Peak Maximum Frequency 1144 hz FFT Window H
415. on Group 19 CIP Objects Appendix B Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Pad SINT 0x39A 3 17 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 Associated Tacho Source SINT 19 Waveform Record Length SINT Pad INT 0x39A 4 16 Source Selection SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 4 17 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 18 Associated Tacho Source SINT 19 Waveform Record Length SINT Pad INT 0x399 1 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 2 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 3 16 Channel Source SINT 17 Data Source SINT 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 289 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 74 Configuration Group 1
416. onal samples need to be acquired at the specified sample rate Especially in the case where a slow speed synchronous source is used this sample acquisition time could be long In such cases the remote system can continue to poll the module for data until it becomes available or can reset abandon the current session 4 Status DINT Any of the following can be returned e eUnrecognizedSession 1 e emaxSessionsReached 2 e ePacketCountOutOfSequence 3 e elnvalidBufferSelect 4 e eNoDataAvailable 5 e eGeneralError 6 e eDeniedRequestAlreadylnProgress 7 e eSessionAccessDenied 8 e eAdvancedMeasurementRequestinProgress 9 e eRequestQueued 10 e eLiveMeasurementinProgress 13 An eSessionAccessDenied status occurs when trying to change an advanced setup with the wrong Advanced Session Instance or before the timeout For all successful requests eSUCCESS 0 is returned any other value ends the session 8 Synch Data Control UINT A synchronizing tacho event reference for this request 10 Advanced Session UINT Multi session session control Instance Sync Data Control Synchronized Advanced Data can be requested from modules that share a TSC X module use its tacho bus outputs If the physical system is in place no pre configuration is required for the cross module synchronization The scheme can be summarized as follows e the TSCX module regularly identifies a particular tacho pulse approximately every 60 seconds e main modules on the t
417. onfiguration attributes specific to the AOP and others from these objects e Mux Object 0x39B e Configuration Manager Object 0x38A e Transducer Object 0x38E 258 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 67 Configuration Group 1 CIP Objects Appendix B Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute Name Data Type CfgRevNumber DINT LocalAOP DINT 2 0x38B 1 16 Time Slot 0 Minimum DAQ Time Multiplier INT 0x38B 1 17 Time Slot 1 Minimum DAQ Time Multiplier INT 0x38B 1 18 Time Slot 2 Minimum DAQ Time Multiplier INT 0x38B 1 19 Time Slot 3 Minimum DAQ Time Multiplier INT CRC Time Date for verifying a safety configuration DINT 3 0x38A 1 17 AOP Module Type SINT 18 Module Type Applied SINT 25 Compliance Mode SINT Pad SINT 0x38A 1 32 Channel 0 AOP Application Type INT 33 Channel 1 AOP Application Type INT 34 Channel 2 AOP Application Type INT 35 Channel 3 AOP Application Type INT 36 Channel 0 Application Type INT 37 Channel 1 Application Type INT 38 Channel 2 Application Type INT 39 Channel 3 Application Type INT 0x38E 1 24 Transducer AC Units ENGUNITS Pad INT Ox38E 1 25 Transducer AC Sensitivity REAL 26 Transducer DC Units ENGUNITS Pad INT Ox38E 1 27 Transducer DC sensitivity REAL 28 TX Power Setup SINT 32 Transducer OK Configuration BYTE
418. only powered by the bus and from a main module base Removal of any module main or Expansion does not affect power distribution to any other module in a system Grounding Scheme The system is isolated from ground and to maintain isolation between multiple interconnected modules whether they are main or Expansion modules Shield connections are common to one another for each module and its terminal base but otherwise isolated from the module circuitry These connections are provided as a termination point for cable screens shields and where applicable for protective ground connections to accessible metal part One or more must be used to connect the Shield bus to a local ground as the base module is not grounded to the DIN rail Use these grounding requirements to verify the safest electrical operating circumstances and to help avoid EMI and ground noise that can cause unfavorable operating conditions for the Dynamix 1444 series system e Module Grounding Provide AWG 16 connection to ground for each Dynamix 1444 Series system module to an available Shield connection terminal e 24V Common Grounding Given that module power supplies are galvanically isolated it is recommended that the DC voltage supply return line to the Dynamix modules is grounded e Transducers verify that transducers are electrically isolated from ground Cable shields must be grounded at one end of the cable and the other end not connected It is recommen
419. onnector Sets Module Spring Connector Screw Connector 1444 DYN04 01RA 1444 DYN RPC SPR 01 1444 DYN RPC SCW 01 1444 TSCX02 02RB 1444 TSC RPC SPR 01 1444 TSC RPC SCW 01 1444 RELX00 04RB 1444 REL RPC SPR 01 1444 REL RPC SCW 01 1444 AOFX00 04RB 1444 AOF RPC SPR 01 1444 AOF RPC SCW 01 Terminal Base Spring Connector Screw Connector 1444 TB A 1444 TBA RPC SPR 01 1444 TBA RPC SCW 01 1444 TB B 1444 TBB RPC SPR 01 1444 TBB RPC SCW 01 Table 3 1444 Series Interconnect Cable Accessories Catalog Number Description 1444 LBIC 04 Local bus interconnect cable qty 4 1444 LBXC 0M3 01 Local bus extender cable 0 3m 11 8 in 1444 LBXC 1M0 01 Local bus extender cable 1 0 m 39 4 in Each main and expansion module terminal base includes one standard ribbon cable connector This connector is sufficient to interconnect all main and expansion modules in a system 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 1 System Enclosure An IP54 weatherproof enclosure is recommended for general applications and required for use in hazardous area locations Use of a metal enclosure is recommended to enhance EMC and thermal system performance Cable Connector and Mounting Accessories Local Bus module to module interconnect cables 1444 series modules are connected through a local bus that is
420. ontact to pin 57 of the module nearest the switch and the other to pin 58 of each module to be managed Figure 12 Wiring Buffer Outputs Override Override Low Override High Buffer Outputs Buffer Outputs Te Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Consider the following with the module e The module ships with a jumper installed between pins 57 and 58 which disables the buffered outputs e When connecting pin 58 from multiple modules to a single module s pin 57 allow for a maximum 3 mA current sink for each connected override input e See Temperature Considerations on page 33 for further information Shield Connections The module is by design isolated from ground All shield connections on this and the lower base connector are common to one another a shield bus but otherwise isolated ae p pe Shield connections are provided as a termination point for cable screens shields one or more can be used to connect the shield bus to a local ground of the user s choosing IMPORTANT When working with the shield bus remember the following e The shield bus of each main and expansion module must be individually connected to ground by at least one shield pin wired directly to ground e For installations where EMI issues are anticipated or when EMI is found to bea problem wire cable shields directly to ground rather tha
421. ope for a Positive 0 positive going pulse It is trailing edge if the slope is Negative 1 opposite the direction of the pulse positive slope on a negative going pulse Pulses per Revolution 1 255 Enter the number of signal pulses per revolution of the shaft DC Volts Fault Checked 1 When enabled checked the tachometer signals a fault Unchecked 0 when the bias voltage of the connected sensor is outside the specified Fault High Fault Low limits 158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 28 Tachometer Parameter Fault High Limit V DC Values 32 000 lt Fault High Limit lt 32 000 Configure the Tachometer Expansion Module Chapter 4 Comments Enter the bias fault high level in Volts ex 2 4 The value must be greater than the Fault Low Limit When enabled checked the tachometer signals a fault when the bias voltage of the connected sensor is outside the specified Fault High Fault Low limits Note The tag and object retain the value in millivolts For example a 2 4 Volt trigger level is a 2400 millivolt tag value Fault Low Limit V DC 32 000 lt Fault Low Limit lt 32 000 Enter the bias fault low level in Volts ex 2 4 The value must be less than the Fault High Limit When enabled checked the tachometer signals a fault when the bias voltage of the connected sensor is outside the specified Fault Low Fault Low limits Note The tag and object
422. or firmware update using ControlFLASH software Table 273 Object Instances InstanceID Description 0 NVS Class Instance 1 Instance 1 of the NVS object NetX firmware 2 Instanc2 of the NVS object DSP firmware Table 274 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of ID Rule Type Attribute Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current revision of this Object Current revision 3 2 Get V Maximum UINT maximum instance number ofan The largest instance Instance object that is created in this class number of a created level of the device object at this class hierarchy level 3 Get V Numberof UNIT Number of object instances The The number of Instances number of object instances at this object instances at class hierarchy level that is created this class hierarchy at this class level of the device level Table 275 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of ID Rule Values 1 Get V Status UNIT Status of the NVS object Status 2 Get V majorinstance USINT Current major revision Revision number of this NVS instance Minor Instance USINT Current minor revision Revision number of this NVS instance 3 Get V Size UDINT Number of bytes contained in this NVS instance 4 Get V Checksum UDINT Checksum CRC or similar Returns the value that is embedded checksum CRC value within the colle
423. or necessary to assure alias free data within the FFT varies If decimation is performed only in hardware via the Sample Rate Divider SRD then the factor is 2 048 so is above the Fmax of the FFT But if decimation is performed in the firmware then a more conservative factor is necessary and is then dependent on the quality of the Low Pass Filter being applied For the Alternate Signal Path the LPF is 48 dB if used so the factor is 2 78 The Default LPF Corner presented is the maximum value applying the selected decimation and the appropriate factor as discussed above Chapter 3 Fmax Alternate Tacho Source 0 1 Select the speed source for the tacho input to be used in the synchronous measurement Tacho Source is applicable only to synchronous measurement Processing Modes e Available Tacho Sources are only those defined from a Tacho Bus or a TTL Input see Speed page Synchronous measurements require a 1 rev signal While the Tachometer Signal Conditioner module outputs a 1 rev TTL to the Tacho Bus provided its Pulses Per Revolution attribute is set see Tachometer page users must help ensure that a Local TTL Input source is a 1 rev signal Fmax Alternate Samples Per Revolution Select from 7 4 8 16 32 64 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Select the number of samples to be measured per shaft revolution Samples per Revolution is applicable only
424. or zero position when the machine is running otherwise all reference to rotor position is lost Always refer to the machine OEM for specific instructions about setting the zero position of the rotor which can differ from the preceding information Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 147 Chapter 3 Measurement Definition A Guide to setting Alarm and Trip set points The objective of thrust monitoring is to help protect the machine not the thrust bearing For example to help prevent the rotating element from coming into contact with the stationary parts of the machine which results in considerable damage lost production and repair costs Some wear of the thrust bearing pads is acceptable to avoid unnecessary alarms and machine trips A typical thrust pad has around 0 75 mm to 1 00 mm 30 40 mils of white metal or Babbitt inspection of the thrust pads would confirm it material therefore if we take the preceding steam turbine application as an example with plus 5 mils 0 127mm as the normal running position we could set the Alarm setting at 6 mils and 11 mils and the trip setting at 12mils and17mils 0 28mm and 0 43mm These setting would help ensure that the thrust pads would suffer some wear before the machine was tripped but before any damage to the machine itself The same logic would be applied for thrust against the Inactive pads so here we have to consider the float to determine t
425. orates phase corrections for any filter on the alternate path and for the main path LP filter However the Primary Path HP filter is non linear phase and cannot practically be corrected for so the POST FILTER data source should be avoided if phase data is important to capture and the HP filter is enabled dependent on Measurement Type Channel Select Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel 0 1 2 3 Reserved The Dynamix 1444 as part of an 0x4C service response returns the following Table 184 0x4C Service Responses Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 SessionInstance USINT The host copies the SessionInstance returned here into each subsequent CM Record Request Up to 3 instances are supported except when reading Live Data See the IMPORTANT note the SpecialRequest structure above 1 DynamicChannel USINT Indicates the dynamic channel for this record Channels 0 3 are valid channels 2 Completed Records UINT This is incremented each time that another complete record has been transferred There are often several packets per completed record 4 RecordSize UINT For a given session the RecordSize returned here is fixed PacketCountDown DWORD The host copies the PacketCountDown returned here into each subsequent CM Record Request When the PacketCountDown reaches 0 the session is complete and the final value in CompletedRecords is all that is transferred 12 Status DINT Any of the following c
426. oups Ungrouped Axes Add On instructions Measuremert Desire Channel 0 Fiters Overall Tracking F iter FET Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 201 202 Chapter 9 Operate the Module 3 Execute the reset service 3 Class Instance Editor Node 192 168 1 89 nm 3 Execute Transaction Arguments Service Code Object Address Class Instance Attribute Value _ Description 1 1 1 oro z V Send the attribute ID Transmit data size Data sentto the device Byte v 01 E Execute Receive Data Output size format Data received from the device Byte v The execution was completed Output radix format Hexadecimal v Help Close Sending a type 1 reset service using the class instance editor of RSNetWorx for EtherNet IP to a Dynamix module at address 192 168 1 89 If the data sent to the device is blank default a type 0 common reset is sent When ready re establish the connection by un inhibiting the module with the current configuration IMPORTANT operation Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 When the connection is reestablished the controller updates the module If the compliance mode of the module is reduced to facilitate remote reset then reset the compliance requirement before restoring the module to normal Operate the Module Chapter 9 Updating Module Firmware Use ControlFLASH to update the firmware in the 1444 se
427. ource Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x396 6 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 7 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 8 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 9 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 10 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 11 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 12 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 295 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 79 Configuration Group 25 Configuration Group 25 Group 25 contains configuration attributes from the Measurement Alarm Object 0x396 Instances 13 19 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x396 13 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 14 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 15 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 16 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 17 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 18 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 19 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 Table 80 Configuration Group 26 Configuration Group 26 Group 26 contains configuration attributes from the following objects e Measurement Alarm Object 0x396 Instances 20 24 e Voted Alarm Object 0x397 Instances 1 and 2 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x396 20 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 21 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 22 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 23 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 24 18 Alarm Name SINT 32 0x397 1 7 Voted Alarm 0 Name SINT 32 2 17 Voted Alarm 1 Name SINT 32 296 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 81 Configuration Group 27 Configuration Group
428. ow Pass Filter Alternate Frequency Values A Low Pass Filter can be applied to the measurement to assure that unwanted high frequency signals are not included in the overall measurement However if an LPF is applied then data processed from an FFT of the signal at frequencies near to and above the LPF corner will be attenuated by the filter LPF Corner Frequency can be between 10 Hz and the lower of 5 kHz or the result of If Fmax Alternate Decimation 1 then 93750 2 048 x Sample Rate Divisor Otherwise 93750 2 78 x Fmax Alternate Decimation x Sample Rate Divisor If the result of the above is lt 10 then the LPF is set to 10 Hz Measurement Definition Comments Enter the frequency where the filter has attenuated the signal by 3 dB Frequencies higher than this are attenuated 24 dB octave 60 dB octave if the Channel Measurement Type is Aeroderivative IMPORTANT If the LPF frequency is within 5 Hz of its maximum default value it will be disabled OFF The Alternate Path Low Pass Filter is available only when the Processing Mode is Asynchronous w 48 dB LP Filter e If firmware decimation is used then the maximum frequencies of the LPF corner can be forced lower than 5 kHz and possibly lower than the specified Fmax This is to assure the measurement is alias free e The available bandwidth Fmax from the Alternate Signal Path is the sample rate 2 56 the customary value However the fact
429. ower Analog 1 0 lines and DC power lines for analog conductors that are less tolerant of electrical noise circuits than category 2 conductors They also cause less Low power digital AC DC 1 0 lines noise to be picked up by adjacent conductors they Low power digital DC lines connect to sensors and actuators relatively close to Communication cables the 1 0 modules 3 Intra enclosure Interconnect the system Low voltage DC power cables components within an enclosure Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 e Communication cables 31 Chapter 1 32 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System To guard against coupling noise from one conductor to another the following general guidelines when routing wires and cables both inside and outside of an enclosure apply Category 1 Routing Guidelines These conductors can be routed in the same cable tray or raceway with machine power conductors of up to 600V AC If it must cross power cabling cross at right angles e Route at least 1 5 m 5 ft from high voltage enclosures or sources of RF microwave radiation e Ifthe conductor is in a metal wireway or conduit each segment of that wireway or conduit must be bonded to each adjacent segment so that it has electrical continuity along its entire length and must be bonded to the enclosure at the entry point Properly shield where applicable and route in a raceway separate from c
430. ower turbine vibration absolute vibration A to A Non integrated acceleration measurements Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters absolute vibration A to V Integrated to velocity acceleration measurements Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters absolute vibration A to D Double integrated to displacement acceleration measurements Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters absolute vibration AV to V Non integrated measurements from an integrating velocity output accelerometer Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters absolute vibration AV to D Integrated to displacement measurements from an integrating velocity output accelerometer Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters absolute vibration V to V Non integrated velocity measurements Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters absolute vibration V to D Integrated to displacement velocity measurements Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters Dynamic Pressure Dynamic pressure measurements Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters AC Current Dynamic current measurements Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters AC Voltage Dynamic voltage measurements Applies 24 dB octave LP and HP filters Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 111 Chapter 2 Time Slot Multiplier Page Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Figure 44 Configuration for Data
431. pe SINT Which measurement data is 0 1 2 transferred for this band RMS max Band RMS default or Frequency max line bin value Frequency of max line Hz order Attribute Semantics Enabled Instances The enable disable state of the 32 instances is available bit wise from a DWORD where at a bit level Table 191 Enabled Instances Value Description 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled instances return error 0x08 Service Not supported when disabled instances are addressed with common services Table 192 Band Type Value Description 0 Fixed bands in Hz 1 Order related bands When 1 attribute 23 sets tacho source Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 393 AppendixB CIP Objects Dynamix Advanced CM Data Object 394 Source of Speed Data Any one of the following can be identified as the speed reference Table 193 Speed Reference Value Description 1 Tacho Speed 0 2 Tacho Speed 1 3 Factored speed from Tacho 0 4 Factored speed from Tacho 1 Higher Values Reserved Table 194 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Code Description of Service Instance Ox0E Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute The Advanced CM Data Object class code 0x39A defines the configuration of the Advanced CM TWF data acquisition Available services allow for data requests for Advanced CM data according to reques
432. pecified as 0 but on subsequent calls the PacketCountDown returned in the CM Record Response must be passed here 12 Advanced Session Instance UINT The Advanced Session Instance that is returned from the 0x4B Advanced CM Data request is included here 402 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Channel Select Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel 0 1 2 3 Reserved The Dynamix 1444 returns the following as part of an 0x4C Advanced CM Data Record Request Table 207 0x4C Advanced CM Data Record Request Byte Offset within Structure Structure Member Data Type Description 0 SessionInstance USINT The host copies the SessionInstance returned here into each subsequent CM Record Request Up to 3 instances are supported DynamicChannel USINT Indicates the dynamic channel for this record Channels 0 3 are valid channels Completed Records UINT This is incremented each time that another complete record has been transferred There are often several packets per completed record RecordSize UINT For a given session the RecordSize returned here is fixed RecordSize is in bytes and describes the appropriate Record Type Structure PacketCountDown DWORD The host copies the PacketCountDown returned here into each subsequent CM Record Request When the PacketCountDown reaches 0 the session is complete and the final value in CompletedRecords is all that is transferred
433. plementation Service Name Description of Service OS foes instance 0x05 X X Reset Reset the peak hold speed RPM max Ox0E xX X Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Behavior The module can process two independent tacho signals from a range of sources For simple TTL signals the main module is equipped with two local tacho inputs Trigger threshold for these inputs is fixed at 2 5V For more complex signals a TSCX module can be used This option provides the possibility of tacho transducer power support for a range of transducer types variable trigger threshold and multiple event per revolution signals Conditioned tacho signals TTL and one event per revolution can then be made available to multiple main modules via the tacho bus A TSCX module is also required to support cross module synchronization that is the advanced On demand data which are synchronized across multiple modules Where a TSCX module is being used help ensure that the main module tacho edge detection the preceding attribute 21 matches that configured for the TSCX module After power up or configuration download the speed value is held at zero rpm until four tacho pulses have been processed This process is used particularly to avoid an initial ghost pulse that can cause a spurious maximum speed value to be stored Similarly while the Tacho OK indication is Fail although the measured speed value continues to
434. plexing mode is active 5 DSP code CRC error If on recalling a configuration from 21 Reserved update the DSP finds a CRC mismatch the configuration is considered corrupt the module is set to its default configuration and the bit is set 6 Reserved 22 Any tacho fail Main module TTL speed inputs 7 Aux Processor DPM fault Will be briefly set during the module 23 Reserved startup sequence Otherwise indicates that the DSP has reset or that the auxiliary communication processor configuration has failed 8 High Temperature Warning 24 Reserved 9 Any Setpoint Multiplier active Alarm limits are being multiplied 25 Reserved 10 DSP Configuration change Set when the DSP receives a different 26 Reserved configuration 11 Reserved 27 Reserved 12 Any Alarm Inhibit active One or more voted alarms is inhibited 28 Reserved 13 Expansion bus Halt requested 29 5VA Fault 14 Expansion bus or module fault Any expansion module not present 30 24V Fault responding or reporting a configuration failure If an expansion module is missing or experiences a communication failure during configuration then this bit will remain set until the configuration process completes successfully following a subsequent download 15 Any calibration failure 31 24V Fault 220 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 40 Transducer Status Operate the Module Chapter 9
435. plication types 80 and 83 the following fixed assignment must be configured e order 0 set to TO and 1x e order 1 set to T1 and 1x This provides fixed 5 Hz bandwidth tracking filters for the gas generator 1x and power turbine 1x It is not necessary to specially configure the Mode or Filter Definition parameters to achieve this result The Not 1X measurement setting implements e order 0 at 1x either tacho can be used e configure the order and the overall 0 to use the same measurement units The Not 1X measurement then provides the difference between the Overall 1 measurement and the first order result The Not 1X measurement data is presented in the same detection type as the order measurement it does not rely on the overall 1 being configured similarly The Not 1X measurement can if desired provide a Not 2x indication by simply changing the order configuration of the first tracking filter on any particular channel The Not 1X is calculated whenever the first tracking filter is enabled irrespective whether it is configured for order 1 1x Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 351 Appendix B Dynamix TSC Module Object CIP Objects The TSC Module Object class code 0x394 defines the setup for the Tacho Signal Conditioning expansion module and interaction of this expansion module with the main module Table 146 Object Instances
436. ponents inside the equipment e Useastatic safe workstation if available Store the equipment in appropriate static safe packaging when not in use Electrical Safety Considerations WARNING To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD all power connections to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with the following Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV or Protected Extra Low Voltage PELV To comply with UL CUL requirements this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with the following Limited Voltage Supply If the input power supply is restricted to 8A no additional protection is necessary However for supplies with higher current ratings that serve multiple groups of main modules the first module of the daisy chain requires an 8A current limiting fuse for protection Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 WARNING All wiring must comply with applicable electrical installation requirements for example N E C article 501 4 b North American Hazardous Location Approval The following information applies when operating this equipment in hazardous locations Products marked CL I DIV 2 GP A B C D are suitable for use in Class Division 2 Groups A B C D hazardous locations and nonhazardous locations only Each product is supplied with markings on the rating nameplate indicating the hazardous locat
437. pports FFT bands but also retains primary path filter options Overall 0 processing and a CM data transfer capability In both cases the FFT band update rate is influenced by the total processing load placed on the module for best performance deploy with the remaining channels configured for DC measurements or set OFF 6 In 18 kHz mode the following restrictions apply No tracking filter functionality is supported Normal Advanced CM data is only available from a main path source To accommodate the 18 kHz bandwidth the SRD for channels 0 1 is now adjustable down to 2 The SRD for channels 2 3 must be 32 7 Due to the high sample rate invoked for 40 kHz mode the following restrictions apply The full 40 kHz bandwidth is available to the Overall 1 measurement if set pre filter FFT band and CM Data sources must relate to decimated sample streams with a minimum decimation of 5 Normal and Advanced CM data is available if their sources are both set post filter 3 No alternate path processing or tracking filter functionality is supported 40 kHz is a special mode that is designed to be applied to both channels of a channel pair with no SRD adjustment A mixture of application types 225 amp 226 is however allowed 8 Due to the high sample rate and signal processing requirements of gSE measurements the following restrictions apply Overall 1 measurement is not supported FFT band and CM Data sources must r
438. priate when the measured value falls outside the expected envelope or profile Profile Alarms can be useful in any application where the measurement vibration strain dynamic pressure varies normally and often significantly through a repeating process Typical of these are machine tools and other non continuous cutting applications robotic or other cyclic motion applications Voted Alarms are where Measurement Alarms are applied They provide a means to assure that a condition warrants an intended action Alarm Overall Danger Alarm Alarm Status To Activate On Set Point Multiplier Trigger Alert Control 0 v Danger Control 1 Transducer Fault Delay 60 000 s Measurement Alarms InputO Brg 1X Overall v Gating Input Brg 1Y Overall x EE Reference off Z Input2 Brg 2X Overall v Condition Greater than High Speed v Input3 Brg 2Y Overall v High 4000 000 RPM Logic 2 Out Of 4 x Low 400 000 RPM Relay Control 1 0 Gating V Fail Safe Enable off Latch Enable Gate Control 0 Gate Control 1 1 0 Control Off Copy Logic Control 0 Logic Control 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 179 Chapter7 Configure Alarms Table 34 Voted Alarms Parameter Name Alarm Name The module provides 13 voted alarms As with any alarm a voted alarm is configured with specific inputs and logic that assesses to a simple true false 1 0 conditio
439. procedure is followed the packet arrangement within the file would be as follows e RecordRequest Packet e RecordResponse Packet with first packet payload at the end Second Response Packet payload Subsequent Response Packet payloads e Last Response Packet payload Instigate further sessions to retrieve data from any other required buffers or channels It is not necessary to reissue a fresh DataRequest Record retrieval from the file can then be accomplished as follows 1 Open the file 2 Read a record with size of Advanced CM Record Request from the head of the file 3 Access the BufferSelect variable to determine the type of record the file holds 4 Read a record with size Advanced CM Record Response from the file pointer 5 Access the RecordSize variable to determine the size of the record 6 Start at the address of the first Record in the Data Array in the first Advanced CM Record Response Then index to any record by using the RecordSize to seek to the correct point in the file 7 Read out the record of size RecordSize Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 407 AppendixB CIP Objects Dynamix MUX Object 408 The MUX Object class code 0x39B defines and controls the multiplexing capability of the main module that is based on single or multiple configurations Up to 3ea subchannels can be configured each based on one DSP stored configuration and each having up to 4ea time slots
440. ption of Attribute Semantics of Values Rule 1 Get V Band RMS REAL Overall Band RMS measurement value 2 Get V Band max REAL maximum line bin value in band RMS 3 Get V Band max Frequency REAL Frequency at which Band max occurs Hz Order 6 Get V Band Value REAL One value from a choice of Band RMS max and Frequency made by configuration FFT Band Source Group of 2 configuration attributes 16 Get V Channel Source SINT The channel FFT to which this bandis Channel range 0 3 applied 128 OFF 392 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 190 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B 17 Get V Data Source SINT The data source for FFT bands is setby Fixed at 0 the Module Control Object attributes 73 80 87 and 94 Demanded Band Frequency Limits Group of 4 configuration attributes 18 Get V Source of Band Frequency Limits SINT Tacho related or fixed band limits in Hz Band type 19 Get V Start Frequency REAL Definition of demanded band start Start lt Stop frequency in Hz or orders refer 18 Start gt 0 Range 0 1 39000 20 Get V Stop Frequency REAL Definition of demanded band stop Stop gt Start frequency in Hz or orders refer 18 Stop lt Fmax Range 0 2 40000 23 Get V Tacho Source for Band Limits SINT Tacho source for band limits Tacho source Transfer of Data to Controller A configuration attribute 24 Get V FFT Band magnitude Ty
441. pto isolated open collector circuits that provide TT Lsignals The outputs are suitable for use in providing simple status on off indication or for replicating and transmitting a TTL speed input to another 1444 DYN04 01RA module 1444 TSCX02 02RB Tachometer Signal Conditioner Expansion Module Four outputs are provided to allow raw and conditioned buffer outputs Raw Buffer Outputs Two outputs one per channel are provided via BNC connectors These outputs provide an ESD and short circuit protected replica of the raw input signals These signals are N rev If the BNC output is a multiple event per revolution signal the associated status indicator 6 or 7 illuminates blue Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 213 Chapter 9 214 Operate the Module Conditioned Buffer Outputs Two outputs one per channel are provided via terminal pin connectors These outputs provide an ESD EFT and surge protected replica of the signals that are output to the local Expansion bus and provided to any dynamic measurement modules on the bus These signals are presumed to be 1 revolution 1444 RELX00 04RB Relay Expansion Module The relay expansion module has no analog outputs 1444 AOFX00 04RB 4 20 mA Output Expansion Module Four ESD and EFT protected outputs Each output is a 4 20 mA proportional signal that represents a selected measurement The outputs are not powered requiring independent loop power
442. put 3 VotedAlarm00 73 Alarm3Input Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Input 3 Logic VotedAlarm00 13 LogicCondition Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Logic Configuration Setpoint Multiplier Trigger Control 0 VotedAlarm00 13 LogicInput0 Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Multiplier Control VotedAlarm00 13 ControllerSPMO Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Multiplier Control Setpoint Multiplier Trigger Control 1 VotedAlarm00 73 Logiclnput1 Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Multiplier Control VotedAlarm00 13 ControllerSPM1 Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Multiplier Control Setpoint Multiplier Trigger Delay VotedAlarm00 13 SPMDelayTime Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Alarm Multiplier ON Time Gating Speed Reference VotedAlarm00 13 SpeedGatingEnSource Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Speed Gating Control Gating Speed Condition VotedAlarm00 13 SpeedGateCondition Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Speed Gating Detection Gating Speed High Limit VotedAlarm00 13 HSpeedGateLimit Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Higher Speed Threshold Gating Speed Low Limit VotedAlarm00 13 LSpeedGateLimit Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Lower Speed Threshold 1 0 Gating Gate Control VotedAlarm00 13 LogicGateSource Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Logic gating source 1 0 Control VotedAlarm00 13 LogicControlSource Dynamix Voted Alarm Object Logic control source Relay Control Fail Safe Enable VotedAlarm00 13 FailSafeEn Dynamix Voted Al
443. put REAL Actual Speed considering number of RPM pulses per revolution 2 Get V Individual Transducer Status BYTE Individual transducer operating status information Sensor Type Configuration Group of 4 configuration attributes 16 Get V Input Sensor Type USINT Definition of input source that Selection options configures required inputs and signal conditioning 17 Get V Input Name SINT 32 Physical channel name identifier 32 characters 24 Get V Sensor Power Supply SINT Bit coded configuration for tacho TX power supply options power supply configuration 25 Get V Sensor Target INT The number of signal pulses per 1 255 Pulses Per Rev revolution of the shaft Trigger Configuration Group of 3 configuration attributes 32 Get V Trigger Mode SINT Potential support for auto threshold 0 Configured threshold detection on the TSC module 1 Auto detection when implemented 33 Get V Trigger Threshold INT Trigger detection threshold voltage Range 32000 32000 that is specified in mV 4 32V 34 Get V Trigger Slope Edge SINT Definition of trigger detection slope 0 Positive 1 Negative Sensor OK Detection Group of 5 configuration attributes 40 Get V Sensor OK Definition BYTE TX OK Definition that drives the Configuration options appropriate OK line of the tacho bus 4 Get V Sensor OK High Threshold INT High voltage threshold for the mV Sensor OK monitoring window Range 24000 24000 42 Get V Sensor OK Low Threshold INT Low voltage threshol
444. r Triggering the Alarm Buffer The alarm buffer triggers on an event that can be any of e Voted Alarm This is the normal method You can select any unique alarm and the alarm status alert danger or fault See Voted Alarms Page on page 179 e Any Voted Alarm When defined this triggers alarm buffer capture when any voted alarm actuates This is regardless of the status so could be alert danger or fault e Controller Output Tag Regardless of the trigger on selection the alarm buffer always triggers when the AlarmBufferTrigger bit 8 of the control tag in the controller output assembly is set e Service Request Regardless of the trigger on selection the alarm buffer always triggers upon receipt of the dynamix data manager object alarm buffer trigger service 190 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Trend and Transient Capture Chapter 8 Latch the Alarm Buffer A latch capability is provided for the alarm buffer When the latch is enabled once triggered and saved the alarm buffer does not update on subsequent trigger events until the latch has been reset Reset the Alarm Buffer Reset a buffer whether it is latched or not as a way to determine when new data is available A latched alarm buffer is reset by either of the following e Set the AlarmBufferReset bit bit 9 of the controller output assembly control tag e Send the reset service to the dynamix data manager ob
445. r TTL Trigger Values Positive 0 Negative 1 Comments Trigger the measurement on the positive or negative going side of the TTL signal Select Positive to trigger on the leading edge or Negative to trigger on the trailing edge Applicable only for speeds with a Local TTL or Tacho Bus source IMPORTANT To assure accurate phase measurements from any configured Tracking Filters the trigger point on the TTL signal must align with the trigger point on the tachometer signal If the TTL source is a Tachometer Signal Conditioner Expansion TSCX module then to assure accurate phase measurements match this parameter to the Trigger Slope defined in the Tachometer configuration for the TSCX Update Rate 0 1 to 20 0 seconds Enter the time in seconds between each speed measurement used to calculate the acceleration rate of change value Speed measurements are updated at a rate not slower than once per 40 milliseconds but dependent on module configuration and the overall module processing requirements The delta time between samples used for the rate of change calculation will be adjusted to the nearest interval based on the actual measurement update rate Time Constant 116 0 1 to 20 0 seconds Enter a time constant for use in the rate of change calculation The time constant calculation effectively smooth s the measurements as it behaves similarly to a high pass filter The smaller
446. r before application specific filters 2 Mid Filter after the Low Pass Filter 3 Post Filter after both application filters and any configured integration 4 Alternate path can be asynchronously or synchronously sampled depending on channel set up Measurement Units Actual selection of Measurement engineering units is a subset of the master engineering units list The selection is based on active measurement application for the applicable measurement channel related to sensor type and signal processing Table 199 Associated Tacho Source Value Description 0x01 Tacho Speed 0 0x02 Tacho Speed 1 Higher Values Reserved Table 200 Common Services Service Implementation Code Ox0E Get Attribute Single Instance Service Name Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Description of Service Returns the contents of the specified attribute 395 Appendix B 396 CIP Objects Table 201 Object Specific Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x4B x X Advanced CM Data This service specifies the data processing that is Request being requested Being on demand this service triggers that processing to take place 0x4C xX Advanced CM Data This service is used to return the requested data Record Request 0x4D X X Advanced CM Data This service can be used to reset finish early the Session Reset specified
447. r output Normal expected status indicator states for a healthy system are all solid green For each output channel if the output is not enabled the associated status indicator is off If enabled e Blue if the output is inhibited or the link is halted e Red when the link fault output value is imposed by the expansion module e In either case the output is likely being held static same value maintained Otherwise the output status indicator is green The color is always solid except all enabled channels flash the active color during a link fault Status Description OFF Green Blue Red Red Green Blue Green Indicator Solid Flashing Solid Flashing Solid Flashing Flashing Flashing off off off PWR Power status 5V power not 5V power OK OK LNS Local network Relay Configured Configured status module not andbusOK and bus NOT configured OK MS Module status Processor Processor Processor Processor activity OK warning critical error critical error OPO Output O status Outputnotin Host Bus fail Output state Bus fail Bus fail use controlling held Output held at fault indication level OP1 Output 1 status Outputnotin Host Bus fail Output state Bus fail Bus fail use controlling held Output held at fault indication level OP2 Output 2 status Outputnotin Host Bus fail Output
448. r redundancy is being implemented externally then it is necessary to connect power to both power inputs on the module If power is landed to only one input and the Power Supply mode is set to Redundant then a fault indication is given Compliance Requirement Setting Compliance Mode None 0 API 670 Compliant 1 For general monitoring applications that do not apply protection requirement select None Selecting API 670 Compliant or higher applies restrictions to the configuration that aid in defining an API 670 machinery Protection Systems standard compliant configuration When performing a safety function the Dynamix 1444 module including any associated auxiliary modules implements a range of diagnostic measures to test for hardware or software failure By specifying the mode in which the safety function operates low high demand mode the extent of these checks their frequency and the actions on detection of a failure can all be set appropriately API 670 enables a great deal of variation in many aspects of the configuration So setting this attribute to API 670 Compliant or higher does not by itself help ensure that a configuration is API 670 compliant API 670 compliance levels require real time measurements So the multiplexed personalities are not enabled when compliance levels greater than None are selected Personality Setting Personality Real Time 4 Ch Dynamic 4 kHz or Static
449. r the FFT data Actual RPM Value 100 Value provided is a 24 bit 3 byte integer First least significant byte bits 0 7 18 ucSpeedByte1 BYTE Second byte bits 8 15 19 ucSpeedByte2 BYTE Last byte bits 16 23 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 24 LineArray REAL The array of FFT line amplitude data 386 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B If the FFT is a synchronous measurement then the RPM value is also provided in the SamplePeriodInSecs parameter In that case the two RPM values are identical Asynchronous Measurements if bit 0 of ucDataSelect is set then number_of_lines number_of_lines ByteCount 8 otherwise number_of_lines ByteCount 4 If bit 3 of usDataSelect is set then number_of_lines number_of_lines 2 number_of_lines 1 FMAX Hz SamplePeriodInSec 2 56 number_of_lines Synchronous Measurements if bit 0 of ucDataSelect is set then f number_of_lines ByteCount 8 otherwise number_of_lines number_of lines ByteCount 4 samples_per_rev The first byte of the SamplePeriodInSec value RPM_in_Hz The last three bytes of the SamplePeriodinSec value number_of_lines 1 samples_per_rev number_of_orders 2 56 number_of_lines number_of_lines 1 samples_per_rev RPM_in_Hz FMAX Hz 2 56 number_of_lines FMAX Hz number_of_orders RPM_in_Hz Rockwell Automation Publicatio
450. rage Trigger Source Alarm Buffer Trigger On Any Alarm Trend AlarmTriggerSource Dynamix Data Manager Object Alarm Data Storage Trigger Source Alarm Buffer Voted Alarm Condition Trend AlarmTriggerSource Dynamix Data Manager Object Alarm Data Storage Trigger Source Alarm Buffer Enable Latching Trend AlarmLatchEn Dynamix Data Manager Object Alarm Data Storage Latching Alarm Buffer Post Trigger Low Resolution for Dynamic Data Trend DynamicLowResoultionPost Trigger Dynamix Data Manager Object Alarm Post Trigger for Dynamic Data Records Alarm Buffer Post Trigger Low Resolution for Discrete Data Trend DiscreteLowResoultionPost Trigger Dynamix Data Manager Object Alarm Post Trigger for Low Resolution Overall Records Alarm Buffer Post Trigger High Resolution for Discrete Data Trend DiscreteHighResoultionPost Trigger Dynamix Data Manager Object Alarm Post Trigger for High Resolution Overall Records Selected Parameters Trend DiscreteParams 0 3 Dynamix Data Manager Object DWORD 0 3 Transient Page Enable Transient Capture Disable Dynamic Capture on Start Up TransientCapture En TransientCapture OnStartUpDisable Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object Transient Data Mode Control Transient Data Mode Control Disable Dynamic Capture on Coast Down TransientCapture OnC
451. ration Failure 3 Ch3 Calibration Failure 4 7 Reserved Table 43 Relay Module 0 Status Relay Module 0 Bit Status Description if 1 0 Module Not Responding 1 Module Configured Relay module 0 has a valid configuration 2 Code CRC Fault 3 High Temperature Warning 4 Link bus fail 5 Halt is Active 6 RAM Fault 7 RAM access error 8 Relay 0 not inhibited Relay 0 is inhibited 9 Relay 1 not inhibited Relay 1 is inhibited 10 Relay 2 not inhibited Relay 2 is inhibited 11 Relay 3 not inhibited Relay 3 is inhibited 12 Relay 0 drive failure Relay 0 failed drive test 13 Relay 1 drive failure Relay 1 failed drive test 14 Relay 3 drive failure Relay 2 failed drive test 15 Relay 3 drive failure Relay 3 failed drive test 222 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 Table 44 Relay Module 1 Status Relay Module 1 Bit Status Description if 1 0 Module Not Responding 1 Module Configured Relay module 1 has a valid configuration Code CRC Fault 3 High Temperature Warning 4 Link bus fail 5 Halt is Active 6 RAM Fault 7 RAM access error 8 Relay 0 not inhibited Relay 0 is inhibited 9 Relay 1 not inhibited Relay 1 is inhibited 10 Relay 2 not inhibited Relay 2 is inhibited 11 Relay 3 not inhibited Relay 3 is inhibited 12 Relay 0 drive failure Relay 0 failed drive test 13 Relay 1 drive failur
452. rdSize to seek to the correct point in the file 7 Then read out the record of size RecordSize 310 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object CIP Objects Appendix B The Transient Manager Object class code 0x38C defines the setup of transient data acquisition mode and provides access to the associated transient data buffers Furthermore this object allows for transient type definition which can differentiate between normal and fast transients Table 96 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Transient Data Manager Class Instance 1 Table 97 Class Attributes Transient Data Manager Setup Instance Attribute Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute ID 1 Get NV Revision UINT Defines revision of Dynamix Transient Data Manager Object Table 98 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values 1 Get V Transient Static Records STRUCT The number of overall static data records Four UINT Maximum 640 per currently stored in each of the 4 transient buffers 2 Get V Transient Dynamic Records The number of dynamic data records Four UINT Maximum 64 per currently stored in each of the 4 transient buffers 3 Get V Run up Data Set Usage BYTE Provide information as to which of the 4 Bits 0 3 for the 4 normal buffers are
453. re 0 TimestampNanoSec UDINT Subsecond accuracy 4 TimestampSec UDINT Seconds since 1970 8 Reserved REAL 12 Reserved DWORD 16 Reserved UDINT 20 ByteCount UDINT The size of the following array in bytes 34 TimingArray UDINT The array of tacho time values 24 bit micro second counter 404 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B For FFT and TWF data For asynchronous data the actual sample period is transferred REAL format For synchronous data the same four bytes are used to transfer the number of samples per revolution and an indicative speed for the transferred data Number of samples per revolution occupies the first byte the remaining 3 bytes are used for a scaled speed value speed x 100 This format supports speed values to 167 772 15 rpm with a resolution of two decimal places Example with data on the wire of 0x 10DC7D05 e Ox 10 16 samples per revolution e 0x057DDC 359 900 e RPM 359 900 100 3599 rpm 60 Hz Whether the data is asynchronous or synchronous can be known from the identifier field This has the following format Bits Description 0 1 Measurement channel 0 1 2 3 from which the data originates 2 Data source Transfer path 0 or 1 3 4 Transfer path 0 data source 0 pre filter 1 mid filter 2 post filter 5 6 Transfer path 1 data mode bit 5 0 asynchronous bit 5 1 synchronous then bit 6 indicates which tach
454. refore comprises measurements that are made by the module while the output data assembly is used for control data being sent to the module Table 244 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Class Instance for the Assembly Object 100 Instance 1 defines one input data assembly option 0 T 101 Instance 2 defines one output data assembly option T 0 Table 245 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Attribute Semantics of ID Rule Type Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Defines the current revision of Current 2 the Assembly Object 2 Get V Maximum UINT 101 Instance Table 246 Instance Attributes Attribute Semantics of Values ID 3 Data STRUCT The input or output data 4 Get V Size UINT The assembly data size Number of bytes Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 File Object CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Semantics Member List See I O Message Formats Note Set access for Output data is not allowed as a security measure to prevent disruption of controlled modules Table 247 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Instance Ox0E x X Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute The File object holds the EDS Electronic Data Sheet file of the device Table 248 Object Instances Instance ID Description Class Inst
455. rement demanded default of 1 19 Get V AC Overall Measurement Peak TC REAL Time constant definition for Peak Range 0 1 60 s measurement demanded default of 1 20 Get V AC Overall Magnitude Detection SINT Detection method for the overall Options Method magnitude value Measurement Time Constants Group of 2 configuration attributes 24 Get V Actual RMS TC REAL Actual implemented RMS TC value Seconds that is based on channel data acquisition setup 25 Get V Actual Peak TC REAL Actual implemented Peak TC value Seconds that is based on channel data acquisition setup 336 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 130 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute ID Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values Rule Peak per Revolution Assessment Group of 2 configuration attributes 32 Get V Configure Peak per Rev SINT Option to enable Peak level Peak per Rev details assessment on a once per revolution basis including tacho source selection 33 Get V Minimum RPM for Peak per Rev REAL Peak per revolution only active above Peak per Rev details this value Attribute Semantics Enabled Instances Following bit coding scheme is used to identify active static AC measurement instances Three bytes are used to describe active instances for each subchannel Byte Bit Description 1 0 7 AC measurement instances 1 8 0 disabled 1 enabled 2
456. ressure and other electrically compatible dynamic sensors Transducer Fault Detection Transducer fault detection is based on bias voltage level and current if the sensors is a powered eddy current probes see the following Bias Level Fault Detection For most sensors when operating normally the sensors bias level will be at an expected level that falls within the default bias limits shown in the following table Measurement Type Sensor Type Default Sensor Power Default Bias Limits Name Index Low Limit High Limit absolute vibration A to A 84 Accelerometer 24V DC 4mA 6 18 absolute vibration A to V 85 Accelerometer 24V DC 4 mA 6 18 absolute vibration A to D 86 Accelerometer 24V DC 4mA 6 18 18 kHz absolute vibration A to A 160 Accelerometer 24V DC 4mA 6 18 18 kHz absolute vibration A to V 161 Accelerometer 24V DC 4mA 6 18 40 kHz absolute vibration A to A 225 Accelerometer 24V DC 4mA 6 18 40 kHz absolute vibration A to V 226 Accelerometer 24V DC 4mA 6 18 gSE 227 Accelerometer 24V DC 4mA 6 18 Position 6 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Rod Drop 7 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Eccentricity 79 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 X shaft relative 81 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Y shaft relative 82 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Comp Differential Exp A Axial 193 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Comp Differential Exp B Axial 194 Eddy Curren
457. ries main module and any connected expansion modules The firmware for 1444 series expansion modules is included in the update that is provided for the 1444 DYN04 01RA dynamic measurement module When the main module is updated the process also automatically updates the firmware in any connected expansion modules To update the firmware in a Dynamix 1444 Series main module follow these steps 1 Place the module into either its out of box Type 1 or Hard Type 2 reset state per the procedures in Resetting the Module on page 197 The module accepts a command to update its firmware only when ina reset state Do not re establish a connection to the module from the controller once it has been reset 2 Make sure that the module is inhibited and does not have any established connections 3 Update the firmware using ControlFlash 4 From Studio 5000 Logix Designer from the connection page of the module properties clear the inhibit module checkbox to uninhibit the module General Requested Packet Interval RPI Inhibit Module CIM X r Fault On Controller If Connex Connection Module Info Tachometer Speed Time Slot Multiplier l HW Configuration v Use Unicast Connection over Ethe Measurement Definiti 3 Channel 0 Filters When the module is uninhibited the controller establishes a connection to the module and downloads its configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P Au
458. ring System Chapter 1 Tacho Inputs The DYN module includes two local tacho inputs 0 and 1 These are not isolated from other module circuitry the signal input has a resistive pull up to 5V and the return connection is analog ground return These local inputs are designed for situations where there is a TTL level tacho signal available a tacho sensor with an open collector output such as NPN type a connection to an Opto output on another Dynamix module or the TTL output from an XM 220 Dual Speed module 1440 SPD02 01RB In most situations the preferred method of providing tacho signals to the module is through the TSC Expansion module Proximity Probes The following are examples of proximity probes Figure 14 ECP Connections ECP Driver Module Channel 0 1 2 3 Output 2o0r3 6o0r7 10 or 11 140r 15 Common 4 8 12 16 24V 1 5 9 13 Shield any terminal base shield pin upper 59 64 lower 19 20 23 24 27 28 31 32 The channel must be configured for a negative 24V supply and either of the two signal connections can be used as in Figure 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 63 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Figures 15 18 show typical wiring diagrams for channels 0 3 of an eddy current probe sensor Figure 15 Channel 0 Wiring g el T 00000000000 Shield Floating
459. rmation applies to all FFT of whatever line resolution and whether used for Condition Monitoring or FFT Band Data The calculation of sample rate must include any decimation that is applied to the samples before this FFT or filter processing see also in the following information decimation Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 333 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 126 Sampling Control Category Disabling a LP filter Description You can disable the LP filter to use more of the available bandwidth for the overall 0 measurement Minimizing unnecessary filtering is also beneficial for reducing module processing load and generally retaining the fidelity of the signal While within a particular channel application type you cannot explicitly choose to disable an LP filter it can be achieved by choosing to set the filter cutoff frequency at the maximum allowed SRD 2 048 noting that for calculation purposes 40 kHz mode has an SRD of 1 On receiving the configuration if the configuration setting is above or within 5 Hz of the calculated maximum then the module automatically disables that LP filter Main path and alternate path asynchronous filters are considered separately as appropriate to the configuration Decimation of asynchronous samples A decimation of n further reduces sample rate by retaining only the nth sample Decimation is commonly used for the following purposes to e Provide
460. rofile mode SINT 1 0 Alarm Tag Reference Range 0 15 Reference for High defining dynamichigh No hysteresis Alert Threshold alert alarm threshold support 66 Get V Profile mode SINT 1 0 Alarm Tag Reference Range 0 15 Reference for Low defining dynamic low No hysteresis Danger Threshold danger alarm threshold support 67 Get V Profile mode SINT 1 0 Alarm Tag Reference Range 0 15 Reference for High defining dynamic high No hysteresis Danger Threshold danger alarm threshold support Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Semantics Individual Alarm Status Individual alarm status code can represent one or more of the following conditions Bit 0 Alert usage enabled Bit 1 Danger usage enabled Bit 2 Adaptive mode Bit 3 Profile mode Bit 4 Multiplier configured Bit 5 Multiplier active Bit 6 Alert status Bit 7 Danger status Alarm Form The following selection choices define the measurement alarm form Table 157 Alarm Form Value Description 0x00 0 Over Threshold 0x01 1 Outside Window 0x02 2 Under Threshold 0x03 3 Inside Window Alarm Type The following options define measurement alarm behavior that is related to transducer status TX OK Table 158 Alarm Type Value Description 0x00 TX OK Considered requires TX OK status to report alarm condition 0x01 TX OK Monitored
461. rust and Proportional Voltage Measurement f Time Constant 1 000 s Calibration Offset 0 00 mil Sense Control Away v Rod Drop Tachometer 0 1 Target Angle 0 dec Angular Range 10 v dec Decay Time 0 1 s Differential Expansion Ramp Angle 0 00 dec Overall Axial Offset 0 00 mil Overall Radial Offset 0 00 mil Eccentricity Tachometer Disable 0 1 ow Minimum Peak Rev 10 00 RPN This page is available only for channels that are defined for Static measurements see Channel Type Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 Note While the parameters associated with all supported DC measurements are presented only those parameters appropriate to the measurement taken must be configured The following is a summary overview of each of the DC measurements the module is capable of and that are configured on this page Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 143 Chapter 3 144 Measurement Definition Normal Thrust Also referred to as rotor position or axial position the thrust measurement is used to monitor thrust bearing wear and to help protect against or provide warning of axial rubs Only use single thrust motion detection one channel when the machine does not have to be shut down and there is another means of verifying thrust bearing failure Use dual redundant thrust position measurements for applications where exceeding thrust position limits m
462. rving an earlier request the 2nd host will receive an error code 13 Bit 2 is not used Set SR_FILTER Bit 3 to request that if samples are decimated or synchronously resampled then only 50 of the configured FFT lines are to be returned For further information see FFT Data Filter SR_FILTER under Sampling Control in the Channel Setup Object 384 Pad PacketCountDown BYTE DWORD Used to align data to a 32 bit boundary The PacketCountDown is initially specified as 0 but on subsequent calls the PacketCountDown returned in the CM Record Response must be passed here Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Phase Data When the SR_mAG_PHASE bit is set the FFT s phase data meaningful or not is returned following the linear FFT data However Selected sample data for any Live TWF FFT always starts at the nearest sample to a tacho event irrespective of how the data is sampled synchronous or asynchronous So there is usable phase from both synchronous or asynchronously sampled data in either case it should reasonably agree with tracking filter order phase all it needs is the once per revolution signal On a TWF if the signal were a simple 1x sinusoid the phase will be visible as the angle from the start of the trace to the first positive peak On an FFT phase values for every bin line are provided as you would expect The Dynamic module incorp
463. s live data by the Normal CM Object Data returned on the controller s input assembly are not time stamped Consequently if the module is used only to serve level data to the controller or other devices then managing accurate time is not always required Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 207 Chapter 9 208 Operate the Module While CIP Sync is designed to continuously update synchronize time between the controller and the module continuous synchronization with the controller is not required Once the time is set in the module it will retain that time until the next power cycle Consequently if communication with the controller are lost the module continues to manage and report accurate time For module time management to operate correctly CIP Sync must be configured in the host controller x 3 Controller Properties Demo olol x8 Nonvolatile Memory Memory Internet Protocol Port Configuration Network Security Alarm Log General Major Faults Minor Faults Date Time Advanced SFC Execution Project i The D splayed here is Controller local time not workstation local time Use ti nfigure Time attributes of Controller Set Date Time and Zone from Workstation Date and Time 7 16 2015 11 01 48 AM Change Date and Time Time Zone l UTC 06 00 Central Time US amp Canada v e j v Adjust for Daylight Saving 01 00 e Time Synchronize
464. s channels 0 and 1 or channels 2 and 3 There are two versions of each of the parameters that are shown in this section one associated with each channel pair Click the button for pair 0 1 or pair 2 3 to select the measurements for either pair Channel Level Parameters The parameters in this section are measurements that are made from individual channels There are four versions of each of the parameters that are shown in this section one associated with each channel Click the button for channel 0 or 1 for channel pair 0 1 or 2 or 3 for channel pair 2 3 to select the measurements for each channel e The parameters on this page are used only by the AOP e The Module Personality and Channel Type selections of the Define Module Functionality page filter the presented measurements e Selecting measurements on this page forces related configuration definition selections but cannot ensure that the configuration of the measurement is appropriate for the application and the applied signals e Use the Copy Button to copy the Channel Pairs and Channel selections that are visible to the other Channel Pair and Channels Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 99 Chapter2 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Table 11 Data for Output Tag Parameter Values Speed Checked 1 Unchecked 0 Module Definition Select Data for Output Tag The parameters on this page are used to specify data to be
465. s tie e eck ales oh heh COCL lial a8 ok Med oi 16 Product Description System Overview sc cie 9ehss 3 lt as sedans st 17 System Enclosure oueres oen erae reka ee erat ci a aad cites 19 Cable Connector and Mounting Accessories 000005 19 SystemC OMiponents sser rarere detains E a 21 Network Connectivity and Considerations ssesse ceesre 22 Chapter 2 Environment and Enclosure tiiis neice ae deioi eek seen veces 26 Prevent Electrostatic Discharge asx sce ciseaditiea tesserae 26 Electrical Safety C onsiderations seicn 2 geese ttwoserendsaddenees 26 North American Hazardous Location Approval 27 European IECex Hazardous Location Approval 29 AP LGOPOComplanee noms caiceiend anata niae ny neg eave ambos 29 Removal or Insertion Under Power RIUP 00055 30 Design Considerations acicsccnetuevs i renen hosts aan TTEN 30 Electro Magnetic Compatibility EMC Precautions 30 Wiring Categories and Routing oincnitevcrerkaosseeranend ae 31 Temperature Considerations sxc sc cee cei meme todeaces 33 Reliability Considerations i224 24 s4405 2 ese e ieee 35 System Space and Clearance Requirements 000 005 36 Wiring Reguirements nesre that heaven MARSA aa hee aE M hcl 37 Module Power Supply Requirements 0 sees ee eee 38 Grounding Schein o5o444e593 25 en ceca aes eas cay taaeets 39 Local Bus Connection main expansion 000ee0ee ees 40 Using Lo
466. s always returned as IEEE Float Real values across the network 380 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Enable A bit wise enable for the Normal CM Data Table 178 Normal CM Data Bit Description 0 FFT 1 Waveform 2 Waveform Averaging 3 7 Reserved Waveform averaging is only a valid selection if or when the Normal CM data source is set to the Alternate path and that is configured for synchronous sample generation Refer also the Channel Set up Object The Normal CM Darta enable affects not only the data available via this object but the data available to the Trend Alarm and Transient Data objects Normal CM Data enable control enables the type of dynamic data available to the downstream Objects In the downstream storage objects dynamic data storage can be disabled per channel Trend Data Manager or by SU CD Transient Normal Live Data is still available if dynamic data storage is disabled in the Trend Data Manager and Transient Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 381 Appendix B 382 CIP Objects Source Selection The Normal CM data can be taken before any filtering 1 from the alternate path 4 or from a choice of two locations 2 3 on the main signal processing path Table 179 Source Selection Index Description 0x01 1 Pre Filter before application specific filters 0x02 2 Mid Filter
467. s from any channel The dynamic record content can include a time waveform and or an FFT that are processed from any enabled data source See Filters on page 118 and Bands on page 139 e Can be allocated to hold either start up or coast down data e A buffer can contain data from only one transient event Overflow When overflow is enabled ifa buffer is filled before a transient is concluded then the data acquisition moves to the next available not latched buffer of the same type This effectively enables definition of e One start up or coast down buffer with 2560 discrete and 256 dynamic records e One start up and one coast down buffer each with 1280 discrete and 128 dynamic records e One start up or coast down buffer with the standard 640 discrete and 64 dynamic records and one coast down or start up buffer with 1920 discrete and 192 dynamic records Initiating a Transient Event When a transient event is initiated by the referenced speed crossing below the high or above the low speed thresholds transient data acquisition is begun to the first available buffer of the applicable type start up or coast down that is not latched Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 193 Chapter 8 194 Trend and Transient Capture Dynamic Data To include TWF and FFT data with the transient data enable the measurements on each channels FFT Page The FFT and TWF saved will be as defined on the FFT Pages b
468. se settings from left to right are on the bottom e 00 Tacho Signal Conditioner Expansion TSCX Module e 01 11 Not used TSX e The TSCX module applies a fixed internal address that requires the terminal base switch to be set to 00 e A DYN module can only host one TSCX module e Only one TSCX module can be connected to the same 1444 Series Expansion bus Main and expansion modules are readily fitted to their respective bases with correct alignment and connector engagement being supported by the following features e Module coding pin main module only e Base module upper and lower connector guidance e Module to base connector guidance and alignment Before installing the module check that there is no damage bent pins on the main Expansion module to base connector Figure 6 Module to Base Position Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 49 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Once the main module is fitted onto the base use the four captive quarter turn screws one in each corner to secure the module to its base Wiri ng Overview General Module Connecter Arrangements The 1444 series requires that wiring is routed to both above and below the modules So particular attention and planning of cabinet wire routing is essential for an efficient well organized and therefore maintainable cabinet Use the following figure when planning cabinet wire routing The fig
469. session instance Only sessions that are associated with an advanced measurement is reset The reset request includes the advanced session instance number from the last successful Advanced CM Data Request 0x4B response Data types consisting of multiple bytes are transferred in little endian format least significant byte first A data communication session starts at the first service request and ends after the final response of the exchange or after timeout of 30 seconds Although three sessions are available a reset remains good practice for freeing up resources for new Advanced Data transfer requests Expected flow would be as follows Request Data Data Data as required Session Reset 0x4B Advanced CM Data Request Advanced CM data processing is started and the results are retrieved using a two part set of commands that are sent as a series of request response messages using connected messages reduce messaging overhead An Advanced CM data request service is used to initialize and start a session The desired parameters are passed to the system to begin the processing of the advanced CM data The anticipated time for the processing to be completed is returned After the processing time expires the requestor can ask for the data using the second part of the command set The instance and attribute can be set to 1 but they are ignored Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP O
470. set indicates that channel has a calibration failure Table 116 Alarm Event Types ID Name Bytes 8 15 Application 01 Measurement Alarm Status Previous Alarm Status 8 11 New Alarm Status 12 15 02 OK Voted Alarm Status Previous Alarm Status 8 11 New Alarm Status 12 15 03 Alert Voted Alarm Status Previous Alarm Status 8 11 New Alarm Status 12 15 04 Danger Voted Alarm Status Previous Alarm Status 8 11 New Alarm Status 12 15 05 Special Relay Source Alarm Previous Alarm Status 8 11 New Alarm Status 12 15 Status Notes While the returned data is the same the trigger is different in each case Ameasurement alarm status event is triggered by a change in the upper 16 bits this can be considered pre alarm data A voted alarm status change is triggered by a change in the overall alarm state true or false The voted alarm status changes are categorized as OK Alert or Danger which is based on which alarm output they relate to encoded as bits 14 15 The special relay source alarm status is used where a dedicated module fail or inhibit active relay has been configured and reflects a change in status of this monitoring 326 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 117 Buffer Event Types CIP Objects Appendix B ID Name Bytes 8 15 Application 01 Trend Data Set Status Bytes 8 9 are previous Trend Buffer status bytes 10 11
471. sion The correlation between that revision and the product label is tabulated in the following table Hardware revision major minor sub minor Product label 6 3 A Table 243 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x01 X X Get_Attributes_ All Returns the contents of the specified attributes 0x05 X X Reset Invokes the reset service for the device Ox0E X X Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute Message Router Object The Message Router Object class code 0x02 provides a messaging connection point through which a client can address a service to any object class or instance residing in the physical device This object is part of the standard Hilscher netX100 EIP protocol stack No attributes are implemented and no services are supported Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 433 AppendixB CIP Objects Assembly Object 434 The Assembly Object class code 0x04 binds attributes of multiple objects which allows data to or from each object to be sent or received over one connection Assembly Objects can be used to bind input data or output data I O data connections are established between an Originator O and a Target T where in this case O is the controller and T is this module Output data is sent in the O T direction and Input data is sent in the T O direction The input data assembly the
472. ssing for each of the channels Table 123 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Channel Setup Class Instance 1 4 Instances 1 4 define the setup for channels 0 3 Table 124 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of Values ID Rule Type Attribute 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object Current revision revision 8 Get V Enabled Instances WORD Bit coding of enabled Decoding information instances Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 331 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 125 Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values Rule 1 Get V Enabled Status BOOL Definition of enabled status of channel 0 Disabled setup 1 Enabled Active 2 Get V Synchronous max RPM REAL Highest machine speed that the RPM synchronous configuration supports 3 Get V Synchronous Min RPM REAL Lowest machine speed that the RPM synchronous configuration supports Configuration Group Group of 9 configuration attributes 16 Get V LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL Low Pass Filter 3 dB corner frequency Hz definition Range 10 40000 17 Get V HP Filter 3 dB Point REAL High Pass Filter 3 dB corner frequency Hz definition this attribute is also the gSEHP Range 0 1 39000 Filter 3 dB 18 Get V Decimation INT Provides a control for spe
473. st 8 bytes See event specific definitions in behavior section Information 9 BYTE 10 BYTE Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 323 Appendix B 324 CIP Objects Table 114 Event Data eEVENT_LOG 11 BYTE 12 BYTE 13 BYTE 14 BYTE 15 BYTE Behavior Events that are stored in the log fall in to one of these types SYSTEM 0x01 ALARM 0x02 BUFFER 0x03 Each has a common header followed by 8 bytes that are specific to the type Many events such as startup are self explanatory change events and have no additional data that is provided in the event specific information bytes Change Events Change events are logged when there is a detected change in the status content and are not triggered directly by the actual state good or bad Table 115 System Event Types ID Name Description Bytes 8 15 Application 01 NetX start up The communication processor has reset No data byes are used restarted 02 Transitioned to Program Configuration activity is underway No data byes are used Mode 03 Configuration Count update A configuration activity has successfully Bytes 10 11 indicate the new completed count 04 Transitioned to Run mode Configuration activity is complete No data byes are used 05 Switch to Out Of Box An instruction to switch the Out of Box No data byes are used Configuration mode is being processed reset type
474. st response unconnected messages One service is used to both start and continue with a session The first request initiates the session and subsequent requests return values that are returned by the service When the packet count down value returned reaches 0 the session is completed The instance and attribute can be set to 1 but they are ignored The host sends the following CM Record Request Parameters as part of an 0x4C service request INT Specify the buffer to retrieve the data from eFFT 2 eT WF 3 or eTACHO 4 The BufferSelect does not change during a session RequestedCount UNIT Set RequestedCount 1 The RequestedCount does not change during a session SessionInstance USINT The SessionInstance is initially specified as 0 but on subsequent calls the SessionInstance returned in CM Record Response must be passed here ChannelSelect BYTE 4 bits indicating the source channel The ChannelSelect does not change during a session SpecialRequest BYTE 3 bits are used e Set SR_mAG_PHASE Bit 0 to request phase see PHASE DATA page 296 and magnitude data from an FFT buffer otherwise just magnitude data is returned e Set SR_LIVE Bit 1 to request force live data collection rather than receive the most recent data from the scheduled data acquisition e IMPORTANT Live data cannot be read concurrently by multiple users If a 2nd host requests live data while the module is still se
475. state Bus fail Bus fail use controlling held Output held at fault indication level OP3 Output 3 status Outputnotin Host Bus fail Output state Bus fail Bus fail use controlling held Output held at fault indication level 1 Host control ing means that the module is receiving level data for output from its host module 2 Output is being held due to bus halt Halt is where the expansion module is advised to temporarily extend its link timeout 240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Status Appendix A Relay Output Module Each status indicator represents the state of that particular channel or output Normal expected status indicator states for a healthy system are all solid green If the output is not enabled all associated status indicator are off If enabled Blue if the relay is inhibited or the link is halted output state being held Otherwise e Red when the relay contacts are in the alarm state e Green when the relay contacts are in the non alarm state The active color flashes for any channel with a detected relay drive fail and for all enabled channels during a link fault IMPORTANT The definition of what contact state red or green represents is a part of the expansion module configuration Table 57 RELX Status Indicators Status Descrip
476. state without an active class 1 connection 0x1004 Dynamic data requests and special service requests are not allowed while the module is in Program Mode while the module is being configured 0x1E Embedded service error The requested inter processor message exchange NetX to DSP and or to an auxiliary module failed to complete so the requested data cannot be returned 0x20 lt 0x1FFFFFFF Invalid parameter in one or more configuration groups Bits 0 to 28 represent groups 1 to 29 if a group is in error the appropriate bit is set to 0 cleared Example 0x1FFCFFFF Ox1FFFFFFF 0x1FFCFFFF 0x300000 As binary 11 0000 0000 0000 0000 So Groups 17 18 Table 278 CIP Engineering Unit List Engineering Units The module supports a subset of the standard and custom CIP Engineering unit lists appropriate to the selected Channel Application Type Value ID Index Name Description 0x1200 24 C Temperature measurement application types There is no conversion between temperature Rao J OF units separate application types apply to each 0x1202 23 K 0x1300 16 psi Dynamic pressure measurement application 0x1307 14 bar 0x1308 15 mbar 0x1309 19 Pa 0x130A 18 kPa 0x0C00 17 MPa 448 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 278 CIP Engineering Unit List CIP Objects Appendix B 0x1500 12 m s Vibration acceleration measurement
477. sure surface area ft2 The exterior surface of all six sides of an enclosure is calculated as follows A 2dw 2dh 2wh 144 Where d depth w width and h height are in inches The system components are designed for internal enclosure surrounding air temperatures of up to a maximum of 70 C 158 F measured 1 in below the main module based on natural convection cooling and specified air space clearances around the Dynamix 1444 series system Outcome of calculations can show that it is can be more efficient to provide a means of cooling rather than increase of cabinet size Contact your cabinet manufacturer for options available to cool your cabinet 34 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 All system components can measure and monitor internal operating temperatures a feature that is highly recommended to be used to control overall system operating temperature during normal use Module specifications indicate a maximum internal operating temperature reference for each module type Despite that the amount of maximum heat dissipation remains unchanged use of slightly assisted cooling also called unducted airflow have a considerable impact 5 10 C 9 18 F on internal operating temperatures of system components There is one configuration aspect that can reduce the dissipation load of each DYN module by about 0 8 W
478. t If communication are restored then normally the fault indication clears noting however if a configuration activity has failed then the fault indication remains set until a successful reconfiguration is completed Normally this reconfiguration is achieved by downloading the configuration from the controller to the appropriate main module Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 415 Appendix B 416 CIP Objects If the main module is not configured to expect a particular auxiliary module that module s status is always reported as zero This status applies equally to the status data obtained via an object attribute request and to the status data in the I O data exchange Object attribute requests for data such as Auxiliary module firmware revision only require that the auxiliary module is present and communicating Bit Description 8 Relay 0 Is Not Inhibited 9 Relay 1 Is Not Inhibited 10 Relay 2 Is Not Inhibited 11 Relay 3 Is Not Inhibited 12 Relay 0 Drive Error 13 Relay 1 Drive Error 14 Relay 2 Drive Error 15 Relay 3 Drive Error In the unlikely event the auxiliary module is found to be in Boot Loader mode not running operation firmware the main module sets the auxiliary module status to a special code Decimal 65 534 Hexadecimal OxFFFE Binary 11111111 11111110 Although the auxiliary module is responding it is in a non operational state and is classed as a failure from t
479. t Configuration STRUCT Multicast related 10 Get Set Select ACD BOOL Address Conflict Detection 11 Get Set Last Conflict Detected STRUCT Structure of 35 USINT Table 268 Common Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x01 X Get Attributes All Returns the contents of the specified attributes Ox0E x X Get Attribute Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute 0x10 x Set Attribute Single Sets the specified attribute Ethernet Link Object The Ethernet Link Object class code 0xF6 is part of the standard Hilscher netX100 EIP protocol stack Before ODVA testing this object is completed updated in line with the latest stack released by Hilscher The Ethernet Link Object maintains link specific counters and status information for an Ethernet communication interface A request to access instance 1 of the Ethernet Link Object refers to the instance associated with the communication interface over which the request was received Table 269 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Ethernet Link Class Instance 1 Instance representing port 1 2 Instance representing port 2 Table 270 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Semantics of ID Rule Attribute Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current revision of this Object Current revision 3 2 Get V maximum Instance UINT 2 3 Get V Numb
480. t Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Comp Differential Exp A Radial 195 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Comp Differential Exp B Radial 196 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 209 Chapter9 Operate the Module Measurement Type Sensor Type Default Sensor Power Default Bias Limits Name Index Low Limit High Limit Shaft Relative LH HP filtered 198 Eddy Current Probe 24V DC 25 mA 14 8 X shaft relative Filtered 77 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Y shaft relative Filtered 78 Eddy Current Probe 24 V DC 25 mA 14 8 Aero derivative AV to D 83 Integrating Accelerometer 24 V DC 4 mA 6 18 absolute vibration AV to V 87 Integrating Accelerometer 24V DC 4 mA 6 18 absolute vibration AV to D 88 Integrating Accelerometer 24 V DC 4 mA 6 18 Aero derivative AV to V 80 Integrating Accelerometer 24 V DC 4 mA 6 18 Dynamic Pressure 93 Pressure Transducer 24V DC 4 mA 1 1 DC Current 4 Proportional Signal off 1 1 DC Voltage 5 Proportional Signal off 1 1 AC Current 95 Proportional Signal off 1 1 AC Voltage 96 Proportional Signal off 1 1 absolute vibration V to V 89 Velocimeter off 6 18 absolute vibrations V to D 90 Velocimeter off 6 18 Bias levels assume the sensor is powered as shown If the sensor is not powered as shown then the observed bias level may be
481. t is scheduled or occurs unexpectedly is a long or short duration event or if the machine s acceleration deceleration is fast slow or varying Observing comparing and diagnosing the behavior of machines as their speed changes often provides unique insight into the condition of the machine that is impossible to obtain during its normal operating constant speed state When the speed ofa machine changes the dynamic forces that are applied to its bearings and structure change both in magnitude and in frequency Non dynamic forces also change thermal growth contraction as the machine heats up or cools down bearing loading as the machines load is increased or shed condenser vacuum pressure changes impart forces These and other start up coast down specific changes can help find otherwise unknown faults and conditions before the fault propagates The controls on this page are active only when at least one speed input is enabled See Speed Page on page 115 192 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Trend and Transient Capture Chapter 8 Buffers The dynamic measurement module implements transient data capture by the application of four configurable buffers where each buffer e Contains 640 discrete data records and 64 dynamic data records The structure content of the discrete data record is user defined and can contain any measured values such as speed 1x magnitude bias overall and many other
482. t main module level One instance is linked to each available tachometer channel Table 150 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Tacho and Speed Measurement Class Instance 1 Instance 1 represents measurement setup and data for tachometer input 0 and associated speeds 2 Instance 2 represents measurement setup and data for tachometer input 1 and associated speeds Table 151 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Attribute Semantics of Values ID Rule Type 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get Tacho Signal BYTE Tacho signal enable and OK Bits 0 1 indicate Status status tacho enabled status 1 enabled Bits 2 3 indicate tacho OK status 1 fault Table 152 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Attribute Semantics of ID Rule Type Values 1 Get V Speed REAL Speed that is based directly RPM on the tacho source equates to a fixed multiplier of 1 2 Get V Factored Speed REAL Processed speed output RPM based on a configured multiplier 3 Get V Speed max REAL maximum speed attribute RPM 1 RPM since power cylce or last reset of stored value 4 Get V Speed ROC REAL Rate of change of the RPM min attribute 1 speed output Basic Tacho Speed Configuration Group of 5 configuration attributes 16 Get V Tacho Source SINT Choice of source local Sele
483. t that is parallel to the center line IMPORTANT For single ramp applications the first channel of the pair channel 0 2 must be mounted facing the ramp while the second channel 1 3 must be mounted on the shaft Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 151 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Head to Head Axial Differential Expansion Head to Head also called Axial Differential Expansion is used when the sensors are aligned axially parallel with the shaft Figure 48 Head to Head Mode one target two targets 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Measurement Definition Chapter 3 The head to head mode enables the extended range operation by using two probes in a back to back arrangement that is shown in the illustration This mode can be used when the machine does not have enough space for larger diameter probes It is not necessary for the scales to be symmetrical in this mode and probes of different voltage sensitivities can be used IMPORTANT When using the head to head mode be aware of these facts For this mode the parameters for Normal Thrust Offset and Sense Control are also used In this mode one probe is active and one inactive This relates to the sense direction and must be configured such that if the gap for the probe that is configured for the active direction increases then the result becomes more positive When configuring
484. te bits are set Otherwise it is zero Read only to the user User Local Relay Control This allows selection from a number of faults that can also be considered Local Relay Control This is a bit wise logical AND of the Auto and User controls This is what is implemented and is read only to the user The objective being that more faults that the relay reacts to can be added above those implicit in the Voted Alarm selection or dedicate the relay only to the indication of certain selected faults Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 427 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 236 Relay Source Decoding Bit Description 0 OFF 1 13 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Output Type Alert 14 16 Reserved 17 29 Voted Alarm Instance 1 13 Output Type Danger 30 32 Reserved 33 45 Voted ALARM INSTANce 1 13 Output type TX OK Higher Values Reserved 126 Dedicated Bypass Active Relay 127 Dedicated Fault Relay Local Relay Control As the special functions 126 and 127 are not the result of Voted alarms there is no definition of type suggest fail safe is adopted for these Local Relay Control also includes a Latching bit to give a latching control to these special functions 0x00 defines the relay as disabled multiple sources not allowed 428 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Opto Output Source An index that allows for source selection
485. temOffset Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 439 AppendixB CIP Objects Table 256 Common Services Servi Implementation Instanc Service Name Description of Service Ci Class 0x03 X Get_Attributes_List 0x04 X Set_Attributes_List Ox0E x X Get_Attribute_Single Returns the contents of the specified attribute 0x10 X Set_Attribute_Single Sets the specified attribute Device Level Ring Object The Device Level Ring Object class code 0x47 is part of the standard Hilscher netX100 EIP protocol stack Before ODVA testing this object is completed updated in line with the latest stack released by Hilscher This object provides the mechanism to configure a network with ring topology according to the DLR Device Level Ring part of the EtherNet IP specification Table 257 Object Instances Instance Description ID 0 Class Instance of DLR Object 1 Active instance of DLR configuration instance Table 258 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Semantics of ID Rule Type Attribute Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Defines the current revision of Current revision the DLR Object Table 259 Instance Attributes Attribute Access Name Data Semantics of ID Rule Type Values 1 Get Network Topology USINT 0 Linear 1 Ring 2 Get Network Status USINT 0 Normal 1 Ring Fault 2 Unexpected loop dete
486. ter Signal Conditioner Expansion ModE A Gea ae S 212 1444 RELX00 04RB Relay Expansion Module 212 1444 AOFX00 04RB 4 20 mA Output Expansion Module 212 Module Outputy seri masrtur ean eTa E ett sleet woud 213 1444 DYN04 01RA Dynamic Measurement Module 213 1444 TSCX02 02RB Tachometer Signal Conditioner Expansion ModE Steck ods ells eet as ated cate ee Ue 2 213 1444 RELX00 04RB Relay Expansion Module 214 1444 AOFX00 04RB 4 20 mA Output Expansion Module 214 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Status CIP Objects Table of Contents SETVICES ear near reer EU EE AR A UR Dye prt arene TEL er 215 17O Messdse Formats ireanii veers ah ra anew eeyenanans 215 Input Assembly ou hue Natl ave lee okt eee ay kee acl 215 Ou utp t Assembly eke cots 3 Secreta eee teats 233 Cali bration rasne a a EE a Avda EEE RER 234 Appendix A Status Indicators san ene E E E a AE ante ee GA 235 Main Module Status Indicators ss 3 2v54ne5 Josieyeress ead 235 Ethernet Port Status Indicators cig oie tw wtetorsaiaiaeseants 237 Expansion Module Status Indicators eee ee eee ees 237 Tacho TSC Module vec seciuer ss esse Gy ica tord 238 4 20 mA Output Status Indicators 06 cee e eee ee eee 240 Relay QutputdMiodules 26 4 sc unl bctsth a aia Ae eel ewes 241 Appendix B Parameter Tag Object Attribute Cross reference 244 Engineering Units ENGUN
487. tern as the cutting tool is at rest moves forward engages cuts disengages retracts and then rests again In other cases the vibration response can vary normally based on the type of fluid being pumped or the type of metal being worked In all these cases and many more the controller can be programmed to serve appropriate alarm limits to the module as standard 1 0 This helps ensure the detection of any deviant behavior regardless of where the process is within the profile or what material is being processed Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure the 1444 Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 2 Internet Protocol Page The Internet Protocol page parameters provide controls for connecting the module to a network See ENET UM001 for more information Figure 37 The Internet Protocol Page a O 1444 DYN04 01RA Input Data Eoen 5 1444 Expansion Module 1444 TSCX02 02RB i 1444 RELX00 04RB Speed Alarms ee i ee Table 12 Internet Protocol Parameter Values Internet Protocol Settings Manually configure IP settings Obtain IP settings automatically using BOOTP Obtain IP settings automatically using DHCP IP settings set by switches on the module Physical Module IP Address N A Comments Type in an IP address for the system Domain Name N A Host Name N A Subnet Mask N A Gateway Address N A Primary DNS Server Address N A
488. tervalCfg STRUCT UINT NumberO0fPorts 1 ARRAY UINT PortNumber UINT PortLogAnnouncelnterval log base 2 seconds 15 Get Set NV PortLogSyncintervalCfg STRUCT UINT NumberO0fPorts ARRAY 438 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 255 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of ID Rule Values UINT PortNumber INT PortLogSynclnterval log base 2 seconds 18 Get Set NV Do mainNumber USINT 19 Get ClockType WORD 20 Get manufactureldentity USINT 4 21 Get ProductDescription STRUCT UDINT Size USINT size Description UTF 8 Unicode 22 Get RevisionData STRUCT UDINT Size USINT size Revision UTF 8 Unicode 23 Get UserDescription STRUCT UDINT Size USINT size Description UTF 8 Unicode 24 Get PortProfileldentitylnfo STRUCT UINT NumberO0fPorts ARRAY UINT PortNumber USINT 8 PortProfileldentity 25 Get PortPhysicalAddressInfo STRUCT UINT NumberO0fPorts ARRAY UINT PortNumber USINT 16 PhysicalProtocol UINT SizeOfAddress USINT 16 PortPhysicalAddress 26 Get PortProtocolAddressInf STRUCT UINT NumberO0fPorts ARRAY UINT PortNumber UINT NetworkProtocol E IP 1 UINT SizeOfAddress USINT 16 PortProtocolAddress 27 Get StepsRemoved UINT Local to Grandmaster 28 Get SystemTimeAndOffset STRUCT ULINT SystemTimeAero ULINT Sys
489. tes the delay could be several minutes Object Specific Services Table 90 Object Specific Services Service Implementation Service Name Description of Service Code Class Instance 0x4B X x Alarm Buffer Force the alarm data to be saved as if an alarm has Trigger occurred This save is intended to be used when an alarm or event external to the DMx M has occurred 0x4C X CM Record Specify the Record Request parameters defined in the Request following section Since the records can be large and the request can be for many records the Record Request usually has to be sent multiple times Data types consisting of multiple bytes are transferred in little endian format least significant byte first A data communication session starts at the first service request and ends after the final response of the exchange However the session is subjected to an inactivity timeout of 30 seconds Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 91 CM Record Request Parameters Byte Offset within Structure Structure Member CIP Objects Appendix B 0x4C CM Record Request CM data is retrieved using a series of request response unconnected messages One service is used to both start and continue with a session The first request initiates the session and subsequent requests return values that the service returns When the packet count down value returned reaches 0 the session is completed
490. th processing stops when a path destination unknown error is encountered 0x06 6 Partial transfer Only part of the expected data was transferred 0x07 7 Connection lost The messaging connection was lost 0x08 8 Service not supported The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object Class Instance 0x09 9 Invalid attribute value Invalid attribute data detected 0x0A 10 Attribute list error An attribute in the Get Attribute List or Set Attribute List response has a non zero status 0x0B 11 Already in requested The object is already in the mode state requested by the service mode state 0x0C 12 Object state conflict The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode state 0x0D 13 Object already exists The requested instance of object to be created already exists Ox0E 14 Attribute not settable A request to modify a non modifiable attribute was received OxOF 15 Privilege violation A permission privilege check failed 0x10 16 Device state conflict The device s current mode state prohibits the execution of the requested service 0x11 17 Reply data too large The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated response buffer 446 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 277 Generic CIP Status Codes CIP Objects Appendix B 0x12 18 Fragmentation of a primitive The s
491. the associated logical alarm status Class attributes and services allow for alarm history information Table 162 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Voted Alarm Class Instance 1 13 Voted Alarm object instances 1 13 Unused instances exist and are accessible but have a disabled state Table 163 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Description of Attribute Semantics of Values ID Rule Type 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 8 Get V Instances WORD Defines the enabled voted Bit coding 13 used alarm instances 9 Get V Common Alert BOOL Boolean status indicates the presence of at least one alert condition 10 Get V Common Danger BOOL Boolean status indicating presence of at least one danger condition 11 Get V Common TX Fail BOOL Boolean status indicates the presence of at least one TX Fail condition 12 Get V First Out Alarm STRUCT Record of first logical alarm event Time Stamp measurement output alarm status logged after reset of First Out alarm option 13 Get V Alarm History STRUCT Array of events Time Stamp measurement output alarm status representing last x number of entries A change in the alarm status triggers an entry 16 Get V Trip Inhibit BYTE Source definition for Trip Source selection Bypass Source Inhibit Bypass 17 Get V Alarm Reset BYTE Source definition for Reset Source selection Source functi
492. the final element of the 1444 series Alarm management System While the voted alarm can act as a virtual relay it cannot switch off power to a motor route power to a light or other annunciator or control a solenoid valve that can trip a turbine Also in applications that require SIL or API 670 compliance relays are the only approved interface between the monitor system and the emergency shutdown system or final actor when used to initiate a forced shutdown See Relay Page on page 165 for an overview on using relays in the 1444 series system 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Trend Page Chapter 8 Trend and Transient Capture Topic Page Trend Page 187 Transient Capture Page 192 This chapter explains trends and transient capture Page Overview The dynamic measurement module includes a trend buffer capability that captures a set of internal data records that are sampled at a defined periodicity and that span a defined amount of time The module also supports an Alarm Buffer a copy of the trend buffer with additional high resolution data at the trigger point which is saved and held upon a user defined trigger Discrete Data Z Ch0 Enable V Ch1 Enable V Ch2 Enable v Ch3 Enable Update Rate 60 0 Data Set Definition FFT Band 0 Channel 0 FFT Band 0 Channel 1 FFT Band 0 Channel 2 FFT Band 0 Channel 3 FFT Band 1 Channel 0 FFT Band 1 Chan
493. the measurement to output zero when in a central position use the individual offsets rather than the Axial Offset to zero the two probes This gives the final result a zero value If that has to be something other than zero the overall offset control Axial Offset can then be used to adjust that In general for any thrust measurement single or dual channel the offset control is a site configuration item in the sense that it cannot normally be determined in advance When having a dual channel differential expansion measurement configured verify that and the measurement pair results you can access the individual channel DC results configured in the 1 0 data or accessed directly via the DC measurement object Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 153 Chapter 3 Measurement Definition 154 Eccentricity Used in monitoring steam turbines Eccentricity is a measurement of the amount of sag or bow in a rotor It can also provide indication of a bent shaft This measurement is used by the operator during startup to indicate when the machine can safely be brought up to speed without causing rubs or damage to the seals Steam turbine rotors are long shafts supported at the ends with heavy loads in between So when shut down cold and not rotating the weight of the rotor causes the shaft to bow over time If the machine is then brought to speed the imbalance that is caused by the bow could da
494. the total buffer length 16 64 records Static Data Source A group of four DWORDs where each bit indicates whether that measurement is included or not 48 Get V DWORD 0 DWORD Range 0 4294967295 49 Get V DWORD 1 DWORD Range 0 4294967295 50 Get V DWORD 2 DWORD Range 0 4294967295 51 Get V DWORD 3 DWORD DWORD 3 is only partially Range 0 1023 populated with measurements hence the lower range 300 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Semantics Table 87 Alarm Data Set Status Bits Description 0 3 Low Resolution Overall Buffer 4 7 High Resolution Overall Buffer 8 11 FFT Dynamic Data 12 15 TWF Dynamic Data Within each section Value Description 0x00 AB_STATUS_DISABLED buffer data type not being captured 0x01 AB_STATUS_ARMED waiting for alarm event trigger 0x02 AB_STATUS_POPULATING alarm event in progress 0x03 AB_STATUS_DATA_READY alarm data available 0x04 AB_STATUS_LATCHED as 0x03 but data is latched until reset Example 0x4444 is all buffers have latched alarm data available Trend Data Set Enable Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Type Overall Dynamic Channel 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 Alarm Data Storage Trigger Source Bits Description 0 OFF 1 13 Voted alarm instance 1 13 output type Alert 14 Any Alert 15 16 Reserved 17 29 Voted alarm instance
495. the user with an FFT whose Fmax is lower than what is implied or attainable by the SRD e Permit internal sample transfer for CM data purposes such transfers cannot support the 40 kHz bandwidth e Reduce the sample rate into an HP filter where the difference between the filter 3 dB and the sample rate is a large ratio The latter is not considered likely to be necessary unless the ratio of sample rate to HP filter cutoff frequency significantly exceeds 3000 On a 5 kHz measurement bandwidth SRD 9 that would equate to an HP filter cutoff lower than 3 Hz In all cases decimation requires prior LP filtering of the samples to avoid aliasing Dependent on the application path filtering can be by 24 or 48 dB octave filters To avoid the possibility of aliasing it is recommended that the following maximum filter cutoff settings are imposed 24 dB LP followed by an HP 0 25 x the decimated sample rate 48 dB LP alternate path only 0 36 x the decimated sample rate 60 dB Aero derivative mode only 0 385 x the decimated sample rate Synchronous resampling also requires anti alias protection and this protection is provided by a 48 dB LP filter The difference between this and asynchronous decimation by a 48 dB LP filter is that in the synchronous case the filter 3 dB point is continually and automatically adjusted according to the machine speed FFT Data Filter SR_FILTER When FFT data is requested that relies on a sign
496. tion 40 Get Relay 0 Relay Control BYTE Actual behavior of relay in case of Relay control detected fault condition 41 Get Relay 1 Relay Control BYTE Actual behavior of relay in case of Relay control detected fault condition 42 Get Relay 2 Relay Control BYTE Actual behavior of relay in case of Relay control detected fault condition 43 Get Relay 3 Relay Control BYTE Actual behavior of relay in case of Relay control detected fault condition NV status relates to nonvolatile storage in the auxiliary module not the main module 414 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Semantics Relay Module Status Each Auxiliary Relay module reports its status as part of the normal exchanges with the main module The bit assignments are as follows Table 223 Relay Module Status Bit Description 0 Auxiliary Module Not Responding 1 Auxiliary Module Configured 2 MSP Code CRC Fault 3 MSP High Temperature 4 Link Fail 5 Halt Active 6 MSP RAM Fault 7 MSP RAM Access Error Bits 0 7 are common to all types of auxiliary module bits 8 15 are specific to type The auxiliary module controls Bits 15 the main module sets bit 0 If bit 0 is set the remaining bits do not reflect the current auxiliary module status If communication with an auxiliary module are lost then the main module sets a status bit to indicate an auxiliary bus faul
497. tion e API and SIL2 High Demand How often the test is performed is dependent on the level of the compliance requirement with higher compliance levels requiring more frequent testing can be read from the module See the Dynamix Relay Module Object in the i ATTENTION The specific frequency of the testing for the configured application Object Library documentation for further information Failure of a routine drive circuit test constitutes a module fault condition for expansion module Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Configure Relays Chapter 6 Double pole Double throw DPDT Relay Solutions All 1444 Series module and expansion module relays are identical single pole double throw SPDT type as in Figure 49 When a double pole double throw DPDT relay is required it is possible to combine two SPDTs to act as a DPDT Figure 49 Single Pole and Double Throw Relays A B A2Bz2 l f Mtd Ci G32 Single Pole Double Throw SPDT Relay Double Pole Double Throw DPDT Relay Each single pole double throw relay includes one input pin common and individual pin connections for the relay s normally open and normally closed positions Each double pole double throw relay includes two common pins connections and for each independent connections for the poles normally open and normally closed positions The 1444 series supports DPDT relay solutions by use of two identically configure
498. tion 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Configuration Group 2 Group 2 contains configuration attributes from these objects e Channel setup Object 0x38F e Module Control Object 0x39E e Tacho and Speed Measurement Object 0x395 e TSC Module Object 0x394 Table 68 Configuration Group 2 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type Ox38F 1 16 LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 17 HP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 18 Decimation INT 19 SRD SINT 20 Alternate Path enable SINT 21 Synchronous Tacho Source SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x38F 1 22 Synchronous samples per revolution INT 23 Alternate Path Decimation INT 24 Alternate LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 0x38F 2 16 LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 17 HP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 18 Decimation INT 19 SRD SINT 20 Alternate Path enable SINT 21 Synchronous Tacho Source SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x38F 2 22 Synchronous samples per revolution INT 23 Alternate Path Decimation INT 24 Alternate LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL Ox38F 3 16 LP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 17 HP Filter 3 dB Point REAL 18 Decimation INT 19 SRD SINT 20 Alternate Path enable SINT 21 Synchronous Tacho Source SINT Pad SINT Pad INT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 261 Appendix B Table 68 Configuration Group 2
499. tion 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 277 Appendix B CIP Objects Table 73 Configuration Group 18 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x397 9 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 0x397 9 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 9 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 41 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 0x397 9 42 Lower Speed Threshold REAL 43 Higher Speed Threshold REAL 48 Logic gating source WORD 49 Logic gating sense USINT 56 Logic Control source WORD 0x397 10 16 Alarm Usage BYTE 18 Alarm Behavior SINT 19 Alarm Type SINT 24 Alarm Logic Configuration SINT 25 Alarm Input 0 SINT 26 Alarm Input 1 SINT 27 Alarm Input 2 SINT 28 Alarm Input 3 SINT 32 Alarm Multiplier Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x397 10 33 Alarm Multiplier ON Time DINT 40 Speed Gating Control SINT 4 Speed Gating Detection SINT Pad INT 278 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 73 Configuration Group 18 Source Object Source I
500. tion OFF Green Blue Red Red Green Blue Indicator Green Solid Flashing Solid Flashing Solid Flashing Flashing Flashing off off off PWR Power status 5V power not 5VpowerOK OK LNS Local network Relay module Configured Configured status not and bus OK and bus NOT configured OK MS Module status Processor Processor Processor Processor activity OK warning critical error critical error RO Relay 0 status Relay Relay notin Bus or rela Relay state Bus or relay Relay in Bus or rela a a disabled alarm drive fail held drive fail alarm drive fail R1 Relay 1 status Relay Relay notin Bus or rela Relay state Bus or relay Relay in Bus or rela z disabled alarm drive fail held drive fail alarm drive fail R2 Relay 2 status Relay Relay notin Bus or rela Relay state Bus or relay Relay in Bus or rela zi Ez disabled alarm drive fail held drive fail alarm drive fail R3 Relay 3 status Relay Relay notin Bus or rela Relay state Bus or relay Relay in Bus or rela rj E disabled alarm drive fail held drive fail alarm drive fail 1 Relay is held when inhibited or bus halt Halt is where the auxiliary module is advised to temporarily extend its link timeout 2 ANY color flashing indicates Bus or Relay drive fail Bus fail is indicated similarly on all enabled channels 3 Relay in Alarm means that the Voted Alarm that is associated with the relay is in the alarm state
501. tionality allowed and the configuration implemented It is recommended that the desired unit entries be modeled using the AOP first to help ensure that the desired unit is allowed given the specific configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 251 AppendixB CIP Objects The dynamix configuration manager object class code 0x38A defines the personality of the module that is based on the selected module type and channel application types It also provides the means by which a complete configuration is downloaded to the module Dynamix Configuration Manager Object Table 60 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule NV Name Description of Attribute 1 Get NV Revision Defines revision of Dynamix Configuration Manager Object 8 Get NV Template Revision 9 Get Set NV Configuration Group 1 See structure definition 10 Get Set NV Configuration Group 2 See structure definition 11 Get Set NV Configuration Group 3 See structure definition 12 Get Set NV Configuration Group 4 See structure definition 13 Get Set NV Configuration Group 5 See structure definition 14 Get Set NV Configuration Group 6 See structure definition 15 Get Set NV Configuration Group 7 See structure definition 16 Get Set NV Configuration Group 8 See structure definition 17 Get Set NV Configuration Group 9 See structure definition 18 Get Set NV Configuration Group 10 S
502. tioned buffer outputs 214 raw buffer outputs 213 TCP IP Object CIP objects 443 Terminal base configuration 47 Time Slot Multiplier Page 112 Time Sync Object CIP objects 438 Time Sync Page 104 Tracking Filter Object CIP objects 347 Tracking Filters 128 Transducer Object CIP objects 328 Transient Capture Page 192 Transient Data Manager Object CIP objects 311 Transient Manager Object CIP objects 311 Trend Page 187 troubleshooting 235 TSC Module Object CIP objects 352 V Voted Alarm Object CIP objects 370 Voted Alarms Page 179 Ww Wiring Overview 50 Wiring Main Module 51 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs You can also visit our Support Center at https rockwellautomation custhelp com for software updates support chats and forums technical information FAQs and to sign up for product notification updates In addition we offer multiple support programs for installation configuration and troubleshooting For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com services online phone Installation Assistance If you exper
503. to use in the averaging e 178 Averaging is exponential This means that once the module has acquired the specified number of samples then the averaged sample result is available after each subsequent update Average TWF Enable checked Select the checkbox to perform in the average time domain on the TWFs The module can average time waveforms Disabled not checked only if they are synchronously sampled This requires that you set the Signal Source above to Alternate Path and 136 that you set the Alternate Path Processing Mode to Synchronous Clear the checkbox to average the FFTs instead of the TWFs Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 26 gSE Parameter High Pass Filter Frequency Values Select from e 200Hz e 500Hz e 1000 Hz e 2000Hz e 5000 Hz Measurement Definition Chapter 3 In addition to standard displacement velocity and acceleration measurements the dynamic measurement module is also capable of Spike Energy measurement Overall Measurement High Pass Filter 5000 y Speed Reference So 1 FFT Measurement Number of Spectrum 800 v FFT Window Hanning X Number of Averages 1 Comment Select the 3 dB point for the gSE measurements High Pass filter The high pass filter is useful in removing low frequency signal components that can otherwise dominate the signal The high pass filter attenuates signals at frequencies belo
504. tomation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 34 Voted Alarms Parameter Name Set Point Multiplier Trigger Delay Values 0 000 65 500 seconds Configure Alarms Chapter 7 Comments The time that the alarm threshold multiplier is applied after the control is toggled The SPM control either a physical switch or the specified bit on controller output starts or restarts the TIMER each time the control toggles A toggle occurs when the state changes such as when the control changes from OFF UNSET to ON SET or ON SET to OFF UNSET Gating Speed Reference Select from e Off Speed 0 e Speed 1 Factored Speed 0 Factored Speed 1 Speed 0 1 is presented only if defined and Factored Speed 0 1 is presented only if the factor value is gt 0 see Speed page Select the speed source to use as the reference in speed gating of this Voted Alarm Gating Speed Condition Select from e Greater Than High Speed Less than Low Speed Inside Window e Outside Window Select the condition to apply in the speed gating logic Gating Speed High Limit gt 0 The high speed threshold Gating Speed Low Limit gt 0 The low speed threshold Must be less than the High Speed limit 1 0 Gating Gate Control Select Gate Control 0 or Gate Control 1 1 0 gating enables a control input to be used to manage enabling control set and disabling contr
505. tor interfaces is further protected once the main modules are installed The following configuration settings must be made or validated on the terminal bases before installation of the designated modules Configure the Main Terminal Base The module terminal base provides three decimal coding switches used to define the last octet of the TCP IP address of the module The IP address of the main module is composed of four suboctets that are separated by dots to conform to the IPv4 structure Each suboctet can be configured with a number from 1 to 254 As shipped from the factory the default IP address of a module is aaa bbb ccc ddd These switches can be used for automatic configuration or definition of the last octet of a static Class C IP address Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 47 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System These settings from left to right are on the bottom e 000 Automatic address assignment default e 001 254 Static IP address setting for example 192 168 1 xxx e 255 887 889 999 Invalid address If set to any of these values the module powers up in Module Fault e 888 Reset When set after power up the module immediately executes an out of box reset See Resetting the Module on page 197 for further information The rotary switches can be adjusted by using a small flathead screwdriver Configure the Relay Terminal Base The two pole
506. tor specifications which can include various post processing tasks including FFT analysis Table 195 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Advanced CM Data Class Instance 1 4 Instances 1 4 support advanced CM data for measurement channels 0 3 Table 196 Class Attributes Attribute Access NV Name DataType Description of Attribute Semantics of ID Rule Values 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision Table 197 Instance Attributes Attribute Access NV Name Data Type Description Semantics of Values ID Rule of Attribute TWF and Common Parameters Group of 4 configuration attributes 16 Get V Source Selection SINT Defines the Source selection data source for options both TWF and FFT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 197 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B 17 Get V Measurement Units ENGUNITS Setthe Engineering units measurement options units that are based on selected data source 18 Get V Associated Tacho Source SINT Tacho source For tacho events selection 19 Get V Waveform Record Length SINT Not used Attribute Semantics Source Selection The Advanced CM data can be read from the alternate processing path 4 or from a choice of locations on the main signal processing path Table 198 Source Selection Index Description Oor1 Pre Filte
507. tput expansion module and interaction of this expansion module with main module Table 227 Object Instances Instance ID Description 0 Current Output Module Class Instance 1 Instance 1 Current Output 0 2 Instance 2 Current Output 1 3 Instance 3 Current Output 2 4 Instance 4 Current Output 3 Table 228 Class Attributes Attribute ID pata NV Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values ule 1 Get NV Revision UINT Current object revision Current revision 11 Get NV Firmware Revision STRUCT Retrieves Firmware Revision of Firmware Revision information the current output module 11 Get NV Major Version USINT 11 Get NV Minor Version USINT 12 Get V Expansion Module Status WORD Coded information on TSC Analog Output Module Analog Output Module operational status 13 Get NV Serial Number UDINT 14 Get NV Product Name SHORT_STRING 1444 AOFX 00 04RB 15 Get V Current Module Control BYTE Configuration of generic current Set to zero output module behavior in case Use only instance attribute 24 of detected fault condition configurable per output channel 16 Get NV Auxiliary Link Time Out UINT Link timeout Fixed at 1000 ms 1s 420 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 229 Instance Attributes CIP Objects Appendix B NV status relates to nonvolatile storage in the auxiliary module not the main module
508. ts Number of Averages Select from 1 ee o o o o o o N w Select the number of averages for the FFT that is used in FFT Band measurements e When averaging the individual FFT s are updated as quickly as possible How fast this occurs is dependent on the overall processing demands on the module which is a function of the module configuration and to some degree the circumstance of the moment This along with the fact that the waveforms are always captured without respect to an overlap requirement so always max overlap makes it impossible to define precisely how long in time it takes to acquire any specific number of samples that are used in the averaging Averaging is Exponential This means that once the specified number of samples has been acquired that the averaged sample result is available for FFT Bands to be calculated upon each subsequent update Band 0 7 Enable Enable checked Check the box if the FFT Band 0 7 is calculated from this channel Disabled not checked The module object lets you define any of the 32 total bands to any channel So the Channel Source attribute specifies to the module on which channel this band processes from or 128 if unused disabled The AOP however simply applies eight bands per channel and automatically associates when Enabled the bands to their respective channels Band0 7 Measurement Select from Select the type of measurement to be provided
509. ts 1585 BRO01B EN P Industrial Ethernet Media and ENET RM002C EN P Ethernet design considerations for information on selecting appropriate Ethernet media for your application Recommended Cables Only straight connectors are recommended for use with the 1444 products Verify that the temperature rating of the selected cable is appropriate to the environment in which the 1444 product is installed up to and including 70 C 158 F Compatible Sensors The following types of sensors that can be connected toa DYN module e 2 wire piezoelectric acceleration sensor e 3 wire piezoelectric acceleration sensor with temperature sensing e 2 wire piezoelectric dynamic pressure sensor e 2 wire piezoelectric velocity sensors e 2 wire self generating velocity sensors e 3 wire piezoelectric acceleration sensor e 3 wire eddy current probe ECP systems e Buffered voltage outputs e Process proportional voltage signals such as temperature pressure and flow There is a transducer supply available for each channel that can be independently enabled and configured negative or positive operation 25 mA at 24V or asa positive constant current source at 4 mA 24V The transducer power supply output is made available at a separate terminal so that by appropriate wiring it is possible to connect either two or three wire transducers Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 System Components About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic
510. ublication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 Figure 11 Typical Wiring for Redundant Power Solutions to Multiple Modules Supply 0 Supply 1 24VDC 24VDC Power Power Supply Supply lo POUGGME GE b eo En ol E COORGRRRE DEG eee GOOG GDOOGROGGEGEG o ees E f ee 000000000 00000 AMIN O KO Of Sag orem al am a O ese fs onan omnes an Ser eee ol o CLE CEO I O Buffered Output Override The Buffered Output Override connections pins 57 and 58 on the 1444 TB A terminal base are used to enable disable the buffered outputs 58 57 OVR OVR The buffered outputs are enabled powered when no connection is present between pins 57 and 58 The buffered outputs are disabled not powered when a connection is present between pins 57 and 58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 55 Chapter 1 56 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System In applications where the buffered outputs are infrequently used a switch can be installed between pins 57 and 58 When installed opening the switch enables the buffered outputs and closing the switch disables the outputs It is possible to use a common switch to manage the buffered outputs of multiple modules as the override pins are Opto isolated from the module circuitry When a common switch is required wire one c
511. uld output also displayed on the page below the decimations selection The menus do not provide selections for every 255 possible decimation values Rather the menus present only selected decimated values that represent relatively uniform rounded increments from 25 Hz to the ADC FMAX Table 19 Decimation Menu Selections SRD 1 4 Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu Dec FMAX Menu SRD 1 SRD 2 SRD 3 SRD 4 Dec lt 5 is not allowed 1 18311 18300 1 12207 12200 1 9155 9200 5 3662 3700 2 4578 4600 2 3052 3100 2 2289 2300 6 3052 3100 3 3052 3100 3 2035 2000 3 1526 1500 9 2035 2000 4 2289 2300 4 1526 1500 4 1144 1100 12 1526 1500 5 1831 1800 5 1221 1200 5 916 900 13 1409 1400 6 1526 1500 6 1017 1000 6 763 800 14 1308 1300 7 1308 1300 7 872 900 7 654 700 15 1221 1200 8 1144 1100 8 763 800 9 509 500 16 1144 1100 9 1017 1000 10 610 600 11 416 400 18 1017 1000 10 916 900 12 509 500 15 305 300 20 916 900 11 832 800 15 407 400 22 208 200 22 832 800 13 704 700 20 305 300 30 153 150 26 704 700 15 610 600 30 203 200 46 100 100 30 610 600 18 509 500 40 153 150 61 75 75 36 509 500 22 416 400 61 100 100 91 50 50 45 407 400 30 305 300 81 75 75 180 25 25 61 300 300 45 203 200 121 50 50 91 201 200 61 150 150 240 25 25 122 150 150 92 100 100 183 100 100 122 75 75 243 75 75 182 50 50 Table 20 Decimation
512. up each module performs an initial Self test Until a configuration is downloaded and an Ethernet connection made after the Self test cycle the modules move to an idle state Table 5 describes the status indicators Table 5 Dynamic Measurement Module Status Color Behavior Status Color Behavior Indicator Indicato r PWR Green Solid DSP Green Flashing RUN Green Flashing OK Green Solid MS Green Solid CHO Green Solid NS Green Solid or Flashing CH1 Green Solid CH2 Green Solid os Green Solid CH3 Green Solid RLY Green Solid If the Status Indicators are not as shown above see Table 54 on page 236 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 85 Chapter 1 86 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Expansion Module Startup Behavior During power up expansion Module Status Indicators provide the address setting of the module See Startup Behavior on page 242 for more information Table 6 Tacho Signal Conditioner Expansion Module Status Indicator Color Behavior Status Indicator Color Behavior PWR Green Solid CHO Green or Solid Blue LNS Green Solid CH1 Green or Solid Blue MS Green Flashing OPO Green Solid OP1 Green Solid If the Status Indicators are not as shown above see Table on page 239 Table 7 Relay Expansion Module Status Color Behavior Status Color Behavior Indicator In
513. uration Group 19 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x39D 0 15 Current Module Control BYTE Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39D 0 16 Auxiliary Link time out UINT 0x39D 1 16 Current Output Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x39D 1 17 Current Output Measurement INT Identifier 0x39D 1 19 20 mA Output scaling REAL 0x39D 1 20 4 mA Output scaling REAL 0x39D 1 24 Current Output Not OK SINT Configuration Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39D 2 16 Current Output Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x39D 2 17 Current Output Measurement INT Identifier 0x39D 2 19 20 mA Output scaling REAL 0x39D 2 20 4 mA Output scaling REAL 0x39D 2 24 Current Output Not OK SINT Configuration Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39D 3 16 Current Output Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x39D 3 17 Current Output Measurement INT Identifier 0x39D 3 19 20 mA Output scaling REAL 0x39D 3 20 4 mA Output scaling REAL 0x39D 3 24 Current Output Not OK SINT Configuration Pad SINT Pad INT 0x39D 4 16 Current Output Enable SINT Pad SINT 0x39D 4 17 Current Output Measurement INT Identifier 0x39D 4 19 20 mA Output scaling REAL 0x39D 4 20 4 mA Output scaling REAL 0x39D 4 24 Current Output Not OK SINT Configuration 282 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Table 74 Configuration Group 19 CIP Objects Appendix B
514. uration attributes 16 Get V Alarm Enable SINT Boolean function 0 Not enabled indicating ifthe alarmis 1 Enabled enabled and defined 17 Get V Alarm INT Defines source of Source selection Measurement measurement alarm Identifier 18 Get V Alarm Name SINT 32 Aname to identify this 32 characters alarm instance 19 Get V Alarm Form SINT Defines form of alarm Alarm form option 20 Get V Alarm Type SINT Defines behavior Alarm type options regarding TX OK state 21 Get V Alarm Processing SINT Defines alarm processing Alarm processing Mode mode to be Normal options Adaptive or Profile Alarm Thresholds Group of 8 configuration attributes 24 Get V Low Alert REAL Defines low alert Range Threshold threshold limit that is 49000 48000 used for Under Threshold and Window alarm types 25 Get V High Alert REAL Defines high alert Range Threshold threshold limit that is 48000 49000 used for Over Threshold and Window alarm types 26 Get V Low Danger REAL Defines low danger Range 50000 Threshold threshold limit that is 49000 used for Under Threshold and Window alarm types 27 Get V High Danger REAL Defines high danger Range Threshold threshold limit that is 49000 50000 used for Over Threshold and Window alarm types 32 Get V Hysteresis SINT The amount on the safe Range 0 20 side of a threshold by which the value must recover to clear the alarm 33 Get V Delay Sustain DINT Duration that a Indivi
515. urce is set to the Alternate path and is configured for synchronous sample generation Refer also the Channel Set up Object FFT Averaging is only a valid selection when FFT is enabled If the FFT Waveform Waveform Averaging and FFT Averaging bits are all set Waveform Averaging is not performed while the other selections are performed It is possible to specify both FFT and Waveform for a channel Waveform Waveform Averaging and FFT is also a valid combination FFT Waveform and FFT Averaging is also a valid combination Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 399 AppendixB CIP Objects The Dynamix 1444 return the following as part of an 0x4B service response Table 205 0x4B Service Responses Byte Offset within Structure Member Data Type Description Structure 0 Processing Time FLOAT Anticipated time for the requested CM data processing to be completed seconds For queued requests multi session processing time also includes anticipated wait time In extreme cases the module is not able to calculate an accurate processing time as the estimate doesn t include any allowance for the acquisition time for additional samples that are needed This is because in most circumstances the internal sample buffers are sufficient to service the demand However when a long TWF say 65536 samples with two or more averages is requested the internal circular buffer is used completely and additi
516. ure provides an overview of the locations of the connectors that are associated with the significant function of each module Figure 7 General Module Buffer Outputs Digital Buffered Outputs diuin Transducer i Inputs 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Wiring the Main Module Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Chapter 1 An installed system has four removable 16 way terminal connectors two interfacing directly to the removable module and two to the terminal base The base and module mounted headers are able to accept either a screw or spring terminal connector Figure 8 Main Module Connectors Upper Module Connector Ethernet Port 2 Ethernet Port 1 Status Status Indicators Allen Bradley 1444 DYN04 01RA Dynamic Measurement BNC Buffered Outputs 0 3 Lower Module HO Connector ake Lower Base ET Connector Allocations to the base or module are broadly based on the following functional requirements e Wide ranging 24V DC power connections are direct to the base so that they are unaffected by module removal e Main signal inputs outputs and relay connections are direct to the module to minimize connection length and number of int
517. ust force a machine shutdown In this case the voted alarm logic is defined such that both measurements must be in Danger before a shutdown relay actuation is executed On steam turbines thrust position measurements are taken within approximately 30 cm 12 in of the thrust bearing monitoring the thrust collars movement between the active and inactive thrust shoes and their subsequent wear The rotors thermal expansion and an increase in the required dynamic measurement range affect measurements that are taken outside of the thrust bearing area greater than 30cm Configuring Thrust Measurements IMPORTANT Ifyou are updating from a Firmware Revision 1 system to Revision 2 system refer to Updating Thrust Measurements later in this section Before we can configure the module for thrust measurement we must understand the relationship between the position of the rotor the thrust bearings and probe locations The thrust bearing consists of two sets of thrust pads the Active pads and the inactive pads the rotor thrust collar runs against the Active pads during normal operation There is clearance between the two sets of pads and knowing this clearance amount is fundamental to configuring the thrust set up Under ambient conditions with the machine stopped this clearance or float is referred to as the Cold Float and can be anywhere between 0 15mm and 0 5mm 6mils to 20mils When the machine is running at normal temperature an
518. ut with a maximum T WF size of 2048 points and a maximum FFT size of 800 lines Sampling During a Transient Event During a transient event while the reference speed remains between the low and high speed thresholds the executing buffer updates at prescribed delta RPM and delta time triggers In the case of start ups delta RPM updates trigger only in the increasing speed direction while for coast downs delta RPM updates trigger in either increasing or decreasing speed directions Independent delta RPM and delta time triggers can be defined for startup and coast down If the delta RPM is set to 0 then no samples are taken on speed change The delta RPM triggers can be set from 1 1000 RPM or 0 if disabled and the delta time triggers from 1 65 535 seconds about 18 hours A discrete data record is saved on each trigger A dynamic data record is captured on every tenth 10 trigger considering both delta RPM and delta TIME triggers The module evaluates speed at 96 millisecond intervals Consequently measurements may not be captured at precisely the specified delta RPM Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Trend and Transient Capture Chapter 8 Concluding a Transient Event A start up transient concludes when the referenced speed crosses above the high speed threshold If during the startup the speed falls below the low threshold then the transient is suspended so sampling stops A coast
519. veform Record Length SINT Pad INT 284 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Table 74 Configuration Group 19 Source Object Source Instance Source Attribute ID Name Data Type 0x39A 4 16 Source Selection SINT Pad SINT 0x39A 4 17 Measurement Units ENGUNITS 0x39A 4 18 Associated Tacho Source SINT 0x39A 4 19 Waveform Record Length SINT Pad INT 0x399 1 16 Channel Source SINT 0x399 1 7 Data Source SINT 0x399 1 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 0x399 1 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 0x399 1 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 0x399 1 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 0x399 1 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 2 16 Channel Source SINT 0x399 2 17 Data Source SINT 0x399 2 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 0x399 2 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 0x399 2 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 0x399 2 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 0x399 2 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT Pad INT 0x399 3 16 Channel Source SINT 0x399 3 17 Data Source SINT 0x399 3 18 Source of band frequency limits SINT 0x399 3 23 Tacho source for band limits SINT 0x399 3 19 Start frequency Orders Hz REAL 0x399 3 20 Stop frequency Orders Hz REAL 0x399 3 24 FFT Band magnitude Type SINT Pad SINT
520. w a defined frequency and passes signals at frequencies above the defined frequency The frequency that is selected is the 3 dB point of the filter Speed Reference Speed Reference 0 or 1 Select the Speed Reference that is associated with the gSE TWF s gSE FFT s processed from this channel The Speed Reference is not used in the module It is provided for reference by higher level software systems that can need to associate an RPM to the measurement Maximum Frequency Select from 100 e 200 400 800 1600 Select the number of lines of resolution to be provided in the FFT Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 137 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Table 26 gSE Parameter Values Comment Number of Spectrum Lines Select from Select the number of lines of resolution to be provided in the FFT e 100 e 200 400 800 1600 FFT Window Type Select from Select the window function to apply in the FFT signal processing e Rectangular FFT Windows Purpose gt Flat top FFT Windows are applied to address the problem of signals that occur at frequencies that are not centered within Hanning a frequency bin In these cases energy from the signal can be dispersed among adjacent bins such that the Hamming amplitude of neither bin represents the actual magnitude of the signal For example If no window is applied the Rectangular Window If the frequency of a signal
521. wer than 45 kHz and possibly lower than the specified Fmax This is to assure the measurement is alias free Inall cases the available bandwidth Fmax is the sample rate 2 56 the customary value However the factor necessary to assure alias free data within the FFT varies If decimation is performed only in hardware via the Sample Rate Divider SRD then the factor is 2 048 so it is above the Fmax of the FFT But if decimation is performed in the firmware then a more conservative factor is necessary and is then dependent on the quality of the Low Pass Filter being applied In this case if the standard 24 dB octave filter is used then a factor of 4 0 must be applied But if the 60 dB octave filter of the Aeroderivative Channel Type is applied then the factor is 2 60 The Default LPF Corner presented is the maximum value applying the selected decimation and the appropriate factor as discussed above 119 Chapter3 Measurement Definition Table 17 Filters Parameter High Pass Filter Primary Frequency Values 0 1 1000 Hz Comments Enter the frequency where the filter has attenuated the signal by 3 dB Frequencies lower than this are attenuated 24 dB octave 60 dB octave if the Channel Measurement Type is Aeroderivative The HPF is not available when the Channel Measurement Type is set to X shaft relative or Y shaft relative For Channel Measurement Types that specify integration it is performed
522. within each subsequent packet If this procedure is followed the packet arrangement within the file would be as follows e RecordRequest Packet e RecordResponse Packet with first packet payload at the end Second Response Packet payload Subsequent Response Packet payloads e Last Response Packet payload Instigate further sessions to retrieve data from any other required buffers or channels Retrieving any record from the file can then be accomplished as follows 1 Open the file 2 Read a record with size of Normal CM Record Request from the head of the file 3 Access the BufferSelect variable to determine the type of record the file holds 4 Read a record with size Normal CM Record Response from the file pointer 5 Access the RecordSize variable to determine the size of the record 6 Starting at the address of the first Record in the Data Array in the first Normal CM Record Response index to any record by using the RecordSize to seek to the correct point in the file 7 Then read out the record of size RecordSize Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 391 AppendixB CIP Objects Dynamix FFT Band Object The FFT Band Object class code 0x399 defines the setup and holds the results for spectral bands that are calculated from Onboard FFT measurements The FFT bands object provides a total 32 instances an average of 8 per channel for a 4 channel protection module The ability to sel
523. within the FFT Available FFT Windows Rectangular Description No window is applied Other Terms Normal Uniform Performance Gives poor peak amplitude accuracy good peak frequency accuracy Usage Use this only for transient signals that die out before the end of the time sample or for exactly periodic signals within the time sample such as integer order frequencies in synchronously sampled data Flat Top Description Other Terms Sinusoidal Performance Gives good peak amplitude accuracy poor peak frequency accuracy for data with discrete frequency components Use this when amplitude accuracy is more important than frequency resolution In data with closely spaced peaks a Flat Top window can smear the peaks together into one wide peak Hanning Description A general purpose window that is similar to a Hamming window Performance Gives fair peak amplitude accuracy fair peak frequency accuracy Usage It is used on random type data when frequency resolution is more important than amplitude accuracy Most often used in predictive maintenance Hamming Description Performance A general purpose window that is similar to a Hanning window Gives fair peak amplitude accuracy fair peak frequency accuracy It provides better frequency resolution but decreased amplitude accuracy when compared to the Hanning window Usage Use it to separate close frequency componen
524. wnloaded after which it is no longer be in its out of box reset state Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 Operate the Module Chapter 9 Command Type 0 1 or 2 Reset The identity object of the module includes a reset service that can be used to execute any type reset Follow this procedure to execute a reset service 1 Set the compliance requirement to none If the compliance requirement is not none then the configuration needs modified as the module does not accept a reset service when configured with a compliance requirement greater than none See Define Module Functionality Page on page 92 for more information on setting the compliance requirement 2 In Studio 5000 Logix Designer select connection and check inhibit module File Edit View Search Logic Communications Tools Window Help asu s e 444 Hs Yr E f 5 Path AB _ETHAP 1 192 168 1 99 amp Rem Prog BE Program Moe EH 4 gt No Foeces b E Controler OK F Energy Storage OK Favorites CA ETTE AA cy No Edis a 2 ayoo 5 E Controller Organizer 9x mm p o 4 A Controller Tags Requested Packel Morel FS 820 5 ms 40 0 10000 amp Power Up Handler Tachometer amp Tasks Speed Mr Fatt On Contolier E Coanecton F ads While in Run Mode Tune Slot Mutober MainTask HN Corbga sbon V Use Unicast Connecton over EheNeyP b I MainProgram A Unscheduled Programs Phases amp Motion Gr
525. y Value 0 22 0 25 Nem 0 16 0 18 ft lbf Normal cross section 1 5 mm 0 002in Stripping length 9 mm 0 35in Conductor cross section solid or stranded min max 0 14 1 5 mm 0 0002 0 002in Conductor cross section stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve min max 0 25 1 5 mm 0 0003 0 002in Conductor cross section stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve min max 0 25 0 5 mm 0 0003 0 0007in Conductor cross section AWG kcmil min max screw 28 16 mm clamp type Conductor cross section AWG kcmil min max spring 26 16 mm clamp type AWG according to ULL CUL min max screw clamp type 30 16 mm AWG according to ULL CUL min max spring clamp type 28 16 mm Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 37 Chapter1 Install the Dynamix 1444 Series Monitoring System Use solid or stranded wire All wiring must meet the following specifications e Minimum insulating rating of 300V e Soldering the conductor is not allowed e Wire ferrules can be used with stranded conductors copper ferrules recommended e Single wire per connection Module Power Supply Requirements The Dynamix 1444 series system must be powered by single or redundant 18 32V DC supplies as follows e To comply with the CE Low Voltage Directive LVD all power connections to this equipment must be powered from a source compliant with the fo
526. y partially populated with Range 0 1023 measurements hence the lower range 312 Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 CIP Objects Appendix B Attribute Semantics Transient Buffer Status The status for the normal mode buffers occupy the first lowest 16 bits The highest 16 bits are reserved Bits 0 3 are for Buffer 0 through to bits 12 15 for Buffer 3 Within each section the following values meaning have been allocated e 0x00 Buffer Free available ready for a transient event e 0x01 Data Ready Normal transient completed normally buffer latched e 0x02 Data Latched Normal transient completed normally but could be overwritten by a new event e 0x03 Transient in progress RPM delta time acquisition in progress e 0x04 Transient in progress Time delta time acquisition in progress e 0x05 Data Ready Aborted speed crossed back over the same threshold but could be overwritten by a new event e 0x06 Data Latched Aborted speed crossed back over the same threshold buffer latched e 0x07 Data Ready timeout speed crossed one RPM threshold then timed out but could be overwritten by a new event e 0x08 Data Latched timeout speed crossed one RPM threshold then timeout buffer latched Example 0x 2222 would indicate all four transient buffers latched with data from transient events that completed normally In the case where the speed crossed back over the same threshold an incomplete
527. y using the Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D or its newer and faster recovery variant RSTP IEEE 802 1w does not work for this EtherNet IP application Most preferred from the perspective of performance support and ease of installation is the use of the DLR redundancy method The Device Level Ring DLR redundancy mode lets you make a simple ring based module to module connection to achieve a network with excellent reliability and fast recovery in the presence of one failure This is the recommended topology for machine protection applications Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 About the Dynamix 1444 Series Dynamic Measurement Module Chapter 1 Under control of one of the ring devices configured to act as ring supervisor a network disruption cable or module can be detected and communication flow direction reversed in a few 100 ms to become a star connection of two linear connections IMPORTANT The Dynamix DYN module cannot provide the required Ring Supervisor capability therefore an EtherNet IP controller interface with DLR functionality is required direct interface to Controller system or for downstream networks a separate 1783 ETAP 3 port EtherNet IP tap can be used to act as Ring Supervisor for multiple EtherNet IP adapters and provide connection to the higher level EtherNet IP network Multiple rings can either be part of a further ring topology or connected with a star topology In t
528. ze of the following array in bytes 34 TimingArray UDINT The array of tacho time values 24 bit micro second counter The event log object refers to a module based event log where a history of key events can be held in NV memory both alarm and system events are retained At least the last 6 500 event entries can be retained but noting that an actual event can generate multiple log entries The event log referred to by this object is Dynamix module functionality independent of any Logix functions of the same or similar name For asynchronous data the actual sample period is transferred REAL format For synchronous data the same four bytes are used to transfer the number of samples per revolution and an indicative speed for the transferred data Rockwell Automation Publication 1444 UM001B EN P August 2015 319 AppendixB CIP Objects Number of samples per revolution occupies the first byte the remaining 3 bytes are used for a scaled speed value speed x 100 This format supports speed values to 167 772 15 rpm with a resolution of two decimal places Example with data on the wire of 0x 10DC7D05 e 0x10 16 samples per revolution e 0x057DDC 359 900 RPM 359 900 100 3599 rpm 60 Hz Whether the data is asynchronous or synchronous it can be determined for the identifier field with use of the following format Table 107 Dynamix Event Log Object Bits Description 0 1 Measurement

Dynamix XM-1444 Series Monitoring System User Manual, 1444

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents